LTE End-to-End Solution Overview PDF

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
PRELIMINARY
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent Long Term Evolution (LTE)

End-to-End Solution | Release LE4.0
Solution
Overview
418-111-000
Issue 0.06
January 2012
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
PRELIMINARY

Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 20102011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners. The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Sun Solaris is a trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
YouTube is a registered trademark of Google.
Oracle and Sun Microsystems are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Limited warranty
PRELIMINARY
This system is a single homogenous system consisting of component parts designed to operate in the manner that the switch is configured when provided to
the customer. Changes to system level configurations set "at the factory" can affect the availability, throughput, standards compliance, and stability of the
product and result in expanded unplanned downtimes as unforeseen issues arise with untested configuration settings. Changes from factory settings can result
in violation of warranty and maintenance agreements with Alcatel-Lucent and should not be performed without the expressed written consent of
Alcatel-Lucent.
About this document

Purpose
.................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvii
xxxvii
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Reason for reissue ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

xxxvii
Scope ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii
xxxviii
Intended audience ............................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii
xxxviii
Related information
How to comment
.............................................................................................................................................................. xxxix
xxxix
................................................................................................................................................................... xxxix
xxxix
Part I: LTE Solution Introduction

1
Long Term Evolution (LTE)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Aids to using this document
What has changed in this document?
Glossary
............................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3
Specialized meaning for key terms
.................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3
How to read this document .................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

1-5
The need for LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-6
Increasing demand .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1-7
Flattening revenue per user
................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1-7
................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1-8
Need to scale and converge older networks .................................................................................................................... 1-9

1-9
Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
iii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Issue 0.06 January 2012
PRELIMINARY
The need for high leverage networks
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE defined
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1-12
What is LTE?
........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1-12
Applicable to all major wireless standards .................................................................................................................... 1-14

1-14
How LTE works
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16
1-16
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network ............................................................................. 1-18
1-18
All IP packet-based network
Use of new radio spectrum
Quality improvements
.............................................................................................................................................. 1-25
1-25
................................................................................................................................................. 1-25
1-25
.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-26
1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures ......................................................................... 1-26

1-26
New network components defined by LTE
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29
1-29
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN)

Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
........................................................................................................................................... 1-31
1-31
............................................................................................................................................... 1-32
1-32
A sample LTE network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-36
1-36
Sample LTE network ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-36

1-36
Benefits of LTE
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39
1-39
High capacity and low latency ........................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1-39
High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities ............................................................................................... 1-40
1-40
PRELIMINARY
Efficiency and reduced operating costs .......................................................................................................................... 1-41

1-41
Provides Efficient Always-On support ....................................................................................................................... 1-42
1-42
Increased flexibility in use of spectrum
Increased spectral efficiency
........................................................................................................................ 1-43
1-43
.............................................................................................................................................. 1-43
1-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks
..................................................................... 1-44
1-44
User-visible benefits .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

1-44
2
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
PRELIMINARY
Contents
About the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution? .............................................................................................. 2-3
2-3
Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ................................................................................................ 2-5
2-5
LTE network
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-6
Components of the LTE Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-6
About the Radio Access Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-8
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network ..................................................................................................... 2-8
2-8
About the Core Network
....................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2-9
About the Common Core Network .................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2-10
About the IMS and Applications Area ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
2-10
About the OAM&P products .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-11
LTE Services
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-13
Summary of services ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-13

2-13
For further information ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-15
The ng Connect program
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2-16
About the ng Connect program ......................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2-16
.............................................................................................................................. 2-17
2-17

2-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
v
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
How the ng Connect program works
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-19
2-19
All the benefits of LTE ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
A pre-Integrated Solution
................................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2-20
Benefits of not having a multivendor solution
............................................................................................................ 2-21
2-21
Ease of evolution .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-22
Preservation of capital
.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-23
Use of ng Connect .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-23

2-23
Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul
......................................................................................................... 2-24
2-24
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) .................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-24
Alcatel-Lucent's Green Touch initiative .................................................................................................................... 2-25
2-25
Converged RAN approaches .............................................................................................................................................. 2-26
2-26
Converged RAN
LightRadio
..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2-26
........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-28
Summary table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30

2-30
3
LTE Services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
Services Portfolio
About the Services Portfolio ................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3-3
Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM)
About AIM
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3-5
Consulting
PRELIMINARY
About Consulting Services .................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3-6
Consulting Services offered .................................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3-7
Analysis
Analysis Services offered
...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Design
Design Services offered
....................................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3-13
Deployment
About Deployment Services ............................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-14
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Project Management Services ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14

3-14
Installation Services
.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-15
3-15
Integration Services ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

3-16
Field Integration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3-16
Application Integration Solution
...................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3-17
Solution Integration and Validation Service ................................................................................................................. 3-18

3-18
OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration
.................................................................................................................... 3-18
3-18
Security Enabler Integration ............................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
Migration Services ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-19
3-19
IP Transformation Centers
.................................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3-21
Operation
About Operation Services
................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-23
Maintain ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-23
Optimize
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-24
Operate and manage .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-24

3-24
4
Deployment options
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Before you begin
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3
LTE Network Deployment Option

About the option ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-5
4-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3

4-3
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5

4-5
How it works
Interfaces
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4-8
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4-8
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO

About the Option ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4-9
Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4-10
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-12
4-12
Interfaces
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4-13
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and W-CDMA
About the Option .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4-14
Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4-15
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4-17
Interfaces
5
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4-17
High-level migration strategy

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
Migration options ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary
............................................................................................................... 5-4
5-4
3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary .................................................................................................................. 5-5

5-5
Basic principles .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-6
LTE designed for easy migration
........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5-7
Migration planning resources ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-8
Part II: LTE Network Provided Services
PRELIMINARY
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
About UEs
................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-2
Explosive growth in LTE
...................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About InterOperability Testing (IOT)
............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-4
Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT ............................................................................................................... 6-4

6-4
About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team ........................................................................................................ 6-5
6-5
The NVIOT Forum ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-6
PRELIMINARY
Contents
IOT Process ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7

6-7
Achievements of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
7
...................................................................................... 6-8
6-8
Approaches for voice with LTE

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
About voice with LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-3
Voice with LTE defined .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-3
......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-3
The CSFB approach

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-5
About CSFB ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-5
7-5
How it works
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7-6
Benefits ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6

7-6
Limitations
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7-7
Network and UE impacts ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-8

7-8
Current implementation .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7-8
The VoLTE approach
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7-9
About VoLTE
............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7-9
Use of IMS network elements ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11

7-11
Use of common core network elements ......................................................................................................................... 7-15
7-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ix
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-10

7-10
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network and UE impacts ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

7-16
Current implementation
....................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7-16
The SVLTE approach

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7-17
About the SVLTE approach
............................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7-17
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18

7-18
Benefits
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7-18
Limitations ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-19

7-19
Network and UE impacts ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-19
7-19
....................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7-20
The SR-VCC approach

Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) ............................................................................................ 7-21
7-21
The Service Centralization approach
Service Centralization
......................................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7-22
Migration
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7-24
Considerations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24

7-24
Migration path
......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7-25
Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE

Summary of approaches ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7-27
8
SMS with LTE

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
PRELIMINARY
About SMS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1
The need for SMS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8-3
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution ................................................................................................................................. 8-3
8-3
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface
...................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-6

8-6
9
Cell Broadcast with LTE

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-1
Public Warning System (CMAS)
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9-2
What is Public Warning System (PWS)
........................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-2
What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) ................................................................................................... 9-3

9-3
How it works
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9-3
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture .............................................................................................................. 9-3

9-3
LTE Network requirements ................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9-5
Network and UE impacts ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9-6
10
Approaches for video on LTE

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
About video over LTE

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10-2
Basic definitions
..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10-2
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10-4
Standards for video over LTE ............................................................................................................................................ 10-5

10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service ......................................................... 10-6
10-6
The Video Communications Service approach
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10-7
About Video Communications Service
.......................................................................................................................... 10-7
10-7
Current capabilities ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-8

10-8
SVLTE UEs ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-12

10-12
New network elements to host new applications
..................................................................................................... 10-13
10-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Video Communications Service architecture ............................................................................................................. 10-11

10-11
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of IMS core

How it works
Limitations
................................................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10-14
........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-16
10-16
............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-17
10-17
Network and UE impacts .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18

10-18
11
Roaming in LTE networks

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
About inter LTE networks roaming

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11-2
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2

11-2
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming ................................................................................................................. 11-3
11-3
LTE Roaming approaches
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11-4
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach ..................................................................................................... 11-4

11-4
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future release) ................................ 11-6
11-6
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming ....................................................................................................... 11-9
11-9
12
Government-mandated services
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12-2
About the 1357 ULIS ............................................................................................................................................................ 12-2

12-2
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12-3
12-3
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution ...................................................................................... 12-5
12-5
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the 1357 ULIS
........................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12-5

12-6
Emergency Services
About Emergency Services ................................................................................................................................................. 12-8
12-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Number Portability
About Number Portability ................................................................................................................................................... 12-9
12-9
About TTY/TTD Support
TTY/TTD Support ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-10
12-10
13
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Public Safety
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
About Public Safety

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13-2
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-2

13-2
Public Safety Expectations with LTE
............................................................................................................................. 13-3
13-3
How it works
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13-4
No specific Network Equipment required for PS ....................................................................................................... 13-4

13-4
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum ............................................................................ 13-5
13-5
Sharing Network Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 13-7
13-7
Hosted Core Model ................................................................................................................................................................ 13-9
13-9
Priority Access
14
...................................................................................................................................................................... 13-10
13-10
LTE End-to-End Security

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
Air Interface Security

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14-2
About Air Interface Security
.............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14-2
Common security threats to the air interface ................................................................................................................ 14-4

14-4
User plane security ................................................................................................................................................................. 14-6

14-6
14-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Control plane security ........................................................................................................................................................... 14-4

14-4
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Access Security

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14-8
About network security ........................................................................................................................................................ 14-8

14-8
Common security threats to the network
................................................................................................................... 14-10
14-10
Recommendations for providing network security .................................................................................................. 14-11

14-11
For further information ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-12
14-12
Part III: Network Elements Overview

15
About the network element descriptions

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution .................................................................................................. 15-1

15-1
Components of the Solution ............................................................................................................................................... 15-4
15-4
How the network element descriptions are organized
16
.............................................................................................. 15-4
15-4
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
9100 MBI/O (BTS)

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16-4
About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
......................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16-4
Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE .................................................................................................. 16-5

16-5
16-6
9125 TC
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16-7
About the 9125 TC
............................................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16-7
PRELIMINARY

16-9
9130 BSC/MFS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-10
16-10
About the 9130 BSC/MFS ................................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE ....................................................................................................... 16-11

16-11
For further information
...................................................................................................................................................... 16-11
16-11
922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-13
16-13
PRELIMINARY
Contents
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) ............................................................................................................. 16-13

16-13
Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE
................................................................................................. 16-14
16-14

16-15
9326 NodeB
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-16
16-16
About the 9326 NodeB
...................................................................................................................................................... 16-16
16-16
Changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE
............................................................................................................. 16-17
16-17

16-18
9370 RNC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-19
16-19
About the 9370 RNC
......................................................................................................................................................... 16-19
16-19
Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 16-21

16-21
16-21
9412 eNodeB
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-22
16-22
About the eNodeB
............................................................................................................................................................... 16-22
16-22
About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB

How it works
..................................................................................................................... 16-23
16-23
......................................................................................................................................................................... 16-23
16-23
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB ..................................................................................................... 16-23

16-23
................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-24
16-24
Support of FDD .................................................................................................................................................................... 16-29

16-29
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-29
16-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Hardware
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections to other network elements ....................................................................................................................... 16-29

16-29
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 16-30
16-30

16-30
LTE RRH Product Family
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-31
16-31
About the LTE RRH Product Family
........................................................................................................................... 16-31
16-31
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-33

16-33
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-35
16-35
Support of both FDD and TDD
Software
...................................................................................................................................... 16-36
16-36
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-38
16-38

16-38
9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-39
16-39
About the Distributed eNodeB Solution
.................................................................................................................... 16-40
16-40
About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU ............................................................................................................................... 16-43

16-43
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU ................................................................................ 16-43
16-43
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-44
16-44
Software
...................................................................................................................................... 16-45
16-45
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-47
16-47
Support for the R-OCM ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-47

16-47
User interface
........................................................................................................................................................................ 16-49
16-49

16-49
PRELIMINARY
17
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network ...................................................................................... 17-3

17-3
Connectivity models .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-5
17-5
Security
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17-5
Changes caused by LTE ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-6

17-6
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Challenges for the customer ............................................................................................................................................... 17-6

17-6
Solution ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-7
17-7
7705 SAR
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-9
17-9
About the 7705 SAR ............................................................................................................................................................. 17-9

17-9
How it works
......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-10
17-10
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-10

17-10
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-12
17-12
User Interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 17-12
17-12

17-12
7750 SR
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-14
17-14
About the 7750 SR
How it works
.............................................................................................................................................................. 17-14
17-14
......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-15
17-15
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-15

17-15
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-17
17-17
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-18
17-18
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network ............................................................................................................................ 17-18

17-18
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE
..................................................................................................................... 17-20
17-20
18
Network elements used in the Core Network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

17-20
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 WCS
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18-4
About the 5060 WCS ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-4

18-4
Ready to support evolution to LTE .................................................................................................................................. 18-6
18-6
18-6
5780 DSC
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-7
18-7
About the 5780 DSC ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-7

18-7
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 18-8
18-8
Advantages
Benefits
............................................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
18-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
18-9
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-10

18-10
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-13
18-13
Connections to the network .............................................................................................................................................. 18-14

18-14
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-15
18-15

18-15
7549 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-17
18-17
About the 7549 MGW ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-17
18-17
18-19
7500 SGSN
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18-20
PRELIMINARY
About the 7500 SGSN ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-20

18-20
Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE ............................................................................................................... 18-23
18-23
18-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-25
18-25
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions ....................................................................................................... 18-26
18-26
How the functions work
.................................................................................................................................................... 18-27
18-27
PRELIMINARY
Contents
..................................................................................................................... 18-28
18-28
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-29

18-29
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-30
18-30
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-34
18-34

18-35
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-35
18-35

18-35
7750 SR (SGW)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-37
18-37
About the 7750 SR (SGW) ............................................................................................................................................... 18-37
18-37
How it works
......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-38
18-38
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-38

18-38
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-39
18-39
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-43
18-43

18-44
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-45
18-45

18-45
9380 3G MSC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-46
18-46
User interface
.................................................................................................................................................. 18-46
18-46
........................................................................................................................................................................ 18-51
18-51

18-51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xix
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About the 9380 3G MSC
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME)

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-52
18-52
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) .......................................................................................... 18-52
18-52
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-53
18-53
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-54
18-54
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-57
18-57

18-57
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-58
18-58

18-59
9471 Wireless Mobility Manager
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-60
18-60
About the 9471 WMM ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-60
18-60
How it works
......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-61
18-61
Advantages of the 9471 WMM
...................................................................................................................................... 18-61
18-61
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-61

18-61
18-62
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-63
18-63
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE .............................................................................................................. 18-63

18-63
18-63
HSGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-64
18-64
PRELIMINARY
About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW)
.......................................................................................................... 18-64
18-64
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18-65
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-65
18-65

18-65
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-66
18-66

18-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
9271 eRNC
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-3
19-3
PRELIMINARY
Contents
About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) ................................................................................ 19-3
19-3
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-4
19-4
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-4
19-4
Software ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-5

19-5
Connections to other network elements ......................................................................................................................... 19-5
19-5
User interfaces ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19-6
19-6
19-6
20
Network elements used in the Common Core Network

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20-1
1357 LIG
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-3
20-3
About the 1357 LIG
.............................................................................................................................................................. 20-3
20-3
Advantages of the 1357 LIG .............................................................................................................................................. 20-4

20-4
Hardware
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-4
20-4
Software ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-4

20-4
Connections to other network elements ......................................................................................................................... 20-5
20-5
User interfaces ......................................................................................................................................................................... 20-5
20-5
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE ...................................................................................................................... 20-6
20-6
20-6
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-7
20-7
About 8810 ICC ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-7

20-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
8610 ICC (OCS)
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection to the network .................................................................................................................................................. 20-9

20-9
20-9
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-10
20-10
About the 8615 IeCCF
...................................................................................................................................................... 20-10
20-10

20-12
8650 SDM HSS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-13
20-13
The 8650 SDM HSS
How it works
........................................................................................................................................................... 20-13
20-13
......................................................................................................................................................................... 20-14
20-14
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS ............................................................................................................................... 20-14

20-14
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 20-15
20-15
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-17
20-17

20-17
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-18
20-18

20-18
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-19
20-19
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS ................................................................................................................................... 20-19
20-19
Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE .......................................................................................... 20-22
20-22
20-22
21
Network elements used for IMS
PRELIMINARY
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21-1
About IMS
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-4
21-4
What is IMS?
........................................................................................................................................................................... 21-4
21-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What does IMS do?
............................................................................................................................................................... 21-5
21-5
The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution
.................................................................................................................................... 21-6
21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ................................................ 21-7
21-7
5060 MGC-8
Overview
PRELIMINARY
Contents
................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-9
21-9
About the 5060 MGC-8
....................................................................................................................................................... 21-9
21-9

21-10
5100 CMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-11
21-11
About the 5100 Converged Messaging System
....................................................................................................... 21-11
21-11
Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 21-12

21-12
21-12
5110 SMSC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-13
21-13
About the 5110 SMSC
....................................................................................................................................................... 21-13
21-13

21-15
5140 BMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-16
21-16
About the 5140 BMC
......................................................................................................................................................... 21-16
21-16
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-18

21-18
Changes in the 5140 BMC to support LTE
................................................................................................................ 21-18
21-18

21-18
21-19
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-20

21-20
About the 5410 PS/XDMS ............................................................................................................................................... 21-20
21-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
5410 PS/XDMS
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE ...................................................................................................... 21-21

21-21
21-22
5420 CTS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-23
21-23
The 5420 CTS
....................................................................................................................................................................... 21-23
21-23
Changes in the 5420 CTS to support LTE
.................................................................................................................. 21-24
21-24

21-25
5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-26
21-26
About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
................................................................................................................................ 21-26
21-26
Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions
............................................................................... 21-27
21-27

21-29
5900 MRF
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-30
21-30
The 5900 MRF ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-30
21-30
Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 21-31
21-31
21-31
7510 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-33
21-33
About the 7510 MGW ........................................................................................................................................................ 21-33
21-33
Type of LTE/IMS function
............................................................................................................................................... 21-34
21-34
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the 7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................... 21-35
21-35
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-35
21-35
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-38
21-38

21-38
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-40
21-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE ............................................................................................................... 21-41

21-41
21-41
7520 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-42
21-42
PRELIMINARY
Contents
The 7520 MGW .................................................................................................................................................................... 21-42

21-42
....................................................................................................................................... 21-43
21-43
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-43
21-43
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-44
21-44
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-44
21-44

21-44
8950 AAA
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-45
21-45
About the 8950 AAA .......................................................................................................................................................... 21-45
21-45
21-48
22
OAM&P products
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22-1
Layers of OAM&P support

Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-4
22-4
About the Network Management Layer (NML) ......................................................................................................... 22-4

22-4
About the Element Management Layer
About the Network Element Layer
......................................................................................................................... 22-5
22-5
................................................................................................................................. 22-5
22-5
1360 COM
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-6
22-6
........................................................................................................................................................... 22-6
22-6
Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE
........................................................................................................... 22-9
22-9

22-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About the 1360 COM
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1300 XMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-10
22-10
About the 1300 XMC ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-10
22-10
Changes in the 1300 XMC to support LTE
................................................................................................................ 22-11
22-11

22-12
1310 OMC-P
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-13
22-13
About the 1310 OMC-P ..................................................................................................................................................... 22-13
22-13
Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE ............................................................................................................ 22-15
22-15
22-15
1357 IMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-16
22-16
About the 1357 IMC ........................................................................................................................................................... 22-16
22-16
Advantages of the 1357 IMC
.......................................................................................................................................... 22-17
22-17
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 22-17
22-17
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-17
22-17

22-18
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE .................................................................................................................. 22-18
22-18
22-19
5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-20
22-20
.......................................................................................................................... 22-20
22-20
PRELIMINARY
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-21

22-21
22-22
8950 SAM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-23
22-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 8950 SAM
......................................................................................................................................................... 22-23
22-23
Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 22-25

22-25
22-26
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio (OMC-R)
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-27

22-27
About the OMC-R
............................................................................................................................................................... 22-27
22-27
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22-28

22-28
22-29
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-30
22-30
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN .................................................................................................................................. 22-31
22-31
Hardware description .......................................................................................................................................................... 22-31
22-31
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-32
22-32

22-32
User interfaces
...................................................................................................................................................................... 22-32
22-32

22-32
9256 OMP
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-34
22-34
About the 9256 OMP
......................................................................................................................................................... 22-34
22-34

22-36
9353 WMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-37
22-37
About the 9353 WMS
........................................................................................................................................................ 22-37
22-37

22-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE ................................................................................................................ 22-38

22-38
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9452 WPS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-40
22-40
About the 9452 WPS .......................................................................................................................................................... 22-40
22-40
22-42
9958 WTA
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-43
22-43
About the 9958 WTA
......................................................................................................................................................... 22-43
22-43
Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 22-45

22-45
22-45
9959 NPO
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-46
22-46
About the 9959 NPO
......................................................................................................................................................... 22-46
22-46
Hardware
................................................................................................................................................................................ 22-48
22-48
Software
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-48
22-48
Changes in the 9959 NPO to support LTE
................................................................................................................. 22-48
22-48

22-48
NEM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-50
22-50
About the NEM
.................................................................................................................................................................... 22-50
22-50
Changes in the NEM to support LTE ............................................................................................................................ 22-51

22-51
22-51
OMC-CN
PRELIMINARY
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-52

22-52
About the OMC-CN ............................................................................................................................................................ 22-52
22-52
Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE .......................................................................................................................... 22-54
22-54
22-54
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMT
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-55
22-55
The SMT
................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-55
22-55
How it works
......................................................................................................................................................................... 22-55
22-55
Changes in the SMT to support LTE
PRELIMINARY
Contents
............................................................................................................................ 22-56
22-56

22-56
TSIS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-57
22-57
About TSIS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22-57
22-57
Changes in the TSIS to support LTE
............................................................................................................................ 22-59
22-59

22-60
WEM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-61
22-61
About the WEM
................................................................................................................................................................... 22-61
22-61

22-62
A
LTE interfaces
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1
A-1
IP connectivity
.......................................................................................................................................................................... A-1
A-1
Graphical view of the LTE interfaces ............................................................................................................................... A-2

A-2
Reference table of interfaces
B
............................................................................................................................................... A-3
A-3
Resources
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-1
Release Notes
............................................................................................................................................................................ B-2
B-2
Technical reading on LTE ..................................................................................................................................................... B-3

B-3
Accessing and navigating the LTE Library
................................................................................................................... B-3
B-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxix
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Planning Hub site ..................................................................................................................................................................... B-2

B-2
PRELIMINARY
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
More about the LTE Library on OLCS ............................................................................................................................ B-6

B-6
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site ............................................................................................................... B-9
B-9
Accessing network element documentation through the Product Index
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
List of LTE customer documentation
........................................................... B-11
B-11
............................................................. B-11
B-11
............................................................................................................................ B-13
B-13
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics ....................................................................... B-23
B-23
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE ........................................................................................................................................ B-24
B-24
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services support for LTE
........................................................................................................... B-26
B-26
Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications ........................................................................................................ B-26

B-26
Glossary
C
.................................................................................................................................................................................... B-31
B-31
Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release naming convention

Project release naming conventions .................................................................................................................................. C-1
C-1
Mobile Backhaul Solution

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... D-1
D-1
Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution .......................................................................................................................... D-2
D-2
About the Mobile Backhaul Solution ............................................................................................................................... D-2
D-2
Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture
........................................................................................................................... D-4
D-4
For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution .............................................................................................................. D-6

D-6
Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................... D-7
D-7
For further information .......................................................................................................................................................... D-7

D-7
E
Defining and displaying the user and control plane

Overview
..................................................................................................................................................................................... E-1
E-1
PRELIMINARY
User plane and control plane defined ................................................................................................................................ E-1

E-1
F
What's new in the Releases

Revisions to this document
................................................................................................................................................... F-1
F-1
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Reason for revision
............................................................................................................................................. xxxvii
1-1
Terms used in this document and their meanings
2-1
Solutions for customer issues and problems
5-1
1xEV-DO to LTE evolution summary
5-2
3GPP to LTE evolution summary
7-1
IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE
7-2
Previously-existing functional entities and network elements used by LTE and by VoLTE
7-3
Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE in the Solution
12-1
How Number Portability is provided
............................................................................................................... 12-9
12-2
How TTY/TTD Support is provided
............................................................................................................. 12-10
16-1
9412 eNodeB Compact Controllers in LE4.0
16-2
9412 eNodeB Compact Modems in LE4.0
................................................................................................. 16-26
16-3
9412 eNodeB Compact TRDUs in LE4.0
................................................................................................... 16-26
16-4
9412 eNodeB Compact MC-TRXs in LE4.0
16-5
9412 eNodeB connections to other network elements
16-6
LTE RRH Product Family that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
16-7
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU sub-racks that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0 ......................................... 16-45
16-8
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Controllers that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
16-9
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Modems that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
17-1
Documentation on the 7705 SAR
18-1
Documentation on the 7500 SGSN
18-2
7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements
18-3
HSGW Interconnections
.......................................................................................... 1-3
PRELIMINARY
List of tables
................................................................................................. 2-30
............................................................................................................... 5-4
........................................................................................................................ 5-5
.............................................................................. 7-12
....... 7-15
............................................................. 7-27
............................................................................................ 16-26
............................................................................................. 16-28
............................................................................ 16-29
......................................................... 16-37
..................................... 16-46
.......................................... 16-46
................................................................................................................... 17-12
...................................................................... 18-44
.................................................................................................................................... 18-65
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
................................................................................................................ 18-23
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-1
9271 eRNC connections to other network elements
.................................................................................. 19-5
22-1
Documentation on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
A-1
LTE Network Interfaces and Protocols ............................................................................................................. A-3
B-1
LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library .................................................................................... B-13
B-2
Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End Solution ............................................................................. B-14
B-3
Documentation Library for ePC 5780 DSC .............................................................................................. B-15
B-4
Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core
.............................................................. B-15
B-5
Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE
............................................................... B-16
B-6
Documentation Library for ePC 9471 MME ............................................................................................ B-16
B-7
Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support)
B-8
Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)
B-9
Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access
B-10
Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS ................................................................................................. B-20
B-11
Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA
................................................................................................ B-21
B-12
Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO
................................................................................................. B-21
B-13
Documentation Library for CDMA eBTS, eRNC
B-14
Recommended classes for LTE
B-15
Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO .............................................................................................................. B-25
B-16
Recommended classes for CDMA
B-17
Stage 3 specification documents for the ePS
B-18
Security specifications for the ePS
B-19
OA&M specifications for the ePS .................................................................................................................... B-29
F-1
Technical information that is added or changed in LE3.0
.......................................................................... F-1
F-2
.......................................................................... F-8
.......................................................................................... 22-32
.......... B-17
...................................................... B-18
............................................................................................ B-18
................................................................................. B-22
......................................................................................................................... B-24
................................................................................................................... B-25
............................................................................................... B-28
.................................................................................................................. B-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
1-1
Current challenges faced by service providers
............................................................................................. 1-10
1-2
Contents of the Evolved Packet System (EPS)
........................................................................................... 1-13
1-3
Key innovations of LTE ........................................................................................................................................ 1-17
1-4
Basics of OFDM ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-19

1-19
1-5
Comparison of OFDM and CDMA
1-6
Basics of SC-FDMA
1-7
LTE throughput improvements in the Radio Access Network (RAN)
1-8
Multiple antenna techniques
1-9
MIMO support on the downlink vs MIMO support on the uplink
1-10
Comparison of LTE architecture and a sample CDMA 2G/3G architecture
1-11
Migration of basic telecommunications functions from 2G/3G to LTE
1-12
eUTRAN and EPC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
1-13
evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core Networks .......................................................... 1-33
1-14
Functional entities within the EPC
1-15
Major components of an LTE network ............................................................................................................ 1-37
2-1
Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
2-2
Major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE network
2-3
Five phases of Services LTE support
2-4
Converged BTS Portfolio ..................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2-5
LightRadio product family
3-1
Five phases of Services LTE support
3-2
Consulting Services for each part of the LTE evolution path .................................................................... 3-6
3-3
IP Transformation Center (IPTC) ...................................................................................................................... 3-21
PRELIMINARY
List of figures
.................................................................................................................. 1-20
............................................................................................................................................. 1-21
................................................ 1-22
............................................................................................................................... 1-23
....................................................... 1-24
..................................... 1-27
............................................. 1-28
.................................................. 1-30
................................................................................................................... 1-34
............................................................ 2-4
.............................................................................. 2-7
............................................................................................................... 2-14
.................................................................................................................................. 2-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
................................................................................................................. 3-4
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1
LTE Network Deployment Option (data only)
............................................................................................... 4-6
4-2
Major components of the LTE Network Deployment Option ................................................................... 4-7
4-3
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
4-4
Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
4-5
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option .................................................................. 4-15
4-6
Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option
5-1
Migration paths to LTE ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
5-2
Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous standards ..................................................................... 5-3
6-1
NVIOT IOT process
6-2
Sample results of band availability testing for a set of FDD UEs
6-3
Sample results of interoperability testing of FDD LTE UEs ................................................................... 6-10
7-1
IMS-related network elements that support VoLTE
9-1
Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) architecture
9-2
CMAS implementation in LTE ............................................................................................................................. 9-5
10-1
Video calling
10-2
Video Communications Service architecture .............................................................................................. 10-11
11-1
Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic
11-2
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services
.......................................................................... 11-7
11-3
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services
........................................................................ 11-8
12-1
Lawful Interception in the Solution .................................................................................................................. 12-4
13-1
Public Safety Upper 700 MHz Band
13-2
8950 SAM (Subscriber Activation Manager) for Public Safety Networks ........................................ 13-8
13-3
Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety .............................................................................. 13-9
14-1
LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
14-2
Air Interface Security: Control Plane Security ............................................................................................. 14-5
14-3
Air Interface Security: User Plane Security
14-4
LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
............................................................... 4-10
............ 4-11
............. 4-16
................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6-7
........................................................... 6-9
.................................................................................. 7-14
.......................................................................... 9-4
............................................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10-9
.......................................................................................... 11-5
............................................................................................................... 13-6
..................................................................... 14-3
.................................................................................................. 14-6
..................................................................... 14-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-1
Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
....................... 15-3
16-1
Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB Compact or LTE Cube
16-2
e-NodeB architecture with MC-TRXs
16-3
Hardware for the MC-TRX module ............................................................................................................... 16-28
16-4
Hardware for the Sample RRH ........................................................................................................................ 16-35
16-5
Architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution ..................................................................................... 16-41
16-6
Hardware for the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
16-7
Transmit Receive Duplex Unit (TRDU) hardware ................................................................................... 16-44
17-1
Hardware for the 7705 SAR-8
17-2
Hardware for the 7750 SR ................................................................................................................................. 17-17
17-3
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network ............................................................................................................. 17-19
18-1
Hardware for the 5780 DSC
18-2
Hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC
18-3
5780 DSC logical design and connections to other network elements
18-4
Hardware for the 7500 SGSN
18-5
Hardware for the 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
18-6
MG-ISM configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18-7
Hardware for the 7750 SR (SGW)
18-8
MG-ISM configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 18-42
18-9
........................................................................ 16-25
.......................................................................................................... 16-27
PRELIMINARY
List of figures
................................................................................................. 16-44
......................................................................................................................... 17-11
............................................................................................................................. 18-11
................................................................................................... 18-12
............................................. 18-14
.......................................................................................................................... 18-22
.................................................................................................. 18-31
................................................................................................................. 18-40
...................................................................... 18-44
18-10 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network
................................................. 18-47
18-11 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC within R4 UMTS Network ................................................................... 18-48

18-12 Hardware for the 9471 MME
........................................................................................................................... 18-55
18-14 9471 MME connections to other network elements

18-15 9471 WMM interfaces
20-1
................................................................................ 18-58
........................................................................................................................................ 18-62
8610 ICC connections to the LTE network elements ................................................................................. 20-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxv
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
18-13 Hardware configuration of the 9471 MME ................................................................................................. 18-56
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-2
Hardware for the 8650 SDM HSS .................................................................................................................. 20-16
21-1
Hardware for the 7510 MGW
21-2
7510 MGW interfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 21-39
22-1
Use of OMC-CN in LTE network
A-1
End-to-End LTE Solution architecture and interfaces
................................................................................ A-2
B-1
Solution-level and core LTE customer documentation
............................................................................... B-4
B-2
OLCS access ............................................................................................................................................................... B-6

B-6
B-3
Release Notes and manuals
B-4
Selecting a document in the OLCS LTE Library list
D-1
Combined network management provided by the Mobile Backhaul Solution
E-1
Control plane and user plane as shown in network diagrams
.......................................................................................................................... 21-37
.................................................................................................................. 22-53
................................................................................................................................... B-7
................................................................................... B-8
................................. D-5
................................................................... E-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About this document
PRELIMINARY
About this document
Purpose
This document describes the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, and includes
information on the following topics:
The need for Long Term Evolution (LTE) networks

An overview of LTE

Deployment options
Network elements
Interfaces
Reason for reissue
Technical information that is added or changed for this issue of this document is
identified in the following table.
Table 1
Reason for revision
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
New material or changes
eNodeB HW evolutions
The following network element of the Radio Access

Network (RAN) descriptions were updated with the
list of hardware versions of the components supported
in LE4.0 Step 4.0.3:
9412 eNodeB (p. 16-22)
LTE RRH Product Family (p. 16-31)
9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit (p. 16-39)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1
Reason for revision
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
LTE RRH Product

Family
With the introduction of the TDD RRH8x5, the LTH

RRH 2x Product Family, is renamed by LTE RRH
Product Family. As such, the chapter has been
reviewed accordingly:
The ng Connect
program
The purpose of the ng Connect program has been

updated to be in line with the last marketing
information. The following description was updated:
LE4.0 Blueprint
Specification 3GPP
variant
The ng Connect program (p. 2-16)
Following the LE4.0 Blueprint Specification, the

following Network Elements of the 3GPP variant
were introduced in this document:
5060 WCS (p. 18-4)
7549 MGW (p. 18-17)
WEM (p. 22-61)
It has to be noted that all the changes made in this document for the Releases are tracked
in Appendix F, What's new in the Releases.
Scope
This document presents the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution as it exists in the
current release. Future developments of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are
not presented in this document.
PRELIMINARY
Intended audience
This document is useful to any reader new to LTE and new to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. This document is recommended reading for all network planners,
engineers, technicians, service providers, and managers who require a basic
understanding of LTE, of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and of the LTE
network elements, products and services used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
All Alcatel-Lucent LTE-related customer documents are available from the Online
Customer Support (OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/
lte/). For a list of Alcatel-Lucent LTE-related customer documentation, see Appendix B,
Resources.
PRELIMINARY
About this document
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxix
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Overview
Purpose
This part gives an introduction to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.

Contents
Chapter 1, Long Term Evolution (LTE)
1-1
Chapter 2, The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
2-1
Chapter 3, LTE Services
3-1
Chapter 4, Deployment options
4-1
Chapter 5, High-level migration strategy
5-1
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Solution Introduction
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains what Long Term Evolution (LTE) is and why service providers are
migrating to LTE. The sections in this chapter cover the following:
The need for LTE

What LTE is
LTE basics: how LTE works

New network components for LTE
What an LTE network is
The benefits of LTE
Covers ONLY the current release
Note that this document, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Overview customer
document, 418-111-000, covers only the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Future items that are not yet implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution are not described in this document. Therefore, when you read
this document, remember that new features that are not implemented in the current release
are not described in this document.
Contents
1-3
1-3
Glossary
1-3
1-3
How to read this document
1-5
The need for LTE
1-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increasing demand
1-7
1-7
1-8
Need to scale and converge older networks
1-9
Summary
1-10
LTE defined
1-12
What is LTE?
1-12
Applicable to all major wireless standards
1-14
How LTE works
1-16
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network
1-18
1-25
1-25
1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures
1-26
1-29
1-31
1-32
1-36
Sample LTE network
1-36
Benefits of LTE
1-39
High capacity and low latency
1-39
High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities
1-40
Efficiency and reduced operating costs
1-41
Provides Efficient Always-On support
1-42
1-43
1-43
1-44
User-visible benefits
1-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

New material and changes in this issue
PRELIMINARY

A complete list of the changes and new material in this issue of this document is given in
the Reason for Revision in the About This Document chapter. Click on Reason for
reissue (p. xxxvii) to be taken to that list.
Glossary
For an extensive glossary of LTE terms and telecommunications-related terms, go to the

LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology, 418-111-012.

Introduction
Within this document, certain terms are used in specialized ways. This topic lists these
terms and gives the definitions used in this document for these terms.
Terms as used in this document
In this document, for brevity's sake, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is
sometimes referred to as the Solution. Also, the following terms are used in this document
to represent the following hierarchy within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
Table 1-1

Meaning
Solution or
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
The complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, encompassing

software, hardware, services, application enablement, and other
capabilities; that is, everything discussed in this book.
parts or Major
parts of the Solution
The three major parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
LTE network
LTE Services
ng Connect program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Term
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-1
(continued)
Term
Meaning
Component
One of the six domains or major parts of a complete LTE network:
Radio Access Network
Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Core Network
Common Core Network
IMS and Applications
OAM&P
Functional entity
New logical entity defined by LTE designers for the LTE network, such
as the eNodeB or the MME.
LTE
Technically speaking, the new network and the associated standards are
named the Evolved Packet System (EPS). Technically speaking, the
name LTE only refers to the radio access component of the new
network. However, the name Long Term Evolution is now widely
associated with the entire new network and is commonly used to refer
to the whole of the new network. Therefore, in this document, the name
LTE is used to refer to the entire network and to the associated new
radio access technology.
Network element
A unique entity within a network, comprising one or more functional

entities. Each NE consists of multiple physical and logical resources,
which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The
NE and the NEs physical and logical resources are recognized as
distinct objects by an element or network management system. An
example of a network element would be a single Alcatel-Lucent 9412
eNodeB.
()
Parentheses after a network element name represent the function or

functions that the network element plays in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. For example, 5420 CTS (TAS) represents the
following:
5420 CTS, which is the name of the network element
(TAS), which means that in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End

Solution the 5420 CTS hosts the TAS function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Covers ONLY the current release
The document, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Overview customer

document, 418-111-000, covers only the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Future items that are not yet implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution are not described in this document. Therefore, when you read
this document, remember that new features that are not implemented in the current release
are not described in this document.
PRELIMINARY

Choose information for your technology type
This book is a reference guide to the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution includes information for many different
radio access technologies. Therefore when you read the book you need to choose the
information that is appropriate to your circumstances and the radio access technology or
technologies in use at your customer site.
Example
For example, if you wish to read about deployment options and use 3GPP radio access
technology at your site, you will probably
skip over the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD
1xEVDO (p. 4-9) section
and read the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and
W-CDMA (p. 4-14) section
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The need for LTE

Overview
Purpose
Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the commonly used name for the next generation of
broadband radio access technology for wireless networks. Before explaining more about
LTE, however, this document first describes why LTE is needed.
Pressures faced by service providers
Today's service providers are faced with multiple challenges that can be divided into the
following categories:
Exponentially increasing demand for mobile broadband services

Reduced revenues leading to the need for a changed business model
Need for high leverage networks to support increased traffic and new revenue
opportunities
Need to scale and converge older existing networks onto a common platform
Each of these challenges discussed below.

Contents
Increasing demand
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
PRELIMINARY
Summary
1-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Increasing demand
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increasing demand
Demand is growing
User demand for mobile broadband service is skyrocketing and growing beyond the
capacity of current systems. Mobile data usage surged in 2008 and continued ramping up
in 2009, fueled by the success of smart phones such as the iPhone, 3G-enabled laptops,
ultra-mobile PCs and innovative handsets, plus online video and social networking
applications.
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE
Users want higher-level services
Users are demanding a higher Quality of Service (QoS) and a seamless multimedia
experience. Users are also expecting enriched, personalized services with a guaranteed
Quality of Experience (QoE). Examples of personalized service include video phone,
remote home web cam, and applications that provide services depending upon where the
user is located. In another example, the network could provide fair usage policies and
notifications to end users when certain bandwidth thresholds are reached.
2G and 3G systems designed for voice
In addition, many current second generation (2G) and third generation (3G) wireless
networks were originally designed to handle primarily voice traffic. Therefore, even when
additional capacity is added to these wireless networks, these wireless networks are not
built to handle large volumes of data gracefully.

Flattening revenues
For many service providers, subscriber growth rates are slowing due to market saturation,
and traditional user-paid revenues are flattening
Carrying more traffic but not being paid for it
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Many web applications and content, particularly video, are sponsored by third parties
such as advertisers, and are thus free to end users. Service providers end up carrying extra
traffic from these applications on their networks without generating extra revenue, due to
flat rate, all you can eat charging.
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for new ways to generate revenue
This flattening revenue per user creates the need for ways to differentiate services
provided over LTE networks and to capture more revenue. The new controls over Quality
of Service (QOS) introduced by LTE have been created in response to this need.

Two key challenges facing service providers
High leverage networks address both of the following key challenges service providers
face today:
Service providers must scale and converge a variety of complex existing networks
onto a common platform while at the same time continuing to cut costs.
Service providers must change their business models to match the new realities of
their business. Service providers must find new and innovative ways of extracting
additional revenue from their existing networks, and also of generating new revenue
based on offering new services and applications.
What is a high leverage network?
A high leverage network is an intelligent network that allows service providers to

continuously offer both of the following, adjusting in real time to the needs of each:
scalable and reliable bit transport at the lowest possible cost

application enablement, Quality of Service (QoS) and traffic optimization
PRELIMINARY
What is application enablement?
Application enablement is an approach that brings service providers and developers

together to combine their network and web capabilities to create and deliver high demand
advanced services and new intelligent applications. Application enablement is a way for
service providers to make new use of their assets of bandwidth, billing, location,
presence, and security, as well as their relationships with end users, to generate new
revenues. By offering these select capabilities as Application Programming Interfaces
(APIs), service providers give developers access to a set of tools to create new
applications and services to run on service provider networks. Unifying the strengths of
service providers and developers facilitates the creation of applications, and in turn,
creates a better end user quality of experience (QoE). As mentioned earlier, this process
also gives service providers new sources of revenue.
For further information on turning service provider networks into high leverage networks,
see:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
http://www2.alcatel-lucent.com/hln/
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/application_enablement
For examples of applications that can be enabled by high leverage networks, see High
leverage networks - new revenue opportunities (p. 1-40).
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE

Pressure to reduce costs
Service providers are experiencing constant pressure to reduce both capital expenses
(CAPEX) and operating expenses (OPEX) of current 2G and 3G wireless networks. This
topic lists various strategies service providers are looking at and using to reduce costs.
Scalable networks
Scalable networks are intelligent networks that can monitor the amount of bandwidth
needed for each session in real time and scale the amount of resources assigned to use the
minimum amount of bandwidth necessary. Scalable networks are necessary if service
providers want to continue to be low-cost bit transport providers.
Reducing network complexity
As networks grow larger and more complex, there is a pressing need to simplify the
networks and simplify the network interfaces that service provider personnel must learn
and use. A common platform reduces network complexity and reduces operating
expenses.
Using spectrum efficiently
Radio spectrum is a limited resource. Also, what radio spectrum does exist is fragmented
between different companies and different technologies. Thus it becomes more and more
important to make efficient use of the spectrum and to avoid the waste caused by the
fragmentation of the spectrum.
Saving space
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
As real estate grows more and more expensive, service providers find they can save
money by reducing the amount of physical space (called footprint) taken up by existing
equipment.
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reducing carbon footprint
Service providers are also under pressure to reduce the energy consumption (carbon
footprint) of their networks. Service providers who reduce their carbon footprint can also
realize significant savings in energy costs, which are a key contributor to the Total Cost of
Ownership (TCO).
Summary
Graphical summary
The following figure summarizes the challenges facing service providers today.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 1-1 Current challenges faced by service providers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Summary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
KEY:
Walled garden - The term walled garden is used here to refer to total service
provider control over applications, content, and media used by UEs communicating
over the service provider network.
Wireless triple play - The term wireless triple play refers to the combined use of
voice, data and video.
PRELIMINARY

The need for LTE
New Value Chain - The term New Value Chain refers to the new business model
required for today's service providers.
What do service providers need?
To remain competitive, service providers in today's marketplace need the following:
Next-generation all-IP wireless broadband networks that can support Quality of

Experience (QoE) and the skyrocketing demand for bandwidth, while reducing total
cost of ownership (TCO), so that the service providers can continue to reduce the cost
of delivering services.
Innovative business models that can generate additional revenue new sources.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

LTE defined
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE defined
Overview
Purpose
The topics in this section define Long Term Evolution (LTE).

Contents
What is LTE?
1-12
1-14
What is LTE?
What is Long Term Evolution (LTE)?
As stated previously, Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the commonly used name for the next
generation of broadband radio access technology for wireless networks. The
specifications for this technology were written by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project
(3GPP) standards body.
Actual name is EPS
PRELIMINARY
The actual name used by the 3GPP body to describe the latest generation technology is
Evolved Packet System (EPS). The Name EPS is used to refer to both of the new network
components designed by the 3GPP standards committees: the eUTRAN and the EPC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
What is LTE?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-2 Contents of the Evolved Packet System (EPS)
PRELIMINARY

LTE defined
Note: For definitions of control and user, see User plane and control plane
defined (p. E-1).
Standards project committees
Two sets of 3GPP standards committee members worked on standards for the two new
network components.
Members of the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) project worked on the evolution of
the Core Network, the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) component.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Members of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) project worked on the evolution of the radio
interface and the access network, the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (eUTRAN) component.
PRELIMINARY

LTE defined
What is LTE?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE became the name commonly used
Technically speaking, the new LTE network is named the Evolved Packet System (EPS)
and the name LTE only refers to the radio access component of the new network.
However, the name Long Term Evolution is now widely associated with the entire new
network and is commonly used to refer to the whole of the new network. Therefore, in
this document, the name LTE will be used to refer to the entire network and to the
associated new radio access technology.

Can interwork with all major wireless standards
The LTE standards have been designed to interwork with all the wireless network
standards supported by both the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and the Third
Generation Partnership Project CDMA2000 (3GPP2) standards bodies. This means, for
example, that a call can easily be handed off from an LTE network to a non-LTE network
and back. For example, a person at a coffee shop could access the Internet using a local
WiFi network, but would lose the connection after leaving the coffee shop and after the
call was handed off. In contrast, if the user were using LTE instead of WiFi, the
connection to the Internet would be maintained even after the user left the coffee shop.
3GPP - The 3GPP standards body sets standards for the following technologies:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), originally Groupe Spcial
Mobile (GSM)
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)
Enhanced Data Rates For GSM Evolution (EDGE)
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), which is also called
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS)
High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)

Evolved High Speed Packet Access (HSPA+)
3GPP2 - The 3GPP2 standards body sets standards for the following technologies:
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data only (EV-DO or EVDO)
PRELIMINARY
Supports both FDD and TDD
The LTE specification supports both Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD) and Time
Division Duplexing (TDD). FDD and TDD are multiplexing methods for radio channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common design for the future
LTE has become the common targeted destination for the evolution of both 3GPP and
3GPP2 technologies.
For further information about the LTE standards, see Tips for getting started with LTE
Specifications (p. B-26).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

LTE defined
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How LTE works

Overview
Purpose
To achieve significant breakthroughs in capacity accompanied by significantly reduced

costs, the LTE designers came up with the following key innovations:
New technologies for increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network
A packet-only (IP-only) network
Other LTE innovations include:

A new high-performance Radio Access Network
New high-performance Core Network
The new LTE Radio Access Network and Core Network components are described
separately, in New network components defined by LTE (p. 1-29).
PRELIMINARY
The other innovations are discussed in this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Key LTE innovations

Figure 1-3 Key innovations of LTE
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
Contents
1-18
1-25
1-25
1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures
1-26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
A major innovation created by the LTE designers was a very large increase in the amount
of throughout between the UE and the Core Network.
To achieve this goal, the LTE designers came up with three innovations:
A new modulation scheme on the downlink

A new modulation scheme on the uplink
Use of multiple antennas for transmission or reception
Each of these innovations is discussed in this topic.

Innovation for the downlink
The downlink is the communication link from the radios in the eNodeB to the user
equipment (UE).
On the downlink, the radios in the eNodeB transmit to the LTE UE using Orthogonal
Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA). OFDMA is a digital modulation scheme
that provides high peak data rates in high-spectrum bandwidths. OFDMA has been
theoretically possible for many years but modern advantages in technology have now
made it possible to use OFDMA in real-life wireless networks.
PRELIMINARY
Note: OFDMA is used on the downlink for both FDD and TDD radio access
technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 Basics of OFDM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure compares OFDM with CDMA.

Figure 1-5 Comparison of OFDM and CDMA
Innovation for the uplink
PRELIMINARY
The uplink is the communication link from the UE to the radios in the eNodeB.
On the uplink, LTE UEs transmit to the eNodeB using Single Carrier Frequency Division
Multiple Access (SC-FDMA). SC-FDMA is a frequency-division multiple access scheme
that offers advantages in Peak-to-Average Power Ratios (PAPR) compared to pure
OFDMA.
Note: SC-FDMA is used on the uplink for both FDD and TDD radio access
technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Basics of SC-FDMA
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure summarizes the throughput improvements in the RAN that are
designed in LTE.
Figure 1-7 LTE throughput improvements in the Radio Access Network (RAN)
MIMO techniques
PRELIMINARY
LTE uses new multiple antenna techniques to manage the enlarged stream of data and to
minimize interference with other transmission streams.
MIMO stands for Multiple-input Multiple-Output (MIMO). In an LTE network, multiple
transmit and receive antennas are used at the eNodeB and at the UE. Use of multiple
antennas provides numerous data paths effectively operating in parallel. In LTE there
must be at least two antennas at the UE and two antennas at the eNodeB that are
dedicated to each active UE. For faster transmissions, the LTE standards allow for use of
four or eight antennas at the UE and four or eight antennas at the eNodeB. At present,
however, only two antennas are being used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of multiple antenna techniques
The following figure shows the various types of multiple antenna techniques.
Figure 1-8 Multiple antenna techniques
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works

Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comparison of MIMO support in downlink and uplink
As shown in the following figure, more multiple antenna techniques are used on the
downlink than on the uplink in the initial release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Figure 1-9 MIMO support on the downlink vs MIMO support on the uplink
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The LTE network is an all-IP, packet-based, flat network that provides scalability and
flexibility while reducing costs.
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
End-to-End IP
LTE is a "pure packet" network. That is, the entire LTE network, end to end, is all IP and
all packet-based. In addition, all network protocols and interfaces are based on IP. In other
words, all parts of LTE are IP-based, from the UEs through the eNodeBs, through the
Core Network, and throughout the rest of the network.
Benefits
The major benefit of an all-IP network is a significant simplification of the network,

reducing the number of network elements in the network and improving operational
efficiency. This leads to less latency and faster transmission of data.
Having fewer network elements in the network also reduces Operating Expenses (OPEX).
No circuit switched traffic
The LTE network is the first wireless network to have no circuit-switched traffic. In other
words, LTE is a completely packet-based system. Therefore, the LTE designers planned
for the use of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform with LTE when voice is
required. IMS can provide Voice over IP (VoIP) traffic over the packet-based LTE
network.

Use of new spectrum
The increased flexibility in LTE's use of spectrum makes it possible to implement LTE in
small portions of radio spectrum that may have been previously unused. For more about
this, see Increased flexibility in use of spectrum (p. 1-43).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
The LTE designers also implemented several quality improvements into the LTE network
standards. This topic discusses those improvements.
Use of SONs
LTE is the first 3GPP technology to include Self-Optimizing Networks (SONs). For more
about SONs in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Use of Self-Organizing
Networks (SONs) (p. 2-24).
Control over Quality of Service
LTE offers a full end-to-end Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism that is simpler and
more flexible to implement compared to existing 2G and 3G QoS mechanisms. The LTE
QoS mechanism is fully focused on IP delivery and is expected to be much easier for
operators to deploy and manage. The LTE QoS mechanism enables the service provider to
offer new value added, differentiated services per user and between users allowing
increased revenue from these premium services.
New UE state
Another quality improvement in the LTE standards is the new UE state, STANDBY,
which is discussed in Provides Efficient Always-On support (p. 1-42).
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing

architectures
Introduction
This topic compares the LTE architecture with the architecture of the 2G and 3G wireless
networks that preceded LTE.
PRELIMINARY
One network instead of two
In traditional networks, voice traffic goes to a circuit switched network and data traffic
goes to a packet network. For LTE, there is only one network, the Evolved Packet Core
(EPC) network, which provides both data and packetized voice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

architectures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pictorial comparison
The following figure compares the LTE architecture with legacy 2G/3G architecture.
Figure 1-10 Comparison of LTE architecture and a sample CDMA 2G/3G
architecture
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works
Functionally the same
Because of this movement of functions to different network entities in LTE, the LTE
architecture varies significantly from the architecture of a typical 2G or 3G wireless
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Functionally speaking, an LTE network carries out the same basic tasks as a 2G or 3G
network. However, LTE provides the same functionality using a single network as
opposed to the combination of two networks (circuit-switched and packet-switched) used
in 2G/3G wireless networks.
PRELIMINARY

How LTE works

architectures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How functions move to different places in LTE
To achieve an all-IP network and a flatter network, the LTE designers sometimes placed
functions in different entities than in previous wireless networks. The following figure
shows wireless functions that are common to all wireless networks. As shown in the
figure, the same functions are located in different places and sometimes use different
hardware in an LTE wireless network than in a 2G/3G wireless network.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 1-11 Migration of basic telecommunications functions from 2G/3G to LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

This chapter describes the two new network components defined for LTE networks:
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eUTRAN and EPC
The following graphic shows the eUTRAN and the EPC in a simplified view of an LTE
network.
Figure 1-12 eUTRAN and EPC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
PRELIMINARY
Contents
1-31
1-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the eUTRAN?
The evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN) is part of the
improved and simplified LTE Radio Access Network (RAN). The eUTRAN contains
radio frequency transmitters and receivers used to communicate directly with the User
Equipment (UE).
PRELIMINARY

The LTE standards define only one functional entity within the eUTRAN: the eNodeB.
What is a Radio Access Network?
A Radio Access Network is that part of a wireless network that sits between the UE and
the Core Network.
What is the eNodeB?
The eNodeB is a new functional entity in LTE. The eNodeB replaces the base station (BS)
and also takes over some of the functions of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) or Base
Station Controller (BSC). The eNodeB connects the subscribers UE (also called mobile
device) to the network.
What is a base station?
A base station (BS) is a transmission and reception station in a fixed location that handles
cellular traffic and consists of one or more antennas, radios, and electronic circuitry. The
base station connects the UE to the Core Network. The base station can also serve as a
bridge between all mobile users in a cell. A base station is called a Base Transceiver
Station (BTS) in the GSM wireless network.
Takes on some RNC functions
In non-LTE networks, radio resource allocation and configuration of base stations are
provided by a separate network entity. In CDMA and UMTS networks this network entity
is called the Radio Network Controller (RNC). In GSM networks this network entity is
called the Base Station Controller (BSC).
To achieve a flatter network and reduce latency, the LTE designers removed the RNC and
BSC from the LTE network. In the LTE network, the eNodeB carries out some of the
functions of the RNC and BSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Note: In LTE, not all of the RNC functions are assigned to the eNodeB. Some
functions are assigned to the Mobility Management Entity (MME).
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General functions of the eNodeB
The eNodeB carries out the following general functions:
Receives and sends radio signals to/from the antennas

Performs radio resource management
Schedules uplink data from and downlink data to the UE
Provides Ethernet links to the EPC entities and other eNodeBs

What is the EPC?
The Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the IP-based packet-only Core Network for LTE.
What is the Core Network?
The Core Network (also called Network Core) is a new multiservice IP mobile core
introduced with LTE but also envisaged to become a converged core in the future. The
Core Network functions as the central part of a telecommunications network and provides
high capacity communications facilities that set up and control communications between
UEs and with other Packet Data Networks (PDNs). The major functions of a Core
Network include aggregation, authentication, call control and switching, charging, and the
providing of gateways to other networks.
Unifies previous CS and PS components
As explained in Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures

(p. 1-26), LTE is the first 3GPP network without a circuit switched (CS) component.
The EPC provides mobile core functionality that, in previous mobile generations (2G and
3G) has been realized through two separate networks: a circuit-switched (CS) network for
voice and a packet-switched (PS) network for data. In LTE, the two former
circuit-switched and packet-switched networks are combined into one packet-based
network.
PRELIMINARY
What does the EPC do?
The EPC carries all kinds of traffic voice, video, and data (although all traffic is in
packet form). All eNodeB data connections travel through the EPC connecting the UE to
the Packet Data Network (PDN) and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
The EPC also supports:
Mobility with legacy 2G and 3G networks in the packet switch component
Mobility across different types of networks (3GPP - 3GPP2 network handovers)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the EPC
As shown in Figure 1-13, evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core
Networks (p. 1-33), the EPC gives service providers far greater capacity, the ability to
control end to end Quality of Service (QoS), and the ability to support new business
models and new services.
Figure 1-13 evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core Networks
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-33
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Entities within the EPC

Figure 1-14 Functional entities within the EPC
The EPC is made up of the following four functional entities:
Mobility Management Entity (MME) - The MME provides mobility and session
control management and authenticates UEs.
Serving Gateway (SGW) - The SGW routes and forwards user packets and acts as the
mobility anchor for the user plane for LTE handoffs and inter-Radio Access
Technology (RAT) handovers. Examples of inter-RAT handovers include handovers
from LTE to CDMA, or from LTE to W-CDMA.
(For definitions of user plane and control plane, see Appendix E, Defining and
displaying the user and control plane.)
Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) - The PGW provides UE session connectivity
to external packet data networks. The UE may have more than one session active with
a PGW for accessing multiple PDNs. The PGW also acts as the anchor point for
non-3GPP networks such as First generation Evolution-Data Optimized or
Evolution-Data Only (1xEV-DO) and Worldwide Interoperability of Microwave
Access (WiMAX).
Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) - The PCRF supports the following
functions:
PRELIMINARY
Network control of Service Data Flow (SDF) detection, gating, Quality of Service
(QoS) and flow based charging
Dynamic policy decision on service data flow treatment in the PCRF
(PGW/SGW)
Authorization of QoS resources.
Note: Some configurations may have additional optional network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-34
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical not physical
The new functional entities defined by the designers of LTE are logical, not physical. In
other words the LTE designers did not assign functions to specific hardware. The LTE
designers also did not specify that each functional entity had to be implemented on a
separate piece of equipment. Thus the LTE designers left the possibility open that the
work of two or more separate LTE functional entities could be performed by the same
physical network element.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-35
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes how the new LTE network components are combined with
previously existing network components to form a complete LTE network.
Note that the sample LTE network shown here is the simplest of LTE networks. The
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also supports other types of LTE networks. For
information on the different LTE network deployment options available within the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 4, Deployment options.
Contents
Sample LTE network
1-36
Sample LTE network

Introduction
The new network components defined for LTE must be combined with existing network
components to make up a functioning LTE network. This topic lists the six components
required for a functioning LTE network and shows how the two new network components
specially defined for LTE, the eUTRAN and the EPC, fit into a functioning LTE network.
Six components and what they do
A functioning LTE network requires the following six major components:
PRELIMINARY
The Radio Access Network - that part of a wireless network that sits between the UE
and the Core Network.
In LTE, the Radio Access is called the Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) and is provided
by the eNodeB.
The Backhaul Network - the intermediate links between the Radio Access Network
and the Core Network - and the Transport Network - the backbone network that
connects everything else.
The Core Network - the central part of a wireless network that provides high capacity
communications facilities that set up and control communications between UEs and
with external networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-36
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Sample LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In LTE, the Core Network is called the evolved Packet Core (EPC) and is provided by
four new functional entities: the Mobility Management Entity (MME), the Serving
Gateway (SGW), the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (PGW) and the Policy
and Charging Rules Function (PCRF).
The Common Core Network - Network made up ot NEs that perform functions
common to both the EPC and the IMS core, for example, HSS.
IMS and Applications - Network elements that are used by the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) platform in interworking with the PSTN and for selected
applications that are IMS-enabled, such as a Short Message Service Center (SMSC).
NOTE: For data-only implementations, IMS is not required. IMS is required for voice
traffic and for other real-time IMS-based services, such as real-time video.
OAM&P Products - The set of Operations, Administration, Maintenance and
Provisioning products that manage all the network elements in the LTE network.
PRELIMINARY

Figure 1-15 Major components of an LTE network
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-37
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Sample LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The network elements listed in Figure 1-15, Major components of an LTE
network (p. 1-37) within the Common Core Network and within the IMS and
Applications area are there for demonstrative purposes only. Any given
implementation of an LTE network may not have exactly those functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-38
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of LTE
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
This section explains the major benefits of LTE and explains why wireless service
providers are migrating to LTE.
Contents
1-39
1-40
1-41
1-42
1-43
1-43
1-44
1-44

Introduction
LTE networks have a combination of high capacity and low latency, both of which are
needed for today's broadband networks.
Increased downlink and uplink rates
LTE provides significantly increased downlink and uplink peak data rates.
Typical peak data rates are:
Uplink: 2.00-2.25 times the current 3G data rates
Downlink: 100 Mbps which is 3 times the current 3G peak rate
LTE networks offer high peak throughout compared with previous broadband
technologies, and significantly lower latency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-39
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
More throughput; less latency
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is latency?
Latency is a term for the time delay experienced in a system. Latency in wireless
networks has many causes. One cause of latency is the time delay when information is
transferred from one network element to another. Cumulative latency has a negative effect
on the performance of a network.
Benefit of reduced latency
LTE's lower latency rates make it possible for service providers to provide new
applications that require low latency, such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video phone.

Introduction
As explained in The need for high leverage networks (p. 1-8), service providers need
high leverage networks to survive and thrive in today's challenging marketplace. This
topic contains examples of new revenue-generating applications that can be run on LTE
networks.
Note: High leverage networks can be created using 2G/3G technology. However,
most applications that run on high leverage networks need the additional bandwidth
and speed provided by LTE networks.
Variable payment rates for quality of service
With the extensive control over the network that high leverage networks have, it will be
possible for a wireless service provider to offer a charging mechanism based on Quality
of Service, similar to what wireline service providers already offer.
Cloud computing
PRELIMINARY
Cloud computing is the providing of Internet-based computing to users on demand. In

cloud computing, shared resources, software, and information are provided to user's
computers and other devices on demand, in the same way as electricity is currently
handled. Though cloud computing can be implemented in non-LTE networks, the high
bandwidth supplied by LTE is key for implementing cloud computing on a large scale.
Fixed wireless
A service provider can use an LTE network to provide broadband fixed wireless services.
Such a network could be installed and used even in an area where the service provider is
not a local cellular phone provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-40
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enterprise applications
Using high leverage networks, service providers could supply enterprise applications for
businesses to use. Enterprise applications are applications used within a single business,
such as order management systems. The high bandwidth supplied by LTE is crucial to
supporting new high bandwidth-requiring enterprise applications.
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
Vertical applications
Using high leverage networks, service providers could also supply vertical applications
for businesses to use. Vertical applications are applications used within a single type of
business, such as a medical software program used only in the healthcare industry. Again,
the high bandwidth supplied by LTE is crucial to supporting new high bandwidthrequiring vertical applications.
Location-based services
Location-based services could also be provided. For example, if an end user is walking
down a certain street, an application could send a message to the end user's UE telling
him or her that there is a sale in a store just up the street selling items that he or she often
purchases.
For further information on turning service provider networks into high leverage networks,
see:
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/application_enablement

Reduced cost
LTE is significantly cheaper than other wireless air interfaces for high speed data. For
example, at high utilization levels, LTE costs only 25 to 50 percent of the cost of High
Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+).
Reduced CAPEX and OPEX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-41
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Because of their flatter structure and fewer network elements, LTE network provides a
significant reduction in CAPEX and OPEX and Total Cost of Ownership (TCO).
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The LTE standard uses a new UE state to provide what is called Efficient Always-On
support. This state was defined in earlier standards but never used until now. This topic
defines the state commonly called Efficient Always-On support and explains the new
state and why it is needed.
Note: The material in this topic is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS) The LTE
and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
What is Efficient Always-On support?
To support new applications such as instant messaging (IM), in which people exchange
short communications in real time, there is a need for LTE UEs to quickly turn on and off,
to send and receive this bursty data. This state of being able to quickly turn on and off is
called Efficient Always-On support. To the user, the UE appears to be always-on.
However, to save energy and system resources, the UE is not 100% on, but in a new state
introduced by the LTE standard.
The concept of efficient Always-On support is also referred to as control plane latency.
Traditional UE states
Until LTE there were only two states for a UE:
IDLE - In the IDLE state the UE is reachable but dormant.

ACTIVE - In the ACTIVE state the UE is actively transmitting or receiving data.
New UE state - STANDBY
To meet the need for the UE able to turn on and off quickly, the LTE designers make use
of a third state, halfway between the traditional states, called STANDBY.
How it works
PRELIMINARY
In the STANDBY state, the UE is silent but always connected. When a UE is in the
STANDBY state, it takes only a very short time for the UE to transition to the ACTIVE
state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-42
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Can use spectrum allotments of varying sizes
LTE designers created LTE to be able to operate in spectrum allocations of different sizes,
including 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz, for both uplink and downlink.
At present the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution only operates on 5, 10 and 10
MHz.
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
Flexibility in implementation
This increased flexibility in use of spectrum allows flexible deployment of LTE and
variable use of spectrum according to expected traffic, projected need, and spectrum
availability.
Easier to deploy
Since an LTE network can be deployed using a small amount of spectrum, it is now much
easier to deploy an LTE network, even in regions where large chunks of spectrum are
scarce.

More bits per Hz
LTE technology is designed for increased spectral efficiency; that is, more bits can be sent
in the same amount of frequency spectrum than with previous radio access technologies.
LTE achieves this better spectral efficiency through the use of OFDMA technology,
advanced MIMO technologies and innovative interference management techniques such
as Frequency selective scheduling (FSS) and/or Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
(ICIC).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-43
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless

networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless

networks
Designed to work seamlessly with all wireless networks
The LTE standard has been designed to interwork with all the wireless network standards
supported by both the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and non-3GPP networks
including the Third Generation Partnership Project CDMA2000 (3GPP2) standards
bodies.
An LTE network can easily be integrated with any of these networks.
Introduction
LTE will change the experiences of end users. This topic lists some of the major changes
that different types of users will see when using an LTE network.
Improved user experience
End users will have an improved user experience. Users will be able to have more
bandwidth available, experience faster downloads, and enjoy new applications that can be
provided because of LTE's high-speed throughput and lower latency.
Users will also experience a seamless multimedia environment and see enriched,
personalized services with a guaranteed Quality of Experience (QoE).
PRELIMINARY
Benefits for corporate users
For business subscribers, benefits will be easily seen and felt in applications where data
throughput is important, such as faster email and file uploads, enhanced VPN
connections, and smoother access to the Internet. Business subscribers will also see the
benefit of LTE in interactive applications where latency is crucial, such as IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS)-based Voice over IP (VoIP), mail and file synchronization with an
online server, peer-to-peer applications, SIP multimedia services including video and
voice conferencing over IP, application sharing, and more. Vertical markets where
information accuracy, reliability and immediacy are key will also see benefits. For
example, the health care sector will be able to deploy medical applications that require
low latency and high-resolution imaging.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-44
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits for mass-market users
Mass market users will benefit from improvements delivered by LTE as well, including
smoother and faster photo and video downloading or uploading, better online gaming
experiences, and improved on-the-go access to social networks such as YouTube,
Facebook or MySpace. These users will perceive an "always-on" experience and have a
richer Quality of Experience than is possible with today's wireless networks. On top of
those improvements to existing services, LTE will also enable the introduction of new
services such as high-definition audiovisual content formatted for mobile screens and
Ultra Mobile Devices (UMDs), new multimedia services, geolocalization applications
with graphical and contextual content, and multi-user interactive gaming.
PRELIMINARY

Benefits of LTE
Benefits for service providers
LTE networks offer higher data throughput to UEs than the older wireless networks. As a
result, LTE will allow service providers to deliver new and advanced mobile broadband
services, such as video delivery, on a wide range of frequency bands.
LTE will also give service providers the chance to open new markets and deliver new
applications, creating new revenue sources.
Finally, service providers can make use of LTE to reduce their Total Cost of Ownership
(TCO). The cost per byte of LTE is expected to be significantly less than the cost per byte
of existing networks. The cost reductions will occur because of the network simplification
of LTE's flat all-IP architecture and the enhanced capacity delivered by LTE.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-45
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-46
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
2 he Alcatel-Lucent LTE
T
End-to-End Solution
Overview
Purpose
This chapter gives a high-level overview of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End to End Solution
and describes the following:
The major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

The advantages and new revenue opportunities brought to the service provider by the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Contents
2-3
What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution?
2-3
Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
2-5
LTE network
2-6
Components of the LTE Network
2-6
About the Radio Access Network
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
About the IMS and Applications Area
2-10
About the OAM&P products
2-11
LTE Services
2-13
Summary of services
2-13
2-15
2-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About the Common Core Network
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the ng Connect program
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
All the benefits of LTE
2-20
2-20
2-21
Ease of evolution
2-22
2-23
Use of ng Connect
2-23
2-24
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs)
2-24
Alcatel-Lucent's Green Touch initiative
2-25
Converged RAN approaches
2-26
Converged RAN
2-26
LightRadio
2-28
Summary table
2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution defined
PRELIMINARY

The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is a next-generation wireless broadband

solution that combines an LTE network with converged and upgraded aggregation and
transport nodes, LTE Services and an application enablement program.
Need for the Solution
Wireless service providers are looking for sustainable profitable growth from new
wireless broadband networks and business models while optimizing network scalability
and total cost of ownership with a highly efficient infrastructure. This network
transformation must support an agile, scalable and open approach to service creation and
delivery that enriches the end-user experience and capitalizes on the explosive growth of
new content and media and the capabilities of new consumer and industrial wireless
devices.
For more about the needs of today's service providers, see The need for LTE (p. 1-6).
Complete Solution
As shown in Figure 2-1, Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End

Solution (p. 2-4), the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution goes beyond LTE radio
access technology and an LTE network to include backhaul, common core, the IP
Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform, LTE Services, and the ng Connect program.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Note: The Backhaul Network, Transport Network, and User Equipment are included
in the figure for the sake of completeness but are not discussed in detail in this
document.
PRELIMINARY
About User Equipment
User Equipment (UEs) are not manufactured by Alcatel-Lucent and are thus not discussed
in this chapter. However, Alcatel-Lucent does have an extensive InterOperability Testing
(IOT) program for UEs. For more information on Alcatel-Lucent's IOT program, see
Chapter 6, UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Three parts
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of the following three parts:
The all-IP completely packet-based End-to-End LTE network

LTE Services from Alcatel-Lucent's Services team
An ecosystem to support the rapid delivery of next generation broadband services and
applications (ng Connect)
PRELIMINARY

Each part is explained in its own section in this chapter.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE network
Overview
Purpose
The backbone of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is an all-IP completely

packet-based End-to-End LTE network. The topics in this section describe that network.
Contents
2-6
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11

Major components
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is made up of the following major components:
the Radio Access Network (RAN)

A Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
A Core Network
A Common Core Network

An IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 Major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE network
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
Note: There are other minor network elements, such as the 9959 NPO, that provide
additional OA&M support but are not shown in the diagram.
Note: It has to be noted that in LE4.0, we introduce in IMS and Applications domain,
the new OAM&P product 1360 COM that combines the 1310 OMC-P and the 1300
XMC into a single Element Management System. The 1310 OMC-P and 1300 XMC
products remain supported but to simplify the figure only 1360 COM is kept.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Note: The 8965 C3S is not needed anymore, as the 7750 PGW is now able to address
directly the 8615 IeCCF.
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Radio Access Network?
The Radio Access Network (RAN) is that part of a mobile wireless network that sits
between the UE and the Core Network. The Radio Access Network uses one of several
different forms of radio access to transmit communications to the UE and receive
information from the UE.
LTE version
In LTE, the Radio Access Network is called the eUTRAN.

LTE component for the RAN
There is a new component for LTE network part of the RAN, the eNodeB. For
information on the eNodeB and on Alcatel-Lucent's eNodeB offerings, see the following:
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) (p. 1-31)
9412 eNodeB (p. 16-22)
For descriptions of all the RAN-related network elements that can be used in the different
deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 16,
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network.

What is the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network?
PRELIMINARY
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network is the term used for the portion of the overall
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Transport Network that connects the cell site
with the MTSO functionality, which for LTE is made up of the EPC and other network
elements.
What is the Transport Network?
A transport network is a generic term used for the entire network of transmission
equipment from the cell site all the way to the Public Switched Data Network (PSDN)
and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution Transport Network is the Transport network used in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network provides connectivity between the eNodeB
and the SGW and the MME in support of the S1 interface and between eNodeBs in
support of the X2 interface.
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
For information about the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network and the network
elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network, see Chapter 17, Network
elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network.

The Core Network (also called Network Core) is the central part of a wireless network
and provides high capacity communications facilities that set up and control
communications between UEs. The major functions of a Core Network include
aggregation, authentication, call control and switching (which handles mobility),
charging, and the providing of gateways to other networks.
LTE component for the Core Network
The new LTE component for the Core Network is the EPC, which contains several
functional entities. For information on the EPC and the functional entities within it, see
the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) (p. 1-32).
For information about the Core Network and the new network elements introduced to
support LTE in the Core Network, see Chapter 18, Network elements used in the Core
Network.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Common Core Network?
The Common Core Network is a set of network elements that perform functions common
to both the Core Network and the IMS, such as the Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG),
Home Subscriber Server (HSS), Offline Charging Systems (OFCS), Online Charging
Systems (OCS) and DNS/ENUM.
Also used in other networks
The network elements in the Common Core Network are not LTE network elements per
se but are also used in other Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.
For descriptions of all the network elements that can be used in the Common Core
Network in the different deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, see Chapter 20, Network elements used in the Common Core Network.

introduction
This topic describes the use of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform and
IMS-enabled applications in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is IMS?
PRELIMINARY
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an architectural framework, designed by the 3GPP

standards body, that is a platform for delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based
multimedia services to end users. The IMS platform provides a service delivery
environment (SDE) for IMS-enabled applications. Part of the service delivery
environment provided by IMS is a common set of functions and procedures for access,
session control, bearer control, policy, and charging. IMS is also used for higher level
applications and services such as video services, voice services, call features, and so
forth.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is IMS-enabled?
When IMS functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled. For an application to be IMS-enabled, the UE registers with IMS, and
IMS ensures authentication of the UE. This action allows all SIP traffic to traverse the
S-CSCF, which can perform billing and other services. This action also engages the IMS
applications.
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
What is the role of IMS in the Solution?
IMS has been added to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to fill several major
roles:
Providing and controlling Access Gateways, including firewalls

Providing a framework for communication services and other applications to be
deployed to end users to enhance revenue
Enabling and running a variety of IP-based applications, such as Short Message

Services (SMS) and Voice over IP (VoIP)
Supporting online and offline charging functions enabling billing for IMS applications
and services
For more information about IMS and for descriptions of all the IMS-related network
elements that can be used in the different deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 21, Network elements used for IMS.

introduction
This topic describes the OAM&P products used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
What is OAM&P?
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) is a general term

used to describe the processes, activities, tools, standards, and so forth involved with
operating, administering, managing, maintaining, and provisioning any network.
The 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620 SAM) supports the OA&M for the Backhaul
Network, Transport Network, MME, and eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Converged OA&M for LTE
PRELIMINARY

LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other OA&M products
Other OA&M products are used to provide OAM&P for the non-LTE portions of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. An example of these other products would be
the 1360 COM or the 1300 XMC, which manages the 8650 SDM HSS and the
applications on the 8650 SDM HSS.
For more on the 5620 SAM, see 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) (p. 22-20).
PRELIMINARY
For descriptions of all the other products that are used for OA&M in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 22, OAM&P products.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Services
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

LTE Services
LTE Services for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are provided by the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization
Contents
Summary of services
2-13
2-15
Summary of services
Summary diagram
As shown in the following diagram, the Alcatel-Lucent Services team provides help for
service providers in all aspects of LTE network planning, implementation and support. In
this chapter, LTE support is grouped into the following phases:
Consulting
Analysis
Design
Deployment
Operation
The services offered by Alcatel-Lucent in each of these phases are explained this chapter.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

LTE Services
Summary of services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 Five phases of Services LTE support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LTE Services chapter
For more information on the LTE Services offered by the Services organization, see
Chapter 3, LTE Services.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

LTE Services
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
The ng Connect program was developed in response to the needs of service providers for
increased revenues and new revenue opportunities. The topics in this section describe the
ng Connect program and explain how ng Connect can help service providers.
Contents
2-16
2-17
2-18

What is ng Connect?
ng Connect is an ecosystem of network resources and expertise that enables rapid

delivery of next generation broadband services and applications. ng Connect was started
by Alcatel-Lucent but is made up of partners from both Alcatel-Lucent and a wide variety
of other companies.
Purpose of ng Connect
Members of the ng Connect program work together to do the following:
Accelerate deployment of new services and devices

Drive new sources of revenue with new business models
Expand the connectivity landscape
PRELIMINARY
More than simple applications
The next-generation ecosystem embodied in the ng Connect program goes far beyond just
handsets and specific individual applications. The next-generation ecosystem brings
together content, media, applications and devices in multiple ways over multiple
networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

How it works
Members of ng Connect create and deliver Solution Concepts (SC), which are technical
and business cases for 4G LTE applications.
PRELIMINARY

Three key facets
The ng Connect program has three key facets, each of which is a critical element in
delivering an SC:
SC Development: Member of ng Connect develop Solution Concepts (SCs) and

pre-integrate and test the SCs over real networks. Currently, SCs are developed in the
Alcatel-Lucent Plano, Texas and Ottawa, Canada SC labs.
As of first quarter 2010, fourteen SCs have been developed:
Mobile Enhanced Reality with Social Sharing
Next Generation Social Music Experience
E-Learning
E-Healthcare
Interactive Gaming on LTE
Multi-screen Solution with User-Generated Content
LTE Connected Car

LTE Connected Camera
Digital Signage with dynamic updates over LTE
Video enhanced interactive Digital Signage
Celebrity Tracker
Gaming Storefront and ng Games
Remote security camera and home control
Secure Anywhere single sign on
Primary Research: Members of ng Connect pool primary research from their
respective organizations against the topic SC, giving a much deeper understanding of
end-user desires and willingness to pay. This material is then used both in positioning
a specific SC in service provider trials and as input to the business modelling
exercises.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Business Modelling: Employing the skills of the Bell Labs Business Modelling group,
specific SCs are assessed for opportunities to develop new business models.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Areas of focus
Activities within ng Connect are focused in five areas:
Consumer media and entertainment

Enterprise collaboration and e-Healthcare
Automobile connectivity
Computing experience
Digital signage

For further information on the ng Connect program, see the ng Connect web site:
PRELIMINARY
http://www.ngconnect.org/
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End

Solution
Overview
PRELIMINARY

Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent is unique in the industry in providing the following:
Broad product portfolio covering all aspects of the network
A complete End-to-End Solution

Professional expertise to build and operate the Solution
Help for service providers in developing and implementing innovative plans to
generate new revenue.
The topics in this section expand upon these and other benefits provided by the
Contents
2-20
2-20
2-21
Ease of evolution
2-22
2-23
Use of ng Connect
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-26
Converged RAN
2-26
LightRadio
2-28
Summary table
2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Benefits of LTE
At the heart of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is an LTE network. Thus the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution gives the service provider all of the benefits of
an LTE network:
Efficient Always-On support

A richer Quality of Service (QoS) and Quality of Experience (QoE) for end users
Greater efficiency and reduced operating costs
For more information on each of these benefits, see Benefits of LTE (p. 1-39).
Introduction
The fact that the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is a pre-integrated network
saves a significant amount of time and money for service providers. This topic lists ways
in which not having to perform integration saves time and money for service providers,
and also provides a higher quality network.
No need to perform costly integration
In a multivendor solution, a service provider must spend a significant amount of money

integrating the network and making sure that the all the network elements work together
as planned. With the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, there is no need to
perform costly integration. All the network elements in the Solution are already
integrated.
PRELIMINARY
Network level testing
Each Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is fully tested in the Alcatel-Lucent

Network Level Test (NLT) lab before being delivered. Testing on individual network
elements and on the integration of network elements is also performed. Thus the service
provider can rely on a proven, high-quality, already-integrated solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Flexibility
Since all of the building blocks in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are from a
single vendor, the network is more flexible. Service providers can grow or reduce parts of
the network much more easily because all the network elements come from
Alcatel-Lucent and have been designed to work together.
PRELIMINARY


Significant savings in deployment and operational costs
Use of the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution instead of a multivendor

solution results in significant savings to a service provider in lowered costs of
deployment, growth, and traffic and capacity management. This is a case in which a
complete network from Alcatel-Lucent is better than the sum of the piece parts in a
multivendor solution.
Other benefits beyond cost savings
Use of the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution gives the service provider
other, additional benefits, beyond cost savings. The most significant of these other
benefits are listed in this topic.
Coordinated product lifecycle
When the entire product is managed by one vendor, you have a common architecture and
requirements and joint release planning. A coordinated product lifecycle also allows the
needs of the service provider's individual network to be taken into account throughout the
lifecycle of the product.
Converged OA&M for LTE
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution has one OA&M platform for all of the LTE
network elements, starting in LE 3.0. The benefits of converged OA&M include fewer
northbound interface per OSS, common IT functions, simplified processes and faster
problem resolution.
Accelerated time to market
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Using the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also gives accelerated time
to market.
PRELIMINARY

Ease of evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ease of evolution
Helping with the migration
This topic explains how the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is set up to help
service providers easily migrate to LTE. The topic also summarizes the ways in which
Alcatel-Lucent can help a service provider migrate to LTE, before, during and after the
migration.
End-to-end services
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services staff have the products and expertise to design, implement,
integrate and fine-tune the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to meet the service
provider's unique needs. Services provided include the following:
Market analysis and strategic planning
Capacity forecasting and planning

Deployment planning
Building the solution
Testing the solution
Installing solution
Validating the installed network and performing interoperability tests
Alcatel-Lucent field testing
Each individual Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution for each service provider is
completely tested in Alcatel-Lucent's Network Level Test (NLT) lab before it is
implemented at the service provider's site.
Customized transformations
PRELIMINARY
Members of Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services team can provide customized transformations

for individual service provider networks. There is a great flexibility in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution. Tailoring the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to meet
the needs of an individual service provider increases the ease of the transition and
improves the usability of the final implemented network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade, often using existing equipment
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is built wherever possible from previously
existing Alcatel-Lucent equipment. Thus, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
protects a service provider's capital equipment by reusing that equipment in the new
network. The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also can incorporate existing 2G
and 3G wireless networks into the new network. The existing 2G and 3G wireless
networks can continue to work as before for as long as necessary. Continuing to use
existing 2G and 3G technology along with LTE technology within the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution keeps service providers from the expenditure of upgrading all
of their network elements at the same time.
PRELIMINARY

Use of ng Connect
ng Connect
Alcatel-Lucent has a corporate initiative to work through the ng Connect program with
other organizations on new applications and on ways for service providers to provide new
services and generate new revenue in their networks.
For more about ng Connect, see The ng Connect program (p. 2-16).
Example: the Connected Car
ng Connect recently created a new application that has become very popular: an
LTE-connected car. Web sites for ng Connect and the LTE connected car are listed at the
end of this topic.
Resources
For further information on ng Connect and on the Connected Car, see:

http://www.ngconnect.org/ecosystem/connected-car.htm
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent's Mobile Backhaul Solution a product offering that provides both

significant cost savings and increased bandwidth in the transport area. The Mobile
Backhaul Solution integrates multiple mobile transport technologies into a more
cost-effective end-to-end network architecture. For more about the Mobile Backhaul
Solution, see Appendix D, Mobile Backhaul Solution.

What are SONs?
Self-Optimizing Networks (SONs) are networks that perform basic network planning and
optimization tasks for themselves to reduce the amount of human interaction needed. In
SONs, in the event of a cell or site failure, self-healing methods are triggered to resolve
the resulting coverage/capacity gap to the extent possible. If these self-healing methods
do not work, then the problem is reported so that a human being can fix the problem.
Purpose of SONs
The concept of SONs grew out of a common consensus that future radio access networks
needs to be easier to plan, configure, manage, optimize and heal. Obviously, if networks
can fix lower-level problems for themselves, this frees up service provider employees to
work on other tasks.
Standards
The 3GPP Release 8 specifications have a series of standards for SONs, including 36.902.
LTE is the first
PRELIMINARY
LTE is the first 3GPP technology to actually include SONs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of SONs
The LTE specifications for SONs are being implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution over several releases. The following are examples of SONs that are
currently implemented in the Solution.
The 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) can automatically calculate and assign
a Physical Cell ID (PCI) to an eNodeB.
From LE3.0 onwards, the ANR feature supports Automatic Neighbor Relations for
LTE eNodeB Cells to LTE eNodeB Cells. Automatic Neighbor Relations means that
an LTE eNodeB will automatically find neighboring LTE eNodeB Cells.
From LE4.0 onwards, the Inter RAT (IRAT) neighbor exchange between UMTS and
LTE systems is supported to report newly discovered 3G neighbors from the 4G
management system to the 3G management system. In this release, only UTRAN
(FDD) RAT is supported. The feature will be later extended to GERAN and CDMA.
The 3G neighbor cell discovery is based on measurements required from the eNodeB
to UEs to report the strongest cell for a given UTRAN frequency. The discovered
neighboring relationships are provided to the 4G EMS (5620 SAM) by the eNodeB.
The neighboring information can be introduced in the 3G EMS (9353 WMS) via WPS
.
For more details on 5620 SAM documentation, see 5620 Service Aware Manager
(SAM) (p. 22-20). For more details on 9353 WMS documentation, see 9353 WMS
(p. 22-37) .
In addition, the 5620 SAM can perform a Self Config operation. Self Config involves
performing steps to automatically configure an LTE eNodeB; that is, to send down the
work order automatically when the LTE eNodeB is managed. An eNodeB software
load is also pushed down as part of this Self Config.
PRELIMINARY


Introduction
In response to the urgent need to preserve our natural environment, Alcatel-Lucent and
Bell Labs have created something unique: Green Touch. Green Touch is a consortium of
telecom service providers, manufacturers, universities and nonprofit organizations with a
mission to conceive and demonstrate the effectiveness of this revolutionary low-energy
network, all within the next five years.
The benefits of Green Touch to the service provider are significant. One key benefit is
that Green Touch networks will use less electricity by a factor of a thousand, resulting in
significant cost savings. Another key benefit will be the opportunity to reach markets
around the world made up of people who at present cannot afford UEs because they
cannot afford the energy cost to keep UEs charged.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Benefits
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more about Green Touch and its possibilities for the future, see the following:
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/pressroom/multimedia/videos/ALCATEL_
GREENTOUCH.html)
See also the information at the following site: http://www.greentouch.org/

Two approaches
Alcatel-Lucent's Converged RAN offering has two approaches:
Converged RAN approach
LightRadio approach
Each approach can be used separately or in combination with the other approach, as
needed.
The Converged RAN approach is discussed in Converged RAN (p. 2-26).
The LightRadio approach is discussed in LightRadio (p. 2-28).
Converged RAN
Two deployment scenarios
The Converged RAN approach has two deployment scenarios:
PRELIMINARY
integrated
distributed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Converged RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows both deployment scenarios.

Figure 2-4 Converged BTS Portfolio
PRELIMINARY

Converged base station components
Alcatel-Lucent is using the following methods to converge base station components:
Creating software-defined modules in the Remote Radio Head (RRH).

Software-defined modules make it possible for one RRH to support multiple radio
access technologies simultaneously, as long as the different radio access technologies
are in the same band.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Converged RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that software defined modules are also being created for Transmitter Receiver
Data Units (TRDUs) and Multi-Carrier Transceiver (MC-TRX) as well.
Supporting multiple technologies in one Base Band Unit (BBU) so several BBUs can
be combined into one. This is accomplished by having multiple cards in the BBU that
support multiple technologies.
Integrating multiple hardware components into one integrated frame.
Distributed base station components
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the LTE RRH Product Family can be
used as part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution, where RRHs can be placed up to 20km
away from the BBU.
Use of the Distributed eNodeB Solution can save space since the BBU does not have to
be physically located with the RRH. Also, the RRH used with the Distributed eNodeB
Solution does not require a cabinet, which also saves space.
For more about the Distributed eNodeB Solution, see About the Distributed eNodeB
Solution (p. 16-40).
LightRadio
Use of LightRadio
PRELIMINARY
Use of LightRadio is the ultimate Converged RAN solution, achieving far greater space
and power savings than traditional Converged RAN solutions. LightRadio consists of
Wideband Active Antenna Arrays (WB-AAA), multi-Band RRHs (MB-RRH), System on
a Chip (SoC) based BBUs, innovative transport solutions including CPRI compression,
new ATCA based network controller based on Cloud technology, and a single OA&M
solution supporting all LightRadio nodes, as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
LightRadio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 LightRadio product family
PRELIMINARY

Benefits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
One major benefit of the LightRadio solution is that it can support multiple radio access
technologies in multiple different bands, which cannot be done by current RRHs.
LightRadio is also a new architecture developed by Alcatel-Lucent where the base
station can be distributed into RF component elements (that could be located on poles,
sides of buildings, towers, and so forth) and baseband/network control that can be
centralized leveraging Cloud capabilities. CPRI compression techniques are capable of
reducing backhaul requirements by up to a factor of three.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Summary table
Solutions for customer problems
The following table summarizes how the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
contains solutions to current customer issues and problems.
Table 2-1
PRELIMINARY
Summary table
Customer Issue or
business problem
How Alcatel-Lucent
addresses the issue
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent

approach
Minimize network total

cost of ownership as data
traffic volumes increase
A highly-scalable, efficient
end-to-end network that uses an
all-IP, service-aware packet core
and transport, LTE radio access, a
scalable IMS service delivery
platform and cost-cutting
operation and maintenance
services
The Alcatel-Lucent solution combines

efficient cell site evolution with
multi-standard base stations (2G+3G+LTE), a
flexible all-IP completely packet-based
wireless/wireline transport solution (Mobile
Backhaul Solution), an all-IP, purpose-built
LTE evolved packet core (EPC) and a proven
IMS service delivery platform.
Expensive real estate to

support large, bulky cell
towers.
LightRadio a new
architecture where the base station
is broken into its component
elements and distributed through
the network or carrier cloud.
Additionally the various cell
tower antennas are combined and
shrunk into a single powerful, Bell
Labs-pioneered multi frequency,
multi standard (2G, 3G, LTE)
device that can be mounted on
poles, sides of buildings or
anywhere else there is power and
a broadband connection.
Solves problem of explosive growth in

demand for Wireless data and also solves the
problem of expensive real estate for cell
tower location.
Boost service agility,

while overcoming risk
and complexity of
integrating third-party
devices and applications
A broad ecosystem of
pre-integrated devices and
applications
Alcatel-Lucent is driving the creation of a

total LTE ecosystem that includes content,
applications, advertising and devices. Our
program supports a successful migration to
LTE. The program enables new business
models by helping ensure connectivity,
distribution, content and resource
management, QoS, applications and service
integration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Summary table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1
(continued)
Customer Issue or
business problem
How Alcatel-Lucent
addresses the issue
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent

approach
Manage total
transformation of IP
wireless networks,
including end-to-end
operations, while
minimizing time to
market, disruption and
risk
Service-driven transformation
program including end-to-end
business planning, design,
integration, migration and
implementation to help service
providers achieve
speed-to-market and predictable
results.
While competitors focus on the migration of

network elements, Alcatel-Lucent helps
service providers address end-to-end
networks, business models,
services/applications, operations and security.
PRELIMINARY

The Alcatel-Lucent end-to-end program

management approach provides holistic
management of the complex
interdependencies characteristic of
transformation projects.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Summary table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
3
Overview
Purpose
LTE Services for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are provided by the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization. This chapter describes these services and the
benefits they offer for the LTE service provider.
Contents
Services Portfolio
3-3
About the Services Portfolio
3-3
3-5
About AIM
3-5
Consulting
3-6
About Consulting Services
3-6
Consulting Services offered
3-7
Analysis
3-9
3-9
3-13
3-13
Deployment
3-14
About Deployment Services
3-14
Project Management Services
3-14
3-15
Integration Services
3-16
Field Integration
3-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Design
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-17
Solution Integration and Validation Service
3-18
3-18
Security Enabler Integration
3-19
Migration Services
3-19
3-21
Operation
3-23
3-23
Maintain
3-23
Optimize
3-24
Operate and manage
3-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Services Portfolio
Need for services
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Services Portfolio
LTE has an extensive impact on a service provider's radio network, core, operations,
billing, security, and service delivery components. Given these impacts, service providers
need help to successfully implement, integrate, and operate LTE networks. The
Alcatel-Lucent Services Portfolio has been designed to give expert help to service
providers for all of these components.
Includes existing networks
The LTE Services Portfolio offered by the Services organization is a comprehensive set of
services that includes both new LTE services and enhancements to existing services.
Built on expertise of Alcatel-Lucent
The breadth and depth of the Services Portfolio reflects the expertise of the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization in multivendor network integration capabilities and
its proven leadership in wireless transformation and migration.
Summary diagram
As shown in the following diagram, the Alcatel-Lucent Services team provides help for
service providers in all aspects of LTE network planning, implementation and support. In
this chapter, LTE Services are grouped into the following phases:
Consulting
Analysis
Design
Deployment
Operation
The services offered by Alcatel-Lucent in each of these phases are explained this chapter.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Services Portfolio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-1 Five phases of Services LTE support
Uses Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM)
PRELIMINARY
The Services organization uses Alcatel-Lucents Advanced Integration Methodology

(AIM), a standards based delivery framework used for Solution delivery. AIM is also
described in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About AIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About AIM
What is AIM?
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
The Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM) is the Alcatel-Lucent framework for the
delivery of Systems Integration (SI) type engagements within Alcatel-Lucent. The
methodology is based on the principles of Systems Engineering, which is an industry
proven approach to dealing with high complexity engineering design projects.
Specialized methodology
The AIM methodology has been specialized to address solutions that contain Network
Integration, Telco IT Integration (OSS/BSS/Applications) and/or Migration Services.
AIM can be used in any communications-related Systems Integration engagement,
including those encountered within strategic industries such as energy, transport, and the
public sector.
Scalable
AIM has been designed to be highly scalable and can be used for projects ranging from
small simple projects up to large complex multivendor prime Integrator engagements
incorporating a multi-release program.
Defined lifecycle
AIM has a defined lifecycle that is supported by a set of processes covering both the
Technical (engineering) and Program/Project Management aspects of SI Services
delivery.
Built on experience and best practice standards
AIM represents the cumulative knowledge and experience of a range of senior

practitioners engaged in SI Programs and Projects. AIM draws extensively on the best
practice approaches defined in the ISO/IEC15288, INCOSE, CMMI and PMI standards.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Consulting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting
Consulting Services
By combining network and IT software-centric views, Consultants in the Services

organization assist service providers with strategic transformation decisions such as
technical feasibility, organizational and network readiness, economic return, support cost
optimization and IT effectiveness. The consultants capture and translate the service
providers vision and strategy into an executable plan, from conception to field execution
to service availability.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 3-2 Consulting Services for each part of the LTE evolution path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Types of services offered
This topic lists and describes all of the Consulting Services offered by the Services
organization.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Consulting
Network Performance and QoS Analysis
Assessing your networks Quality of Service (QoS) and its impact on business
performance and proposing network performance optimization and customer experience
improvement options.
Site Consolidation
Providing a detailed analysis and set of recommendations to achieve footprint reduction,

site consolidation and real-estate valorization.
Mobile Backhaul Audit and Design
Building the business case for reducing cost per bit and designing backhaul solutions
ready for next generation access technology and services.
Sustainable Energy Audit and Design
Helping operators optimize energy usage and/or implement eco-friendly power and
innovative cooling solutions.
High Leverage Network and IP Transformation
Providing a methodological framework for capturing requirements and priorities, and

designing and planning predictable transformation and migration.
Application Enablement, Service Creation and Monetization
Assessing new business models and designing solutions to monetize service provider
assets and enable new service development and delivery.
Operation and OSS/BSS Transformation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Addressing all aspects of people, process, platform, and metrics that service providers
must consider when preparing an operational transformation to support converged
networks and services.
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Consulting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fixed and Mobile Multimedia
Addressing video services delivery technology, network planning and optimization,

end-user experience, differentiation strategies, business models, content mix, player and
partner ecosystems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Analysis
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Analysis
This topic lists and describes all of the Analysis Services offered by the Services
organization.
SIOP Services
The Alcatel-Lucent Site Implementation solution provides extensive Site Implementation

and Outside Plant (SIOP) services. These services include designing, building and
managing end-to-end deployment of the physical infrastructure for mobile and radio sites,
readying them for equipment installation. Typical examples of infrastructure worked with
include towers, antennas, and concrete pads. The work performed includes concept
development, tendering, design and execution. Services supports the following type of
SIOP Services:
Deployment Delivery Management

Site Implementation and Outside Plant (SIOP)
Architecture and Engineering
Site Construction
Site Inspection
Site Survey
Visit customers physical locations to survey and assess on-site structural and equipment
conditions, including equipment locations, cabling assignments, power, and related site
information.
Design Engineering
Perform design engineering functions, such as analysis and design of physical plant
components, creation of network order requirements, order preparation, capacity analysis,
and site space planning.
Help ensure that the correct installation site material is ordered and that the optimal
equipment layout for installation of ordered equipment at the network site is determined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Site Engineering
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Engineering
Help ensure that the correct footprint hardware is ordered and that the ordered equipment
is configured for optimal performance in the customers network.
Site Records
Perform detailed record keeping to accurately document the configuration of equipment

and physical placement within the network, initially creating site records as well as
performing updates and ongoing maintenance.
Engineering Assessment
Assess equipment and site conditions (that is, power system, batteries, grounding),
including surveys, inspections, tests, problem/issue identification, and make
recommendations for fixes, upgrades, and improvements.
Solution Architecture Advisory Services
Solution Architecture Advisory Services can be tailored to the specific needs of the
service provider, and can include some or all of the following:
Working directly with the service provider to convert requirements/problem

statements into an end to end solution architecture.
Acting as the service provider's primary point of contact for solution technical issues.
Leading the technical delivery of the solution across Alcatel-Lucent in partnership
with PM.
Communicating and documenting the service provider's architectural and technology
choices across the Alcatel-Lucent technical team.
Radio Network Planning and Audit Service
PRELIMINARY
LTE is adapting Smart Antenna Systems in order to reach the expected throughput and
coverage estimated for 4G systems as defined by the 3GPP standards. LTE will be
implementing multiple antenna techniques (MIMO, beam forming and antenna diversity.
Such sophisticated technology adds new challenges to the network design process for
wireless technology. These new challenges include such new tasks as defining the antenna
system for different clusters based on customer needs/topology and addressing the issues
for co-sites, where an eNB is located with the legacy (2G/3G base station).
Co-sitting needs to be addressed because most LTE technology will be deployed after
former GSM/UMTS systems, and deploying new sites will not be as simple as is was for
early technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent Radio Network Planning experts apply special consideration to

aspects that are of high importance for Quality Of Service (QoS), such as interference and
parameters impacting the planning. In addition, planning measures are carried out to keep
the interference between the cells as low as possible.
Finally, this service also deals with the challenges related to RF deployment of LTE
networks, one of which is the evaluation of site candidates that are presented by the site
acquisition teams. These candidates are checked from a technical point of view and
ranked according to their suitability. If required, technical site surveys precede the final
decision whether a site is chosen or rejected. When the sites, their locations, and their
particularities are known, the Radio Network Engineer defines the antenna system,
coverage and capacity requirements as well as interference limitation. With determined
site locations and antenna heights as inputs, service coverage predictions are performed.
Relevant planning parameters such as pilot output power placement of the antenna are
taken into account.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Analysis
Operations Readiness plan
Total solution processes and products for LTE are tested against a rigorous and extensive
suite of test cases and generic data before becoming generally available to the public. This
service is available in conjunction with the purchase of Integrated Solution Planning
Services from Alcatel-Lucent. Under this service, test cases are developed and executed
based upon critical requirements documents created as part of those Integrated Solution
Planning Services.
OSS/BSS Implementation Planning and Analysis
Alcatel-Lucents OSS/BSS Implementation Planning and Analysis (IPA) is an analysis to

discover LTE customer-specific operational needs and to map those needs to specific
requirements. The IPA facilitates the identification of requirements to fully implement the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE/IMS/other Platform and to integrate it into the LTE service providers
operational environment.
The IPA process determines appropriate solution strategy and details. The output of the
IPA is a mutually agreed-upon plan that defines the requirements, activities, deliverables,
roles, responsibilities, and timeline for the deployment of the solution. Establishing a
clear roadmap helps the LTE service provider become knowledgeable, comfortable and
self-sufficient with the solution. The IPA process consists of two phases: Requirements
Gathering and Solution Specification.
Assembling a team of specialists to develop the IPA
Baselining the architecture, the strategy and the implementation plan

Defining roles, responsibilities, and requirements
Other activities required for a detailed IPA report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Tasks performed by this service include the following:
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security Organizational Assessment
Alcatel-Lucents LTE Security Organizational Assessment Service reviews security

policies and organizational processes to identify threats and security vulnerabilities within
the customers LTE environment organization. This leads to recommendations to fill
identified gaps, with a documented analysis, supporting justification and a proposed
remediation plan.
Security Architecture Design
Based on the security requirements that may have been set forth by the customer and an
initial security risk assessment of the LTE solution to deploy, Alcatel-Lucent uses best
practices and security configuration baselines to determine the appropriate high-level and
low-level security designs for the LTE environment, in line with any applicable
Alcatel-Lucent reference architecture.
Architecture Security Assessment
The LTE Architecture Security Assessment is based on existing threat and risk models
developed by Alcatel-Lucent and industry best practices, and results in a prioritized list of
security vulnerabilities, documented analysis, supporting justification, and a proposed
remediation plan. Such an assessment is based on the following two approaches:
A black-box approach is used to cover tests from a vantage point outside the LTE
platform environment.
A white-box approach is taken for internal tests whereby the customer provides in
advance some information on the LTE environment internal network topology.
To achieve the objective, Alcatel-Lucent performs vulnerability scans of the systems that
are part of the LTE delivery platform, complemented by manual vulnerability analysis on
the systems. Tests can be performed from the following vantage points, as applicable and
agreed upon with the customer:
External scan of hosts of the LTE ePC platform exposed to subscribers.
Internal scan of a customer network (IS, management, and so forth) from the LTE
platform, aiming at providing the assurance that the LTE platform cannot be used as a
vector to compromise other customer environments.
Internal vulnerability scan of the LTE platform itself, to provide a mapping of
vulnerability that may be leveraged for infrastructure compromise.
PRELIMINARY
The security assessment phase will be documented in a report that will be presented to
appropriate stakeholders. This report will include a proper description of the
infrastructure exposure and highlight relevant threats to the infrastructure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Design
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Design
This topic lists and describes all of the Design Services offered by the Services
organization.
RF Planning and Design
The RF Planning and Design Service consists of the following three phases:
Phase 1 - Initial Planning: RF propagation and traffic simulation techniques

Phase 2 - Final Design: calibration of RF propagation tools, coverage prediction and
QoS analysis, and issuance of search area rings for site locations
Phase 3 Implementation: drive test surveys, candidate site surveys and selection,
and close-out site documentation
Pre-Launch RF Optimization
Alcatel-Lucents LTE Pre-Launch RF Optimization Service provides fine-tuning of

system parameters and configurations to attain optimum quality of service from the
network. Optimization is achieved by performing RF measurements via drive tests,
analyzing the results, and adjusting system parameter settings to meet system
performance criteria.
ePC and eUTRAN Network Architecture and Design
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent network architecture and design experts will analyze and define the
network architecture and evolution scenarios, formulate recommendations and work with
the service provider to identify the effective solution option. Following this, the
Alcatel-Lucent experts will verify the dimensioning and capacity aspects according to the
service providers site constraints, following standard processes and verifying the overall
correct application of new features. Throughout the project, Alcatel-Lucent network
architecture and design experts act as trusted advisors, partnering with the service
provider to identify service provider needs and answer service provider questions. The
Alcatel-Lucent network architecture and design experts dedicate special consideration to
aspects that are of high importance for Quality of Service (QoS), such as the control of
end-to-end (E2E) QoS and the network management in general.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deployment
The Services Organization offers a variety of Deployment Services, including the

following:

Migration Services
IPTC Services
Each type of Deployment Service is explained separately in this section.

Types of services
Project Management includes the following services:
PRELIMINARY
Coordinating contracted activities through final delivery of all elements.

Managing resources, which includes allocating staff and other resources to support the
project schedule.
Analyzing and tracking project risks, reporting status and executing risk response
plans.
Escalating and issuing jeopardies as necessary.
Managing close-out activities before resources are released.
Verifying that all activities within the scope of work have been completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of services
This topic lists all the Installation Services that are provided during Project Deployment.
Site Preparation
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
Provide advance preparation of customer sites to enable seamless physical installation of

network element equipment, including installation of equipment mounting structures,
overhead framework, cable racking, power, and so forth.
Equipment Installation
Install multi-technology equipment. Tasks include assembling, cabling and wiring, and
testing hardware components, and verifying that the equipment is functioning as
engineered and specified.
Equipment Removal
Safely and efficiently remove old/unused equipment and cables from network sites for
replacement with newer technology. Oversee disposition of old/unused equipment,
whether for scrap or recycling, resale, or redeployment elsewhere within a network.
Installation Quality Assessment
Provide installation quality analysis, recommendations, and support to help improve the
reliability and interoperability of physical network infrastructure and critical business
quality management processes, including assessment of current network infrastructure
and installed workmanship, standardization of installation practices, and consultation on
quality management systems.
Note: The Installation Quality Assessment Service is available only in North America.
Installation Staging
Perform a full inventory, inspection, assembly, configuration, and testing of network

equipment in a controlled environment at an Alcatel-Lucent or customer facility, remote
from the planned network implementation site, delivering a ready-for-installation system
directly to the customers location for on-site implementation.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About Integration Services
Alcatel-Lucent Network and System Integration Services supports both service provider
and enterprise customers in their network and business evolution with a focus on these
key transformation services:
Network Design, Integration, Optimization and Migration expertise to assist our

customers in getting the most out of their network investments through network
planning and design facilitation, network infrastructure optimization, multivendor
network integration, and reliable migration to next generation infrastructure.
OSS/BSS, Service Delivery Platform (SDP) and Service Oriented Architecture (SOA)
solutions and integration services that include Business and Operational Process
Consulting, Billing and Customer Relationship Management (CRM), Service
Assurance, and Service Fulfillment. These services enable faster time-to-market
(time-to-revenue), increased customer retention, and optimized operational/IT costs.
Fixed, Mobile and Multi-screen Multimedia Integration Services that include
integrated multivendor solutions (such as IPTV, VoIP, and Mobile TV) that allow
content distribution over various channels (broadband, mobile and Internet). The
practice offers intermediation services between service providers, enterprise
customers and web community services. Additionally, the Alcatel-Lucent portfolio
includes middleware and applications for multiple screens. To help bring it all
together in an innovative multiscreen video and multimedia services offering, our
customers can trust in Alcatel-Lucent global system integration leadership.
Types of services
This topic lists all the Integration Services that are provided during Project Deployment.
Field Integration
Field Integration
Field integration involves configuring and integrating installed products into networks
and verifying that the equipment is fully functional within the overall network, including
translations, validation, and acceptance testing.
PRELIMINARY
Other services that fall within the Field Integration service are explained in this topic.
Product Integration
Alcatel-Lucent's Field Integration services provide the resources, processes, tools and
experience necessary to create network element provisioning data to meet customer
specifications, provision elements, verify interfaces amongst network elements and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Field Integration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
management systems, perform acceptance testing, coordinate all required network

integration activities, and integrate installed equipment to help ensure it is operational
within the overall network.
Product Capacity Growth
Adds nodes, ports, channels, sectors, carriers, and other resources to a product to increase
capacity of the current operational product.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
Product Upgrades
Upgrades product to new releases (pre-launch), adds services or new features, performs
reconfiguration, or modifies capabilities of the product after it has been deployed.
Product Operations Support
Ensures proper product operation within a network by providing general maintenance,

including trouble resolution.
Product Validation
Validates product-level operation against customer requirements within contract for

compliance.
Product Operations Knowledge Transfer
Provides customers staff with informal training on product operations, beyond those that
are available in product-level training.

To increase their revenue and competitiveness, Communication Service Providers (CSPs)

are looking at leveraging their network assets to create differentiating applications. CSPs
can develop the applications themselves or work with third party advertisers or
applications and content providers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
To help CSPs reach their goals, Alcatel-Lucents Application Integration Solution helps
CSPs develop, market, and provide proof of concept for new applications. This solution
also provides trial facilities as well as guidance that is controlled, secured, and stepwise
so that CSPs are assured of reaching immediate results.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucents Solution Integration and Validation Service provides a laboratory

environment where the customer can test voice, data and/or video services over specified
technologies, which may include optical, Ethernet, IP, ATM, Wireless/Mobility and/or
Circuit Switching. This service helps ensure the interoperability of the network elements
and associated Element Management Systems and Network Management Systems
according to the requirements of the proposed. Testing areas may include integration,
performance, redundancy, scalability and/or management testing. The Integration Lab
Testing Service is based on requirements developed from network planning and design
documentation. Alcatel-Lucent engineers work with the customer to define test plans that
conform to the customers test requirements, perform the testing according to an
agreed-to test plan, and provide the customer with a written report of the test results.

PRELIMINARY
Provide service operations consulting, migration services, system integration capabilities

and OSS/BSS and application services solutions including a portfolio of enablers,
applications and products from leading strategic partnerships. Alcatel-Lucent's OSS/BSS,
SDP and SOA solutions and services portfolio is ideally suited to fixed, mobile and
converged carriers who have non-sustainable subscriber growth as well as those facing
fierce competition forcing them into an IP transformation to deliver higher-value, secure
user-centric services faster. Migration and transformation projects can impact so many
areas in a service provider network, such as new services and service delivery
environment, new business models, new partners, new technology, new OSS/BSS
systems and applications, new organizations, new security measures and new skills
needed by service provider personnel. The OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration
Service helps service providers to successfully navigate all of these changes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The LTE Security Architecture Design work item will lead to the selection of a number of
security enablers to be integrated on the LTE deployment to ensure appropriate coverage
of the identified security risks. For the selected enablers, Alcatel-Lucent produces the
following documents:
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
Appropriate configuration (databooks) for the security equipment and others relevant
systems for which security-related functions are expected.
Integration and acceptance tests plans, to enable the validation of the deployed
enablers from a security standpoint, and verify that the security enablers fulfill their
expected functionalities.
Once these documents are approved, Alcatel-Lucent employees perform the

implementation and configuration of the security enablers. Integration tests are then
performed to validate that all systems are correctly deployed and configured from a
security standpoint. Finally, acceptance tests are performed.
Migration Services
Purpose
This topic describes Services' Network Migration services.

Network Migration defined
When a carrier chooses to replace network elements in the converged strategy, a

migration is the process of moving all customers and traffic from the legacy to the new
converged network elements.
Network Migration defined
Network migration is thus the process of moving all customers and traffic from the legacy
to the new converged PS core network.
Challenges and risks
Network migration raises a number of challenges, including the following:
minimizing the disturbances to the end-users (service outage, performance

degradation) and to the service provider's operation
minimizing transformation costs and lead-time in a multivendor environment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
Migration Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sample migration activities
The migration process typically starts once the new network elements are deployed and
running as an overlay of the legacy network elements. The process includes multiple
activities, the list of which depends on the service provider environment. The following
list of typical activities is for illustration only; it is neither exhaustive nor mandatory:
Solution architecture, migration strategy and planning

Creation and validation of the Methods of Procedures
Integration of the ePC with the legacy Core Networks
Architecture and capacity assessment of the networks prior to starting the migration of
subscribers and traffic, and upgrade of capacity in the new core network if needed
Deployment of the GGSN and SGSN features into the new PS core network and their
integration with the rest of the network (including Applications, OSS/BSS, and
Lawful Interception)
Migration of subscribers
Migration of services and traffic from the legacy PS core network to the converged
one
Re-parenting of the 2G and/or 3G Radio Access Networks from the legacy PS core
network to the converged one
Performance verification all through the migration process
The importance of Program Management
Program management is fundamental to network migration. The Program Management

provided by Alcatel-Lucent helps to provide consistency and reliability to Network
Migration. The Program Management Alcatel-Lucent provides also includes migration
scheduling for timed projects with given dependencies and constraints, and migration
workflow management for dealing with events required to complete a migration.
Benefits of using Alcatel-Lucent's Migration Services
PRELIMINARY
With its unique products and services portfolio, its multivendor capabilities and its broad
expertise in complex network transformation programs, and in Program Management,
Alcatel-Lucent can mitigate all the risks of Network Migration for the service provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Transformation Centers defined
IP Transformation Centers (IPTC) provide End-to-End 2G/3G/4G/IMS Solution testing

services and capabilities.
The following figure shows the role of an IPTC in providing integration and validation of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
Figure 3-3 IP Transformation Center (IPTC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The rest of this topic lists and describes services offered by an IPTC.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E2E LTE Solution Integration and Validation
Systematically configure and integrate the LTE Solution components (HW and SW) to the
specific customers Multi-Vendor environment, which includes LTE RAN, IMS, 2G/3G,
PSTN integration, and inter-carrier interconnection. This service also entails integrating
the solutions using the Gold Standard Customer Specific configuration parameters so as
to model the customers production network as closely as is feasible.
LTE Solution Readiness
Develop, validate and produce Methods of Procedures (MOPs), including the sequencing
of the MOPs, that are specific to the customers network environment so as to produce a
fast and accurate implementation and integration of the network components in the
customers field environment.
LTE Network Transformation and Migration Service
Identify risks and issues and recommended migration strategies. Develop, validate, and
produce migration model and MOPs to execute in the field during the migration
processes.
LTE Product Validation and Acceptance Service
PRELIMINARY
Perform product-specific testing to validate features, security, and L2/L3 conformance as

per requirements listed in the Product Specific manuals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation
Operation Services
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Operation
Operation Services provide the expert resources, tools, practices and integrated support
structure to keep service providers networks up and running at peak performance around
the clock. Operation Services also include such tasks as network optimization and
management services.
Categories
Wireless Operation Services can be divided into the three categories:
Maintain
Optimize
Operate and Manage
Each of these types of operation services is explained here.
Maintain
About Maintenance Services
Maintenance services provide the expert resources, tools, practices and integrated support
structure to help keep our customers networks up and running at peak performance
around the clock.
Technical Support (TS)
Provide integrated remote Technical Support (TS) for complex, multivendor network
applications, enabling rapid response, restoration, and resolution of system issues and
outages.
Repair and Exchange Service (RES)
Return for Repair (R4R)
Allow for defective parts to be returned to Alcatel-Lucent for repair.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Provides a service where faulty equipment is sent to Alcatel-Lucent for repair and a
replacement pack is sent in its place. RES is different from Return for Repair (R4R)
where the actual pack is sent back after repair.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Operation
Maintain
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customer Technical Advocates (CTAs)
Provide expert technical liaisons offering information on hardware/software releases and

features, answering engineering questions, supporting upgrade strategy, and providing
network evolution support.
Resident Engineer
Provide dedicated on-site support at the customer location from a field technician
performing Level 1 site operations and maintenance activities, at the customers direction.
Optimize
Post-Launch Optimization
With Post-Launch Optimization, experienced RF Engineers partner for RF Consultation

support for Field Integration Testing (FIT) of RF Self-Optimizing Network (SON)
features and/or staff augmentation. The RF Engineers provide an ePC optimization
service to cover LTE post-launch optimization from end to end.
Operate and manage

About Managing Services
Market and economic conditions require a reinvention of telecommunications network

business models. This radical shift from an emphasis on network-centric services to
customer-centric content, solutions and services raises numerous challenges. Making this
change demands nothing less than business transformation.
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent Managing Services helps the service provider to do the following:
Realize reductions in CAPEX/OPEX

Deliver operational and financial efficiencies through streamlined operations and new
service delivery
Reduce network overlays and lower IT costs

Transform networks and processes for long-term growth by shifting the operational
focus to the end-user experience and by migrating to a services-centric model
Develop and grow revenue from new sources while investing in people and in skills
transformation
Provide the framework, through creative partnering and innovative risk sharing
options, for helping to create a next generation-enabled portfolio of services for
consumers and enterprises.
The rest of this topic lists the Managing Services offerings that Alcatel-Lucent provides.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Operate and manage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multivendor Maintenance
A solution providing a single point of contact model for maintenance supporting

multivendor products in the network.
Managed Network Operations
A network outsourcing solution that assumes operational fault management responsibility

for the entire network or for a subset of a telecom carriers network through a central
NOC (Network Operation Center), applying state-of-the-art operations processes and
tools.
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Operation
Carrier Network Outsourcing
A strategic business and technology relationship between Alcatel-Lucent and service

providers seeking seamless migration to next-generation network architecture. Emphasis
is on improving efficiency while providing ongoing network operation services.
Build Operate Managed for Mobility
A comprehensive package of services that includes consulting, planning, design,

implementation, and managed services to operate the network.
Managed Infrastructure
An innovative managed service offering which bundles network infrastructure, build-out,

operation and maintenance services and a transformational financing model.
Managed End-to-End Service Operations
A cost-effective, managed end-to-end services operations capability that meets end-user

demand for an improved customer experience.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Services
Operate and manage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the deployment options currently available within the
Options
At present the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution contains several deployment

options:
LTE Network
LTE Network Overlay with 3GPP2 Network
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network

LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Each deployment option is described in this chapter.

This chapter contains only a high-level view of the deployment options. For further
information about a deployment option and about how it can be tailored for the needs of
your network, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
Contents
4-3
Terminology
4-3
4-5
About the option
4-5
Diagrams
4-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Before you begin
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
4-8
Interfaces
4-8
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD

1xEVDO
4-9
About the Option
4-9
Diagrams
4-10
How it works
4-12
Interfaces
4-13
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and

W-CDMA
4-14
About the Option
4-14
Diagrams
4-15
How it works
4-17
Interfaces
4-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Before you begin
This topic gives information you need to know before studying the deployment options.
Contents
Terminology
4-3
Terminology
Introduction
This topic defines terms used throughout this chapter.

Component
Throughout this document the term component is used to mean one of the six domains
or major parts of a complete LTE network:

Backhaul Network and Transport Network
Core Network
Common Core Network
OAM&P
Each deployment option shown in this chapter is comprised of network elements from
each of these six components. For definitions of these components, see A sample LTE
network (p. 1-36) and LTE network (p. 2-6).
Network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Through this document the term network element is used to mean a unique entity within a
network. Often one NE consists of multiple physical and logical resources, which can be
configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The NE and the NEs physical and
logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an element or network management
system. An example of a network element would be a single Alcatel-Lucent 9412
eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Before you begin
Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each deployment option shown in this chapter is made up of network elements.

Interworking
Most of the LTE deployment options include interworking between the LTE Network and
other non-LTE networks. In the computing world, Interworking is defined as the ability
to seamlessly communicate between devices supporting dissimilar protocols...by
translating between the protocols, not through encapsulation. (Newton, Harry, Newton's
Telecom Dictionary: The Official Dictionary of Telecommunications & the Internet, 15th
ed. [New York: Miller Freeman, Inc., 1999.]) For the purposes of this document
interworking is defined as the seamless transmission of an active data session or voice
call from the LTE Network to a 3GPP2 or 3GPP network and vice versa.
Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) handoff
Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) is used for the handoff of an active data session
from one network to another.
PRELIMINARY
IRAT handovers allow a user with VoIP Services to have a coordinated handover between
the LTE Network and second generation (2G) and Third Generation 1.25 MHZ carrier
(3G1x) networks. When IRAT is used, the VoIP service interruption is minimized through
the transfer of session information between the Radio Access Networks (RANs) and using
a common Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) for access
to the Packet Data Network (PDN) for the voice services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About the option
Introduction
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
This topic gives a high-level view of the LTE Network and the LTE Network Deployment
Option.
What is the LTE Network?
The LTE Network is a network that carries only LTE traffic.

What is the LTE Network Deployment Option?
The LTE Network Deployment Option is a mobile network using LTE technology.
Uses
The LTE Network Deployment Option can be used to provide service over a new mobile
network. This stand-alone network in greenfield applications can provide data-only
services or can provide both voice and data services, using Voice over LTE (VoLTE) to
provide the voice.
Note: For more about VoLTE, see Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with LTE.
Diagrams
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data-only implementation
The following diagram shows the data-only configuration of the LTE Network
Deployment Option. The interfaces and how the network connects to the User Equipment
(UE) and the Packet Data Network (PDN) are also shown.
Figure 4-1 LTE Network Deployment Option (data only)
PRELIMINARY
LTE portion does not provide voice but may carry voice
The data-only configuration of the LTE Network Deployment Option does not interwork
with a 2G or 3G network to provide voice services. Also, the data-only configuration of
the LTE Network Deployment Option does not provide IMS and does not link to the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Therefore the data-only configuration of
the LTE Network Deployment Option does not itself provide voice traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Diagrams
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: However, voice traffic may still be carried by the LTE Network Deployment
Option configuration. Voice over IP (VoIP) traffic may flow through the LTE Network
Deployment Option, as long as the VoIP traffic is generated, sent, and reassembled by
network entities that exist outside of the data-only LTE Network Deployment Option.
Data and voice implementation
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
The following figure shows the version of the LTE Network Deployment Option that can
handle both data and voice.
Figure 4-2 Major components of the LTE Network Deployment Option
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only the major OA&M products are shown in this figure.
When the IMS and applications layer is added the LTE Network can handle voice,
using Voice over LTE. When the IMS and applications layer is absent, the LTE
Network provides only data traffic, although, as explained in LTE portion does not
provide voice but may carry voice (p. 4-6), a data-only LTE network may still carry
voice traffic under certain conditions.
Note: For an explanation of Voice over LTE in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, see Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with LTE.
How it works
Explained earlier
For an explanation of how the LTE Network works, refer to Chapter 1, Long Term
Evolution (LTE).
Interfaces
Call flow
In the LTE Network, the UE is connected to the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) in the evolved
UTRAN (eUTRAN) via the Uu interface. The eNodeB uses the S1-MME interface to
convey control message to the MME and uses the S1-U interface for the bearer traffic to
the Serving Gateway (SGW). The Mobility Management Entity (MME) uses the S6a
interface for user authentication and subscriber data in the Home Subscriber Server
(HSS). The SGW interconnects with the Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) via the S5
interface. The PGW is connected to the Policy Charging Rule Function (PCRF) via the
Gx interface. The PGW is connected to the Packet Data Network via the SGi interface.
Support for local routing
The 7705 SAR supports local routing, so it is a valid option to route X2 traffic directly
between eNodeBs.
PRELIMINARY
For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Network, see Appendix A,
LTE interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment

Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO
About the Option
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
About the Option
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option:
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option uses the LTE Network
and supports interworking with an eHRPD network. This topic gives a high-level view of
the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option.
Wireless networks supported
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option supports only 1xEVDO
wireless networks.
Definition
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option is a network made up of
an Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network that has been installed and is interworking with a service
provider's 3GPP2 (CDMA and EV-DO) network.
Uses
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option is used typically by
service providers who have existing CDMA and/or EV-DO networks to add additional
data services to their networks and to make use of new spectrum.
Both voice and data supported
Both voice and data are supported. Both voice and data handoffs from LTE to CDMA
within the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network are supported.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagrams
Implementation
The following diagram shows the basic components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Network Deployment Option. The interfaces used and network connections are also
shown.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 4-3 LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
Component-level view
The following figure shows LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
broken down by components.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Figure 4-4 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
Deployment Option
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of interworking supported
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option currently supports the
following types of interworking:
Data redirection and reselection
Active IRAT handover for data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
How it works
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic describes the eHRPD program and how it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution.
What is eHRPD?
eHRPD stands for evolved HPRD (eHRPD). eHRPD is a program developed by

Alcatel-Lucent to make it possible to hand off calls from the LTE Network to a CDMA
network and from a CDMA network back to the LTE Network. The purpose of eHRPD is
to translate LTE calls into the High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) standard.
Why is eHRPD needed?
Because LTE is a packet-only network, LTE handovers to a CDMA network are treated as
data calls. Thus, handovers from LTE to CDMA must go through the protocol used for
EV-DO within CDMA, a standard protocol called High Rate Packet Data (HRPD).
Impacted network elements
To provide handover information and support connectivity between LTE and eHRPD, the
following new or enhanced network elements are used in the LTE Interworking with
3GPP2 Network Deployment Option:
PRELIMINARY
The Access Terminal (AT) or User Equipment (UE) is enhanced to support both LTE
and eHRPD RF technologies. In other words, this must be a dual-mode UE.
The LTE and eHRPD systems are enhanced to support the transport of conversational
speech using mobile vocoders.
The HRPD RNC is enhanced to recognize the dual mode AT/UE and make network
selection decisions based to the AT/UEs functionality. The enhanced HRPD RNC is
referred to as eRNC.
The HRPD BTS supporting the dual mode UE contains software that can
automatically work with eHRPD. Though the BTS when used with HRPD is called an
eBTS, no action needs to be taken to turn the BTS into an eBTS. The software on the
BTS automatically adjusts to eHRPD traffic as necessary.
The LTE eNodeB is enhanced to receive eHRPD pilot measurements from the UE
with SIB8 support, broadcast eHRPD information with configure eHRPD
measurement objects, trigger handover from the LTE system to the eHRPD system
based on the measurement report, and facilitate a special signaling tunnel from the UE
to the eHRPD system
The HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) is a new network element that supports
LTE/eHRPD interworking.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
The standard LTE network elements, such as the 7750 SR (PGW), are used.
The 8950 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server is not a new
network element, but it is required for the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
Deployment Option.
Note: Note that the 3G1X Network (not the EV-DO Network) sends the over-the-air
broadcast information that notifies UEs of the presence of LTE coverage. The
broadcast comes from the 3G1X network because some dual-mode UEs only attach to
the 3G1X Network upon power up.
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
How it works
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Same transport network
In this deployment option LTE traffic shares the same transport network as the CDMA
traffic.
Interfaces
Additional interfaces
In the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option, the following
additional interfaces are supported by the EPC and Common Core:
S2a between the PGW and the HSGW

Gxa between the PCRF and the HSGW
SWx between the HSS and the AAA
S6b between PGW and AAA
For the Backhaul Network, the switching segment connects the HSGW to LTE network
elements over the S2a interface. An aggregation switch may be used to reduce the number
of interfaces on the PGW.
For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Network Deployment Option, see Appendix A, LTE interfaces.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Overview
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option:
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment

Option: GSM and W-CDMA
About the Option
Introduction
This topic gives a high-level view of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Deployment Option.
Wireless networks supported
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option supports GSM and
W-CDMA wireless networks.
Definition
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option is a network made up of
an Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network that has been installed and is interworking with a service
provider's 3GPP (GSM or W-CDMA) network.
Uses
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option is typically used by
service providers who have existing GSM and/or W-CDMA networks to add additional
data services to their networks and to make use of new spectrum.
Both voice and data supported
PRELIMINARY
Both voice and data are supported. Both voice and data handoffs from LTE to GSM
within the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Diagrams
Introduction
The following diagram shows the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment
Option. The interfaces used and network connections are also shown.
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-5 LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option
Component-level view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The following figure shows a view of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network broken
down by component.
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Diagrams
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-6 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Deployment Option
Note: With this configuration, both GSM and W-CDMA can be supported at the same
time with the same physical LTE Network.
PRELIMINARY
Types of interworking supported
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option currently supports the
following types of interworking:
Data redirection and reselection

blind HO with no measurements (for pre-R8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
Limited to pre-R8 IRAT
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option currently interworks only
with Pre-R8 GSM and W-CDMA network elements.
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
How it works
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is Pre-R8?
There are two methods defined in the 3GPP specifications for interworking with legacy
GSM/UMTS networks: pre-Release 8 (called Pre-R8) and Release 8 (called R8 +).
For 3.0, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution only supports the Pre-R8 method.
How it works
Using the Pre-R8 standard as specified in TS 23.401 Annex D, the LTE Network and
GSM or W-CDMA Network use the 3GPP Pre-R8 interfaces (Gn/Gp) as the basis for
interworking. The Gn/Gp interface has both signaling and bearer. The signaling is
directed to the MME and the bearer is directed to the PGW.
PGW is the anchor
In this case the PGW provides the functions of a GGSN for the Serving GPRS Support
Node (SGSN) and acts as the mobility anchor for I-RAT.
Backhaul Network
For the Backhaul Network, the switching segment connects SGSN and RNC to LTE
network elements over the Gn and Gp interfaces.
Interfaces
Additional interfaces
In the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option, the following
additional interfaces are supported by the EPC and Common Core:
Gn between the MME and SGSN (Pre-R8) 3GPP 29.060
Gn (non-roaming) / Gp (roaming) between the PGW and the SGSN 3GPP 23.060
Gr between the HSS and the SGSN (Pre-R8) 3GPP 29.002
For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Interworking with 3GPP
Network Deployment Option, see Appendix A, LTE interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Deployment options
Interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
5 igh-level migration
H
strategy
Overview
Purpose
This chapter discusses evolution of existing service provider networks to LTE. The
chapter shows sample migration paths for different technologies, gives some basic
principles for migration planning and lists sources of further information.
Contents
Migration options
5-1
5-4
3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary
5-5
Basic principles
5-6
5-7
Migration planning resources
5-8
Migration options
Introduction
There are several different migration paths that service providers can take to migrate to
LTE.
Sample migration paths
Note how in each sample, the amount of LTE in the network grows over time, as it is
needed. Note also how most service provider networks retain non-LTE networks to work
in parallel with the LTE Networks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Figure 5-1, Migration paths to LTE (p. 5-2) shows sample migration paths to LTE.
PRELIMINARY
Migration options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-1 Migration paths to LTE
PRELIMINARY
Compatibility with all major network types
LTE was purposefully designed to be compatible with all major types of wireless
networks. As shown in Figure 5-2, Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous
standards (p. 5-3), the LTE standards were perceived and written as a natural evolution
of existing wireless networks. Therefore, from a technological standard, migration to LTE
is straightforward. If you look at the dotted lines in Figure 5-2, Compatibility of the LTE
Standard with previous standards (p. 5-3), each dotted line shows that it is possible to
move directly from the technology at the left-hand end of the dotted line directly to LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Migration options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous standards
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
This topic shows, at a high level, the major steps involved in evolving a sample 3GPP2
network, in this case, a 1xEV-DO network, into an LTE network.
Table 5-1
1xEV-DO to LTE evolution summary
Portion of Network
Tasks
Access devices
Deploy new multimode eHRPD/LTE devices
Evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD)

software upgrade
Transport/IP Backhaul
Core/OA&M
BTS -> eBTS (occurs automatically in the

software)
RNC -> eRNC
PDSN -> HSGW
Deploy eNodeB
Carry out the following tasks:
If your network has Time Division

Multiplex (TDM) or Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM) Backhaul, migrate
to LTE-Ready Backhaul
Add LTE traffic to Ethernet Backhaul

Network
Deploy new components
Serving Gateway (SGW)
PDN Gateway (PGW)
Mobility Management Entity (MME)
Policy and Charging Rules Function

(PCRF)
Home Subscriber Server (HSS)
PRELIMINARY
Add capacity/update OA&M

hardware/software:
CDMA MS (OMP, OMC-RAN)
LTE MS (SAM 5620)
Updating the backhaul is critical to success with LTE. For help with this, see Appendix D,
Mobile Backhaul Solution.
For additional information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see the following url:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/!ut/p/kcxml/04_
Sj9SPykssy0xPLMnMz0vM0Y_QjzKLd4w3dnTUL8h2VAQAvhWwcA!!?LMSG_
CABINET=Solution_Product_Catalog&LMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Solutions/Solution2_
Detail_000021.xml)
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
This topic shows, at a high level, the major steps involved in evolving a 3GPP network,
such as GSM or W-CDMA, into an LTE network.
Table 5-2
3GPP to LTE evolution summary
Portion of Network
Tasks
Access devices
Deploy new multimode UMTS/LTE and/or

GSM/LTE devices
Deploy eNodeB
Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) supports
legacy Gn/Gp interfaces on the MME and
PGW) The Gn interface is used for
interworking the SGSN with the PGW. To
support this interface, the PGW provides the
functional equivalency of the GGSN.
Core/OA&M
Deploy new components
PDN Gateway (PGW)
Mobility Management Entity (MME)
Policy and Charging Rules Function

(PCRF)
Home Subscriber Server (HSS)
Add capacity/update OA&M

hardware/software:
UMTS (OMP, OMC-RAN)
LTE (SAM 5620)
For additional information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see the following url:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Updating the backhaul is critical to success with LTE. For help with this, see Appendix D,
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detail_000021.xml)
Basic principles
Introduction
This topic lists basic principles that Alcatel-Lucent recommends using in migration
planning.
Conservation of existing equipment
Wherever possible, re-use existing network and existing equipment, to save on costs and
save time and energy.
Existing systems that are not interworking with LTE remain unchanged.
Migrate at the right pace
You can evolve one portion of your network to LTE at a time, and at the pace that works
best for you.
Alcatel-Lucent supports multiple approaches that allow graceful introduction of one
technology at a time, with efficient spectrum and subscriber migration to reduce service
provider risk along the way.
Take advantage of LTE's assets
See LTE designed for easy migration (p. 5-7) for a list of the characteristics and
functionalities of LTE that make migration to LTE easy. Making use of these natural
benefits of LTE will ease your migration.
Make use of professional help
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent's LTE Services organization can help plan your migration and evolve your
network. See LTE Services (p. 2-13) for a description of the LTE Services that
Alcatel-Lucent can provide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The LTE designers planned LTE for easy migration of current 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless
systems to LTE. This topic lists some of the ways that LTE is designed to make migration
easy.
PRELIMINARY
Spectrum conservation and flexibility
The 3GPP standardization body behind the LTE design understands that radio spectrum is
a scarce resource, and as a result, has allowed LTE to be deployed in a variety of
bandwidths (from 1.4 to 20MHz). In other words, 2G or 3G service providers can, if they
wish, allocate just some of their existing bands to LTE. This flexibility opens the door to
different deployment scenarios, offering tailored solutions fitting service providers'
strategies and market needs.
LTE flexibility
The flexibility of the LTE standard offers many advantages as the service provider plans
the migration:
LTE wireless networks can be easily integrated into existing wireless networks and
smoothly co-exist with current 2G and 3G wireless networks.
In the LTE design the EPC can accommodate evolved versions of the GSM,
W-CDMA, and CDMA Radio Access Networks (RANs) in addition to the LTE RAN.
Allowing all these versions of the RAN to communicate with the EPC creates a
smooth migration from GSM, W-CDMA and CDMA to LTE.
LTE wireless networks can overlay existing 2G or 3G wireless networks without
causing any disruption of service.
LTE has been designed for graceful migration of current technologies to LTE.
An LTE network can be implemented as a complete, stand-alone network or LTE can
be implemented one component at a time. LTE components can be used with existing
networks until the service provider migrates more parts of the service provider
network
LTE can be used with many different radio spectrums and at many different
bandwidths.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For more information or for help in planning a migration, contact your Alcatel-Lucent
Account Executive.
For more about LTE and other topics mentioned in this document, see Appendix B,
Resources.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Part II: LTE Network Provided

Services
Overview
Purpose
This part describes the LTE Network Provided Services in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Chapter 6, UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
6-1
Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with LTE
7-1
Chapter 8, SMS with LTE
8-1
Chapter 9, Cell Broadcast with LTE
9-1
Chapter 10, Approaches for video on LTE
10-1
Chapter 11, Roaming in LTE networks
11-1
Chapter 12, Government-mandated services
12-1
Chapter 13, Public Safety
13-1
Chapter 14, LTE End-to-End Security
14-1
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE Network Provided Services
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
6 Es and Alcatel-Lucent's
U
Devices and IOT Team
Overview
Purpose
This chapter covers the following topics:
UEs available in the market today

InterOperability Testing (IOT)
Alcatel-Lucent's commitments to IOT
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
Services that Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team offer

Network Vendor Interoperability Testing (NVIOT) Forum
Process followed by the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team
Contents
About UEs
6-2
6-3
6-4
Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT
6-4
About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team
6-5
The NVIOT Forum
6-6
IOT Process
6-7
6-8
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About UEs
What is a UE?
User Equipment (UE) is the name used in the 3GPP standards for mobile terminals. In
this document the term UE is used instead of mobile terminal.
What is a mobile terminal?
A mobile terminal is a handheld (portable) device that provides a standardized radio

interface between the end user and the base station in a wireless telecommunications
network.
Other names
UEs are known by many other names, including mobile unit, mobile phone, cell phone,
Access Terminal (AT), mobile, mobile station, and terminal.
Types of UEs
Many different devices now function as UEs. The following are examples of UEs
available in today's wireless networks:
PRELIMINARY
hand-held cellular telephones, which can include any of the following:

simple devices that can only access one legacy type of network
multimode cellular telephones that can access several networks simultaneously
smart phones, UEs that contain handheld computers that are integrated into the
cellular telephone. Typically the computers have a complete operating system and
are able to host advanced applications. Smart phones combine the functions of a
cellular telephone, a camera, and a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
computers, including
a laptop computer equipped with mobile broadband adapter
Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs)
wireless networking hardware that can be plugged into any computer, such as a
dongle. A dongle is a small piece of hardware that connects to a laptop, desktop or
server computer. Though the term "dongle" was originally used to refer only to
software-protection dongles; now the term can also be used for a small piece of
hardware with a USB flash drive that can serve as a wireless networking device.
How it works
When they are turned on (powered up) UEs maintain radio communication with local
base stations, even when not in use. When in use, the UEs communicate via radio with the
base stations. Through the base stations the UEs are connected to wireless and wireline
telecommunications networks and to the Internet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Not manufactured by Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent does not manufacture any UEs. This fact has two benefits for service
providers:
Our testers and network planners are unbiased and thus can better help the service
provider identify the UEs or set of UEs that are best for that particular service
provider's needs.
Alcatel-Lucent is free to work with all device vendors in the market without
generating any conflicts of interest. Thus the Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
has been able to build close working relationships with many different device vendors
and is able to do full interoperability testing with a wide range of the UEs available in
today's markets.
PRELIMINARY
The rest of this chapter describes the InterOperability Testing (IOT) services that the
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team offers. Service providers can use
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team for help in choosing and in testing UEs for their
service provider networks.

Fastest-developing system ever
As reflected in the June 2011 report of the Global Suppliers Association (GSMA), LTE is
the fastest developing mobile system technology ever. As of June 2011, there were 208
LTE network commitments worldwide and a robust ecosystem in development with 137
LTE UEs in commercial deployment or announced. This number represents a 40%
increase in the number of LTE UEs between March 2011 and June 2011.
For more information
For further information on the explosive growth of LTE, and on the GSMA, see the
GSMA web site at the following address:
(http://www.gsacom.com/)
Need for IOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
With the explosive growth in number of UE devices availability, interoperability testing

(IOT) is more important than ever. The rest of this chapter defines IOT and explains
Alcatel-Lucent's involvement in IOT.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is InterOperability Testing (IOT)?
InterOperability Testing (IOT) is defined as the verification of an interface between two

parties' network elements, on a functional level, in accordance with the relevant 3GPP
standards. For testing purposes, the network elements under test are regarded as black
boxes with well-defined external interfaces.
How it works
IOT verification is achieved by execution of a predetermined set of test cases to ensure

compatibility between the network elements at the interface under test. The aim of
verification is to provide confidence that the two elements can interwork successfully.
Primarily, the correct behavior of an element at its external interface is tested. The
behavior is deemed to be correct if it exactly matches the interworking described in the
test case.
Benefits
Comprehensive and thorough IOT provides several advantages to service providers,

including faster time to market, reduced deployment costs, streamlined integration,
expanded product offerings and lower deployment risk. Reliable interoperability also
means a faster return on investment and a clear competitive advantage in todays complex
wireless marketplace.

Commitment to LTE ecosystem
Alcatel-Lucent is fully committed to the development of the LTE ecosystem.

Alcatel-Lucent has been conducting LTE IOT for over 3 years and are currently testing
with over 20 chipset and device vendors including both FDD and TDD. To assist with the
rapid expansion of the ecosystem Alcatel-Lucent has established an open IOT device
program to welcome the large number of OEM vendors.
PRELIMINARY
Testing of UEs and chipsets
Alcatel-Lucent is also committed to working closely with both chipset companies

(including smartphone chipsets) and handset manufacturers to meet service providers'
needs and to accelerate Time To Market of commercial handsets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Results are confidential
Alcatel-Lucent's IOT programs with UE suppliers are covered by Non-Disclosure

Agreements (NDAs). Therefore, IOT reports and detailed IOT related information cannot
be disclosed without the UE suppliers written approval. Given such approval,
Alcatel-Lucent is willing to disclose detailed IOT information in a three-party-meeting,
for example, between a service provider, a UE supplier, and members of Alcatel-Lucent's
Devices and IOT Team.
PRELIMINARY

Introduction
Because of the importance of interoperability to service providers, Alcatel-Lucent has

dedicated a significant amount of resources across the globe to form the Alcatel-Lucent
Devices and InterOperability Testing (IOT) Team. This topic describes that team and the
services they offer.
What is the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team?
The Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team is a team developed to perform

interoperability testing with UE suppliers and chipset makers, and to provide high-quality
and reputable value-added service and support to service providers who need to select
UEs to use in their networks.
Cross-technology support
The Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team is a cross-technologies team that covers both
LTE and W-CDMA UEs.
Participation in standards bodies
The team also is a vocal proponent of interoperability in many IOT-related standards

bodies and technology forums.
Benefits of IOT testing
The testing program put on by the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team provides the
following benefits to the service provider:
An open architecture with Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 1x and EV-DO Rev 0/A, GSM,
GPRS, W-CDMA and LTE (FDD and TDD) platforms
Consulting services with a skilled engineering team for design and integration ideas
Integration of third-party products and services with the Alcatel-Lucent platforms
Compatibility testing in the Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Interoperability Testing Lab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For further information on the device testing and InterOperability Testing services that
Alcatel-Lucent provides, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Customer Team.
The NVIOT Forum

Member of IOT Forum
Alcatel-Lucent is an active member of the Network Vendor Interoperability Testing

(NVIOT) Forum (http://www.nviot-forum.org/), an informal group of leading LTE, 3G
and 2.5G wireless equipment suppliers. The members of the NVIOT Forum are
committed to interoperability testing and open standards. The groups intent is to ensure
that W-CDMA equipment and solutions produced by group members will interoperate
from the very beginning, and therefore enable rapid establishment of multivendor
W-CDMA networks.
Compliant with standards
All members of the NVIOT produce products that adhere to Third Generation Partnership
Project (3GPP) (http://www.3gpp.org/) specifications.
Work of the IOT Forum
The major work of the NVIOT Forum is to identify a common methodology and
procedures, and includes the following:
Exchange of interoperability test suites

Proposal of testing procedures
Creation of common procedures to facilitate communication on IOT matters to service
providers
Benefit to service providers
PRELIMINARY
Service providers benefit from the work of the NVIOT Forum since the NVIOT Forum
gives the following benefits to its members:
identification and solution of interoperability issues early on

improved quality of tests and associated documentation
teamwork that facilitates the commercial deployment of mobile systems.
A detailed description of the processes defined by the NVIOT Forum is available at

http://www.nviot-forum.org/.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
IOT Process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IOT Process
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team follows the InterOperability Testing (IOT)
process defined by the Network Vendor Interoperability Testing (NVIOT) Forum.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 6-1 NVIOT IOT process
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Experience with many technologies
Members of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team have extensive experience with
interoperability on many technology fronts, including W-CDMA, GSM, GPRS, CDMA,
1xRTT, ATM, and IP. This topic gives several examples of the extensive infrastructure
and UE testing that members of this team have done and can do for a service provider
when needed.
Note: As noted before, specific IOT related information for specific UEs cannot be
disclosed without the UE owners written approval. Therefore, the information given
in this topic remains on a generic level
Information can be disclosed if the vendor is willing
Alcatel-Lucent is willing to disclose detailed IOT information in a three-party-meeting

(vendor-vendor-operator) where each vendor presents the status of his IOT activities.
Sample testing of band availability for a set of UEs
PRELIMINARY
The following figure, which represents data from June 2011, shows the results of testing
the bandwidth availability of a set of Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) 3GPP UEs. The
UE names are across the top of the figure. Here the UEs are given numbers prefaced by
MV for mobile vendor and CS for chipset vendor. The actual names of the UEs are
not given to preserve confidentiality of information. Note the large number of bands and
bandwidths that need to be supported for LTE. Note also the large number of vendors and
the variability in bands each vendor supports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Sample results of band availability testing for a set of FDD UEs
PRELIMINARY
Sample UE testing results
The following figure shows the results of functional testing of a set of FDD LTE UEs.
Again, the UEs are given numbers prefaced by MV for mobile vendor and CS for
chipset vendor. The actual names of the UEs are not given to preserve confidentiality of
information. As can be seen in the following figure, that is accurate as of June 2011,
Alcatel-Lucent works with a large set of chip set and device vendors.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-3 Sample results of interoperability testing of FDD LTE UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
7 pproaches for voice with

A
LTE
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe all the approaches currently offered in or
currently supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution for handling voice with LTE.
Requirement for SMS
Short Message Service (SMS) is essential to all LTE deployments, both data and voice.
SMS is covered in Chapter 8, SMS with LTE.
Governmental requirements
All approaches to voice with LTE in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully
meet government-mandated requirements for mandatory services. Government-mandated
services are explained in Chapter 12, Government-mandated services.
Contents
7-3
Voice with LTE defined
7-3
7-3
The CSFB approach
7-5
About CSFB
7-5
How it works
7-6
Benefits
7-6
Limitations
7-7
Network and UE impacts
7-8
7-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VoLTE approach
7-9
About VoLTE
7-9
How it works
7-10
Use of IMS network elements
7-11
Use of common core network elements
7-15
7-16
7-16
The SVLTE approach
7-17
7-17
How it works
7-18
Benefits
7-18
Limitations
7-19
7-19
7-20
The SR-VCC approach
7-21
Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC)
7-21
7-22
7-22
Migration
7-24
Considerations
7-24
Migration path
7-25
7-27
Summary of approaches
7-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

This section gives general information about voice with LTE.

Contents
7-3
7-3

What is Voice with LTE?
As used with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, Voice with LTE refers to any
of several approaches or methods used to enable voice communications within LTE
networks or to provide voice communications as an adjunct to LTE networks.
Note: The term Voice with LTE is often confused with the term VoLTE. VoLTE
stands for Voice over IMS over LTE. VoLTE is one of the approaches used in LTE
networks to provide Voice with LTE.

Introduction
This topic lists all possible approaches for voice with LTE and explains which approaches
are currently implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two in-network approaches
Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB)

Voice over IMS
Each of these approaches is described in this chapter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports the following two in-network
approaches for providing voice with LTE:
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One in-handset approach
Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) is a UE-based third approach that works with the
SVLTE is also described in this chapter.
Additional approaches to be supported in the future
The following additional approaches will be supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE

End-to-End Solution in the future:
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) - a feature that provides advanced
handoff capabilities when handing off IMS-based voice calls to GSM, W-CDMA and
3G1x networks
Service Centralization using IMS Centralized Services (ICS) - a feature that is added
to an IMS based voice solution to supply a consistent and possibly personalized
service delivery environment across radio access technologies.
Unsupported approaches
PRELIMINARY
Other approaches to voice with LTE exist. These non-standards based approaches are not
supported in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution but are mentioned here for the
sake of completeness.
VoLGA - The Voice over LTE using Generic Access (VoLGA) approach transports
circuit-switched (CS) voice transparently through the LTE packet infrastructure,
leveraging the existing Iu or A interface to 2G or 3G MSCs using an interworking
function, the VoLGA Access Network Controller (VANC). VoLGA is a solution used
by a small set of service providers in a small fraction of the market. VoLGA is not
standardized by the 3GPP/3GPP2 standards body; VoLGA standards are published by
the VoLGA Forum.
Use of a SIP UE with proprietary enhancements to the MSC - The Nokia Siemens
(NSN) Fast Track VoLTE is an example of this approach. This approach enhances
an existing MSC with a SIP Gm interface. This approach has not caught on widely
and is currently used by a small set of service providers in a small fraction of the
market.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The CSFB approach

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

The CSFB approach
The information in this section describes the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) approach
for handling of voice within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About CSFB
7-5
How it works
7-6
Benefits
7-6
Limitations
7-7
7-8
7-8
About CSFB
What is CSFB?
Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is an approach where voice coverage is supplied by a

legacy circuit-switched network that has the same geographic coverage area as the LTE
network. To originate or receive a voice call using the CSFB approach, the UE falls
back or drops back from LTE to the legacy network and stays on the legacy network
until the completion of the voice call.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The CSFB approach
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic briefly describes how voice calls are handled in the LTE network using the
CSFB approach.
Assumptions
The assumption for this scenario is that the LTE network has a dedicated signalling
interface from the MME to the target MSC supporting the same coverage area as the
current LTE cell site.
Both networks register the UE
During the time that a CSFB UE is attached to the LTE network, the CSFB UE registers
with two networks: the LTE network and a legacy network in the same geographic area.
Both register the UE. This is achieved using a dedicated signalling interface between
MME and target MSC with the MME informing the MSC of UE attach, detach and
location area updates.
One network controls the UE
While the UE is active on the LTE network, as specified in this scenario, the UE is under
the control of the LTE network. The legacy network is merely aware of the UE's presence.
Control of the UE is passed to the legacy network during the voice call and returned to
the LTE network when the call is completed.
Benefits
Introduction
The benefits of the CSFB approach are explained in this topic.

Reuse of existing equipment
PRELIMINARY
The major benefit of the CSFB approach is the re-use of the legacy network
infrastructure. Operators can deploy LTE for data-only service and re-use the legacy
network for voice.
Basic service
The CSFB approach gives the service provider basic, transparent voice service to LTE
handsets in networks with parallel coverage by a legacy mobile network adapted to
support CSFB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Benefits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Does not require IMS
The CSFB approach has the benefit of not requiring IMS in the network. Thus the CSFB
approach can be used:
In cases where the operator wishes to delay Voice over IMS deployment
With voice handsets in cases where LTE is deployed in advance of IMS
With LTE roamers whose home network is not IMS capable
If the IMS client is not loaded in the UE
PRELIMINARY

The CSFB approach
Can be priced as an inexpensive alternative
The CSFB approach can be offered to provide basic voice service as an inexpensive
alternative in networks where IMS voice is available as a premium service.
Provides a service that will always be in demand
For the foreseeable future, CSFB will always be needed. CSFB will be needed for a long
time and perhaps forever, to support roamers and to support non IMS-capable UEs.
Limitations
Loss of data session
For UMTS service providers and for GSM service providers the problem with CSFB is
that when the call falls back to circuit for voice, the data session is suspended.
Slowing down of data session
Even in cases where the legacy network continues the data session, the data session
operates at a probable reduced capacity and speed.
Increases call setup delay
The CSFB approach causes a delay in call setup that can be noticeable to the user,
especially for calls from LTE to GSM.
Increased load on the network
CSFB places an increased load on the signalling component of a network because of the
extra signaling required in passing calls over to the other network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
However, from LE4.0, the support of enhanced redirection to UTRAN and GERAN, PS
handover enhancement to UTRAN for CS fallback, and the configurable fallback method
precedence reduces the CSFB call set up time and improves the fallback call successful
rate when the handover target is overloaded.
PRELIMINARY

The CSFB approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required interface
The CSFB approach requires that support of the dedicated signalling interface (SGs for
GSM/UMTS networks and S102 for 3G1X networks) be added on the MME towards all
likely target MSCs in the legacy network ( SGs for 3GPP networks and S102 for 3GPP2
networks).
Network impact
All MSC serving zones with LTE coverage need to be upgraded to support CSFB
functionality and dedicated signalling interface towards the MME. There will be
additional load on the network as the result of UE movement back and forth from LTE to
legacy every time a voice call occurs. The load will consist of extra signalling traffic on
both LTE/EPC and legacy networks. Alcatel-Lucent Services can help the service
provider perform modeling to anticipate and design for the additional load on the
network.
UE impacts
The UE for CSFB must be dual-mode, that is, capable of communicating both with LTE
and with a legacy network.
In addition, the CSFB client must be loaded onto the UE.
CSFB GSM/UMTS networks
CSFB is implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution for GSM and
UMTS networks.
Future implementation
PRELIMINARY
CSFB for Third Generation 1.25 MHZ carrier Code Division Multiple Access (3G1x
CDMA) networks will be supported in a future release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VoLTE approach

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
The information in this section describes the VoLTE approach as used in the
Contents
About VoLTE
7-9
How it works
7-10
7-11
7-15
7-16
7-16
About VoLTE
VoLTE defined
VoLTE stands for Voice over LTE.

Voice over IMS over LTE refers to the option of providing voice service on the LTE
network through the use of IMS.
More than just data service
Voice over LTE (VoLTE) does handle voice as packetized data, but in addition VoLTE
adds performance standards and quality of service considerations, to reach
high-performance voice channel delivery standards.
What is IMS?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a powerful architectural framework, designed by the

3GPP standards body, that is a platform for delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based
multimedia Internet-like services to end-users. The IMS platform provides a common
set of functions and procedures for session control, bearer control, policy, and charging.
When these functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled.
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
About VoLTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on IMS, see About IMS (p. 21-4).

Most widely accepted
VoLTE is the most widely accepted approach for voice with LTE.
Sensitive to delay and jitter
VoIP being a real-time application has stringent requirements of low latency (delay) and
jitter (variability of delay). Factors that affect the total end-to end bearer delay are the
encoding and packetizing delays at the source, network delays, and buffering,
de-packetizing and decoding delays at the destination endpoint. In order to provide
acceptable delay, jitter, and packet loss for VoIP calls, end to end quality of service (QoS)
support is essential.
Therefore the Solution introduces new QoS controls to manage delay and jitter in VoLTE.
How it works
Summary
Voice over IMS is a specific implementation of a VoIP (Voice over IP) service with the
control and voice traffic streams carried as a pure data call within the LTE and EPC
network. The LTE handset starts the voice call as an LTE call using SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol) messages to establish the VoLTE session. The IMS client in the
communicating UEs codes the voice call and sends the voice call packets through the
LTE network just like other data packets. The call goes through the network as a data call
and is decoded by the LTE handset on the other end back into a voice call.
Can coexist with CSFB
The Voice Over IMS approach can co-exist with the CSFB approach in the same
operator's network, with IMS-based services taking precedence over the CSFB option if
both features are available in both UE and network.
PRELIMINARY
Enhancements needed for VoLTE
The full implementation of VoLTE in the Solution requires several major enhancements.
The first two of these enhancements are provided. The remaining enhancements will be
provided in a future release.
The LTE eUTRAN and EPC has been enhanced for VoIP delivery.
An IMS core has been added to provide IMS support, and a Telephony Application
Server (TAS) is used to provide end-user services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) will be used to provide handover
capabilities for voice calls to GSM/UMTS and 3G1x networks.
Note that SR-VCC will require enhancements to both LTE/EPC, legacy mobile
networks and will require addition of specific IMS functional entities. This feature
will be provided in a future release of the Solution.
Service Centralization using IMS Centralized Services (ICS) will be provided to
supply a consistent and possibly personalized service delivery environment across
radio access technologies.
Note that ICS may require enhancements to legacy mobile network and will require
addition of specific IMS functional entities. This feature will be provided in a future
release of the Solution.
PS handover of Voice over IMS towards UMTS and EVDO networks - Note that PS
handover of calls requires enhancements to the legacy mobile networks. This feature
will be provided in a future release of the Solution.
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach

New IMS functional entities to support voice calls
VoLTE adds new IMS network elements to the Solution to perform voice-related
functions, and changes some existing IMS functional entities. The following table lists the
IMS network elements used for VoLTE.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1
This IMS functional

entity
performs this VoLTE

function
using this Alcatel-Lucent

network element
For more
information,
see...
Proxy CSCF
(P-CSCF)
Session management.
5450 IP Session Controller

(ISC)
5450 ISC
(P/S/I-CSCF)
(p. 21-26)
Interrogating CSCF
(I-CSCF)
The Proxy Call Session Control

Function (P-CSCF) is a SIP
server that controls allocated
bearers within the visited
network and generates charging
records.
See especially,
Providing
Call Session
Control
Function
(CSCF)
functions
(p. 21-27)
Session management
The Interrogating Call Session
Control Function (I-CSCF) is a
SIP server that acts as the entry
point for all connections related
to a user
PRELIMINARY
NOTE: This function is

optional. All other functions are
required.
Serving CSCF
(S-CSCF)
Session management
Breakout Gateway
Control Function
(BGCF)
The Breakout Gateway Control

Function (BGCF) is a required
network element that selects the
appropriate MGCF in which
PSTN/PLMN breakout is to
occur based on the destination
and/or origination of the call.
Telephony Application
Server (TAS)
The Telephony Application

Server (TAS) is an application
server that hosts specified
telephony-related applications.
The Serving Call Session

Control Function (S-CSCF) is a
SIP server that gives the user
access to the Application
Servers.
5420 CTS
5420 CTS
(p. 21-23)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1
(continued)
This IMS functional

entity
performs this VoLTE

function

network element
For more
information,
see...
Media Gateway
Control Function
(MGCF)
The Media Gateway Control

Function (MGCF) MGCF
provides the signaling
interworking functions between
the IMS and the Public
Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) and CS services on the
Public Land Mobile Network
(PLMN) networks.
5060 MGC-8
5060
MGC-8
(p. 21-9)
Media Gateway
(MGW)
The Media Gateway (MGW)

provides connectivity to the
PSTN and CS services of
PLMN.
7510 MGW
7510 MGW
(p. 21-33)
MRF
The MRF provides media

resource function to support
functions such as
announcements and
conferencing capabilities.
5900 MRF
5900 MRF
(p. 21-30)
DNS/ENUM
The DNS/ENUM server is used

to resolve IP addresses and
E.164 addresses.
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
VitalQIP
ENUM/DNS
(p. 20-19)
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
Note that this function could be

shared in small-use settings with
the DNS function already in the
LTE network but a dedicated
DNS/ENUM will be required to
support any significant
deployment.
Note: Some of the material in this table is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS)
The LTE and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS-related network elements in the Solution
The following figure shows how the VoLTE network elements that host IMS functional
entities fit into the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and the primary interfaces
with other components of the LTE network. The IMS-related network elements that
support VoLTE are shown in the red circle.
Figure 7-1 IMS-related network elements that support VoLTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reuse of existing network elements
The VoLTE approach, in addition to adding some new network elements, reuses some
existing network elements that are already being used by LTE. These network elements
do not change for VoLTE and thus are presented separately from those listed in Table 7-1,
IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE (p. 7-12)
Table 7-2
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
Previously-existing functional entities and network elements used by

LTE and by VoLTE
This
functional
entity
performs this function

network element
For more information on

this network element and
its role, see
Home
Subscriber
System (HSS)
subscriber data
8650 SDM HSS
8650 SDM HSS (p. 20-13)
Offline charging
function
offline charging
8615 Instant Enhanced

Charging Collection
Function (IeCCF) for Offline
Charging Systems (OFCS)
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)

(p. 20-10)
Online charging
function
online charging
8610 ICC
8610 ICC (OCS) (p. 20-7)
Lawful Intercept
Gateway
mediation requests for

lawful interception
1357 LIG
1357 LIG (p. 20-3)
Interception
Management
Center
administrative requests
for lawful interception
and OA&M
1357 IMC
1357 IMC (p. 22-16)
8650 Subscriber Data

Manager (SDM) Home
Subscriber Server (HSS)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network impacts
Network impacts include the following:
In LE4.0:
8650 SDM enhanced to support IMS service data
1357 LIG LI enhanced to support interception of VoLTE calls
8615 IeCCF and 8610 ICC enhanced to support VoLTE charging
5780 DSC (PCRF) enhanced to support VoLTE specific QoS policies
In a future release:
9321 eNodeB, 9351 MME and serving MSCs enhanced and the SCG added to
IMS system to support SRVCC
Target MSC and the SCG enhanced to support ICS

UTRAN or EV-DO and SGSN or HSGW enhanced to support PS handover and
potential SRVCC from 3G packet access towards CS legacy access
UE impacts
An IMS client must be loaded onto the UE.

Also, the UE must be IMS-compatible, that is, must be compliant to GSMA IR.92 version
3 or above
Trials
From LE3.0 onwards, VoLTE is implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End

Solution with limited trial capabilities.
More functionality in future releases
PRELIMINARY
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, IMS Centralized Service (ICS), and PS handover of
VoLTE to 3G packet access will be added in future releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SVLTE approach

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

The SVLTE approach
The information in this section describes the SVLTE approach for handling of voice with
Contents
7-17
How it works
7-18
Benefits
7-18
Limitations
7-19
7-19
7-20

What is SVLTE?
Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) is an approach that provides Two phones in one.
In other words, each SVLTE UE has two complete logical UEs within a common device
sharing a common user interfaces and, in certain configurations, common RF
components. From within the SVLTE UE, one of the embedded UEs communicates with
the legacy network. Also from within the UE, the other embedded UE communicates with
the LTE network.
Provides simultaneous voice and data
Since each SVLTE UE has two UEs within it, an SVLTE UE can provide simultaneous
voice (through a circuit switched legacy network) and LTE data (through an LTE
network) and optionally using packet services over legacy mobile access.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The SVLTE approach
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Simultaneous registration
An SVLTE UE maintains simultaneous registration on the legacy network for voice and
the LTE network for data.
Fall back to legacy access required
With an SVLTE UE there is no handoff or fall back to place or receive a voice call. The
legacy network sets up and manages the voice call in the same way the legacy network
sets up and manages other voice calls. The LTE network has no knowledge of the voice
call.
No communication between two networks
With an SVLTE UE the legacy network manages the voice call and the LTE network
manages the data call. The two networks do not communicate with each other at all about
the calls.
Benefits
Provides simultaneous voice and data
The chief benefit of the SVLTE approach is that it provides simultaneous voice and data
using legacy networks for the voice traffic while maintaining data services on LTE access.
Attractive to 3GPP2 service providers
The SVLTE approach is attractive to 3GPP2 service providers as an alternative to CSFB.

CSFB works well for 3GPP service providers because simultaneous voice and data
services for UMTS service providers are available over legacy access, at least in regions
providing UMTS or GSM with DTM coverage. For 3GPP2 service providers, however,
CSFB suspends data connectivity in order to complete the voice call over the 3G1X
access network.
PRELIMINARY
Most 3GPP2 service providers regard SVLTE an interim approach, to be used instead of
CSFB, until Voice over IMS over LTE (VoLTE) is widely available.
No network impact
The SVLTE approach has no impact on the network. In other words, no special
configuration or special equipment is required in the network to make the SVLTE
approach work.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Limitations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Limitations
Negative impacts on the UE
Though the SVLTE approach has no network impact, the SVLTE approach has significant
impacts on the UE. The fact that SVLTE UEs contain two separate UEs (that is, two
separate phones), causes the following negative impacts:
Higher cost
Increased power drain

A need to charge the battery more often
A more complex UE
A larger UE
PRELIMINARY

The SVLTE approach
Viewed as a short-term approach
The SVLTE option is often viewed as a short-term approach, because of the battery drain
and other limitations of this option. In the future, after VoLTE is widely available, many
service providers will probably switch from the SVLTE approach to the VoLTE approach.

No network impacts
The SVLTE approach has no network impacts. All the work is done in the UE.
UE impacts
SVLTE requires a special UE that contains two complete logical UEs, one for the legacy
network and one for LTE. For more on the impacts of SVLTE on the UE, see Negative
impacts on the UE (p. 7-19).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

The SVLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Works with the Solution
The SVLTE approach has been tested with and works with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Note, however, that the SVLTE approach is independent of the
network and thus cannot be monitored using the OA&M products that are part of the
Dependent upon UEs
The SVLTE approach is dependent upon the availability of SVLTE UEs.
PRELIMINARY
Note: It is recommended that SVLTE UEs are also capable of SVDO (parallel use of
3G1X and EV-DO access) to provide a similar end user service experience while
operating outside regions with LTE coverage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SR-VCC approach

A future capability
PRELIMINARY

The SR-VCC approach
The Single Radio Voice Call Continuity feature will be used to provide session continuity
for handoffs of voice calls to GSM/UMTS and 3G1X networks for voice calls. SR-VCC
will be supported in a future release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
An additional benefit of the 3GPP IMS standard is its definition of standards for
providing IMS Centralized Service (ICS) feature to the end user while using CS (Circuit
Switched) voice bearers over legacy mobile access (GSM/UMTS or 3G1X). ICS will
enable service providers to provide IMS-provided rich services to the end user
independent of their location and availability of LTE access.
What is IMS Centralized Service?
IMS Centralized Service (ICS) is the power for the IMS at the home network to control
the call for the life of the call, even if the user roams to a non-LTE network. IMS
Centralized Service will be offered in a future release of the Solution.
What are IMS-provided rich services?
IMS-provided rich services are voice services that are not available to end users in
traditional cellular networks. In traditional cellular networks the set of services that an
end user can get is fixed. The reason the set of services is fixed is so that roaming will
work, as an end user travels from one service provider's network to another.
How it works
In traditional legacy networks, control of the call is passed from network to network as
the end user travels from one geographic region to another.
PRELIMINARY
However, with VoLTE, the IMS on the home network always sets up and maintains
control of the call for the entire length of the call. So when a user roams to a different
network, the IMS on the home network still controls the call. Also, when the user
originates a call from outside the home network, no matter where the user is
geographically located, the IMS on the home network still sets up and maintains control
of the complete call. Therefore, VoLTE can provide additional services to voice users
because the IMS on the home network always manages the call, even if the end user is
halfway around the world from his or her home network.
New services can be invented
The IMS power within VoLTE gives service providers an opportunity of inventing and
providing to their users new voice services. Thus VoLTE can be used to provide
differentiated services to users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In a future release
IMS-supported rich services will be supported in a future release of the Solution, when
IMS Centralized Service is supported.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

Migration
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Migration
Overview
Purpose
This section presents information on the migration path to follow when introducing voice
with LTE.
Contents
Considerations
7-24
Migration path
7-25
Considerations
CSFB will be needed for a long time
CSFB will be needed for at least the next ten years and possibly for always, to support
roamers and to support LTE users who do not have IMS-capable handsets.
SVLTE provides simultaneous voice and data
SVLTE provides simultaneous voice and data. Therefore SVLTE is an alternative that
works better than CSFB for most 3GPP2 networks.
CSFB can coexist with IMS
CSFB can co-exist with IMS-based services in the same operator's network, with
IMS-based services taking precedence over the CSFB option.
Typical deployments
PRELIMINARY
Most service providers are choosing to deploy LTE networks first, and planning to deploy
IMS later, after the LTE networks are in place and working.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Migration path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Migration path
Introduction
This topic describes the necessary migration path for service providers to follow, based on
the considerations outlined in Considerations (p. 7-24).
PRELIMINARY

Migration
CSFB first
Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is the approach that service providers will be adding
first. As stated previously, CSFB will be needed for at least the next ten years and
possibly for always, for the following reasons.
VoLTE technology may never be used by all networks everywhere, so CSFB will be
needed to support roaming to and from other service providers' 2G and 3G networks.
Not all end users will have UEs that support VoLTE. CSFB will be needed to support
UEs that are not compatible with VoLTE, including delivery of SMS to wireless data
cards for device management procedures. For information on SMS within the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 8, SMS with LTE.
It will be necessary for most service providers to keep some capability for CSFB in
their networks, to communicate with UEs from with other service providers who may
never move beyond CSFB.
3GPP2 operators will add SVLTE
Because SVLTE provides 3GPP2 legacy networks the chance of providing simultaneous
voice and data to their end users while still using the legacy network equipment, most
3GPP2 service providers will add at least some SVLTE coverage in their networks.
Note: 3GPP2 operators who add SVLTE to their networks will still need to provide
CSFB to support roaming to and from other service providers' networks.
Move to VoLTE
Service providers will gradually move to VoLTE as the following conditions occur:
VoLTE UEs become widely available

service providers move more and more of their traffic to LTE networks and can
gradually phase out their legacy networks
Need to maintain CSFB support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Service providers will continue to support CSFB for the foreseeable future, for the
reasons outlined in CSFB first (p. 7-25).
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Migration
Migration path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Greenfield may start with VoLTE
The one exception to this migration path is greenfield networks. Service providers
starting up greenfield networks in the future may choose to start with VoLTE if VoLTE
UEs are available at that time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparison table
PRELIMINARY

The following table compares and contrasts the approaches for voice with LTE offered by
Table 7-3
Approach
Description
Advantages
Limitations
Availability in
the Solution
CS Fallback
(CSFB)
UE is registered in
LTE and is paged
over LTE but takes
call in CS (GSM,
UMTS, or 1x).
Reuses the
legacy
2G/3G
infrastructure.
For CDMA 3G1x networks,

there is no way to do data at
the same time as voice.
UMTS, GSM (and

3G1x in the future),
For GSM networks, DTM is

required to do data at the
same time as voice.
For UMTS networks, a
separate data session will be
maintained, but at a slower
rate of transmission than with
LTE.
Voice over IMS

(VoLTE)
Provides voice
service on the LTE
network through
the use of IMS.
Provides
opportunity
for enriched
voice
services and
other new
services.
Trial version
available in 3.0.
VoLTE is not suitable without

SRVCC in regions with a high
likelihood of handover
towards legacy access that are
not upgraded to support VoIP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Provides
all-IP call
with no need
to fall back
to the legacy
infrastructure.
VoLTE can not be used while

roaming onto LTE networks
not upgraded to support VoIP.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-3

(continued)
Approach
Description
Advantages
Limitations
Availability in
the Solution
Simultaneous
Voice and LTE
(SVLTE)
Two phones in
one to re-use
legacy voice
capabilities while
offering
simultaneous LTE
for data.
A way for
3GPP2
service
providers to
provide
simultaneous
voice and
data sessions
to the UE.
UE has greater complexity

and shorter battery life.
Supported with the

Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End
Solution in 3.0.
Depends upon
availability of
handsets.
UE maintains
simultaneous
registration on
LTE network for
data and legacy
network for voice.
UE manages the
voice call (the
Solution does not).
PRELIMINARY
This solution is independent

of the network and thus
cannot be monitored using
Solution OA&M products.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE

8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the different ways Short Message Service (SMS) is supported
within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About SMS
8-1
The need for SMS
8-3
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution
8-3
8-4
SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS)
8-6
About SMS
SMS defined
Short Message Service (SMS) is the text communication component of phone, web or
mobile communication systems. SMS uses standardized communications protocols that
allow the exchange of short text messages between UEs (handsets), including the
exchange of messages between wireless and wireline phone devices.
Limitation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The major limitation with SMS messages is a length restriction of 160 characters. The
length restriction is a historical requirement that was based on the longest signaling
message allowed by signaling protocols. Even today, however, most providers limit text
messages to around 200 characters or less.
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE
About SMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
With SMS, a user types a short message, usually on a simulated keyboard on a UE, SMS
messages can also be sent, however, from a PC to a UE; in that case, the user would type
the message using a real keyboard. After the user finishes typing the message, the user
sends the message. The network then transmits that short message to a Short Message
Service Center (SMSC). The SMSC takes that set of keystroke data and attempts to send
that data to the designated recipient. Usually the designated recipient is a UE, although,
the recipient can also be a PC or an email account. If the information cannot be
transmitted at that time, the SMSC will wait and try to transmit the information later.
No guaranteed transmission
There are no guarantees that the SMS message will get through, although most SMS
messages do get through.
Note: Indeed, because a network tries repeatedly to transfer an SMS message, in cases
of an overloaded network, an SMS message is more likely to get through than a voice
message. That is because the network only tries once to set up a voice communication
path.
Not a dedicated circuit
Another difference between an SMS message and a voice call is that SMS does not set up
a real time dedicated connection between the sender and receiver that stays up from the
time the message it sent to the time it is received. However, as explained in the next
paragraph, most SMS messages are sent over circuit connections.
Transmitted over circuit connections
PRELIMINARY
In all wireline networks, SMS messages are sent over a circuit connection. Therefore
traditional SMS is a actually circuit-based application, even though SMS information is
always made up of short bursts of data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
The need for SMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The need for SMS

SMS support is required
Support of an SMS solution is required in all networks, including LTE networks, from the
very first day the network is set up.
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE
Use of SMS by end users
SMS is the basis of text messaging and thus is deployed in all wireless networks today to
support the widespread use of text messaging by end users. SMS text messaging is one of
the most widely used data applications in the world today.
SMS as used by service providers
SMS is also critically needed by service providers.

Service providers use SMS to perform the following tasks:
performing over-the-air activation of a new UE

sending configuration data to a UE
sending network and software updates to UEs
Using voice servers to provide recorded announcements to UEs
SMS required for some dual configurations
SMS is also used in some scenarios to notify a dual-mode 3G/LTE UE that is using one
mode that there is incoming information on or a need to support the other mode.
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution

Introduction
Two ways to deliver SMS are available for use in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution:
SMS over the SGs interface - a circuit-based approach

SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS) - an IP packet-based approach
Each of these ways of delivering SMS is explained in this chapter.
No, the SMS application is unchanged when used in an LTE environment. The only thing
that changes is how to deliver and originate circuit-based SMS data in the IP packet-based
world of LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Does SMS differ when used in an LTE environment?
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is SMS over the SGs/S102 interface?
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface is a method of delivering SMS data between a legacy
network and an LTE network using one of the following standard interfaces:
SGs interface (between LTE and 3GPP networks)

S102 interface (between LTE and 3GPP2 networks)
It is assumed here that the legacy network and the LTE network are co-located in the
same geographic area.
What is the SGs interface?
The SGs interface is an interface that extends between the LTE MME and a 3GPP
network's Visitor Location Register (VLR) at the MSC of the 3GPP network. In the SGs
interface, Non-Access Stratum (NAS) procedures are used to translate circuit-based SMS
messages from the legacy network into the equivalent packet-based SMS messages for
the LTE network and vice versa.
The SGs interface is similar to the Gs interface. The Gs interface is used between
WCDMA and legacy networks for transmission of SMS messages between WCDMA
networks and CDMA networks.
What is the S102 interface?
The S102 interface is just like the SGs interface except that the S102 interface is used
between LTE Networks and 3GPP2 networks. Just as with the SGs interface, the existing
S102 interface is used for carrying SMS information between the circuit-based 3GPP2
MSC and the packet-based MME.
What about SMS between two LTE UEs?
SMS between two LTE UEs is supported.

What route would an all-LTE SMS take?
SMS messages between two LTE UEs would probably still go through a legacy network
for two reasons:
PRELIMINARY
At present most Short Message Service Centers (SMSCs) are based in legacy
networks. Therefore the SMS from the first UE would have to pass through an SGs or
S102 interface to reach the SMSC.
IMS-based SMS is not yet widely used. When sending the SMS to the second LTE
UE the SMSC would not know whether the network the second UE was in supported
IMS_based SMS. Therefore, the SMSC would send the SMS using traditional S102 or
SGs method to make sure that the message can be transmitted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CSFB not needed
The SMS over SGs/S102 method of sending SMS messages does not require fall back
to the 2G or 3G network to send or receive SMS messages. Thus the SMS over
SGs/S102 method can be deployed without deploying CSFB.
In other words, no handover is required from an LTE network in order for the LTE UE to
send or receive SMS data.
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE
Useful for data-only networks
Because the SMS over SGs/S102 method does not require CSFB, the SMS over
SGs/S102 method can be used in an LTE data-only network to provide SMS coverage
for LTE UEs.
Can be used with any LTE network
The SMS over the SGs/S102 method is used with all types of LTE networks, both with
data-only LTE networks and with LTE networks that support both data and voice.
Impact on the legacy network
At least one MSC in the legacy network must be equipped, through a software upgrade, to
use the SGs or S102 interface.
When to equip one MSC
If the legacy network is communicating with an LTE data-only network, and thus only
sending SMS traffic to the LTE data-only network, only one MSC needs to be equipped.
All SMS traffic from the LTE data-only network can be routed through the single
equipped MSC.
When to equip all the MSCs
If CSFB is set up between the legacy network and the LTE network, then all the MSCs in
the legacy network are already set up with the SGs or S102 interface. So you do not need
to do any additional work to support SMS, is CSFB is already set up.
Note: Remember that CSFB is not required to support the SGs/S102 interface
method. Communication over the SGs/S102 interface does not fall back to voice
circuitry as voice calls do.
The SGs interface is defined in the 3GPP TS 29.118 standard. SMS over SGs and over
S102 is defined in the 3GPP TS 23.272.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
SMS with LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SMS over IP
SMS over IP is all-IP packet-based SMS that is hosted by IMS. SMS over IP does not
need to go through circuit-based transformation, unless the UE on the other end of the
SMS session is currently hosted by a legacy network.
What is IMS?

multimedia Internet-like services to end-users.
IMS is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to enable and run a variety of
IP-based applications, such as Short Message Services (SMS) and Voice over IP (VoIP).
For more on IMS, see Chapter 21, Network elements used for IMS.
PRELIMINARY
From LE3.0 onwards, IMS-based SMS over IP is available for some configurations of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. For more information on this, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the Cell Broadcast services offered in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution to support the Public Warning System (CMAS designed for
US Market) in Release LE4.0.
Contents
9-2
9-2
What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS)
9-3
How it works
9-3
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture
9-3
LTE Network requirements
9-5
9-6
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Public Warning System supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution in the Release LE4.0
Contents
9-2
9-3
How it works
9-3
9-3
9-5
9-6

Public Warning System
PRELIMINARY
The Public Warning System (PWS) service defines the requirements for a Warning
Notification delivery to be transmitted to a large numbers of subscribers via their UEs.
The PWS is a generalization of Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commercial Mobile Alert System
The Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) application, specific to the US market,
related to regulatory compliance, is a text-based Public Warning System that delivers
Warning Notifications provided by Warning Notification Providers to CMAS capable
PWS-UEs. CMAS defines three different classes of Warning Notifications (Presidential,
Imminent Threat and Amber Alerts).
PRELIMINARY

The Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End Solution supports the CMAS application in Release

LE4.0.
How it works
Characteristics
The CMAS service has the following characteristics:
CMAS is a best effort service

Existing calls should not be preempted due to the processing of CMAS Warning
Notifications
3 categories of Warning Notifications are defined: Presidential, Imminent Threat and
Amber Alerts. Presidential alerts must be transmitted and received. Subscribers may
opt-out of other categories of alerts
Alerts are made of text with a maximum of 90 English characters
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMAS architecture
The following figure shows the CMAS Architecture. The radio access technology used by
the Commercial Mobile Service Provider (CMSP) can be CDMA, GSM, UMTS or LTE.
Figure 9-1 Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMAS implementation in LTE
The following figure shows the functional architecture within the LTE network.
Figure 9-2 CMAS implementation in LTE
PRELIMINARY

In the Alcatel-Lucent End-To-End Solution, the 5140 Broadcast Message Center (BMC)
supports the two functional entities: the Commercial Mobile Service Provider (CMSP)
Gateway and the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC).

Requirements
The LTE network is required to support the delivery of CMAS Warning Notifications as
follows:
Warning Notifications are broadcast to multiple users simultaneously with no
acknowledgment required
Support for concurrent broadcast of multiple Warning Notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning Notifications are broadcast to a Notification Area based on the geographical

information specified by the Warning Notification Provider (via the Federal Alert
Gateway in CMAS)
Only Warning Notifications originated from an authenticated authorized source are

broadcast.

Required interface
The CMAS application requires that support of the dedicated signaling interfaced SBc to
be added on MME, while S1-MME/S1-AP is to be enhanced to support CMAS specific
message transfer between the MME and the eNodeB.
Network impacts
Network impacts include the following, in LE4.0:
5140 BMC introduction to support the CMSP Gateway function and the CBC
function. The CMSP gateway is responsible to interface to the Federal Alert Gateway.
The CBC is responsible to determine the impacted network elements for CMAS alerts
and managed the transmission and retransmission of the alerts.
9471 MME enhanced to support the selection of the appropriate eNodeBs based on
the information provided by the CBC for the distribution of the CMAS alerts and the
forward of these messages to the selected eNodeBs.
9412 eNodeB enhanced to support the RRC paging to Alert CMAS-capable UEs of
the presence of CMAS notification broadcast in the eUTRAN. The CMAS
notifications are delivered in System Information messages (in the Block SIB 12).
UE impacts
PRELIMINARY
UEs are required to support text display, distinct vibration cadence and audio attention
signals, as means of distributing the CMAS alert messages to the CMSPs (Commercial
Mobile Service Provider) subscribers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
10
10
Approaches
for video on
LTE
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the approaches offered in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE Solution for handling video over LTE.
Contents
10-2
Basic definitions
10-2
10-4
Standards for video over LTE
10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service
10-6
10-7
10-7
Current capabilities
10-8
10-11
SVLTE UEs
10-12
10-13
Use of IMS core
10-14
How it works
10-16
Limitations
10-17
10-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Video Communications Service architecture
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section gives general information about video over LTE.

Contents
Basic definitions
10-2
10-4
10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service
10-6
Basic definitions
Introduction
This topic presents basic definitions of terms used in this chapter.

Note: Some material in this topic is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS) The
LTE and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
Broadcast video
Broadcast video is unidirectional video that is sent to many users at once. Broadcast video
may be received by any user in the coverage area who has the service enabled on his or
her UE.
PRELIMINARY
Multicast video
Multicast video, like broadcast video, is unidirectional video that is sent to many users at
once. However, unlike broadcast video, multicast video may only be received by
members of a multicast group who have subscribed to the service and who have joined
the multicast group associated with the particular video session. Because it is subject to
subscription, multicast video allows the service provider to set specific user charging
rules for this service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Basic definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conversational video
Conversational video is video that offers two-way audio and video conversation between
two participants or between a small group of participants.
Conversational video compared to broadcast and multicast video
The major difference between conversational video and broadcast and multicast video is
that conversational video always has the capacity for two-way audio and video
conversation among the participants. Broadcast and multicast video, on the other hand,
are always unidirectional (one-directional).
PRELIMINARY

Conversational video can be changed to one-way
At the user's choice, at any particular time, the video and audio component of
conversational video can by muted. However, this muting is not a limitation of the service
but rather a user's choice as to how to use the service. Muting and un-muting of video and
audio during a conversational video call can be performed at will by the user. However,
the inherent capacity for two-way audio and two-way video remains in the conversational
video call.
A video call with all users sending audio and video is often referred to as "I See You, You
See Me" while a call with all but one user muted can be referred to as "I see what you
see".
Client
A client is a software application running on a UE that enables the UE to access a remote

service. For example, the Video Communications Service client enables the UE to be able
to use Video Communications Service.
Enhanced Address Book
An Enhanced Address Book (EAB) is an application on the user's device that contains
typical subscriber information that would be in an ordinary address book application but
also includes additional Presence information, such as whether a contact in the address
book is in LTE coverage and can answer a video call. This information is conveyed to the
user via a Presence Server. An EAB feature is built into Video Communications Service.
A Video Communications Service subscriber can see this additional contextual
information of other subscribers if the other subscribers have the EAB feature and have
allowed the Video Communications Service subscriber to see this information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Note: While not a requirement, the EAB application is strongly recommended to

increase user satisfaction with the Video Communications Service.
PRELIMINARY

Basic definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional entity
In this book, the term functional entity is defined as a logical entity defined by LTE
designers for the LTE network, such as the eNodeB or the MME.
The new functional entities defined by the designers of LTE are logical, not physical. In
other words the LTE designers did not assign functions to specific hardware. The LTE
designers also did not specify that each functional entity had to be implemented on a
separate piece of equipment. Thus the LTE designers left the possibility open that the
work of two or more separate LTE functional entities could be performed by the same
physical network element. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution one network
element often performs the role of several functional entities.
Network element
In this book, the term network element is defined as a unique entity within a network,
comprising one or more functional entities. Each NE consists of multiple physical and
logical resources, which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The
NE and the NEs physical and logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an
element or network management system. An example of a network element would be a
single Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
Video call
A video call is a session that can support a two-way audio stream and a two-way video
stream among two or more devices. When there are more than two-devices, this is
commonly called a video conference. This session is controlled by the 5420 CTS (TAS)
in a way similar to the way sessions for voice calls are controlled. The devices could be
mobile User Equipment (UEs), personal computers (PC)s or any other device supporting
an IMS UE and capable of originating and receiving audio and video streams.

video over LTE defined
PRELIMINARY
As used with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, video over LTE refers to any
of several approaches, or methods, used to enable video communications between UEs
and other devices over LTE networks.
Note: Not all of these approaches are implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for video over LTE
Service providers need the ability to provide high-quality video over LTE for many
reasons, including the following:
To meet the ever-growing expectations of end users

To help stimulate user demand for LTE devices, build traffic on LTE networks and
create new revenue-generating opportunities for service provider
To compete with an ever-increasing proliferation of new Internet-based applications

from "Over-the-top providers"
To differentiate their services in a highly competitive market
PRELIMINARY

Requirement to minimize delay and jitter
Video over LTE, being a real-time application, has stringent requirements of low latency
(delay) and jitter (variability of delay). Factors that affect the total end-to end bearer delay
are the encoding and packetizing delays at the source, network delays, and buffering,
de-packetizing and decoding delays at the destination endpoint. In order to provide
acceptable delay, jitter, and packet loss for video over LTE calls, end to end quality of
service (QoS) support is essential.

Introduction
This topic lists standards used in the Video Communications Service approach.
What is the MMTel standard?
The 3GPP/NGN IMS Multimedia Telephony Service (MMTel) standard is a global

standard for video based on the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The standard defines a
range of converged, fixed and mobile real-time multimedia communication options that
use different media capabilities such as voice, real-time video, text, file transfer and
sharing of pictures, audio and video clips.
MMTel standards groups
The MMTel standard is a joint project between the 3GPP and ETSI/TISPAN standards
groups.
Standards for presence information are defined in the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA
RCS 1.0 standard.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Standards for presence information
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Compliance with standards
Video Communications Service complies with the MMTel standard and applicable
GSMA RCS 1.0 standards.
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment
Alcatel-Lucent is a very active participant in the 3GPP, GSMA and ETSI/TISPAN

standards groups, and our products are designed to meet these standards. Also,
Alcatel-Lucent is committed to evolve our products as the standards evolve.
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications

Service
One approach
From LE3.0 onwards, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports one
approach for video: LTE Video Communications Service, which supports point to point
video. Video Communications Service is explained in this chapter, in The Video
Communications Service approach (p. 10-7).
Future approach
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent's eMBMS is an example of a multicast video service. eMBMS will be

offered in a future release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

The information in this section describes the LTE Video Communications Service
approach for delivering video over LTE.
Contents
10-7
10-8
10-11
SVLTE UEs
10-12
10-13
Use of IMS core
10-14
How it works
10-16
Limitations
10-17
10-18

What is Video Communications Service?
Alcatel-Lucent's LTE Video Communications Service is a conversational video service

that runs on LTE networks.
Purpose
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The purpose of Video Communications Service is to provide a set of rich conversational

video communications services that leverage the increased data bandwidth and greater
total capacity provided by LTE. Video Communications Service gives service providers
the ability to provide new services and generate new revenue in the area of video
communications services.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of Video Communications Service
Video Communications Service is designed to help service providers meet all the video
communication needs previously identified in this chapter. Thus, Video Communications
Service helps service providers provide high-quality video that will help stimulate user
demand for LTE devices, build traffic on LTE networks and create new
revenue-generating opportunities for service providers. Video Communications Service
also helps service providers differentiate their services in the face of competition from
other telecommunications-based and Internet-based service providers.
Non-LTE users can participate
Video Communications Service is designed to allow non-LTE subscribers to participate in

these video services, thus offering video services to more end users.
Part of the Solution
LTE Video Communications Service Solution is part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE

Introduction
In Video Communications Service Release 1.0, the initial release of Video

Communications Service, the following three basic capabilities are supported:
Video calling
A presence-enabled Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on the client
Video Calling
PRELIMINARY
Each participant in a Video Communications Service video call sees a large image of the
far end participant and a small image of themselves. The bandwidth provided by LTE will
enable high quality video with Video Graphics Array (VGA) resolution and 30 Frames
Per Second (FPS). Lip-synch is maintained by transmitting both the audio and video
streams over the LTE IP data connection.
IMS control of LTE provides low latency that allows easy conversation between the two
parties. Supplementary services such as caller ID and call waiting are supported. Calls
will be forwarded to a voice mail system when the end user is busy, does not answer, or is
not attached to the wireless network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-1 Video calling
PRELIMINARY

Enhanced Address Book (EAB)
Video Communications Service 1.0 also includes an Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on
the client. The Enhanced Address Book (EAB) contains typical subscriber information but
is also presence-enabled. Presence-enabled address books contain additional real-time
information about where the subscriber is located and real-time information about the
present capability of the end user's contacts.
The EAB leverages the Presence Server (PS) functional entity and the XML Document
Manager (XDM) Server (XDMS) functional entity (both hosted by the 5410 PS/XDMS).
The presence server is responsible for aggregating all service capability information
published by all device and terminal clients, and distributing this information to all
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
How the EAB works
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
authorized watchers. The Shared XDMS is used to store all presence-related lists, for
example the list of subscribed contacts (which in Video Communications Service is called
the Video Communications Service buddy list) and the presence authorization lists.
The Video Communications Service clients operate on lists that are stored in the Shared
XDMS. The subscribed contacts who have authorized the end user to receive their
presence information are listed in the EAB and are available on the Video
Communications Service client.
Information in the EAB
Each Video Communications Service subscriber has the ability to do the following in his
or her EAB:
Select participants and initiate a video call or video share from the EAB
Manage (create/edit/delete) contacts in the EAB
Manage social presence indicators in the EAB, such as mood, status message (free
text), and hyper-availability
What is hyper-availability?
Hyper availability is a social presence status defined in the GSMA RCS1.0 Functional
Description 2.1.3.1. Hyper-availability is also called Need to communicate or contact
me status. This status allows a certain user to inform those contacts with whom a Social
Presence Relationship has been established, that the user is currently in a situation where
it is possible to communicate more freely (for example, in a waiting room), and that the
user is willing to communicate right now.
This status has following characteristics:
This status is temporary: it is set for a short, limited period of time (for example, a
couple of minutes) which is operator configurable on the user's device, after which it
automatically switches off.
It is a positive status: it does not interfere negatively with the basic mobile status
(such as available anywhere/anytime)
It is controlled by the user: it can be set manually or be programmed but it is always
initiated by the end user.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the Video Communications Service architecture.

Figure 10-2 Video Communications Service architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
As shown in the figure, Video Communications Service makes use of LTE and enhanced
High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) radio access networks, Third Generation (3G) Mobile
Switching Center (MSC), and Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
(OAM&P) systems and IMS Core.
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components impacted by Video Communications Service
Video Communications Service causes changes and/or new network entities in two of the
components shown in Figure 10-2, Video Communications Service architecture
(p. 10-11).
SVLTE UEs are required.
Additional IMS Application Servers have been added. The new IMS Application
Servers host applications needed by Video Communications Service.
Each of these impacted components is explained separately, below.
SVLTE UEs
SVLTE UE required
Video Communications Service requires a dual-mode UE that can handle simultaneous

sessions of voice and video. From LE3.0 onwards, the UE chosen to support Video
Communications Service is the Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) User Equipment
(UE).
What is an SVLTE UE?
A Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) UE is a UE that provides Two phones in one.
In other words, each SVLTE UE has two complete UEs within it. From within the SVLTE
UE, one of the embedded UEs communicates with the legacy network. Also from within
the UE, the other embedded UE communicates with the LTE network. The two
communications paths are completely separate.
Note: More information about SVLTE UEs is given in The SVLTE approach
(p. 7-17).
UE 1 and UE 2
To avoid confusion on this page, the first UE within the SVLTE UE is called UE 1 and
the second UE is called UE 2.
UE 1 for circuit voice
PRELIMINARY
In the Video Communications Service configuration, one UE within the SVLTE UE (here
called UE 1) is used to handle all circuit-mode voice calls.
As shown in Figure 10-2, Video Communications Service architecture (p. 10-11),
traffic from UE 1 (the gold line) connects to the existing 3G MSC in the legacy network.
Using the existing circuit switched infrastructure for voice-only calls eliminates any
dependency on VoLTE and thus allows earlier deployment of Video Communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
SVLTE UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service service. In this scenario, all voice services, including roaming and emergency
calling, are handled by UE 1 and the existing legacy network infrastructure. Any Lawful
Intercept that is requested on voice-only calls is also handled by the 3G MSC.
Note: Voice calls can, of course, be LTE calls, in which case they are packet data
calls, not circuit-based calls. LTE voice calls can go through the LTE network or can
be handled off to eHRPD and then handled by an EV-DO MSC (not shown in Figure
10-2, Video Communications Service architecture (p. 10-11)). However, in the
current implementation of Video Communications Service, which is only for 3G1x
CDMA networks, the only UE allowed is the SVLTE UE. By definition, all SVLTE
UEs contain one circuit-mode UEs and one LTE UE.
PRELIMINARY

Second UE for data sessions
In the Video Communications Service configuration, the second UE within the SVLTE
UE (here called UE 2) is used to handle all data calls.
As shown in Figure 10-2, Video Communications Service architecture (p. 10-11),
traffic from UE 2 goes to the PCRF and CSCF and on into the LTE network.
Client required
An Video Communications Service client must be loaded on the SVLTE. The Video
Communications Service client enables UE 2 to access the Video Communications
Service service.

Introduction
Described in this topic are the functional entities that have been added to the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support Video Communications Service and
the network elements that host these functional entities.
Video Application Server
The Video Application Server (Video AS) functional entity is used to support the basic and
supplementary services associated with video calling and video sharing. The Video AS
complies fully with the 3GPP Multimedia Telephony Service (MMTel) standard.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The Video AS functional entity is hosted by the 5420 CTS. For information on the 5420
CTS, see 5420 CTS (p. 21-23).
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PS/XDMS Application Server
The Presence Server (PS)/XDM Server (XDMS) functional entity supports the Enhanced
Address Book (EAB) contact list on the Video Communications Service client. The
implementation of the PS/XDMS in Video Communications Service is fully compliant
with the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA RCS 1.0 standard.
The PS/XDMS Server functional entity is hosted by the 5410 PS/XMDS. For information
on the 5410 PS/XMDS, see 5410 PS/XDMS (p. 21-20).
Voice Mail Server
The Voice Mail Server functional entity provides voice mail service for unanswered video
calls and video sharing sessions. Service providers can configure this voice mail server so
it is shared with the voice mail server for normal voice calls, so the user may have a
single mailbox. A subscriber placing an unanswered video call will be offered the ability
to leave a voice mail.
The Voice Mail Server functional entity is hosted by the 5100 CMS. For information on
the 5100 CMS, see 5100 CMS (p. 21-11).
Use of IMS core

Uses existing IMS core
The Video Communications Service approach does not add any new functionality to the
IMS core, but instead uses existing functional entities and network elements in the IMS
core. This topic explains the role of the IMS core in Video Communications Service and
briefly describes the IMS core functional entities and network elements used by Video
Communications Service.
Use of IMS for QoS
Video Communications Service uses the Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia System (IMS) to

provide control latency and jitter, provide excellent Quality of Service (QoS), and to
provide a centralize platform for control and monitoring of many applications.
PRELIMINARY
Need for IMS
While the transition to advanced multimedia services is aided by the growing

deployments of high bandwidth LTE networks, more bandwidth by itself does not ensure
success. Replicating the internet model of bundling random, ad hoc silos of services is not
a formula for sustained success or potentially, even survival for a single company or the
telecom industry. IMS-capable networks enable integration of applications into a single
architecture that results in a more robust, more economical (over the long term) solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Use of IMS core
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and enables a better end user experience than can result from bundling of set of silo
applications. Thus IMS is used within Video Communications Service to provide a
platform for hosting a variety of video and voice applications.
IMS core entities used by Video Communications Service
The following functional entities in the IMS core are used by Video Communications
Service. These functional entities are not changed by Video Communications Service, but
merely used by Video Communications Service. These functional entities are described
here for completeness' sake.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
HSS - The Home Subscriber Server (HSS) functional entity stores the subscriber data
for the service subscription including authentication credentials, identification data
including subscriber directory number (DN), Public User Identity (PUID), Private
User Identity (PRID) and details about any supplementary services that are provided
to the subscriber.
The HSS functional entity is hosted by the 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM)
Home Subscriber Server (HSS) . For more information about the 8650 SDM HSS, see
8650 SDM HSS (p. 20-13).
PCRF - The Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) functional entity provides
the interface to the QOS capabilities of the radio network and the packet core. The
PCRF is used by the IMS system to request specific QOS attributes for the bearer
connections for the audio and video parts of video call/share sessions. Signalling is
sent by the CSCF to the PCRF for each time a video call/share session the is
established.
The PCRF functional entity is hosted by the 5780 DSC. For more information about
the 5780 DSC, see 5780 DSC (p. 18-7).
Call Session Control Function (CSCF) - The IMS CSCF functional entity registers the
subscriber after performing authentication using the credentials stored in the HSS.
The CSCF functional entity supports the subscriber to originate and receive video
calls and directs SIP messages to the appropriate IMS application server.
The CSCF functional entity is hosted by the 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC). For
more information about the 5450 ISC, see 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) (p. 21-26). See
especially, Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions (p. 21-27).
Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG) - To meet regulatory requirements for support of
Lawful Intercept, a Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG) functional entity is required. The
LIG supports the transmission of communication data and communication content to
the Law Enforcement Agency (LEA) when a court order requires the service provider
to provide that data for a specific subscriber.
The LIG functional entity is hosted by the 1357 LIG and the 1357 IMC. For more
information about the 1357 LIG, see 1357 LIG (p. 20-3) and 1357 IMC
(p. 22-16).
Note that LIGs can be used for both data and voice/video. Note also that if the service
provider is using VoLTE then packet switched voice is intercepted in the IMS network
and sent to agencies via LIGs. If circuit switched voice is used, the LIG function is
carried out by the 3G network.
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic gives a high-level description of how the various components of Video
Communications Service make video sessions possible.
User signs up for the service
To receive Video Communications Service, the end user first signs up for the Video
Communications Service video communications service through his or her service
provider. After the end user signs up, a service provider employee will load the Video
Communications Service client onto the end user's UE. If the end user does not have an
SVLTE UE, he or she will have to purchase one at that point and have the Video
Communications Service client loaded onto the SVLTE UE.
Note: At the discretion of the service provider, UE can come with the Video
Communications Service client already installed.
UE client runs the service
The primary focus of the service is the Video Communications Service client. The Video
Communications Service client provides the user interface to a presence enabled contact
list and allows the user to initiate both video calls and video sharing sessions. The end
user can start video calls and video sharing sessions by selecting another Video
Communications Service subscriber using the contact list on the mobile phone or by
dialing the directory number (DN) of the other subscriber.
The client also provides a user interface to supplementary services including caller ID and
call waiting. The client also has a message waiting indication to notify users when they
have voice mail waiting.
End user chooses which call is active
PRELIMINARY
The client on the SVLTE device handles the coordination of normal voice and video
calling/sharing. The end user can place a current voice call on hold to answer an incoming
video call or place a video call on hold to answer an incoming voice call. The client
supports the user interacting with either the voice call or the video call, but not both at the
same time. For example, it is not possible to continue the video part of a video
call/sharing session while at the same time having a voice conversation on a voice call.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of presence information
The client allows the end user to see presence information from other users who have
included the user in their group for presence information. This will include social
presence or, for other Video Communications Service subscribers, an indication that
video calls and video sharing are supported.
PRELIMINARY

Primary voice service handled by MSC
As explained in UE 1 for circuit voice (p. 10-12), support of circuit-switched voice

calls is provided to the circuit-mode UE within the SVLTE UE by the 3G MSC in the
legacy network. The 3G MSC supports all the circuit-switched voice services including
basic calling, supplementary services, roaming and regulatory services including
emergency calling, lawful interception and mobile number portability. There is no direct
interaction between the 3G MSC controlling circuit-mode voice calls and the 5420 CTS.
The 5420 CTS is the Telephony Application Server (TAS) within IMS that controls video
calls and video sharing sessions.
Changing a voice call into a video call
When an Video Communications Service video sharing session is established between the
two parties on a voice only call, the existing voice only circuit switched call is dropped.
As part of establishing the video sharing session, a new two-way voice connection is
established in the data network along with the video share.
Leaving an LTE coverage area
When the UE originating or receiving an Video Communications Service video call or

video sharing session roams out of the LTE network, the call will be dropped.
Limitations
Limitations
Video Communications Service 1.0 supports only one kind of UE, the SVLTE UE. In
later releases Video Communications Service will be expanded to Circuit Switched Fall
Back (CSFB) and VoLTE UEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Also, Video Communications Service Release 1.0 is restricted to 3GPP2 service

providers, for 3G1x CDMA and 1xEV-DO Radio Access Networks that interwork with
LTE using eHRPD. In future releases Video Communications Service will be available
for Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) networks and for UMTS
networks.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SVLTE UE
The Video Communications Service approach requires an SVLTE UE.

Video Communications Service client
PRELIMINARY
The Video Communications Service client must be loaded onto the SVLTE UE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
11

11
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes all the approaches currently supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Solution for handling Inter LTE service provider roaming.
Contents
11-2
Definitions
11-2
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming
11-3
11-4
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach
11-4
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future
release)
11-6
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming
11-9
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section gives general information about Inter LTE networks roaming.
Contents
Definitions
11-2
11-3
Definitions
What is Home network ?
The Home network is the location where the service of a particular Mobile end-user was
registered, i.e. network belonging to the Home Service Provider.
What is Visited network ?
When travelling, the Visited network is the network that covers the geographical area
where the Mobile end-user is located in and of course, the Mobile end-user has not
subscribed services to the Visited Service Provider. In case of roaming, roaming
agreements have to be established between the Home Service Provider and the Visited
Service Provider.
What is Roaming ?
Roaming is a general term referring to the extension of connectivity service in a location

that is different from the home location where the service was registered.
PRELIMINARY
The term "Roaming" originally coming from the GSM sphere is also applied to the other
technologies CDMA, W-CDMA and LTE.
Traditional GSM Roaming is defined as the ability for a Mobile customer to
automatically make and receive voice calls, send and receive data, or access other
services, including home data services, when travelling outside the geographical coverage
area of the Home network, by means of using a Visited network. This can be done by
using a communication terminal or else just by using the subscriber identity in the visited
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is Inter LTE network Roaming ?
This is an LTE end-user belonging to a LTE Home network and roaming to a LTE Visited
network.
What are HPLMN and VPLMN ?
PLMN stands for Public Land Mobile Network. Home PLMN (HPLMN) is the mobile
network the user belongs to. Visited PLMN (VPLMN) is a network the mobile user has
roamed in. Each PLMN is identified by a unique PLMN identifier (ID).
PRELIMINARY


Introduction
This topic lists all possible approaches for Inter LTE network roaming and explains which
approaches are currently implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Inter PLMN Roaming for LTE end-users with other technologies (WCDMA, CDMA and
GSM) is to be supported in a future release.
Two network approaches
From LE4.0 onwards, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports the
following two network approaches for providing Roaming with LTE that are Roaming
architectures compliant with the TS23.401 standard:
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic

LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO)
Both approaches are described in this chapter.

Benefits
The Roaming Service brings benefits for both LTE Service Providers and LTE
Consumers:
LTE Service Providers can increase their coverage enhancing the value of their
network by roaming with other operators. The service providers can increase revenue
by accepting roaming subscribers.
For LTE Consumers, roaming is allowed to have extended coverage and continued
services among service provider networks.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic architecture for
handling Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
11-4
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future
release)
11-6
11-9

Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic architecture for
handling Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
About Roaming Architecture with Home routed traffic
PRELIMINARY
Roaming Architecture with Home routed traffic is an architecture where PGW and
Application Function (AF) resources are allocated in the Home PLMN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic:
Figure 11-1 Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic
PRELIMINARY

How it works
This topic describes the key aspects to support LTE Roaming across inter service provider
or PLMN for the home routed traffic architecture.
PLMN System acquisition: When a roaming UE is switched on, it attempts to make
contact with the Public Land Mobile Network. The UE looks for a suitable cell for the
chosen PLMN and then can register its presence if necessary.
HSS Discovery: HSS in the HPMLN is discovered by the Visited MME thanks to
DNS (Domain Name Server) query result.
PGW Selection: PGW selection in the HPMLN is based on provisioning in HSS and
DNS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V-SGW / H-PGW interface: S8 (Roaming) interface is supported between Visited

SGW and Home PGW and it applies for Home routed traffic architecture only.
QoS Control: The eUTRAN QoS in this architecture is supported in VPLMN and
PCRF QoS in HPLMN.
Roaming Agreement and Access control: Parameters at HSS level (per
user/group/PLMN) allow defining access restrictions, operator barring.
Note: DNS provisioning becomes a critical task for Roaming with both HSS
Discovery and PGW selection.
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported

in a future release)
Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Local Break Out architecture for handling
Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two configurations are presented:
when IP services are triggered in the Home network,

when IP services are triggered in the Visited network.
Please note that the Local Break Out approach is to be supported in a future release.
About Roaming Architecture with Local Break Out and Home IP services
PRELIMINARY
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services is an architecture where PGW is
allocated in Visited PLMN and Application Function resources for IP services are
allocated in the Home PLMN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach

(supported in a future release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This figure shows the Roaming architecture with Local Break Out and Home IP services
triggering
Figure 11-2 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services
PRELIMINARY

How it works
This topic describes the main aspects to support LTE Roaming with Local Break Out and
Home IP services triggering compared to the LTE Roaming with Home Routed Traffic
approach.
PLMN System acquisition and HSS Discovery: see similar processes for Home
Routed Traffic PLMN system acquisition and HSS Discovery
PGW Selection: PGW selection in the HPMLN is based on provisioning in HSS

(special flag set for VPLMN allocation allowed) and visited PGW in DNS.
V-SGW / V-PGW interface: S5 interface is supported between visited SGW and
visited PGW.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS Control: the eUTRAN QoS in this architecture is supported in VPLMN and
PCRF QoS is supported in both HPLMN and VPLMN via S9 interface.
Roaming Agreement and Access control: Parameters at HSS level (per IMSI) allow
defining access restrictions.
About Roaming Architecture with Local Break Out and Visited IP services
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services is an architecture where PGW is
allocated in Visited PLMN and Application Function resources for IP services are
allocated in the Visited PLMN too.
This figure shows the Roaming architecture with Local Break Out and Visited IP services
triggering
PRELIMINARY
Figure 11-3 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
This topic describes the key differences between LTE Roaming with Local Break Out and
Visited IP services triggering compared to the Local Break Out and Home IP Services
approach.
Routing path: the routing path is optimized for real-time applications. Bearer packets
do not need to be routed in the HPLMN (e.g. if terminating destination is in VPLMN
or closely).
QoS Control: H-PCRF does not make QoS policy based on IMS service.
PRELIMINARY


Roaming Agreement and Access control
Both approaches cant apply with access restriction per user (IMSI). It is necessary to
choose one of the Roaming architecture.
Mobility
S1 Handover scenario with SGW and MME relocation is supported between two service
providers and PLMNs. No direct X2 interface is supported between border eNodeBs.
Networks impacts
Network impacts include the following:
DNS use is strongly requested for Inter PLMN Roaming.

Security between service provider networks: security gateway/firewall with Diameter
Peer/Proxy and implementation of IPSec tunnels (when available in a future release)
are recommended.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
12
12
Government-mandated
services
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the government-mandated services supported by the

Contents
12-2
About the 1357 ULIS
12-2
How it works
12-3
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution
12-5
12-5
12-6
Emergency Services
12-8
About Emergency Services
12-8
Number Portability
12-9
About Number Portability
12-9
12-10
TTY/TTD Support
12-10
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports lawful access (often referred
to as legal inception or lawful interception). The ability to support lawful interception is
provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS).
Contents
About the 1357 ULIS
12-2
How it works
12-3
12-5
12-5
12-6
About the 1357 ULIS

What is the 1357 ULIS?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (1357 ULIS) is a complete
system for supporting real-time lawful interception over virtually any type of network.
LI for the Solution
The 1357 ULIS supplies any lawful interception needed within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
PRELIMINARY
What is lawful interception?
Lawful interception of telecommunications is a capability that allows authorized

organizations or law enforcement agencies (LEAs) to detect and intercept the use of
telecommunications facilities by criminal or terrorist organizations. All
telecommunications operators are obliged to comply with government regulations to
enable the interception of any type of call, and most countries have adopted global lawful
interception requirements and standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 1357 ULIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Information provided
For any type of intercepted traffic, the 1357 ULIS allows the monitoring of selected
subscribers in real time inside the telecommunication network, and provides Law
Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) with:
Intercept-related information (IRI), which is the signaling information (that is the

source and destination of the call), and related information, such as intercepted short
message service (SMS) calls.
Content of the communication (CC), which includes the voice, fax, data, video or
message contents carried on a speech channel, or information exchanged on a
high-speed Internet access link.
PRELIMINARY
How it works
Main functions
There are several primary functions required within a network to achieve lawful
interception:
The Intercept Access Point (IAP), which is located within the network nodes. The IAP
is responsible for generating the intercept-related information and content of
communication
The Mediation function, which clearly delineates the public network from the Law
Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF). The Mediation function communicates
with the IAP using internal network interfaces, which can be proprietary. The
Mediation function also communicates to one or more LEMFs through locally
standardized handover interfaces (that is, HI2 and HI3)
Implementation of functions
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the functions are implemented in the
following way:
The IAP function is performed by the HSS, MME and S/P-GW network elements
The Mediation function is performed by the 1357 ULIS Legal Interception Gateway
(LIG) network element.
The 1357 ULIS LIG is described in 1357 LIG (p. 20-3).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integrated LI solution
The following figure shows how Lawful Interception works in the Solution. The case
shown here is a non-roaming case. However, whether the UE is roaming or not, the
procedure is the same: First, to configure an intercept across the network elements, and
secondly, if there is a match the network element will intercept the traffic and send it to
the 1357 which will send it to LEA.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 12-1 Lawful Interception in the Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required for both voice and data
Lawful interception compliance is required for all voice and data communications. The
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution provides lawful interception support for all LTE
services, whether the services are voice or data services.
PRELIMINARY

Compliance
The 1357 ULIS:
Provides surveillance of all common telecommunication services: voice, fax, data,

VoIP, high- speed Internet (for web browsing, e-mail, peer-to-peer)
Complies with regulatory requirements in numerous countries worldwide
Conforms to all international lawful interception standards developed by ETSI, 3GPP
In addition, Alcatel-Lucent maintains a close cooperation with regulatory authorities,

standardization bodies and LEMF and Monitoring Center (MC) providers ensuring
compliance with the latest standards and technologies.
Cost-efficiency
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 ULIS:
Provides central management of all interception activities in the network

Uses a scalable architecture that enables cost-efficient solutions for small to very large
communications networks
Integrates into any available network wire line, wireless or converged
Reliability
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 ULIS:

Monitors and extracts critical intercept-related information/call content with no
impact to the performance or reliability of the telecommunication network and
services
Handles Alcatel-Lucent core network evolutions seamlessly with no impact on LEA

interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliable partner
Alcatel-Lucent is a reliable partner, bringing more than 10 years of experience in the

deployment of lawful interception solutions to more than 70 fixed and mobile networks
and the knowledge of a global telecommunications equipment, solutions and services
provider.
Need for a centralized solution
With the explosion of voice and data transmissions in today's networks, and the rapid
transformation of operator networks to IP, the lawful interception of voice and data
communications is becoming increasingly challenging for both service providers and
LEAs. In addition, most solutions available today are fragmented and, therefore, do not
provide a complete lawful interception capability across all networking domains,
functions and interfaces.
Provides a centralized solution
The 1357 ULIS consolidates all former Alcatel and Lucent lawful interception functions
under one umbrella. The 1357 ULIS thus provides a centralized solution designed to
provide a single management solution for all of a service provider's lawful interception
needs. This centralized management can be used for multivendor mediation functions and
can allow a network operator or a Law Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful
interception management.

Customer documentation
An entire set of customer documentation for the 1357 ULIS is available from the online
customer support (OLCS) web site for customers who have purchased the 1357 ULIS
product. For instructions on using OLCS, see Accessing and navigating the OLCS web
site (p. B-9) and other helpful information in Appendix B, Resources.
Related standards
PRELIMINARY
For basic standards on Lawful Interception (LI), see ES 201 671: "Telecommunications
security; Lawful Interception (LI); Handover interfaces for the lawful interception of
telecommunications traffic".
4th Generation (4G) standards for LI are given in the following documents:
3GPP TS 33.106, Lawful interception requirements, Stage 1

3GPP TS 33.107, Lawful interception architecture and functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3GPP TS 33.108, Handover interface for lawful interception

ATIS TI.678 LAES for Voice over Packet Technologies in Wireline
Telecommunications Networks
For more about the 1357 LIG
The 1357 LIG is described in 1357 LIG (p. 20-3).
PRELIMINARY
For more about the 1357 IMC
The 1357 IMC is described in 1357 IMC (p. 22-16).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Emergency Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Emergency Services
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports emergency services via CSFB.
What are Emergency Services?
Emergency Services is a term used to cover national requirements to handle (and route)
emergency calls to a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) and be able to report
locations from which the emergency calls come.
How it works
For CSFB voice calls the handling of Emergency Service calls reverts to the legacy
network to which the voice call has fallen back.
PRELIMINARY
For VoLTE calls emergency calls are handled using CSFB to 2G/3G as defined in 3GPP
23.272, Section 4.6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Number Portability
Introduction
PRELIMINARY
Number Portability
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports Number Portability.

What is Number Portability?
Number Portability (NP) is the ability to switch service providers and maintain the same
wireless phone number. Number portability is required by law in many countries.
The following table shows how Number Portability is provided within different parts of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, including within all the approaches for
voice.
Table 12-1
Option
Number Portability is provided by
CS Fallback (CSFB)
Current NP solutions in place in Alcatel-Lucent's legacy networks.
Voice over IMS

(VoLTE)
Current NP solutions in use in Alcatel-Lucent's IMS based network.
SVLTE
Current NP solutions in place in Alcatel-Lucent's legacy networks.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TTY/TTD Support
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports Teletypewriter

(TTY)/Telecommunications Devices for the Deaf (TTD) (TTY/TDD) Support (often
shortened TTY/TTD Support).
What is TTY/TTD Support?
Teletypewriter (TTY)/Telecommunications Devices for the Deaf (TTD) (TTY/TDD)

support (TTY/TTD Support) is support for alphanumeric UEs that provide translation of
circuit-mode calls into digitized text.
TTY/TTD Support required for voice and data
Support is required for all TTY/TTD devices to be able to communicate with each other,
regardless of the underlying radio access network technology. The Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution provides full TTY/TTD Support.
The following table shows how TTY/TTD Support is provided within different parts of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, including within all the approaches for
voice.
PRELIMINARY
Table 12-2
Option
TTY/TTD Support is provided by
CS Fallback (CSFB)
The MSC on the legacy network to which the voice call has fallen back
Voice over IMS

(VoLTE)
Transcoding between V.18 and GTT-IP (text/RTP) in the MGCF and

MGW.
SVLTE
For the legacy network call, the MSC in the legacy network handling the
call. (like CSFB)
data-only
transmissions in the
LTE network
not relevant.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
13
Public Safety
13
Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Public Safety Solution supports key value points.
The ability to support Public Safety is provided by the Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End
Solutions network equipments. The solution allows Public Safety users to use dedicated
Public Safety networks and Public Safety operators to manage their own networks
(portion of network) or to share network elements.
Contents
About Public Safety
13-2
Definitions
13-2
13-3
How it works
13-4
No specific Network Equipment required for PS
13-4
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum
13-5
Sharing Network Elements
13-7
Hosted Core Model
13-9
Priority Access
13-10
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
About Public Safety
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About Public Safety

Overview
Purpose
This section presents basic definitions or terms used in this chapter and the Public Safety
expectations.
Contents
Definitions
13-2
13-3
Definitions
Public Safety (PS)
Public Safety (PS) involves the prevention of and protection from events that could
endanger the safety of the general public from significant danger, injury/harm, and
damage such as crimes or such as natural or man-made disasters.
To meet the increasing challenges in the public safety area, responsible public institutions
and organizations (national, regional, local) can tap into their own intelligence to
successfully address possible threats in advance. They optimize their internal structures,
use synergies, and carefully balance costs and benefits of their measures.
Public Safety Users
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety Users are subscribers belonging to Public safety organization with a LTE
mobile device to access Public Safety networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
In the situation of events in remote office, more and more real-time life-saving
information is needed (Video, Images, Messaging e.g. medical telemetry). Due to
multiplicity of Public Safety organizations (Multi-Agency, Multi-Jurisdiction), a full
inter-operability is required for the team coordination and by consequence a full
inter-operability in the networks.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
About Public Safety
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how the Public Safety works with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE solution
Network Elements.
Contents
13-4
13-5
13-7
Hosted Core Model
13-9
Priority Access
13-10

No specific network equipment required
PRELIMINARY
There is no specific network equipment for the Public Safety solution, the only
requirement is to have eNodeB supporting frequency band dedicated to public safety. The
already available LTE solution Networks Elements are used for Public Safety. The
differentiation with commercial LTE solutions can be highlighted with key features and
concepts for Public Safety.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency

spectrum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Public Safety configurations
The Alcatel-Lucent Solution for Public Safety is flexible and allows several
configurations from full private network to shared networks according to the customer
needs and inter PS network operator agreements (e.g. roaming).
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
Public Safety devices
The Public Safety devices are required to follow the LTE standards and to comply with
the 3GPP frequency spectrums (USB modems, Trunk modems and routers, smart phones
and PDAs from multi vendors).
Public Safety frequency spectrum
The Alcatel-Lucent Public Safety Solution operates in the frequency spectrum defined by
the legislation, e.g. Band 14 in the US 700 MHz frequency spectrum and supports both
2x5 MHz operation (Public Safety Broadband Block) and 2x10 MHz (D block and Public
Safety Broadband Block). Note that other commercial bands could be used (800 MHz, 2.3
GHz) and other LTE bands where public safety does no have access to spectrum (400
MHz).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency

spectrum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This following figure shows the Public Safety used in the US:
Figure 13-1 Public Safety Upper 700 MHz Band
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sharing Subscriber dependent Network elements
The Alcatel-Lucent Public Safety Solution allows Public Safety network operators to
share network elements and manage their own data thanks to partitioned capabilities with
role based access controls.
The basic shared ePC configuration concerns the following equipments: 8950 SAM, ,
8650 SDM, 5780 DSC.
The network operating model consists of one centralized NOC (Network Operations
Centre) responsible for end-to-end management and maintenance of the shared
network elements. The NOC is represented by the SAM 8950 application for the
subscribers provisioning.
Ability for partitioned subscriber management and for tenants to securely manage
their own subscriber groups on an HSS: 8950 SAM allows the definition of one or
more operators for each partition who have the permission to add, modify and delete
subscribers associated with that partition. These operators are not able to view
information associated with any other partition. Subscriber partitioning is performed
by IMSI range.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the 8950 SAM use for Public Safety:
Figure 13-2 8950 SAM (Subscriber Activation Manager) for Public Safety Networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hosted Core Model
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hosted Core Model

Introduction
Deploying an entirely new Public Safety network with 4G LTE infrastructure is

cost-prohibitive; this is why a Hosted Core is an attractive choice. An ePC Service
provider (e.g. Alcatel-Lucent) deploys, operates and maintains the Alcatel-Lucent core for
Public Safety agencies.
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
The following figure shows the Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety:
Figure 13-3 Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
Hosted Core Model
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hosted Model Scope
This section explains the key facets of the Alcatel-lucent hosted model:
ALU owns the ePC (Multitenant core) and Local entities own gateways, backhaul,
RAN and devices
High system availability is obtained with the geographic redundancy
Confidentiality is kept thanks to secure partitioning (separate management database,
no cross visibility)
All bearer traffic stays local, signaling traffic comes to the ePC (some applications
may require bearer traffic to traverse the hosting facility).
Benefits of the Hosted Model
This section explains the major benefits of the hosted model:
Avoiding need for large capital outlay and creation of knowledgeable experience base
Predictable, consistent cost structure
Flexible management solution:
Varied levels of shared management based on needs/requirements of each entity
From full Alcatel-Lucent management through complete jurisdiction involvement

or anywhere in between
For future release, a common Portal will present dynamic alarming, ticketing and
reporting content to Alcatel-Lucent and public entities.
Priority Access
Principles
In order to reflect the command chain in the PS agency, priorities are given on the
concurrent services within a given jurisdiction with for example higher priority users
moving at the head of the line. Therefore it is possible to define priority per user and per
bearer.
PRELIMINARY
15 priority access levels can be assigned to Public Safety users. In cases where a user can
have multiple bearers (some default bearers, others dedicated) the priority of each bearer
can be specified. The administrator defines the bearers and their priorities for a group of
users and then assigns particular users to that group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Priority Access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each Radio Bearer request, using provisioned rules, the PCRF decides on the QoS
attributes and retrieves in particular to the eNodeB those three Allocation Retention
Priority (ARP) attributes:
Priority Level - A Radio Bearer priority for resource allocation used for admission.
Pre-emption Capability - Specifies whether this Radio Bearer can trigger pre-emption
(to free up resources) of other Radio Bearers
Pre-emption Vulnerability - Specifies whether this Radio Bearer can be pre-empted by
other Radio Bearers.
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
How it works
The operator can provision the ARP range that is considered high priority in the eNB.
At every Radio Bearer setup request the eNB will evaluate the current eNB resources. If
key eNB limits are reached, the eNodeB will determine whether to pre-empt existing
Radio Bearers for those considered high priority per the ARP attributes listed above.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Public Safety
Priority Access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
14

14
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes common security risks in an LTE network and gives
recommendations for providing security in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two areas
There are two main areas of security that are necessary for any LTE network:

Network Security
Both types of security are described in this chapter.

Contents
14-2
14-2
Common security threats to the air interface
14-4
Control plane security
14-4
User plane security
14-6
14-7
14-8
About network security
14-8
14-10
Recommendations for providing network security
14-11
14-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes common security risks for the air interface in an LTE network and
describes the security provisions that must be made to provide security on the air
interface.
Contents
14-2
14-4
14-4
User plane security
14-6
14-7

Introduction
PRELIMINARY
Air interface security involves protecting the LTE air interface from over the air attacks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-1 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
PRELIMINARY

What is the LTE air interface?
The LTE air interface is that portion of the network that exists between the UEs and the
eNodeBs.
Purpose
The purpose of air interface security is to do the following:

Protect the UE users and equipment and the LTE network from threats and
vulnerabilities generated in the air interface
Protect UE user/equipment and traffic from over-the-air interface threats

Protect LTE network (eNB, MME, SGN, SGSN, HSS) from over-the-air Interface
threats
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two planes to be protected
To protect the air interface, two types of security protection must be applied: security on
the control plane and security on the user plane.

Air interface is vulnerable
By its nature the air interface is vulnerable open to interception. Radio waves travel in all
directions. The service provider cannot control the scope of the transmission. Anyone
with the proper equipment can listen to the transmission, interrupt the transmission, or
inject data into the transmission.

Introduction
Air interface security on the control plane is provided by the use of encryption.
What is encryption?
PRELIMINARY
Encryption involves the encoding messages or packets before they are transmitted over
the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-2 Air Interface Security: Control Plane Security
PRELIMINARY

Two types of signaling protected
Encryption is required for both Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Network Access
Server (NAS) signaling.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

User plane security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User plane security

Introduction
As shown in the following figure, air interface security on the user plane is also provided
by the use of encryption.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 14-3 Air Interface Security: User Plane Security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Further information about LTE air interface security can be found in the 3GPP TS 23.401
standard.
PRELIMINARY

For help with network security
For assistance from Alcatel-Lucent with network security for your network, contact your
Account Executive.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes common security risks for the network portion of an LTE Solution
and describes the security precautions that must be taken to provide network access
security.
Contents
14-8
14-10
14-11
14-12

Introduction
PRELIMINARY
Network security involves protecting LTE interfaces and traffic from wireline attacks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-4 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
PRELIMINARY

What part of the network does network security protect?
As shown in the figure, Network Security protects the following portions of the Solution:
the eUTRAN.
the ePC
service provider OA&M networks
all wireline networks owned by the service provider and connected to the LTE
network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of network security is to do the following:
Protect user subscriber identity, user location and traceability

Perform entity authentication (UE and LTE network
Maintain data integrity (mandatory for RRC and NAS signaling)
Preserve confidentiality of the information (optional for RRC/NAS signaling and
radio bearer)
Perform mobile equipment identification (for example, to identify unauthorized and

stolen UEs)

Threats to the eUTRAN
The eUTRAN typically covers long backhaul distances between eNodeBs and the central
offices. Also, fifty percent or more of backhaul networks are leased by service providers
from third party vendors. Thus, for security purposes, the eUTRAN must be considered a
hostile network and strict security must be applied.
Common threats to the Ethernet Access Transport Network (EATN) include the
following:
EATN users create DoS attacks from EATN on the eNBs, SEG, EPC, OAM and EMS
systems, call processing systems, and any other host exposed to the EATN.
Intrusion and unauthorized access to backhaul systems, including OAM, EMS and
call processing systems and resources.
Eavesdropping and tampering with the traffic traversing the EATN (OAM, signaling
and radio bearer traffic).
Threats to the ePC
The ePC must be carefully protected in case of an attack through the eUTRAN, or from a
wireline network not owned by the service provider.
PRELIMINARY
Threats to the OA&M network
Since the OA&M network is typically within the service provider network and kept
private by the service, the risk to the OA&M network is less than the risk to the
eUTRAN. However, the OA&M networks still need to be protected. If a hacker can reach
the OA&M network, a hacker can perform service-interrupting procedures like rebooting
and bringing down key equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Threats to all service provider wireline networks
Standard security practices for service provider wireline networks must be followed. For
security purposes, any wireline network not owned by the service provider must be
considered a hostile network.
PRELIMINARY


Use of authentication and key agreements
Network security can provided by the use of authentication and key agreements between
adjoining network elements.
In addition, the use of the IPSec package for leased backhaul and between LTE nodes is
strongly recommended (though optional).
What is authentication?
Authentication is the process of checking all incoming packets to see if they are from a
valid source. If the packets are not from a valid source, they are discarded. Packets are
considered legitimate if they contain predefined keys. Keys are predefined sets of digits
known to both network elements that are exchanging sets of information.
What is IPSec?
IPSec is a software package that creates encrypted tunnels between individual users.
Communication passes through these encrypted tunnels and therefore cannot be read by
hackers.
Threats that IPSec can protect from
IPsec will protect the LTE traffic and LTE network element (eNodeB, MME, SGW,
PGW) interfaces from the following threats:
Denial of Service (DoS): packet flood, traffic flood, magnification/amplification

attacks, and other types of flooding and attacks.
Eavesdropping: wiretapping, packet sniffing, packet capture, traffic analysis,
unauthorized recording or capture of information being transmitted, port mirroring.
Unauthorized System Access: bypass authentication, or access control, password
cracking, privilege escalation, shared accounts, physical intrusion into eNB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Masquerading/spoofing legitimate subscribers, system, serving network, as a home

environment, cloning, spoof IP address of eNB, SEG, MME, SGW, and PDNGW.
Loss or Compromise of information in transit: manipulation of data, integrity of data,
unauthorized deletion, insertion modification, reordering, replay or delay, spam,
traffic injection.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Theft of Service: Masquerade as legitimate user during authentication process,

repudiation of a service charge.
Repudiation: of traffic origin, of traffic delivery, of administrative action, of
occurrence of system event.

Further information about LTE network security can be found in the 3GPP TS 33.401
standard.
For help with network security
PRELIMINARY
For assistance from Alcatel-Lucent with network security for your network, contact your
Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Part III: Network Elements

Overview
Overview
Purpose
This part gives an overview of the Network Elements of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Chapter 15, About the network element descriptions
15-1
Chapter 16, Network elements used in the Radio Access Network
16-1
Chapter 17, Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network
17-1
Chapter 18, Network elements used in the Core Network
18-1
Chapter 19, Radio/core (hybrid) network elements
19-1
Chapter 20, Network elements used in the Common Core Network
20-1
Chapter 21, Network elements used for IMS
21-1
Chapter 22, OAM&P products
22-1
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
III-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Network Elements Overview
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
III-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
15
15
About
the network
element descriptions
Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of a variety of network elements

representing many different types of radio access networks. Each of these network
elements has a separate network element description in this document.
This chapter describes how to find the network element description in this document for a
particular network element.
Contents
Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution
15-1
Components of the Solution
15-4
15-4

Comprehensive view
A complete list of all the network elements that can be used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution in the current release is given in Figure 15-1, Network elements
and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3).
Color coding is used in the diagram to identify which component a network element
belongs to. See the key at the bottom left of the diagram.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For reference only
Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution (p. 15-3), which is for reference purposes only, lists all Alcatel-Lucent network
elements, representing many different types of radio access networks, that can be used
with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. These network elements will never all
be used in any single instance of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Comprehensive diagram
PRELIMINARY
The following diagram lists all network elements in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution and the interfaces that connect them.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 15-1 Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components of the Solution

Six major components
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of the following six major
components:
Radio Access Network (RAN)

Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Core Network
Common Core Network

IMS delivery environment
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) support

Listed by component
Network elements used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are listed by
component in Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3) and in this document.
Therefore the network element descriptions in this document are grouped into the
following chapters:
PRELIMINARY
Radio Access Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 16,
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network and are shown as blue-green in
Solution (p. 15-3).
Backhaul and Transport Networks - It is beyond the scope of this document to list
network elements for Backhaul. However, information about LTE backhaul is given
in Chapter 17, Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network. Backhaul-related network elements are shown as grey in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3).
Core Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 18, Network
elements used in the Core Networkand are shown as light green in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Radio/core hybrid network elements from older radio access technologies. (This
special chapter describes older network elements that do not neatly fit into the
component hierarchy.) These network elements are explained in Chapter 19,
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements and are shown as mixed green and
blue-green in Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3).
Common Core Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 20,
Network elements used in the Common Core Network and are shown as gold in
Solution (p. 15-3).
IMS and Access Gateways - These network elements are explained in orange in Figure
15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution (p. 15-3) and are described in Chapter 21, Network elements used for
IMS.
IMS and Session Control - These network elements are explained in Chapter 21,
Network elements used for IMS and are shown as yellow in Figure 15-1, Network
elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3).
IMS and Applications - These network elements are explained in Chapter 21,
Network elements used for IMS and are shown as blue-green in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3).
OAM&P Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 22, OAM&P
products and are shown as red in Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3).
PRELIMINARY
Scope
LTE-only network elements are fully described in this document. Network elements that
are reused from other networks are sometimes described more briefly. However, all
network element descriptions refer the reader to other Alcatel-Lucent customer
documents for further information on the network element.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
16
Network
elements used in
the Radio Access Network
PRELIMINARY
16
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent Radio Access Network (RAN) and the network
elements used for Radio Access in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the Radio Access Network?
The Radio Access Network (RAN) is that part of a mobile wireless network that sits
between the UE and the Core Network. The Radio Access Network uses one of several
different forms of radio access to transmit communications to the UE and receive
information from the UE.
Can contain NEs from different wireless networks
The Radio Access Network (RAN) in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution can
contain second generation (2G), third-generation (3G) and LTE network elements.
Network Elements from 2G and 3G wireless networks are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution when the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network at a service provider location
is integrated with other non-LTE service provider wireless networks.
Two categories
The network elements used for Radio Access in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution can be divided into the following two categories:
LTE-only
The Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB is used only in the LTE portion of the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Network elements that are used only for LTE

Network elements that are used both in support of LTE and in other Alcatel-Lucent
networks
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
16-4
16-4
Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE
16-5
16-6
9125 TC
16-7
About the 9125 TC
16-7
16-9
9130 BSC/MFS
16-10
About the 9130 BSC/MFS
16-10
Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE
16-11
16-11
16-13
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)
16-13
16-14
16-15
9326 NodeB
16-16
16-16
16-17
16-18
9370 RNC
16-19
About the 9370 RNC
16-19
Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE
16-21
16-21
9412 eNodeB
16-22
About the eNodeB
16-22
16-23
How it works
16-23
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB
16-23
Hardware
16-24
Support of FDD
16-29
Software
16-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections to other network elements
16-29
User interfaces
16-30
16-30
16-31
16-31
Advantages
16-33
Hardware
16-35
16-36
Software
16-38
16-38
16-39
16-40
About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
16-43
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
16-43
Hardware
16-44
16-45
Software
16-47
Support for the R-OCM
16-47
User interface
16-49
16-49
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

9100 MBI/O (BTS)
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9100 MBI/O (BTS)

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9100 Multi-Standard Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
Indoor/Outdoor (MBI/O) (BTS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
16-4
16-5
16-6

What is the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)?
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is a network element that fills the role of the base transceiver
station (BTS) in Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) networks.
Role of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) sends data to and receives data from the GSM User equipment
(UE). The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) provides the physical radio link between the UE and the
rest of the Alcatel-Lucent GSM network.
Advantages of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
Advantages of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) include the following:
PRELIMINARY
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is a true Multi-Standard BTS able to support all the different
3GPP technologies.
GSM and all evolutions (GPRS, EDGE, etc.)
WCDMA and all evolutions (HSPA, HSPA+, etc.)
LTE, LTE advanced, etc.
Different versions of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) exist to answer operator needs, in terms
of size, capacity, and site constraints:
Macro Indoor BTS: MBI5
Macro Outdoor BTS: MBO2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mid Indoor BTS: MBI3

Mid Outdoor BTS: MBO1
Compact Outdoor BTS Evolution: CBO
The main advantage of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS), versus our competitors, is that:
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) multi-standard, multi-version range was introduced in
1999 to all our GSM customers.
Customers can easily evolve their installed base towards WCDMA or LTE
through maximum reuse of their past investment.
Customers avoid site constraints/site-renegotiations for all new technical
introductions.
9100 MBI/O (BTS) cabinets are full-backward compatible - new generations of
modules are able to co-exist with previous generations of modules. For example,
new generations of SDR modules, able to support GSM/LTE simultaneously
within the same module, are able to co-exist in the cabinet with older generations
supporting GSM only.
Cabinets are fully TCO optimized - IP ready, with minimum power consumption.
PRELIMINARY

9100 MBI/O (BTS)
Use of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) in a combined GSM and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent GSM wireless

network, the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) continues to be used as the base transceiver station for
GSM user equipment (UE). The modules in the BTS are able to support GSM or LTE
independently. The GSM TRX is connected to the GSM BSS Architecture (BSC, Core
Network) and same is true the LTE network.

Support of dual-mode handsets
There are no changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE unless the service
provider wishes to use the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support dual-mode LTE and GSM User
Equipment (UE). Alcatel-Lucent can add software to the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support
dual-mode LTE and GSM UE if necessary.
The Multi-Standard BTS is ready to evolve from GSM towards LTE by:
Plug-in modules supporting LTE or GSM+LTE
Software Upgrade (SU)
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is not designed to support 3GPP2 (CDMA) networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

9100 MBI/O (BTS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent GSM base station, go to the following url and
search for 9100.
https://support.alcatel-lucent.com
Note: All Alcatel-Lucent GSM customer documentation starts with the number
9100.
Then click on Alcatel-Lucent - Customer Support - Product Content-Evolium 9100
BTS (Base Transceiver Station).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9100 MBI/O (BTS). For a listing of these classes, go
to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/
Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword 9100.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9125 TC
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

9125 TC
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9125 Compact Transcoder (TC) as used in the
Contents
About the 9125 TC
16-7
16-9
About the 9125 TC

What is the 9125 TC?
The 9125 TC is a network element that is in charge of voice transcoding between

compressed codecs used on the Global System for Mobile (GSM) radio and G711 used in
the core network.
The 9125 TC is the latest transcoding equipment of the field-proven and widely
successful Alcatel-Lucent family. It has been designed in a modular way, permitting
flexible extensions. Investment can therefore be optimized by purchasing and deploying
the configuration, best suited to the network topology.
The 9125 TC provides speech transcoding between GSM and 64-kbit/s PCM coding laws,
and data-rate adaptation in the BSS. Sub-multiplexing on the Ater interface between TC
and BSC is standard in all configurations and reduces transmission needs or requirements
on the Ater interface by up to 75%. The 9125 TC contains powerful digital
signal-processing devices, sufficient to handle all the different available speech coding
algorithms and several rate adaptation techniques.
Role of the 9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The functions performed by the 9125 TC are speech transcoding and rate adaptation
together with related OA&M functions.
PRELIMINARY

9125 TC
About the 9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The basic functions are:
Speech-service functions
Conversion of vocoder blocks (TRAU frames 320 bits) into 160 A-law PCM
samples of eight bits and vice versa
Framing and synchronization of vocoder blocks
Adjustment of the phase of blocks in the downlink direction for minimum delay
Discontinuous-Transmission (DTX) functions: Voice-Activity Detection (VAD)

downlink, Comfort-noise measurement downlink, Comfort-noise insertion uplink,
Speech extrapolation uplink
Data-services functions Data-rate adaptation for V.110 formats with intermediate rates of 8 kbit/s or 16
kbit/s
Framing and synchronization of the data blocks
Tandem Free Operation Tandem Free Operation (TFO) provides a better voice quality by avoiding
unnecessary successive coding and decoding operations in the case of
mobile-to-mobile calls
Management of TRAU and TFO frames

Construction of TFO messages
In-band TFO negotiation
Rate control, time alignment, DTX
Operations and Maintenance (OA&M) functions

Self-test and alarm handling
Setting test loops
Supervision on 16-kbit/s and 64-kbit/s links
Testing 16-kbit/s and 64-kbit/s links with test frame
Advantages of the 9125 TC
Advantages of the 9125 TC include the following:
PRELIMINARY
Capacity
Sized to your current need with support for more capacity as your network grows
192 A interfaces capacity, that is, up to 5600 Erlang
A large choice of codecs (HR, FR, EFR, AMR, WB-AMR) is supported
Compactness
Compact equipment practice: 19 standard rack - only 2m height

Unrivalled compactness with only 3.75 liters per A interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Flexibility
Multi-BSC/ multi-MSC feature simplifies your network design
Alcatel-Lucent 9125 Transcoder product range covers all connectivity
requirements up to 24 BSCs and up to 192 A interfaces
Minimizing your operating costs
Only two board types simplify your logistic
Narrow-band transcoding boards and wide-band capable boards can be mixed
in the same cabinet
Remote software downloading and remote TC management minimize on-site
intervention
The use of state-of-art DSPs permits unrivalled low power consumption
Availability of STM-1 connectivity reduces transmission costs
PRELIMINARY

9125 TC
Future proof
The 9125 TC enables a smooth migration towards 3G networks
Ready for full IP architecture

Evolution towards ultra compact TC (doubled capacity per cabinet)

For more information on the Alcatel-Lucent 9125 TC, see the following: Alcatel-Lucent
9125 Compact Transcoder Product Description, 3DC 210 16 0007 TQZZA.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9125 TC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9125.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9130 BSC/MFS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9130 BSC/MFS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9130 Base Station Controller/Multi-BSS Fast Packet
(BSC/MFS) Evolution as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
16-10
16-11
16-11

What is the 9130 BSC/MFS?
The 9130 BSC/MFS is a network element that fills the role of the Base Station Controller
(BSC) and the Packet Control Unit (PCU) in Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) networks. In the current ALU GSM architecture, the Controller is divided into 2
parts: the BSC for Voice and the MFS (Multi-BSS Fast Packet Server) for the Data
(GPRS, EDGE). The MFS is the PCU (Packet Control Unit). So in terms of architecture,
the 9130 BSC/MFS are connected on one side to the BTSs and on the other side to the
Core Network.
Role of the 9130 BSC/MFS
PRELIMINARY
The 9130 BSC/MFS sends data to and receives data from the GSM User equipment (UE).
The 9130 BSC/MFS provides the physical radio link between the UE and the rest of the
Alcatel-Lucent GSM network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 9130 BSC/MFS
Advantages of the 9130 BSC/MFS include:
Scalability / Flexibility with rack sharing - possibility to support 2 BSCs in the same
rack or mix BSC/PCU
TCO optimized:
Minimum footprint and power consumption
IP readiness
PRELIMINARY

9130 BSC/MFS
Reduced maintenance and spare costs (only 5 different boards)
Use of the 9130 BSC/MFS in a combined GSM and LTE network

network, the 9130 BSC/MFS continues to be used as a base transceiver station for GSM
user equipment (UE).

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS when it is used in the
9130 BSC/MFS in LTE
Nothing about the 9130 BSC/MFS changes when the GSM network is integrated with the
LTE network, because the 9130 BSC/MFS only manages the GSM/GPRS/EDGE part of
the network.

For documentation
For documentation on the GSM/WCDMA Tendering Portal, go to the following url:

https://all1.us.alcatel-lucent.com/teams/TechDB/Portalpages/portal.aspx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
For documentation on the Wireless Marketing Toolbox, go to the following url:

http://wireless.app.alcatel-lucent.com/marketing_toolbox/gsm/products_solutions.htm#
BSC.
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

9130 BSC/MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9130 BSC, on the 9130 MFS and on GSM. For a
listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword 9130
BSC, 9130 MFS, or GSM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

This section describes the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
16-13
16-14
16-15

What is the 922x 1xEVDO BS?
The 922x 1xEVDO BS is the network element that fills the role of the base station (BS) in
the Alcatel-Lucent Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data Only (1xEV-DO)
network.
What is a 1xEV-DO BS?
An Alcatel-Lucent 1xEVDO Base Station is a Base Station (BS) that has been configured
to support 1xEV-DO.
A Base Station (BS) is a transmission and reception station in a fixed location that is used
to handle cellular traffic and consists of one or more receive/transmit antenna, microwave
dish, and electronic circuitry. The base station serves as a bridge between UEs and the
EPC.
Role of the 922x 1xEVDO BS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The 922x 1xEVDO BS sends data to and receives data from the 1xEV-DO User
equipment (UE). The 922x 1xEVDO Base Station provides the physical radio link
between the UE and the rest of the Alcatel-Lucent 1xEV-DO network.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 922x 1xEVDO BS in a combined CDMA and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent CDMA

wireless network, the 922x 1xEVDO BS continues to be used as the base station for
CDMA user equipment (UE).
The BS is connected to the 9271 EV-DO RNC via T1/E1/Ethernet lines that support
maintenance and call processing messages. The T1/E1/Ethernet lines go to a router and
then from the router to the DO-RNC application processors via an Ethernet connection.
These dedicated T1/E1/Ethernet facilities also carry the traffic for each UE.

Purpose
The 922x 1xEVDO BS can also be upgraded into a evolved BS. This upgraded product is
called the eBTS.
What is the eBTS?
The Alcatel-Lucent evolved Base Transceiver Station (eBTS), or Converged BTS, is a

software-enhanced EV-DO BS that supports dual mode user equipment. The dual mode
user equipment UE in this scenario supports both EV-DO and LTE. The eBTS supporting
the dual mode UE contains software that can automatically work with eHRPD.
Note: Though the BTS when used with HRPD is called an eBTS, no action needs to
be taken to turn the BS into an eBTS. The software on the BS automatically adjusts to
eHRPD traffic as necessary. .
Advantages
The 922x 1xEVDO BS requires no additional footprint, is easy to converge, and

inexpensive.
PRELIMINARY
No hardware upgrade needed
There are no changes to the BS hardware to support the dual mode user equipment. Any
Alcatel-Lucent EV-DO base station that supports EV-DO Rev A can support the
dual-mode user equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software description
It is beyond the scope of this document to describe the software hosted by the eBTS.
Refer to the customer documentation listed at the end of this chapter for descriptions of
the software applications hosted by the eBTS.
PRELIMINARY


For a list of recommended documentation on the BTS and the eBTS, see Table B-13,
Documentation Library for CDMA eBTS, eRNC (p. B-22).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 922 1xEVDO. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 922 or 1xEVDO.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9326 NodeB
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9326 NodeB
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9326 NodeB network element as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
16-16
16-17
16-18

What is the 9326 NodeB?
The 9326 NodeB is one of many alternate Node B products that fill the 3GPP-defined role
of the NodeB in the Alcatel-Lucent Wide band Code Division Multiple Access
(W-CDMA) network.
Role of the 9326 NodeB
PRELIMINARY
The 9326 NodeB acts as a base transceiver station in the W-CDMA network, carrying out
the following functions:
Network interface management
Radio access
Call processing
Configuration and supervision
Synchronization
Performance monitoring
Hardware
The Node B products come in a variety of indoor and outdoor models with a wide range
in capacity. For more information on the hardware of the 9326 NodeB, see the
documentation listed at the end of this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
For information about the software on the 9326 NodeB, consult the documentation listed
at the end of this section.
Connections to the network
The 9326 NodeB provides the following interfaces
PRELIMINARY

9326 NodeB
Iub interface towards an RNC

Uu interface towards a User Equipment (UE)
User Interfaces
The 9326 NodeB is managed by the 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS).
Use of the 9326 NodeB in a combined W-CDMA and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA

wireless network, the 9326 NodeB continues to be used as an eNodeB, or base transceiver
station, for W-CDMA user equipment (UE).

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9326 NodeB product when it is used in the
Support of dual-mode handsets
There are no changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE unless the service provider
wishes to use the 9326 NodeB to support dual-mode LTE and W-CDMA User Equipment
(UE). Alcatel-Lucent can add software to the 9326 NodeB to support dual-mode LTE and
W-CDMA UE if necessary.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9326 NodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9326 NodeB, go to the following url:

Note: All Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA customer documentation starts with the numbers
93.
Under Support on the page, click on the arrow next to Jump to Content Page and
select Documentation
Click on the range 9000 - 9999.
Search for 9326.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9326 NodeB. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9326 Node B".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9370 RNC
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

9370 RNC
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 RNC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 9370 RNC
16-19
16-21
16-21
About the 9370 RNC

What is the 9370 RNC?
The 9370 Radio Network Controller (RNC) is the Radio Network Controller for the
Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN. The 9370 RNC supports mobility within a W-CDMA network
and between W-CDMA and GSM networks.
What is the Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN?
The Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN is the Radio Access Network part of the Alcatel-Lucent
W-CDMA wireless network, and contains the following components:
9370 RNC
939x NodeB
9353 WMS
Role of the 9370 RNC
The main functions of the RNC are to control and manage the following:
Radio Access Network (RAN)
Signaling between Core Network (CN) parts and the Radio Network System (RNS)
NodeBs and their corresponding radio resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

9370 RNC
About the 9370 RNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 9370 RNC
Advantages of the 9370 RNC include its world-class quality and ease of operation:
All modules have the same visual indicators

Most reliable RNC on the market, field proven 5-9's
No single point of failure, all critical components are 1+1 spared
The only software defined RNC in the market. New technology evolution introduction
(for example, HSPA+) is done through software only directly on existing hardware
(no new hardware required)
Simple and compact, requires half the cabinet space. Only four different modules are
required for the RNC functionality.
Hardware
The 9370 RNC is based on a multiservice data platform called the Multiservice Switch
15000. This is a single-shelf, single-platform in-cabinet product.
Software
For information on the software of the 9370 RNC, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio
Network Controller Technical Description, NN-20500-021.
The 9370 RNC has the following interfaces:
Iu interfaces: toward the Core Network

Iub interface: toward the NodeB
Iur interface: toward another RNC
Iupc interface: toward the SAS
OAM&P interface: toward the network management platform (9353 WMS)

IuBC interface: toward Cell Broadcast Center (CBC)
User Interfaces
The 9370 RNC is managed by the 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS).
PRELIMINARY
The 9353 WMS is the OAM interface . Also, the 9370 RNC can be directly connected to.
It supports a text-based user interface which allows provisioning and query requests.
Use of the 9370 RNC in a combined W-CDMA and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA

wireless network, there is no impact to the 9370 RNC. The 9370 RNC continues to be
used as an RNC in the W-CDMA UTRAN portion of the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9370 RNC when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent
PRELIMINARY

9370 RNC
9370 RNC in LTE
No changes are required in the 9370 RNC when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution as the 9370 RNC does not interact with the LTE network.

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 RNC, go to the following url:

93. To find all the documentation for the W-CDMA Solution, look under
UMTS/W-CDMA Solutions.
Select the Product Index and then search for 9370 RNC.
See especially, the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller Technical Description,
NN-20500-021.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9370 RNC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9370 RNC".
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9412 eNodeB
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the eNodeB
16-22
16-23
How it works
16-23
16-23
Hardware
16-24
Support of FDD
16-29
Software
16-29
16-29
User interfaces
16-30
16-30
About the eNodeB

What is the eNodeB?
The eNodeB is a term created for the LTE reference architecture to denote a more
powerful base transceiver station (BTS) that has been designed to fit into the flatter LTE
network.
PRELIMINARY
For more about the LTE specifications for the eUTRAN and the eNodeB, see Evolved
UTRAN (eUTRAN) (p. 1-31).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB?
The 9412 eNodeB is a compact network element that fills the LTE role of eNodeB in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. The 9412 eNodeB is a self-contained solution
that is designed to fit easily into small physical spaces and be extremely easy to install.
The 9412 eNodeB is often called the LTE cubeor the 9412 eNodeB Compact.
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
What does the 9412 eNodeB do?
The 9412 eNodeB is a network element that sends data to and receives data from the User
Equipment (UE). The 9412 eNodeB provides the physical radio link between the UE and
the evolved Packet Core (EPC) network, thus performing the base station function of the
Radio Access Network (RAN).
How it works
Transmission-related tasks
The 9412 eNodeB carries out the following transmission tasks during the life of a call:
Receives and sends radio signals to and from the antennas

Schedules uplink data from the UE and downlink data to the UE
Provides Ethernet links to the EPC elements and other eNodeBs
Communicates with both the user equipment (UE) and the Evolved Packet Core
(EPC)
Connects the subscribers UE to the network.

Benefits
This topic lists the advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.

PCMD
Per Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD) is a set of detailed data collected
on the major events associated with the processing of each connection within a session.
This data is typically collected from the eNodeB and the MME via count mechanisms in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Both of the Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB offerings are able to supply Per Call (or Connection)
Measurement Data (PCMD).
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the session/connection management software. The data is forwarded to static store on the
network node, and then ultimately forwarded to a northbound interface, where it can be
analyzed by a service provider postprocessor. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, the 9959 NPO performs post-processing on PCMD data.
For further information on the 9959 NPO and PCMD processing, see 9959 NPO
(p. 22-46).
Advantages of the 9412 eNodeB cube
The Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB cube has the following advantages:
Ultra-compact size - The ultra-compact 9412 eNodeB cube is designed to fit in small
spaces and be extremely easy to install, and is a fully-integrated version of the
eNodeB. Thus the 9412 eNodeB contains all required equipment, including the radios,
in one compact frame, which increases ease of installation.
Hardware
Purpose
This topic explains the hardware for the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
eNodeB parts
All Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB models share the following parts:
eNodeB radios, which send signals to/from the antennas

eNodeB Base Band Unit (BBU), which performs the following functions:
Sends Tx/Rx signals to and from the radio through CPRI link
Provides Ethernet interface to the network
Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB cube
PRELIMINARY
As a fully integrated system, the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB cube houses all required
parts of the eNodeB in one unit. Within this unit, the baseband functions are done in the
base band unit (BBU) and the radio functions are performed in the built-in Transmit
Receive Duplex Units (TRDUs) or in MultiCarrier Transceivers (MC-TRXs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-1 Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB Compact or LTE Cube
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
The Base Band Units are Controller units and Modem units.
The 9412 eNodeB can be installed in an indoor or outdoor cabinet.
The 9412 eNodeB can share antennas with co-located CDMA wireless networks.
The 9412 eNodeB can be housed in a cabinet dedicated to LTE RAN equipments or in a
cabinet supporting GSM, W-CDMA or CDMA RAN equipments (such as MBI, MBO,
PSU or CDMA cabinets).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controller unit
The following table gives the list of eCCM-U (enhanced Core Controller Module)
hardware versions supported in LE4.0:
Table 16-1
9412 eNodeB Compact Controllers in LE4.0
Controller naming
Hardware variant
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE
P0bis
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE
P2
Modem unit
The following table gives the list of the eCEM (enhanced Channel Element Module)
Table 16-2
9412 eNodeB Compact Modems in LE4.0
Modem naming
Hardware variant
eCEM-U (LTE only)
Transmit Receive Duplex unit (TRDU)
The following table gives the list of the TRDUs (Transmit Receive Duplex Units)
PRELIMINARY
Table 16-3
9412 eNodeB Compact TRDUs in LE4.0
TRDU Naming
Hardware Frequency Band

Variant
Carrier
Bandwith
Output RF
Power
TRDU2x40-07U
Band XIII (700 MHz

Upper)
10 MHz
2 x 40W
TRDU2x4007PS
Band XIV (700 MHz)
5 MHz
2 x 40W
TRDU2x40-08L
EDD band (800 MHz

Lower)
5 and 10 MHz
2 x 40W
TRDU2x40-08U
EDD band (800 MHz

Upper)
5 and 10 MHz
2 x 40W
TRDU2x60-26
Band VII (2600 MHz)
10 and 20 MHz
2 x 60W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Carrier Transceiver (MC-TRX)
The multi-technology MC-TRX (Multi-carrier transceiver) is used to support LTE + GSM

on single RF path. The same MC-TRX is connected to the GSM controller (SUM-X) and
to the LTE BBU Module.
The following figure shows the eNodeB architecture with MC-TRXs.
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
Figure 16-2 e-NodeB architecture with MC-TRXs
Note: Any mixture of TRDUs, MC-TRXs or RRHs modules within the same eNodeB
is not allowed.
The 9412 eNodeB with MC-TRXs is housed in the MBI5 or MBO2 GSM cabinets.
The following picture shows the MC-TRX module.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-3 Hardware for the MC-TRX module
The following table gives the list of the MultiCarrier TRXs (MC-TRXs) hardware
versions supported in LE4.0:
PRELIMINARY
Table 16-4
9412 eNodeB Compact MC-TRXs in LE4.0
MC-TRX HW
Hardware Frequency Band

variant
Carrier
Bandwith
Output RF
Power
SU-TMXA18
5 and 10 MHz
60W total
3GPP Band III (1800 MHz

DCS band)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Support of FDD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support of FDD
What are FDD and TDD
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD) are different
multiplexing schemes that can be used to separate the uplink and downlink signals in a
wireless network. Both FDD and TDD can be used with LTE.
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
Supports FDD
The 9412 eNodeB Compact supports FDD.
Software
Software
Describing the software on the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB is outside the scope of this
document. For information on the Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB software, see the documents
listed at the end of this chapter.

Three connections
The Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB has three connections to other network elements within
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
S1-MME interface between the 9412 eNodeB and the 9471 MME
S1-U interface between the 9412 eNodeB and the serving gateway 7750 SGW
X2 interface between the 9412 eNodeB and other 9412 eNodeBs Note that the X2
interface is a logical interface and does not have to be a physical one. In the service
provider's network, 9412 eNodeBs are typically not physically connected to each
other.
Table 16-5
9412 eNodeB connections to other network elements

Network Element
Purpose
S1-U
to 7750 SR-SGW
User and control traffic, to establish the user

plane
S1-MME
to 9471 MME
User traffic, for signaling and authentication
X2
other eNodeBs
There are two X2 interfaces that link the

eNodeBs together and are used for handovers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Interface
PRELIMINARY

9412 eNodeB
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
Managed by the 5620 SAM
Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeBs are managed by the 5620 SAM.

100BaseT interface
Additionally, the eNodeB has a 100BaseT interface allowing connection to a laptop

computer for diagnosing improper system operation.

For information on the 9412 eNodeB
For a list of recommended documentation on the AlcatelLucent 9412 eNodeB, see Table
B-9, Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access (p. B-18).
For more on the user interfaces
For more information on the user interfaces and OAM&P for the 9412 eNodeB, see the
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Solution Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
(OA&M), 418-111-001.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9412 eNodeB. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword eNodeB".
PRELIMINARY
For a list of recommended classes, see also the Recommended classes for LTE
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

This section describes the LTE RRH Product Family as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Part of a distributed eNodeB solution
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the LTE RRH Product Family is used as
part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution. For a description of the Distributed eNodeB
Solution, see About the Distributed eNodeB Solution (p. 16-40).
Contents
16-31
Advantages
16-33
Hardware
16-35
16-36
Software
16-38
16-38

What is the LTE RRH Product Family?
The LTE Remote Radio Head (RRH) Product Family (formerly called 9442 Remote Radio
Head [RRH] 2x) is a set of radio product offerings built to provide simultaneous support
for both 3G and LTE networks.
The RRH product family is designed for macro-cellular applications, and is an alternative
to conventional Macro BTS.
Note: LTE RRH 8x here means eight transmit paths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Note: LTE RRH 2x here means two transmit paths.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of the LTE RRH Product Family
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE RRH Product Family is designed to provide service providers
with the means to achieve high quality and maximum capacity coverage with minimum
site requirements. Members of the LTE RRH Product Family provide a zero footprint
solution and noise-free modules, which minimizes the impact on the environment and
makes placement far easier.
Characteristics
Characteristics of the LTE RRH Product Family include the following:
Highly Integrated RF (radio, amplifier, filter) components
Small size resulting in significant reduction in eNodeB size and footprint

High Efficiency - utilizing state of the art amplifier technology resulting in significant
reduction in power consumption
Optimized for advanced antenna technologies demanded by LTE, with scalability in

mind
Simultaneous LTE and 3G operation up to 20 MHz
2 x 40W or 8 x 5W transmit power to enable 2x2 MIMO
Noise figure below 2 dB (AWS)
CPRI based interface

Low power consumption 280 W = Lower OPEX
Compact and Lightweight
Approximately height 620 mm x width 270 mm x depth 170 mm (24.4 x 10.63 x
6.7 inches)
Approximately less than 20 kg (44 lb) (w/o mounting kit)
Operating Range -40 C to +50 C
Flexibility
Daisy Chaining to existing RRH
Modular extension for 4x Rx support
PRELIMINARY
Note: For precise characteristics of the equipments, please refer to the LTE RRH
datasheets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages
Advantages of the Distributed eNodeB Solution
One significant benefit of the Alcatel-Lucent Distributed eNodeB Solution (described in

About the Distributed eNodeB Solution (p. 16-40)) is that service providers can
position the LTE RRH Product Family radios close to the antennas and have the LTE
RRH Product Family radios connect to the base station unit. The intention behind the
Distributed eNodeB Solution is to push the radio as close to the antenna as possible.
PRELIMINARY

Flexibility in radio installation
The radio used in the Distributed eNodeB Solution, the LTE RRH, is a zero footprint,
noise-free module that does not require a cabinet and minimizes the impact on the
environment.
For example, the RRH2x40 can be either floor, pole or wall mounted.
Flexibility in placement
The RRH can be placed at a significant distance away from the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU.
The LTE RRH can be placed remotely, such as on the roof of a building, while the base
band unit part can be placed a significant distance away, such as in the basement of the
building. Thus the distributed architecture of the 9926 DBS allows service providers to
work around space limitations.
Faster and cheaper installations
Installation of the LTE RRH components can be done more quickly and more cheaply
than before.
The LTE RRH is an easy-to-install product: the installation can be done by a single
person; no cranes are needed to hoist the BTS cabinet to the rooftop.
A site can be in operation in less than one day, a fraction of the time required for a
traditional Macro BTS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-33
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Due to its small size and weight, operators can locate the LTE RRH where RF
engineering deems ideal, trade-offs between available sites and RF optimum sites are
minimized
The LTE RRH is a zero footprint solution and a noise-free module: this allows for
simpler negotiation with site landlords and minimizes the impact on the environment
and neighborhood. Thus fewer civil works are required.
There is no need for reinforcing steel frames to support heavy outdoor Macro BTS
cabinet (around 300Kg). RRH2x40 weighs less than 20kg, while RRH8x5 is around
25 kg.
PRELIMINARY

Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Smaller installation footprint
The LTE RRH Product Family has a smaller installation footprint, resulting in the
following benefits:
Less rental area: The footprint of a cluster of LTE RRH is much less than the footprint
of a traditional Macro BTS cabinet (in some cases also transmission cabinet, battery
cabinet and power distribution cabinet) therefore the monthly rental fees are
considerably reduced (less footprint and weight).
Less equipment on site:

The digital LTE Module does not need to be installed on the rooftop and can be
placed in the basement (with fiber running to LTE RRH in rooftop) or in
centralized base band hotels (if dark fiber is available between sites).
No need for TMAs due to the fact that the feeder losses are dramatically reduced
(when the LTE RRH is mounted close to antennas)
Improved RF performance (over the Macro BTS): Compared to a conventional Macro
BTS (equipped with MCPA 60W) that delivers about 20W at the antenna level
(assuming 3dB feeder + TMA losses), LTE RRH (assuming 0.8 dB jumper loss)
delivers 65% more RF power while consuming half the power.
Reduced CAPEX
The LTE RRH Product Family reduces a service provider's CAPEX in the following
ways:
Where dark fiber is available, Node Bs can be centralized (base band hotels), thus
further reducing the site construction and acquisition cost, normally higher in urban
areas: cost is further decreased by the use of one single fiber (thanks to single-mode
CWDM feature) per remote site (assuming daisy-chain), leading to a dark fiber lease
cost reduction factor of up to 6.
A digital LTE Module can serve several remote sites and Channel Element pooling
amongst them further reduces equipment costs.
Reduced OPEX
PRELIMINARY
The LTE RRH Product Family reduces a service provider's OPEX in the following ways:
Up to 50% reduction in power consumption.

20% less site visits: as the Channel Element cards are in the digital LTE Module
cabinet, there is no need to visit the remote site for capacity upgrades.
The LTE RRH has a high MTBF and uses natural convection cooling to produce a
zero noise high reliability fan-less solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-34
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation and management is simplified as number of eNodeBs that need to be

managed is reduced (one digital LTE Module can serve several remote sites) and they
are in the same location.
Transmission costs are reduced as no leased E1/T1 is needed, instead owned and/or
leased optical fiber between the LTE RRH site and a centralized base station.
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
Product description
The LTE RRH Product Family products are all self-contained radio modules.
Figure 16-4 Hardware for the Sample RRH
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-35
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support for 2X2 MIMO configurations
While the LTE RRH Product Family does contain models that support either lesser or
greater output power per path, all products in the LTE RRH family are design to support
2X2 MIMO configurations.
Supports up to four-way Rx diversity
All products in the LTE RRH Product Family also support up to 4-way Rx diversity.
Note: 4-way Rx here means four receive paths.
Variable bandwidth support
RRH modules are available to support a variety of frequencies to support both LTE and
non-LTE networks.

What are FDD and TDD?
Supports FDD and TDD
The LTE RRH Product Family supports both FDD and TDD.
Naming convention
TD-RRHx products support TDD.
PRELIMINARY
FD-RRHx products support FDD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-36
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Differences
TDD radio products differ from FDD radio products because of the underlying technical
differences. The following table gives the list of RRH hardware versions supported in
LE4.0:
Table 16-6
LTE RRH Product Family that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

RRH Naming
Hardware
Variant
Frequency Band
Output
RF Power
Supported
multiplexing
scheme
RRH2x40-AWS
without RDEM
P1.1, P2,
AM1
Band IV AWS (2100/1700

MHz)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-AWS with
RDEM
AM1
Band IV AWS (2100/1700

MHz)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-07L
P1.1, P2,
AM1
Band XII, XVII (700 MHz

Lower)
2 x 40W
FDD
Band XIII (700 MHz Upper)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-07U
RRH2x40-08L
P1.1, P2
EDD band (800 MHz Lower)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-08U
P1.1, P2
EDD band (800 MHz Upper)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-26 without
RDEM
NG3
Band VII (2600 MHz)
2 x 40W
FDD
RRH2x40-26 with
RDEM
NG3
Band VII (2600 MHz)
2 x 40W
FDD
TD-RRH2x20-23
G1 (former
P2)
Band 40 (2300-2400 MHz)
2 x 20W
TDD
TD-RRH2x20-2350
G1.1
Band 40 (2320-2370 MHz)
2 x 20W
TDD
TD-RRH2x20-234R
G2
Band 40 (2300-2400 MHz)
2 x 20W
TDD
Band 38 (2570-2620 MHz)
2 x 20W
TDD
Band 38 (2575-2615 MHz)
8 x 5W
TDD
TD-RRH2x20-26
TD-RRH8x5-26
P2.1
Note: RDEM is for Receive Diversity Expansion Module.

For more information on the differences, consult the documentation listed at the end of
this section, or contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-37
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Software
LTE RRH products are configured, controlled and monitored from the OMC through the
digital LTE Module and optical link. SW and firmware downloading is supported. for
each RRH product.

To find RRH customer documentation
To access documentation on the LTE RRH, carry out the following steps:
Go to the following url:

(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/ lte/)
Choose an LTE release and click on it.
Click on LTE LEx Manuals and Guides where x stands for the software release
Click on Documents/Manuals
Choose a release
Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or
LTE.
Result: A list of customer documentation appears.
Go to the box called Model/Subgroup and from the drop-down select LTE RRH.
Result: A list appears of customer documentation for the network element you
selected.
For more information on navigating through the OLCS site, see Accessing and
navigating the OLCS web site (p. B-9).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the LTE RRH Product Family. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatellucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword eNodeB".
PRELIMINARY
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-38
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

This section describes the 9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit as used in the
Part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 9926 digital 2U eNodeB Base Band
Unit or 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is used as part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution (9926
Distributed Base Station or 9926 DBS), which is also described in this section.
Simultaneous LTE and non-LTE on the same radios
This section also discusses the use of the R-OCM module in the 9226 d2U BBU. The
R-OCM module gives a service provider the opportunity to use the same radios for LTE
and non-LTE transmissions simultaneously.
Contents
16-40
16-43
16-43
Hardware
16-44
16-45
Software
16-47
16-47
User interface
16-49
16-49
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-39
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Logical, not physical architecture
The LTE reference architecture requirements for the eNodeB are logical, not physical.
Alcatel-Lucent designers have taken advantage of the flexibility of the LTE reference
architecture requirements to provide a distributed solution for an eNodeB. This topic
explains the Alcatel-Lucent Distributed eNodeB Solution.
What is the Distributed eNodeB Solution?
This Distributed eNodeB Solution is an eNodeB in which two major components are
geographically separated. The components can be placed hundreds of feet apart and still
work together as a fully functioning eNodeB.
The Distributed eNodeB Solution is designed to provide operators with the means to
achieve a high quality and maximum capacity coverage with minimum site requirements.
Components
The Distributed eNodeB Solution is comprised of the following:
Antennas
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, the Base Band Unit (BBU)
LTE RRH, the radio component
Architecture
PRELIMINARY
The following figure shows the architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-40
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-5 Architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution
PRELIMINARY

Linked by optical fibers
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU and the LTE RRH radios are linked by optical fibers,
carrying downlink and uplink base band digital signals along with OAM information.
Flexibility in placement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-41
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Obviously the Distributed eNodeB Solution offers greater flexibility in placement for an
eNodeB. For example, the radios in the distributed eNodeB Solution can be placed
remotely, such as on the roof of a building, while the base band unit component can be
placed at quite a distance, such as in the basement of the same building. Thus the
distributed architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution allows service providers to
work around problems of limited space.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example: rooftop installations
The advantages of using Alcatel-Lucent LTE RRH to replace a traditional Macro BTS are
most evident in rooftop installations. In fact, the limited space available in some sites may
either prevent the installation of traditional Macro BTS equipment or require costly
cranes to be employed, thus coverage holes may appear. These sites can however host
LTE RRH installation providing more flexible site selection and therefore improved
network quality. In addition installation time and costs are greatly reduced.
Flexibility in radio installation
The radio used in the distributed eNodeB Solution, the LTE RRH, is a zero footprint,
noise-free module that does not require a cabinet and can be placed at a significant
distance away from the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU.
Low power consumption
The LTE RRH Product Family used in the Distributed eNodeB Solution has low power
consumption, which helps the service provider work around power constraints.
Shared use of cabinets and RF assets
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is a very compact 2U (88mm) unit and takes up little space.
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, along with TRDUs and an MC-TRX RF Module, can be
installed in free space in existing Alcatel-Lucent macro cabinets, compact cabinets, and
multi-standard base station cabinets. Shared use of existing cabinet space allows LTE to
share the same RF assets (radio, amplifier, filter, antennas, power equipment) as CDMA,
GSM or WCDMA and maintains the existing footprint.
Support of PCMD
The Distributed eNodeB Solution, like all Alcatel-Lucent eNodeBs is able to supply Per
Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD).
PRELIMINARY
Per Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD) is a set of detailed data collected
on the major events associated with the processing of each connection within a session.
This data is typically collected from the eNodeB and the MME via count mechanisms in
the session/connection management software. The data is forwarded to static store on the
network node, and then ultimately forwarded to a northbound interface, where it can be
analyzed by a service provider postprocessor. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, the 9959 NPO performs post-processing on PCMD data.
For further information on the 9959 NPO and PCMD processing, see 9959 NPO
(p. 22-46).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-42
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU?
The 9926 d2U (digital 2U) Base Band Unit (BBU) is the part of the 9926 DBS that
includes the eNodeB controller and the baseband processing boards (modems) in a very
compact 2U (88mm) unit. The d2U eNodeB can be installed in free space of existing
Alcatel-Lucent macro cabinets, compact cabinets, and multi-standard base station
cabinets. This method allows LTE to share the same radio frequency (RF) assets (radio,
amplifier, filter, antennas, power equipment) as a non-LTE wireless network and maintain
the existing CDMA, GSM or WCDMA footprint.
PRELIMINARY

Role of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU performs the following functions:
Sends Tx/Rx signals to and from the radio through CPRI link
Provides Ethernet interface to the network

Advantages
The benefits of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU include the following:
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is a very compact 2U (88mm) unit that takes up little
space and can be installed in existing cabinets.
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is easy to install; it is so lightweight that it can be
carried by one person.
The modem and controller in the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU are field replaceable.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-43
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU hardware
The following figure shows the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU hardware.
Figure 16-6 Hardware for the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
The 9926 d2U consists of four types of hardware boards:
The controller unit, or eCCM-U, controls OA&M management, transport,

external/internal alarm connectivity and external synchronization reference interfaces.
The modem unit, or eCEM-U, is the main call processing engine performing base
band transmit/receive digital signal processing. A d2U eNodeB supports one to three
CEMs.
The Rack Back Plane, or RBP, supports all internal links between the CCM and CEM
modules.
The Rack User Commissioning, or RUC, provides for the commissioning of
nonvolatile memory and fan alarms.
The Transmit Receive Duplex Units (TRDUs) perform the RF processing for the LTE base
station. A TRDU includes a radio with two transmitters and two receivers, two TX power
amplifiers, and double duplex filter in a single shelf-mounted module.
Figure 16-7 Transmit Receive Duplex Unit (TRDU) hardware
PRELIMINARY
Compact size
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU has a compact design (2U height) and a minimal weight
(<12Kg).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-44
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cards used for LTE
LTE use of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU relies on the following digital modules, each on a
separate card:
CCM (Core Controller Module); BTS controller (modem to radio communication, I/F
to backhaul)
CEM (Channel Element Module); Modem
PRELIMINARY


What are FDD and TDD?
Supports FDD and TDD
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU supports both FDD and TDD.
Sub-racks
Some sub-racks in the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU are individualized to support either FDD
or TDD. The following table gives the list of the BBU shelf hardware versions supported
in LE4.0:
Table 16-7
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU sub-racks that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
In LE4.0, this component
supports this multiplexing scheme
d2UV3 (9926 BBUv1)
FDD
d2UV5 (9926 BBUv2)
Both FDD and TDD
Note: The component d2UV4 (9926 BBUv1+) is no more supported in LE4.0.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-45
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controller unit
The eCCM-U (enhanced Core Controller Module) supports both FDD and TDD, (but
different variants of it). The following table lists the hardware versions supported in
LE4.0:
Table 16-8
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Controllers that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
Controller naming
Hardware
Variant
Supported
multiplexing
scheme
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE (former eCCM-U)
P0bis
FDD
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE (former eCCM-U)
P2
FDD
eCCM-U_(high CPRI rate)_GE
TDD
Modem unit
The eCEM (enhanced Channel Element Module) supports FDD and the bCEM
(High-capacity Channel Element Module) supports both FDD and TDD. The following
table lists the hardware versions supported in LE4.0:
Table 16-9
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Modems that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
Modem naming
Hardware Variant
Supported multiplexing
scheme
eCEM-U (LTE only)
FDD
bCEM (-48VDC)
P1.0
TDD
bCEM (wide range)
P1.1
TDD
PRELIMINARY
Note: The modem bCEM P0.1 (TDD) is no more supported in LE4.0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-46
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Software-defined load
The 9926 LTE Digital Module is common between LTE and W-CDMA (9926 d2U). This
means that the same digital rack can be configured by Software to operate in WCDMA or
LTE technology.
PRELIMINARY

Software changes to support LTE
To support LTE instead of W-CDMA, a different software load on 9926 d2U is required.
Both software loads are loaded on to each 9926 d2U and the switching between loads
occurs automatically, as needed.

What is the R-OCM?
The Reverse Optical Communication Module (R-OCM) is an optional circuit pack that
acts as an interface module to connect the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU to the existing
OneBTS Digital Shelf. The R-OCM converts the optical Common Public Radio Interface
(CPRI) from the BBU and connects to the OneBTS backplane to facilitate use of OneBTS
RF assets. The R-OCM gets its name because the R-OCM has the inverse functionality of
the existing OneBTS CPRI Module (OCM) available on OneBTS (to support CPRI
connection out to remote radio equipment).
Use with both CDMA and 1xEV-DO
The R-OCM module is used with the 92xx series of base stations that are currently
supporting 3G1X and/or EVDO radio access technologies.
R-OCM connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-47
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Customers who have deployed Alcatel-Lucent systems can add LTE capability to that
system by inserting a Reverse OneBTS CPRI Module (R-OCM) in the OneBTS digital
shelf and cabling the R-OCM to the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU that is part of the LTE
Distributed eNodeB Solution. The new R-OCM module replaces a slot of a CCU (CDMA
modem) and connects on one side with the LTE 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU through CPRI
links, and on the other side with the CDMA BTS backplane that itself connects to the
radio modules. Thus, the R-OCM provides a cross connection between the LTE eNodeB
and CDMA (3G1x/EV-DO) base stations.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of the R-OCM is to enable Modcell 4.0B and Compact 4.0B base stations to
simultaneously support both CDMA and LTE in the same RF chain in the same base
station.
How it works
The R-OCM can be situated in any of the channel unit slots in the Modcell 4.0b digital
shelf (DS) and can support up to 6 MCRB radios. All downlink signals sent over the
CPRI link interface from the eNB will be de-serialized by the R-OCM and sent over the
ModCell 4.0b backplane to the MCRB assets. Conversely, all uplink signals will be
serialized by the R-OCM and sent over the CPRI link to the LTE eNB. Thus the R-OCM
hardware will facilitate the IQ and C&M data exchange common among ALU remote
radio equipment (RE) assets. As a result, the LTE eNB views the R-OCM as a set of
pseudo or virtual Remote Radio Heads (vRRHs).
Benefits
Use of the R-OCM provides the following benefits:
Simultaneous reuse of radios - After the R-OCM is installed, the same radio can be
used for CDMA and LTE.
Asset protection - OneBTS RF assets can be used for LTE upgrade instead of
scrapped.
Smooth transition to LTE - Use of R-OCMs gives CDMA service providers who
currently have the OneBTS platform a smooth transition to simultaneous support for
CDMA and LTE.
Internal combining - Use of R-OCMs gives the ability to provide internal combining.
Internal combining allows use of same antenna paths without needing external
combiners/duplexers. Use on internal combining eliminates the dB loss on the cables
that is caused by external combiners/duplexers.
PRELIMINARY
Ease of migration to LTE
As mentioned, introduction of the R-OCM allows a smooth migration path to LTE for our
existing 3G1x customers who have the OneBTS platform. When 4G technology is added,
the customer simply adds a R-OCM to an available channel card slot inside the OneBTS
shelf and an LTE BBU, RF assets (including radio, amplifier and filter panel) can be
reused as long as there is sufficient RF power available at the amplifier. If more RF power
or an additional transmit path is required, additional amplifiers can be added in the same
way that a CDMA carrier is added. This migration strategy allows significant asset
protection by reusing the RF assets. Another benefit is that this upgrade strategy requires
a relatively simple installation/upgrade effort.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-48
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unique in the industry
Alcatel-Lucent's R-OCM is unique in the industry. No other competitor offers this

opportunity to use radios for LTE and non-LTE transmissions simultaneously.
User interface
PRELIMINARY

Managed by the 5060 SAM
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is managed by the 5620 SAM.

To find 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU documentation
To access documentation on the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, carry out the following steps:

(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/ lte/)
Click on Documents/Manuals
Choose a release
Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or
LTE.
Go to the box called Model/Subgroup and from the drop-down select 9926 D2U
BBU.
selected.
For more information on navigating through the OLCS site, see Accessing and
Training
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-49
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatellucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-50
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
17
17
Network
elements used in
the Backhaul Part of the
Transport Network
Overview
Purpose
how LTE backhaul differs from other types of backhaul

the impact of LTE on the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
help that is available with designing and optimizing your LTE transport network
Sources of further information
The network elements used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support
the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Contents
17-3
Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
17-3
Connectivity models
17-5
Security
17-5
Changes caused by LTE
17-6
Challenges for the customer
17-6
Solution
17-7
7705 SAR
17-9
About the 7705 SAR
17-9
17-10
Hardware
17-10
Software
17-12
User Interfaces
17-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
How it works
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the

Transport Network
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-12
7750 SR
17-14
About the 7750 SR
17-14
How it works
17-15
Advantages
17-15
Hardware
17-17
Software
17-18
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network
17-18
17-20
17-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network used within the
Contents
17-3
Connectivity models
17-5
Security
17-5
17-6
17-6
Solution
17-7

Introduction
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network can be viewed as a multi-segment

architecture with function and scale dividing the network into three separate segments.
These segments are explained in this topic.
Cell site segment
The cell site segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out the
following functions:
aggregator
multiservice support (TDM, ATM, IP, ETH over packet)
Ingress SLA enforcement in upstream, that is, to make sure that the upstream traffic is
in line with the agreed Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Network Clock delivery to base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The recommended solution for the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network will vary
depending on the access technology. Potential solutions include the following:
a point to point (tree, chain) or a ring topology, for example:

point to point (PTP) fiber: tree or ring
Packet MicroWave (MW): ring, chain, tree, or mesh
Residential tree topology
The cell site solution can be based if necessary on leased backhaul.

Note that ring networks provide a higher availability than point to point networks.
Aggregation segment
The function of the aggregation segment is to reduce the number of lower speed
interfaces in the MLS front-ending the PGW or the MLS.
The aggregation segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out the
aggregation of MBH traffic

connectivity of the X2 interface (a new interface for LTE)
Network Clock distribution (plus optimizations to deal with network clock quality and
scalability)
Technologies used in the aggregation segment include the following:
Fiber
MW
SDH leased links
Access multiplexer
Topologies used in the aggregation segment include the following:
ptp
rings
mesh
Note: The closer you are to the network controllers, the higher the relevance of ring or
mesh networks.
PRELIMINARY
Mobile gateways segment
The function of the switching segment is to connect the Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network with the RAN Controllers such as SGWs and MMEs for LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
The mobile gateways segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out
Providing aggregator and multiservice support (TDM, ATM, ETH, IP)

Dealing with following:
Scalability of network controllers VLAN, ARP
Redundancy of network controllers
Simpler operations
Connectivity with mobile core
Ingress SLA enforcement in downstream, that is, to make sure that the downstream
traffic is in line with the agreed-upon Service Level Agreement (SLA)
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Mobile Gateways can be redundant.
Connectivity models
Multiple models
On top of physical infrastructure of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network described
in Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network (p. 17-3), multiple logical
connectivity models can be supported, including the following:
Virtual Private Wire Service (VPWS) (TDM, ATM or ETH) containing Layer 2 point
to point service with possibly an optimization to improve scalability
Multipoint layer 2 with E-LAN or E-Tree for IP or Ethernet base stations
Multipoint layer 3, with IP only and a mixture of IP and layer 2 multi-point
Security
Security
From a security standpoint, either the underlying delivery network is trusted, or the
packet delivery network must enforce security with special mechanisms. One of the ways
of ensuring that data (user or control) is not corrupted and not tampered with is by the use
of IPsec which uses encryption to tunnel packets securely through the network ensuring
data integrity and privacy.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carries more traffic
LTE networks carry significantly more traffic in the backhaul between the UE and the
Core Network than in other non-LTE Radio Access Networks. As fourth generation cell
sites are rolled out in support of Long Term Evolution (LTE) services, and the increase in
mobile data services continues unabated, it is expected that average bandwidth
requirements will increase to tens of Mb/s per site.
Changes
LTE traffic brings the following changes to the network:
More bandwidth
Capacity for base station to base station communication (X2 protocol)

Flex architecture
IP-only base stations
Use of IPsec tunnels within the network, for example, to protect data being sent over a
leased network segment
More QOS classes
Need for synchronization solution over packet data
IP traffic only
Flatter architecture
Simpler architecture, with a reduced number of network elements

New problems
LTE brings new problems and challenges for service provider backhaul networks. To
successfully implement LTE, a service provider must do the following:
PRELIMINARY
Reduce and control network costs

Maintain competitiveness while still meeting end-user demand for new multimedia
services
Manage increased traffic driven by new broadband services
Transport traffic efficiently
TDM backhaul too costly
The price of TDM backhaul to cover the greatly increased demands of LTE traffic are
prohibitive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Need to switch to packet-based transmissions
Packet-based technologies offer the only competitive solution. Packet-based technologies

can be used over a variety of currently-existing physical media, without incurring the
expense of purchasing additional TDM backhaul.
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Solution
Solution
Alcatel-Lucent's solution for the transport problems faced by service providers migrating
to LTE is the Mobile Backhaul Solution.
What is the Mobile Backhaul Solution?
The Mobile Backhaul Solution is a product offering developed by Alcatel-Lucent that

provides the industry's first and most comprehensive framework for mobile transport
evolution to all-IP.
Completely packet-based
The Mobile Backhaul Solution is made up of completely packet-based technologies that

can be used to increase the capacity of any wireless technology.
Key network elements
Described in the rest of this chapter are two key building blocks for a Mobile Backhaul
Solution:
7705 SAR
7750 SR
There are, however, many other network elements that are be used to make up a complete
Mobile Backhaul Solution, which are commonly represented in diagrams in this
document by the MT/BT function and the MG/BG function.
MT/BT function
The MSP Termination Device (MT) is a cell site device providing aggregation of base
station (BS) traffic and termination of Mobile Backhaul (MBH) network at the cell site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The BTP Termination Device (BT) is a cell site device providing backhaul network
termination in a backhaul transport provider application and aggregation of base station
traffic from multiple mobile operators at the cell site.
PRELIMINARY

Solution
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG/BG function
The MSP Aggregation Gateway (MG) is a device at the MTSO site providing aggregation
and grooming of traffic from multiple cell sites and interfaces to any relevant Network
Controller (NC).
The BTP Aggregation Gateway (BG) is a device at the MTSO providing aggregation of
traffic from multiple cell sites and demarcation/handoff to the MSP MG in a backhaul
transport provider application.
PRELIMINARY
For more about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, its network elements, and documentation
and training for the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see Appendix D, Mobile Backhaul
Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
7705 SAR
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the 7705 SAR as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 7705 SAR
17-9
How it works
17-10
Hardware
17-10
Software
17-12
User Interfaces
17-12
17-12
About the 7705 SAR

What is the 7705 SAR?
As used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent 7705 Service
Aggregation Router (SAR) is a cell site edge aggregation platform providing Ethernet
Backhaul transport for the eNodeB.
What is Ethernet Backhaul?
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) is a solution that allows both LTE and CDMA applications to
be transported using Internet Protocol (IP) over Ethernet facilities.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

How it works
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 7705 SAR do?
The primary function of the 7705 SAR is to aggregate LTE and CDMA 1x and EVDO
traffic from macro cell sites and provide backhaul transport of this traffic to the Mobile
Switching Office (MSO). At the MSO the traffic is typically terminated at the IP/MPLS
layers on the 7750 SR.
Provides for routing
In an LTE network, the 7705 SAR provides a demarcation point between the eNodeB and
the User-to-Network Interface (UNI) of the Ethernet Access Transport Network (EATN).
(The UNI is the EATN interface facing toward the cell site. UNI stands for User-Network
Interface.)
In combination with the 7750 SR that functions as an MLS, the 7705 SAR provides for
routing between the eNodeB and the various LTE and OAM&P elements.
Hardware
Hardware description
PRELIMINARY
Industry-leading scalability and density is provided in the 7705 SAR-8, a two rack unit (2
RU) version of the 7705 SAR that supports up to 96 T1/E1 Any Service, Any Port
(ASAP) ports. The platform can be optionally configured with a redundant control and
switch module and uplinks. The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR-8 has eight slots; two are
allocated for control and switch modules (CSMs), with the remaining six being available
for user traffic adapter cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Figure 17-1 Hardware for the 7705 SAR-8
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fixed configuration version
The 7705 SAR-F is a fixed configuration version of the Service Aggregation Router. The
7705 SAR-F is packaged in a one rack unit (1 RU) high form factor that supports up to 16
T1/E1 any service any port (ASAP) ports. The ASAP ports can be configured to support
ATM, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA), TDM and MLPPP. Six 10/100 Base-T
auto-sensing Ethernet ports are provided, plus two further ports supporting 10/100/1000
Base TX with small form factor pluggable optics (SFPs).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Software
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR owes much of its development heritage to the
Alcatel-Lucent Service Router (SR) product line. Sharing much of the market-leading
Service Router Operating System (SR OS) feature set, the Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR
brings a powerful, service-oriented capability to the RAN.
User Interfaces
5620 SAM
The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR greatly augments the IP/MPLS RAN transport solution
with end-to-end LTE IP service management under the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM. The
Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR has a full set of operations, administration and maintenance
(OAM) features. These features, when under the control of the Alcatel-Lucent 5620
management portfolio, ensure rapid fault detection as well as efficient backhaul
troubleshooting.

For more information on the 7705 SAR, see the following documents and class.
PRELIMINARY
Table 17-1
Documentation on the 7705 SAR
Document Number
Document Title
3HE 05967 AAAA TQZZA
7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide
7705 SAR Interface Configuration Guide
7705 SAR MPLS Guide
7705 SAR OAM and Diagnostics Guide
Quality of Service Guide
Router Configuration Guide
Routing Protocols Guide
Services Guide
System Management Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7705 SAR. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7705 SAR.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

Overview
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 7750 Service Router (SR) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 7750 SR
17-14
How it works
17-15
Advantages
17-15
Hardware
17-17
Software
17-18
17-18
17-20
17-20
About the 7750 SR

What is the 7750 SR?
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router (SR) product family is a suite of multiservice
edge routers designed to deliver high-performance, high availability routing with
service-aware operations, administration, management, and provisioning. The 7750 SR
also serves as a host for other key LTE network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
Role of the 7750 SR
The main function of the 7750 SR router is to provide combined IP/MPLS service-aware
aggregation in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network and between MSOs within the
Core Network and other parts of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network.
PRELIMINARY

How it works
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provides converged network infrastructure
The 7750 SR integrates the scalability, resiliency, and predictability of MPLS along with
the bandwidth and economics of Ethernet and a broad selection of legacy interfaces to
enable a converged network infrastructure for the delivery of next-generation services.
Multiple deployment options
The 7750 SR has an advanced and comprehensive feature set that enables the 7750 SR to
be deployed as an aggregation router in mobile backhaul applications, or as a mobile
gateway (MGW) for wireless networks. The 7750 SR can also be used as a Broadband
Network Gateway (BNG) for residential services, as a Multiservice Edge for Carrier
Ethernet and IP VPN business services. With support for service enabled high density
10GigE and 100GigE interfaces, the 7750 SR is also well suited for core routing
applications. Available in five chassis variants, the 7750 SR scales from 40 Gb/s to 2 Tb/s
of capacity, providing cost-effective solutions to address the smallest to the largest
network locations.
Advantages
Benefits
The 7750 SR offers the service provider the following benefits:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
High-bandwidth, high- performance user plane processing

The 7750 SR has a unique product architecture with inhouse advanced packet
processing technology (FP2) . The 7750 SR has a wireline performance of up to 25
Gbps bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet processing turned on (for
example, security and deep packet inspection [DPI]), the performance is up to 10
Gbps.
Fully redundant hardware and software with advanced high reliability features
The 7750 SR has availability levels of 99.9999%, which are needed to achieve or
improve QoE for voice and data customers.
Increased revenues with innovative, differentiated services
PRELIMINARY

Advantages
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Support for advanced networking services allows service providers to capitalize on

information embedded in the network to provide subscriber-centric Internet and
connectivity services. Subscriber, service, and application awareness can be used to
provide differential QoS treatment of higher-value traffic streams and manage the
online experience.
Service Awareness
The advanced gateway product architecture of the 7750 allows wirespeed
performance with high-scale, dynamic in-band processing of L4-L7 traffic in millions
of IP flows The 7750 SR also has application awareness of connections, traffic flows
and their mapping to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing
new service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service
requirements. Service awareness is also important for advanced packet processing
such as DPI.
Reduced operational expense
By combining wireline and wireless services on a 7750 SR-based converged provider
edge, network operations are simplified because all services run over a platform with
consistent feature set, operational model, and management, while supporting the
service scalability required to combine services. As legacy services are migrated to
the new converged service network, the legacy networks that carried the service can
be decommissioned, further simplifying overall network operations and expenditure.
In addition, the 7750 SR has numerous features for automated provisioning of
subscribers. Services, based on service templates and interacting with other
operational systems for authentication and authorization, continually evolve in step
with customer requirements providing an unprecedented level of investment
protection.
Investment protection
From its introduction, the 7750 SR family has evolved with customer feature and
scaling requirements. The 7750 SR sophisticated and flexible hardware has a track
record of allowing new features and enhancements to be introduced in-place in
software, rather than through a rapid series of ever-changing hardware iterations. The
award-winning FP2 network processing silicon ensures 7750 SR platform capacity
and service scale can continually evolve in step with customer requirements providing
an unprecedented level of investment protection.
Environmentally friendly
Pioneering advances in power efficiency are incorporated into each member of the
Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR family, reducing the expense of both powering and cooling
when comparing products with less advanced silicon technology. Combined with
environmentally sensitive manufacturing processes, careful materials selection, and a
view to sustainable product life cycle management, the 7750 SR family assists service
providers in reducing their environmental impact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
Diagram
The following diagram shows the basic hardware of the 7750 SR as used in the LTE
Network.
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 17-2 Hardware for the 7750 SR
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Software
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Own software release
The 7750 gateway release is delivered on its own software release, in addition to the
standard 7750 SR-OS release.
For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation and
classes listed at the end of this section.

Aggregation
Typically located in a hub or mobile switching office (MSO), the 7750 SR is the
multiservice edge aggregation router within the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
that terminates all of the Ethernet IP/MPLS traffic coming from the eNodeBs and routes it
to the Evolved Packet Core. This same 7750 SR can perform the aggregation routing and
multi-layer switching functions within a CDMA Backhaul Network and forward this
traffic to the appropriate CDMA 1X voice or EVDO network. The 7750 SR is able to
provide this service differentiation of both LTE and CDMA traffic using its advanced
IP/MPLS and QoS capabilities. The 7750 SR is also a high-performance, scalable,
service-aware core router with 2 Terabits capacity and high-density FE/GE, 10GE and
100GE interfaces.
Example
PRELIMINARY
The following figure shows how the 7750 SR is used in a sample LTE and CDMA
Network. This network uses T1 and Ethernet Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Figure 17-3 Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Host for key network elements
The 7750 SR is used as host for several LTE core network elements, including the 7750
PGW/7750 GGSN and 7750 SGW. The 7750 SR is also used in the Backhaul Part of the
Transport Network portion of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. For further
information about uses of the 7750 SR in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution,
see the following topics:
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) (p. 18-25)
7750 SR (SGW) (p. 18-37)
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network (p. 17-3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For supporting Mobile Backhaul
There are no specific changes to the 7750 SR hardware to support the LTE Backhaul Part
of the Transport Network. However, software updates and configuration changes to the
existing 7750 SR supporting the 2G/3G Backhaul Network provide additional features
and network capabilities.
For hosting Core Network Elements
The 7750 SR becomes a Mobile Gateway in the LTE Core Network with the addition of
the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Service Module (MG-ISM) and the SR-OS-MG software.
The 7750 SR becomes either a Serving Gateway (SGW) or a combined Packet Date
Network/Gateway GPRS Support Node (PGW/GGSN). The MG-ISM used for all these
functions is identical. The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the 7750 SR
functions as either an SGW or a combined PGW/GGSN.
Note that the 7750 SR can also host a stand-alone PGW or stand-alone GGSN if
necessary.

For documentation
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR when the 7750
SR is used as an aggregation router/Ethernet Switch, see Table B-7, Documentation
Library for ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support) (p. B-17).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7750 SR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
18
18
Network
elements used in
the Core Network
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent network elements used in the Core Network in
Not included in this document
The Core Network in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution contains 2nd and 3rd
generation and LTE network elements.
The Core Network (also called Network Core) is the central part of a wireless network
that provides services to the customers who are connected by the access network. One of
the main functions of the Core Network is to route calls across the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN). A Core Network is usually made up of high capacity
communication facilities that connect primary nodes.
Can contain NEs from different wireless networks
The Core Network in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution can contain second
generation (2G), third-generation (3G) and LTE network elements. Network Elements
from 2G and 3G wireless networks are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution when the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network at a service provider location is
integrated with other non-LTE service provider wireless networks.
Contents
18-4
About the 5060 WCS
18-4
Ready to support evolution to LTE
18-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
5060 WCS
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-6
5780 DSC
18-7
About the 5780 DSC
18-7
How it works
18-8
Advantages
18-9
Benefits
18-9
Hardware
18-10
Software
18-13
18-14
User interfaces
18-15
18-15
7549 MGW
18-17
About the 7549 MGW
18-17
18-19
7500 SGSN
18-20
About the 7500 SGSN
18-20
Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE
18-23
18-23
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
18-25
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions
18-26
18-27
18-28
Advantages
18-29
Hardware
18-30
Software
18-34
18-35
User interfaces
18-35
18-35
7750 SR (SGW)
18-37
About the 7750 SR (SGW)
18-37
How it works
18-38
Advantages
18-38
Hardware
18-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-43
18-44
User interfaces
18-45
18-45
9380 3G MSC
18-46
18-46
User interface
18-51
18-51
18-52
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME)
18-52
Advantages
18-53
Hardware
18-54
Software
18-57
18-57
User interfaces
18-58
18-59
18-60
About the 9471 WMM
18-60
How it works
18-61
18-61
Hardware
18-61
18-62
User interfaces
18-63
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE
18-63
18-63
HSGW
18-64
18-64
Hardware
18-65
Software
18-65
18-65
User interfaces
18-66
18-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Software
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5060 WCS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 WCS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the AlcatelLucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS) as used
in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 5060 WCS
18-4
18-6
18-6
About the 5060 WCS

What is the 5060 WCS?
By offering flexible scalability, simplified efficient operations, all-IP interfaces, and

evolution to IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and Long Term Evolution (LTE), the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS) effectively meets todays mobile
service providers needs for cost-effective Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) service introduction
and capacity expansion, voice core renovation, IP network transformation, and long-term
investment protection.
Role of the 5060 WCS
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS provides the call-control and signaling functionality that is
central to the Alcatel-Lucent distributed-switching solution for mobile networks.
Designed specifically for Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP)
R4/R5/R6-compliant architectures, the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS significantly improves
network capacity, simplicity and operational efficiency.
Advantages of the 5060 WCS
The 5060 WCS:
Offers flexible scalability for cost-effective service introduction or capacity expansion
Offers Carrier-grade 99.999 percent availability and reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 5060 WCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enables all-IP network transformation with all-IP interfaces

Delivers optimal network performance with rapid detection, isolation, and alerting of
network issues
Provides investment protection with evolution to IMS and LTE
Together with the Alcatel-Lucent 7549 Media Gateway and integrated Wireless Element
Manager (WEM), the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS is at the center of the Alcatel-Lucent
Mobile Next Generation Network (NGN) solution. Built on the second-generation of the
Alcatel-Lucent Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) the
selected technology for all Alcatel-Lucent common call and session-control platforms
the ATCA High Capacity (HC) Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS delivers dramatic capacity
improvements and cost savings compared to the previous generation of ATCA platforms.
PRELIMINARY

5060 WCS
Use of the 5060 WCS
The main functions provided by the 5060 WCS include the following:
Fully redundant architecture

with:
Hardware/software fault tolerance
Overload controls
Automatic self-recovery
Support for up to 128 MGWs
Mobile Switching Center (MSC) pooling and geographical redundancy
High scalability
with:
Support for up to 10 million subscribers on a single cabinet
Reduced power and cooling requirements Optimized IP with internal Ethernet switch
and IP interfaces
Integrated WEM (unified OA&M)
with:
Simplified configuration, fault and performance management of the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, all subtending MGWs and MSC pools
Configures as any combination

of:
Visited MSC (VMSC)

Gateway MSC (GMSC)
MGCF
Mobile NGN proactive monitoring and analysis capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5060 WCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

With its unique approach to building a massively scalable call-processing system, the
carrier-grade, field-proven Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS architecture supports an
industry-leading capacity per footprint density ratio and can directly support up to 128
media gateways (MGWs). Available for deployment in todays Second Generation and
Third-Generation mobile networks (2G/2.5G/3G), the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS supports
evolution to the all-IP network, IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) as a Media Gateway
Control Function (MGCF) and to Long Term Evolution (LTE).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, see Alcatel-Lucent 5060
WCS Product Description.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5060 WCS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5060 WCS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5780 DSC
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
This section describes the 5780 Dynamic Services Controller (DSC) as used in the
Contents
About the 5780 DSC
18-7
How it works
18-8
Advantages
18-9
Benefits
18-9
Hardware
18-10
Software
18-13
18-14
User interfaces
18-15
18-15
About the 5780 DSC

What is the 5780 DSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Services Controller (DSC) is a carrier-grade platform

that provides the Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) for 3G packet core and 4G
evolved packet core networks according to the 3GPP Release 7, 8 and 9 specifications.
Thus the 5780 DSC is the network element that provides centralized policy control in
both the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1x
Ultimate Wireless Packet Core (UWPC).
What is policy control?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Policy control is the process whereby service providers dynamically instantiate business
rules into their network. Such rules include access to resources, kinds of services, Quality
of Service (QoS), charging, and amount of usage. The rules can be widespread or tailored
to an individual user. Policy controls can also be used to utilize network resources more
effectively.
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
About the 5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR)?
The Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR) is a database that stores subscriber profiles,
including all the details required for determining the appropriate QoS for a session.
Purpose of the 5780 DSC
The 5780 DSC allows service providers to manage and control network behavior based
on their business rules, application requirements, network status, and subscriber
entitlement and preferences. After these decisions are implemented, the decisions are
instantiated and enforced in the network as a set of network policies.
RADIUS support
In addition the 5780 DSC offers the ability to provide RADIUS support in an existing
AAA environment and acts as a converged policy manager operating in both a wireless
and wireline environment.
3GPP-compliant
The 5780 DSC implements the Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) function as
defined in the 3GPP standard, in Technical Specification 23.203.
Need for the 5780 DSC
Faced with rapidly increasing mobile data traffic and growing subscriber expectations,
mobile service providers are looking for ways to grow revenue and profitability while
enhancing the subscriber experience. The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Services
Controller (DSC) enables service providers to monetize and optimize network resources
while offering personalized choice for the subscriber in both a 3G and 4G environment.
How it works
Role of the 5780 DSC
PRELIMINARY
The 5780 DSC is the decision-making engine that allows the authorization of network
resources based on application requests and network conditions. Network resource
authorization consists of gating packets from a specific service data flow (SDF) as per
application request, QoS control for specific SDFs, and flow-based per SDF charging.
What does the 5780 DSC do?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Service Controller (DSC) ensures adherence to

predefined QoS in both the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and in the
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1x Ultimate Wireless Packet Core (UWPC) via network-wide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
management and control of policy and charging. By coordinating and exchanging the
information with the PGW, the 5780 DSC sets a policy including a predefined set of
allowed policies and/or charging status, and generates corresponding Policy Control and
Charging (PCC) actions such as gating, QoS control, and charging.
The 5780 DSC also hosts the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR). An example of
information that would be stored in the SPR is a subscriber's permitted services.
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
Operates throughout the life cycle of the call
The 5780 DSC operates throughout the life cycle of the user interaction with the network.
For example, the 5780 DSC is used during initial User Equipment (UE) attachment, and
during the establishment of additional resources to support the establishment of an
application session.
Advantages
Advantages of the 5780 DSC
Key advantages of the 5780 DSC include the following:
The 5780 DSC is a purpose-built, flexible platform that provides scalable

performance against a wide range of complicated use cases.
The 5780 DSC has a carrier-grade, NEBS-certified platform.

ALU has a long history in policy management, stemming from being a leader in
TPSDA and having over 25 customers worldwide for wireline policy management.
Flexible rules engine allowing operators to easily update and modify policies.
A platform that is, in general, easy to install and get up and running.
Benefits
Benefits to the service provider
Benefits of the 5780 DSC to the service provider include the following:
Provides the tools to allow operators to personalize their service offerings with scale
and velocity to attract new subscribers while more efficiently monetizing each bit
delivered
Provides concurrent support for wireline access models, thus providing massive
operational benefits while future-proofing the operators network
Supports Alcatel-Lucent Application Assurance (AA) functionality in legacy PPPoE
BRAS environments and allows easy migration to 7750 Service Router (SR)-based
subscriber management with minimal additional investment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
Benefits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Empowers mobile operators to monetize their network assets and build new business
models, allowing them to enter into the value chain with ACP partners
Leverages Wireless Network Intelligence to dynamically protect subscriber QoE
while maintaining the integrity of the network
Experience to integrate seamlessly into existing OSS environments with flexible
ability to access subscriber records distributed across multiple sources (horizontal) or
ability to stitch together subscriber records across multiple rows (vertical)
Provides seamless charging flexibility with support for pre-paid/post-paid models
while providing application-specific treatment such as zero rating for some traffic
flows
Provides support for a complete IMS solution
With Gx session correlation, allows operators to seamlessly leverage the L7 packet
inspection techniques offered by a DPI enforcement point with existing bearer-plane
enforcement points to further enhance the breadth of policy-controlled in-line data
plane capabilities
Demonstrates capability to interoperate with a leading DPI vendor through the Gx
interface
Provides exceptional reliability, scalability and performance to support a vast number
of subscribers, services and applications
Provides flexible hardware deployment options
Provides easy, simple-to-understand and simple-to-build pricing models that scale
with wireless and wireline sessions
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 DSC is built on the NEBS certified, carrier-grade

Alcatel-Lucent ATCA 14-slot blade server platform.
PRELIMINARY
The 5780 DSC uses a common ATCA v2 shelf that is used for several Alcatel-Lucent
products including the 5780 DSC, the 8650 SDM HSS, the 9471 MME, and IMS
platforms enhancing operational support and sparing.
The 5780 DSC platform is carrier grade, NEBS certified, and compliant with the ATCA
standard (PICMG 3.0 and PICMG 3.1 standards). The 5780 DSC is an Integrated
solution, encompassing housing, switching, computing/IO blades and storage in one
cabinet.
The 5780 DSC platform employs 1+1 hot-redundancy on all cards with no single point of
failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-1 Hardware for the 5780 DSC
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware configuration
The following figure shows the hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC:
Figure 18-2 Hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC
Blades
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 DSC uses two main processing blades: the Common Services
blade and the PCRF Services blade.
The Common Services blade is configured in a 1+1 pair for redundancy, and a single pair
is required per ATCA shelf.
The PCRF Services blade is configured in 1+1 pair for redundancy and up to five pairs
can be deployed in a single ATCA shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to the processing blades, the 5780 DSC includes the Switching Hub blades.
The Switching Hub blades are housed in the 2 central chassis slots and are configured in a
1+1 redundancy pair.
Software
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
Software on the Common Services blade
The main software on the Common Services blade is the OAM Service Module. The
OAM Service Module provides a centralized interface with the PCRF instance using the
web-based GUI console or the northbound interface for integration with the OSS/BSS and
the 5620 SAM management capabilities. The OAM Service Module is the single point of
contact to administer and distribute the policy rules to the PCRF services, load-balance
requests to the PCRF Services blades, and to report the overall system status and
management.
DPA
The main software in the Common Services module is called the DPA Service Module.
The DPA Service Module provides the interface with the external entities (that is, SGW,
PGW, SPR, and the PCRF processing modules), and dispatches and performs load
balancing on requests among the external entities.
Software on the PCRF Services blade
The main software on the PCRF Services blade is the PCRF Services Blades Module. The
core function of the PCRF Services Blades Module is the policy decision engine that
maintains service data flow states, creates application session bindings, and provides
event forwarding.
Software on the Switching Hub blades
The Switching Hub Blades provide internal communication between processing blades.
The switching hub blades are housed in the middle two slots in the chassis and are
configured in a 1+1 redundancy pair.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure show the network connections of the 5780 DSC.
Figure 18-3 5780 DSC logical design and connections to other network elements
Note: The SPR is shown twice in the diagram, because the 5780 DSC can handle the
SPR in two ways. The 5780 DSC can interact with an external SPR, as shown at
number 1 in the figure. Or the 5780 DSC can host the SPR internally, as shown in
number 2 in the figure. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 5780
DSC supports both internal and external (on the SDM) SPR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Gx interface allows interaction with the mobile network, which includes a direct
connection to the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) on the Packet Data
Network Gateway (PGW) and an indirect connection to the Online Charging System
(OCS) and the Offline Charging System (OFCS).
The Sh/Sp interface allows interaction with the Service Profile Repository (SPR), which
provides information about the profile of the subscriber that requests the session,
including data such as subscription information.
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
The Rx, WS, and RESTful interfaces are used to interact with the application domain to
intercept application requests and understand application specific network requirements.
The Gxa interface allows interaction with the HSGW, and is used to transfer QoS policy
information from the PCRF to the HSGW (Trusted Non-3GPP access).
The S9 interface allows interactions in between a PCRF in the HPLMN (H-PCRF) and a
PCRF in the VPLMN (V-PCRF).
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 5780 DSC is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM).
The 5780 DSC provides a web-based GUI to configure PCRF rules to meet network
requirements.

For online information
For online information about the 5780 DSC, see the Alcatel-Lucent customer product
page for this document: www.alcatel-lucent.com/5780dsc.
Data sheet
See especially the data sheet at the following link:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
&& (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/!ut/p/kcxml/04_
Sj9SPykssy0xPLMnMz0vM0Y_QjzKLd4w3dnTRL8h2VAQADYR9IA!!?LMSG_
CABINET=Solution_Product_Catalog&ampLMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Products/
Product_Detail_001131.xml#tabAnchor4)
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5780 DSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5780 DSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7549 MGW
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

7549 MGW
This section describes the AlcatelLucent 7549 Media Gateway (7549 MGW) as used in
Contents
About the 7549 MGW
18-17
18-19
About the 7549 MGW

What is the 7549 MGW?
The Alcatel-Lucent 7549 Media Gateway (7549 MGW) is a gateway network element
that provides the media gateway function with voice and data bearer interfaces (TDM, IP,
ATM). The 7549 MGW is capable of performing any-to-any switching, including
TDM-to-TDM, native Packet-Packet and TDM-to-Packet.
The 7549 MGW is one key component of many which make up the Alcatel-Lucent Next
Generation Network (NGN) wireless solutions architecture. The 7549 MGW meets
todays mobile service providers needs for cost-effective Global System for Mobile
Communications (GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS)
service introduction, capacity expansion, and voice core renovation. It also provides
long-term investment protection by evolving to the all-IP network, IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS), and Long Term Evolution (LTE).
Role of the 7549 MGW
The Alcatel-Lucent 7549 MGW provides packetized and channelized interfaces for
interconnecting service providers Mobile Switching Centers as well as interfaces that
enable connection to external public telephone systems.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7549 MGW
About the 7549 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 7549 MGW:
Is scalable to 96,000 ports with a small footprint for significant cost, facilities, and
power savings
Enables advanced media processing at TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-packet, and
packet-to-packet network borders for maximum flexibility and cost-effectiveness
Requires fewer network elements and simplifies network management with many
integrated features
Is optimized for IP, enabling all-IP network transformation
The 7549 MGW is paired with the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS as a next-generation mobile
switching product that bridges the voice and data signaling protocols of 2nd and 3rd
generation mobile networks with intelligent networking.
The 7549 MGW also shares the same integrated Wireless Element Manager (WEM) used
by the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS), simplifying network
configuration, provisioning, and management.
Use of the 7549 MGW
The main functions provided by the 7549 MGW include the following:
Built on leading-edge technology with state-of-the-art DSP, computing, and media

processing components
All-in-one voice server cards, with integrated DSPs and echo cancellers
Integrated features: media server, signaling gateway (SGW), interworking function
(IWF), internal signaling relay function (SRF)
Offers IP and TDM switch fabrics for high quality, native interworking at
TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-packet, and packet-to-packet network borders
PRELIMINARY
Advanced VQEs for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and TDM, including
Automatic Level Control, Adaptive Noise Reduction, Voice Activity Detection,
Silence Insertion/Detection, Comfort Noise, Generation, Packet Loss Concealment,
Adaptive Jitter Buffer, and WB-AMR
Powerful IP-to-IP processing capabilities with IP Transcoding, multi-path Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) for Layer 3+ routing and control, and Multi-Protocol Label
Switching (MPLS) Resource Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE)
for Quality of Service (QoS)
As used in the Solution
The 7549 MGW is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support the
5060 WCS, while the 7520 MGW is used to support the 9380 3G MSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 7540 MGW, see Alcatel-Lucent 7549
MGW Product Description.
PRELIMINARY

7549 MGW
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7549 MGW. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7549 MGW.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7500 SGSN
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7500 SGSN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 7500 SGSN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 7500 SGSN
18-20
18-23
18-23
About the 7500 SGSN

What is the 7500 SGSN?
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) is the network element
used in an Alcatel-Lucent end-to-end GPRS/W-CDMA packet core network to provide
the mobility and IP packet management functions for mobile broadband end-users. Built
upon a scalable, high-performance industry standard platform, the 7500 SGSN provides
the flexibility to support GPRS/EDGE, HSPA/HSPA+ or combined services all from a
single rack.
Alternate: 9471 WMM
The 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (WMM) network element can also be used as an
SGSN. For more about the 9471 WMM, see 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager
(p. 18-60).
PRELIMINARY
Role of the 7500 SGSN
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is a powerful, versatile, all-IP, 2G/3G SGSN that
supervises the mobility events in a Packet Core and provides the following functions:
Mobility management
Session management
Packet relaying, transfer and routing of user packets
Legacy 2G/3G and IP Radio Access interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security and access control

Management of subscription data
Packet Core Operations and Maintenance
Advantages of the 7500 SGSN
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is essential for delivering the bandwidth and mobility
management needed to deliver EDGE/HSPA mobile broadband services both in packet
core network renovations and expansions.
PRELIMINARY

7500 SGSN
Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is a key component of Alcatel-Lucent 3GPP mobile packet

core and the Wireless Broadband Network.
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN provides:
High capacity and scalability - all in a compact cabinet. Based on industry standard
ATCA design providing state of the art architecture and capacity.
Platform homogeneity:
Thanks to a common ATCA platform, the 7500 SGSN provides the same look and feel
as the other Alcatel-Lucent mobile core elements.
Configuration Flexibility:
2G and 3G capabilities in one product allowing smooth evolution from 2G or 3G to
combined 2G/3G operation.
Interface Variety:
Legacy ATM , Frame Relay, SS7 interfaces, and all-IP interfaces are supported
simultaneously for a smooth network evolution.
Reliability:
Full redundancy ensuring service continuity with geo-redundancy, load-sharing and
security mechanisms.
Cost optimization:
Supports mobile operators IP network transformation, reducing capacity expansion
costs and sharing of radio access network infrastructure with other service providers,
and delivery of multimedia services (mobile TV, radio) over existing network
infrastructure.
Easy and fast integration:
Multivendor-tested for seamless integration into any 2G/3G radio and core network
environment.
Supported by the industrys leading all-IP network and service aware management
portfolio.
The following figure shows a 7500 SGSN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Hardware
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

7500 SGSN
About the 7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-4 Hardware for the 7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 7500 SGSN in LTE Network
The 7500 SGSN is a key network element in the interworking and handover procedures
between an existing GSM/W-CDMA network and an LTE network.
In this role, the 7500 SGSN supports Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) handovers
between 2G GERAN or 3G UTRAN and LTE eUTRAN, including:
User (data) plane traffic forwarding between BSC or RNC and LTE SGW
Control plane traffic between BSC or RNC and LTE MME

Roaming between Home and Visited networks
Charging and billing statistics collection
PRELIMINARY

7500 SGSN

No changes
No changes are required on the 7500 SGSN to support LTE interworking because the LTE
EPC provides the 3GPP pre-release 8 Gn/Gp control and user interfaces.

For information
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN go to the following site:
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)
For documentation
For documentation on the 7500 SGSN go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/).
For information on navigating through the OLCS site, see Accessing and navigating the
OLCS web site (p. B-9).
Table 18-1

Document Number
Access Control Management
3CM59857FGAAPCZZA
Alarm Management
3CM59853FECEPCZZA
Batch Management
3CM76912FECFPCZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Document Title
PRELIMINARY

7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1
(continued)
Document Title
Document Number
Log Management
3CM61979FECFPCZZA
OAM CLI User Guide
3BL40725HABAPCZZA
Performance Management
3CM40555FECFPCZZA
SGSN Alarms Dictionary
3BL28368HABADTZZA
SGSN Configuration Guide
3BL40706HABAPCZZA
SGSN Hardware Management Guide
3BL65028HABAPCZZA
SGSN Maintenance Guide
3BL65033HABAPCZZA
SGSN Observation Counters Dictionary
3BL40723HABADTZZA
SGSN Parameters dictionary
3BL40724HABADTZZA
Signaling Management
3CM77602FGAAPCZZA
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7500 SGSN. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7500 SGSN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router
(SR) is used to perform the LTE Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN gateway or PGW)
function and the Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) functions. This configuration is
described in this section.
Special case
Note: For LE3.0, the eHRPD IW was validated using a 3rd Party PGW.
Contents
18-26
18-27
18-28
Advantages
18-29
Hardware
18-30
Software
18-34
18-35
User interfaces
18-35
18-35
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent delivers mobile gateway functionality via the industry-leading, all-IP

service-aware platform, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router. With the addition of a
Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM), the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service
Router extends its broad applicability to the mobile environment, supporting the
following applications:
Evolved Packet Core (EPC) gateways:

Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW)
GPRS Gateway Support Node (GGSN) applications
The 7750 SR is used in the role of PDN Gateway (PGW) in LTE environments, and in the
role of the GGSN in GPRS/WCDMA environments (that is, a gateway in
2G/2.5G/3G/2.5G/3G/3G+). A single 7750 SR system can be configured to perform the
roles of PGW and GGSN simultaneously.
What is the 7750 SR (PGW)?
The 7750 SR (Packet Data Network [PDN] Gateway) is the IP-anchor core element, in
charge of management of IP address domains in LTE, that connects to external data
networks and provides connectivity between UEs and between a UE and external IP
domains.
What is the 7750 SR (GGSN)?
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (Gateway GPRS Support Node [GGSN]) is the

GPRS/WCDMA mobile core gateway that provides connectivity with external networks
by defining and managing access to Access Point Names (APNs). APNs are IP addresses
of external Packet Data Networks (PDNs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What does the 7750 SR (PGW) do?
Like the 7750 SR (SGW), the 7750 SR (PGW) is the termination point of the packet data
interface towards external Packet Data Networks. As an IP anchor point for subscriber
bearers within the LTE network, the PGW carries out the following functions:
Provides the UE with an IP address (IPv4, IPv6 or both)
Facilitates flow based charging under control of the PCRF, such as the following:
Providing Uplink and Downlink service level charging (for example, based on
Service Data Flows (SDFs) defined by the PCRF
Serving as enforcement point for policy decisions coming from the PCRF
Connects user to PDNs (packet data networks, or external IP networks)

Serves as the cross-technology mobility anchor by supporting mobility between 3GPP
access and non-3GPP access, and between different non-3GPP accesses
Provides per-user based packet filtering
Provides additional traffic inspection and processing in order to achieve better control
of network resources and better performance of network applications. This
functionality, L4-L7 packet inspection and processing, is called Application
Assurance and is performed inline, on the 7750 SR.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Characteristics of the 7750 SR (GGSN)
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (GGSN) has the following characteristics:
Highly scalable in terms of sessions, PDP contexts and throughput

Facilitates content-based charging: by application (that is, different pricing for MMS,
e-mail, WAP access) and combined bearer-level and application-level charging (that
is, by time, volume and service value with different pricing for on-portal, off-portal,
roaming, GPRS, WLAN)
Fully supports prepaid solution: standards-based real-time date prepaid solution by
supporting a variety of the protocols that are used to contact billing and mediation
device systems including Radius and Diameter
Flexible management of Access Point Names: APN aliasing concept and single APN
facility on Gn & APN differentiation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the 7750 SR (GGSN)
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (GGSN) has the following benefits for the service provider:
Increases ARPU of prepaid subscribers when roaming.

Offers a powerful next-generation GGSN that is built with full focus on the user plane
requirements for the evolved mobile broadband and that is scalable, future-proof and
easy to integrate in a network
Provides a flexible charging solution by adding content-based charging function into
the operator's network.

No change needed when used for LTE
The 7750 SR supports LTE gateway functionality (PGW and SGW) on the same platform
as which the 7750 SR supports the GGSN functionality. When introduced as the LTE
PGW, the 7750 SR allows converged gateway capabilities and extending its role to
perform the GGSN functionality for GPRS/WCDMA. The 7750 SR can also act as a
common IP anchor for LTE and previous generations of 3GPP (WCDMA, HSPA, and
HSPA+, for example). As such, the 7750 SR facilitates seamless interconnectivity of LTE
with previous generations of 3GPP networks and facilitates handover between these
networks.
The 7750 SR performs the functions of the PGW or GGSN (or a combined functionality
of PGW and GGSN). There are no changes required to the product.
Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM)
PRELIMINARY
No additional hardware is required to support LTE. Additional hardware in the form of

the Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) is needed for higher mobile
gateway capacity and scalability of data connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages
Purpose
This topic describes the advantages of the 7750 SR that provides both the LTE PGW and
GPRS/WCDMA GGSN functionality.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Benefits of the 7750 SR
The Serving Gateway functionality is implemented on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR. The
key advantage to use of the 7750 SR is the ability to use the same high-performance,
highly scalable platform to perform a number of functions in the LTE network, including
the Serving Gateway function. Other benefits include the following:
Wireline performance of up to 25 Gb/s bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet

processing turned on (security, DPI), the performance is up to 10 Gbps.
Availability levels of above 99.999%, providing the availability that service providers
need to achieve or improve QoE goals for voice and data customers
Minimize service and business risks when introducing LTE
Ability to grow subscriber base and services for years to come without having to
physically replace the equipment
Application awareness of connections, traffic flows and the mapping of connections
and traffic flows to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing new
service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service requirements. The
awareness is also important for advanced packet processing (DPI).
Ability to enforce end-to-end QoS with per-service/application, per-user granularity
and increase the overall Quality of Experience (QoE) for wireless broadband services
High performance, high capacity user plane processing for 2G/2.5G/3G/3G+ and
LTE.
Field-proven as fixed edge/core with high availability and with nonstop services
Full redundancy of critical user plane functions (routing and forwarding). The
distributed and isolated mobile gateway functionality allows independent scaling of
control plane for mobility-based functions and L3 routing functions.
Full set of IPv4/IPv6 routing capabilities to tie directly to IP aggregation and
backbone
Integrated and virtualized L2 and L3 services to manage mobile network overlays
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The functionality is added to a proven platform, that has more than 48,000 units
deployed in more than 350 customer networks.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Mobile Packet Gateway
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR Mobile Gateway won the CTIA 2010 Emerging Technology
Award for Network Infrastructure and Wide Area Network. The MPG provides
Inhouse 100 Gbit/s network processors

Hierarchical IP Quality of Service (H-QoS)
Wirespeed, best-in-class performance resulting in Mobile Gateway user plane
processing over 100 Gbps per platform
Integrated advanced packet processing (Application Assurance) for up to 10 Gbps
L4-L7 traffic processing.
Hardware
PRELIMINARY
To perform PGW and GGSN functionality, the 7750 SR-7 and the 7750 SR-12 platforms
can be used. The following section shows examples of the mobile gateway functionality
based on the 7750 SR-12.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-5 Hardware for the 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
About the MG-ISM
A single blade - the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) - is added in

one of the 10 available slots of the 7750 SR to allow the Mobile Gateway functionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The MG-ISM is a full-height, hot-swappable module that fits into any of the Input/Output
(I/O) slots of the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router to provide the SGW or PGW
functionality for LTE or the GGSN functionality for 2G/3G. User plane (LTE bearers or
Packet Data Protocol [PDP] contexts) traffic is directed to the module via the routers
backplane and switching fabric, thus eliminating the need for directly supporting external
connections by the module and maximizing its packet processing performance. The
MG-ISM ensures service continuity at the user/data plane for Service Data Flows (SDFs)
which are carried over virtual containers bearers and PDP contexts. The MG-ISM
supports flow detection and communicates with the PCRF. As instructed by the PCRF, the
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG-ISM performs the Policy Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF). The MG-ISM
also facilitates flow-based charging through interfaces toward offline and online billing
and charging systems.
Sub-elements of the MG-ISM
The MG-ISM comes as factory-installed and is preconfigured. The MG-ISM is composed

of the following sub-elements:
1 Input/Output Module 3-XP (IOM3-XP). The Input Output Module (IOM)3-XP

contains bays for two ISAs and makes the routing decisions and performs QoS
enforcement. The IOM3-XP also communicates with the CPM for management
purposes via the 7750 SRs backplane.
2 Integrated Service Adapters (ISAs). Each Integrated Services Adapter (ISA)

provides the key functionality and performs identification of applications to enable
dynamic per-user, per-application, per-IP flow QoS policy control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-6 MG-ISM configuration
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-33
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Determines function
The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the MG-ISM performs as a PGW, as
a Serving Gateway (SGW), as a GGSN, or, as described in this topic, a combined PGW
and GGSN.
The 7750 gateway release is delivered on its own software release, in addition to the
standard 7750 SR-OS release.
SR Operating System
The Alcatel-Lucent Service Router Operating System (SR OS) is a carrier-grade, highly
fault-tolerant, and feature-rich operating system that provides the mobile gateway
functions with an LTE or GPRS/W-CDMA network. The software enables the following
functions:
Basic Mobile Gateway System Configuration and operations

System security and access as well as event logging and accounting logs
IOM, Media Dependent Adapter (MDA), and port level provisioning
IP Routing and associated attributes such as an IP addressing, port, link aggregation

group (LAG) as well as IP and MAC-based filtering
Routing Protocols
Mobile Gateway Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP).
Configuration of service parameters such as GTP, subscriber information, and user
bearer services
Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M) and Diagnostics
Quality of Service (QoS) and policy management.
PRELIMINARY
For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation
available from the Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support Documentation Service
(OLCS).
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR-12, used as
PGW/GGSN, see Table B-8, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN/SGW) (p. B-18).
For information on accessing OLCS, see Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site
(p. B-9).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-34
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 7750 SR (PGW) provides the following interfaces to the LTE and external network:
Gn/Gp
S5/S8
SGi, Gi
S2a
S6b (Diameter)
Ga
Gy/Ro (OCS)
Rf (OFCS)
Gx
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
User interfaces
5620 SAM
The 7750 SR mobile gateways are managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware
Manager (SAM) for assured, simplified and integrated operations across both network
and service management domains. The 5620 SAM is designed to manage services and
provide service level visibility into the LTE network.

For more on the 7750 SR
For further information on the 7750 SR, see 7750 SR (p. 17-14).
Documentation
For a list of customer documentation on the AlcatelLucent 7750 SR, see Table B-7,
Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support)
(p. B-17).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-35
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR-12, used as

PGW/GGSN, see Table B-8, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN/SGW) (p. B-18).
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training on the 7750 SR (PGW)
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (PGW). For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7750 PGW.
(p. B-24).
Training on the 7750 SR (GGSN)
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (GGSN). For a listing of these classes, go to
the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the
keyword 7750 GGSN.
PRELIMINARY
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-36
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (SGW)
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
This topic describes the 7750 SR (SGW).

Contents
18-37
How it works
18-38
Advantages
18-38
Hardware
18-39
Software
18-43
18-44
User interfaces
18-45
18-45

What is the 7750 SR (SGW)?
Alcatel-Lucent delivers mobile gateway functionality via the industry-leading, all-IP

service-aware platform, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router (SR). With the addition
of a Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM), the Alcatel-Lucent 7750
Service Router extends its broad applicability to the mobile environment, supporting the
following applications:
Evolved Packet Core (EPC) gateways:

Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW)
GPRS Gateway Support Node (GGSN) applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-37
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
In the role of the SGW, the 7750 SR 7750 Service Router (SR) (Serving Gateway [7750
SR SGW]) is the network element that provides IP connectivity between the eUTRAN and
the EPC. The 7750 SR (SGW) also connects to a number of eNodeB network elements.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 7750 SR (SGW) do?
The 7750 SR (SGW) performs the following functions:
Serves as the local mobility anchor for UE by terminating the packet data network
interface towards the eUTRAN and the UE
Manages user-plane mobility by performing IP routing and forwarding functions and
maintaining data paths between eNodeBs and the PGW
Serves as the local mobility anchor point for inter-eNodeB and inter-3GPP handovers
Performs session supervision for the eNodeB
Performs mobility anchoring for mobility with other 3GPP technologies, such as
2G/GSM and 3G/W-CDMA
Performs the IDLE mode downlink packet buffering and initiation of network
triggered service request procedure
Performs packet routing and forwarding
Performs accounting on user and QoS Class Identifier (QCI) granularity for
inter-service provider charging
Performs Uplink and Downlink charging per UE and per PGW
Advantages
Purpose
This section describes the advantages of the 7750 SR that provides the SGW
functionality.
Benefits of the 7750 SR
The Serving Gateway functionality is implemented on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR. The
key advantage to use of the 7750 SR is the ability to use the same high-performance,
highly scalable platform to perform a number of functions in the LTE network, including
the Serving Gateway function. Other benefits include the following:
PRELIMINARY
Wireline performance of up to 25 Gb/s bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet

processing turned on (security, DPI), the performance is up to 10 Gbps.
Availability levels of above 99.999%, providing the availability that service providers
need to achieve or improve QoE goals for voice and data customers
Minimize service and business risks when introducing LTE
Ability to grow subscriber base and services for years to come without having to
physically replace the equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-38
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application awareness of connections, traffic flows and the mapping of connections

and traffic flows to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing new
service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service requirements. The
awareness is also important for advanced packet processing (DPI).
Ability to enforce end-to-end QoS with per-service/application, per-user granularity

and increase the overall Quality of Experience (QoE) for wireless broadband services
High performance, high capacity user plane processing for 2G/2.5G/3G/3G+ and LTE
Field-proven as fixed edge/core with high availability and with nonstop services
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
Full redundancy of critical user plane functions (routing and forwarding). The
distributed and isolated mobile gateway functionality allows independent scaling of
control plane for mobility-based functions and L3 routing functions.
Full set of IPv4/IPv6 routing capabilities to tie directly to IP aggregation and
backbone
Integrated and virtualized L2 and L3 services to manage mobile network overlays
The functionality is added to a proven platform, that has more than 48,000 units
deployed in more than 350 customer networks.
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (SGW) is based on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router
(SR-12) (12-slot) service router.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-39
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-7 Hardware for the 7750 SR (SGW)
About the MG-ISM
PRELIMINARY
A single blade - the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) - is added in

one of the 10 available slots of the 7750 SR to allow the Mobile Gateway functionality.
The MG-ISM is a full-height, hot-swappable module that fits into any of the Input/Output
(I/O) slots of the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router to provide the SGW or PGW
functionality for LTE or the GGSN functionality for 2G/3G. User plane (LTE bearers or
Packet Data Protocol [PDP] contexts) traffic is directed to the module via the routers
backplane and switching fabric, thus eliminating the need for directly supporting external
connections by the module and maximizing its packet processing performance. The
MG-ISM ensures service continuity at the user/data plane for Service Data Flows (SDFs)
which are carried over virtual containers bearers and PDP contexts. The MG-ISM
supports flow detection and communicates with the PCRF. As instructed by the PCRF, the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-40
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG-ISM performs the Policy Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF). The MG-ISM
also facilitates flow-based charging through interfaces toward offline and online billing
and charging systems.
Sub-elements of the MG-ISM
The MG-ISM comes as factory-installed and is preconfigured. The MG-ISM is composed

of the following sub-elements:
1 Input/Output Module 3-XP (IOM3-XP). The Input Output Module (IOM)3-XP

contains bays for two ISAs and makes the routing decisions and performs QoS
enforcement. The IOM3-XP also communicates with the CPM for management
purposes via the 7750 SRs backplane.
2 Integrated Service Adapters (ISAs). Each Integrated Services Adapter (ISA)

provides the key functionality and performs identification of applications to enable
dynamic per-user, per-application, per-IP flow QoS policy control.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-41
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-8 MG-ISM configuration
PRELIMINARY
The MG-ISM is placed in one of 10 available slot on the 7750 SR-12. Multiple MG-ISMs
may be installed to allow greater capacity. MG-ISMs can be configured as 1:1 redundant
pair(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-42
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Determines function
The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the MG-ISM performs as an SGW or
a PGW.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
About the SR-OS-MG software
Mobile gateway functionality on the 7750 SR is enabled by the SR-OS-MG software

(operating system). SR-MG-OS is a special variant of the Alcatel-Lucent Service Router
Operating System (SR-OS), a carrier-grade, highly fault-tolerant, and feature-rich
operating system that provides the mobile gateway functions with an LTE or
GPRS/W-CDMA network. The software enables the following functions:
Basic Mobile Gateway System Configuration and operations

System security and access as well as event logging and accounting logs
IOM, Media Dependent Adapter (MDA), and port level provisioning

IP Routing and associated attributes such as IP addressing, port, link aggregation
group (LAG) as well as IP and MAC-based filtering
Routing Protocols
Mobile Gateway Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Label Distribution

Protocol (LDP)
Configuration of service parameters such as GTP, subscriber information, and user

bearer services
Operations, Administration and Management (OA&M) and Diagnostics
Quality of Service (QoS) and policy management.
The 7750 SR Mobile Gateway release will be delivered via the SR-OS-MG software
release, separate from the standard 7750 SR-OS release.
For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation
available from the Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support Documentation Service
(OLCS).
For information on accessing OLCS, see Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site
(p. B-9).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-43
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
For a list of recommended documentation on the 7750 SR-12, used as SGW, see Table
B-8, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW) (p. B-18).
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 18-9 7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements
Table 18-2
PRELIMINARY
Interface
Network Element
Purpose
S5/S8
From the PGW
User and control traffic
S11
To the MME
Control traffic
S1-U
To the eNodeB
User traffic
Rf
To the OFCS
Offline charging traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-44
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
5620 SAM
The 7750 SR mobile gateways are managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware
Manager (SAM) for assured, simplified and integrated operations across both network
and service management domains. The 5620 SAM is designed to manage services and
provides service level visibility into the LTE network.
PRELIMINARY

7750 SR (SGW)

For more on the 7750 SR
For further information on the 7750 SR, see 7750 SR (p. 17-14).
For documentation
For documentation on the 7750 SR go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support

(OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/)
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR, used as SGW,
see Table B-8, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)
(p. B-18).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (SGW). For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 7750 SGW.
(p. B-24).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-45
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9380 3G MSC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
18-46
User interface
18-51
18-51

What is the 9380 3G MSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is the 3rd Generation Mobile Switching Center portion
of the UMTS circuit core network. The primary function of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G
MSC is UMTS/GSM wireless mobility management and voice call control for UMTS
mobile subscribers.
PRELIMINARY
Figure 18-10, Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network
(p. 18-47) shows the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS circuit core network.
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC interfaces to the UMTS radio access network via the
3GPP Standards defined Iu-cs interface and the GSM A interface for 2G services. The
Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC also interfaces to a Network Management System (NMS),
GSM Service Control Function (gsmSCF), Gateway Mobile Location Centre (GMLC),
Equipment Identification Register (EIR), Home Location Register (HLR), another MSC,
PSTN and other PLMNs for full support of mobile-to-land and mobile-to-mobile voice
calls.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-46
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-10 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
Alcatel-Lucent has based its complete Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC offer on a

softswitch-based architecture that seamlessly evolves through software upgrade. With
architecture ready for the circuit-switched and packet-switched domain voice offers,
Alcatel-Lucent can provide total assurance to the network operator of investment
protection in circuit-switched infrastructure.
Alcatel-Lucents 9380 3G MSC offer consists of the following elements:
MSC Server on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform (CP)
Alcatel-Lucent Network Gateway (NG)

Alcatel-Lucent 8688 Media Resource Server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-47
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent MSC Server is built on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform (LCP).
The Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform is a highly scalable platform based on proven
technology with an extremely flexible software architecture that enables rapid
development of new protocols, variants and service applications. The MSC Server
performs mobility management and call processing, terminates signalling protocols and
controls bearer gateways, and performs to OAM&P and billing functions. The Release 99
UMTS circuit-switched domain is shown in Figure 18-11, Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC
within R4 UMTS Network (p. 18-48).
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform controls Alcatel-Lucent Network Gateways and

Alcatel-Lucent LMRS. Alcatel-Lucent uses a flexible and scalable carrier-class media
gateway. The Alcatel-Lucent LNG provides open, standards-based interfaces for
softswitch control.
The Alcatel-Lucent LMRS enables tight integration between the components and
provides specialized resources for announcements, tones and conference bridges.
Figure 18-11 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC within R4 UMTS Network
Role of the 9380 3G MSC
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is the circuit-core network component that provides
circuit switched mobility services. The initial architecture is based on the 3GPP Release 4
architectures in which the control and bearer planes are separated, and is designed to
evolve to the future 3GPP Releases.
Advantages of the 9380 3G MSC
Advantages of the 9380 3G MSC include the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-48
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reduced Cost
Alcatel-Lucents spread-spectrum experience and unrivalled deployment expertise

coupled with a unique portfolio of network tools and technical solutions pioneered by
Bell Labs, enable operators to reduce capital and operating expenditures (CAPEX and
OPEX).
The introduction of UMTS gives operators the opportunity to select new hardware
elements in the UMTS network. This enables operators to introduce solutions that are
designed to give maximum return on investment. The Alcatel-Lucent solution supports
3GPP Release 99, Release 4, Release 5 and beyond with software only upgrades, thus
providing:
Cost effective, reliable platforms that in the unlikely event of equipment failure
guarantee maximum possible operation with little or no service degradation for end
users.
Cost-effective ways to integrate enhanced services.

The extensive use of carrier class, industry standard hardware and the use of open,
flexible interfaces that will enable the fast deployment of new and exciting, revenue
generating services.
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
Alcatel-Lucents 9380 3G MSC has been designed around these principles, offering
maximum investment protection and OPEX reduction.
Reduced Time to Market
Rapid deployment of enhanced services is one of the most critical components in

maximizing revenue. When it comes to being the first to market with new services,
operators need to prevent long lead times for enhanced services development and be able
to customize and differentiate once the services are available.
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSCs modular software components are implemented
within a powerful finite state machine environment. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC
Server uses a patented Programmable Protocol Language (PPL) software tool set for
software implementation. Using a Graphical User Interface (GUI), Alcatel-Lucent
developers can create or modify state machines by editing standard templates using
graphical technology. State machine flow charts are automatically converted into a state
table configuration that can be downloaded and activated in the switch. Alcatel-Lucents
PPL allows service providers to enable differentiating services faster than it is possible on
traditional second generation switching platforms.
Investment Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-49
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC network elements evolve their functionality as packet
networks evolve to provide a wireless end-to-end VoIP solution. Deployment of
Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSCs in a service provider's network provides investment
protection for providing today's wireless services and also sets the stage for the upcoming
VoIP evolution.
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalability
Scalability is one of the most important factors in minimizing initial deployment costs.
The scalability of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC allows operators to grow with
subscriber demand (pay as you grow). Increased capacity is realized by adding cards to
the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC.
Progressive increments of growth are made possible through modular components with
high port density, allowing operators to maintain the most efficient port provisioning
based on subscriber population, while ensuring sufficient capacity at all times.
Standard Interoperability
As wireless networks grow worldwide, it will be extremely important for switch

platforms to support a variety of protocols and interfaces. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G
MSC operates with a multitude of control protocols such as Bearer Independent Call
Control (BICC), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP-I), Integrated Services Digital Network
User Part (ISUP), Mobile Application Part (MAP), Radio Access Network Application
Part (RANAP), BSS Application Part (BSSAP), Radio Interface Layer 3 (RIL3) and
transport technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and Internet Protocol
(IP). Numerous ISUP variants are available within the protocol library, including
adaptations suitable for major North American Region/EMEA/CALA and APAC
networks.
H.248 support allows Lucents softswitch-based MSC Server to be able to control media
gateways that comply with the 3GPP standards.
Future proof
As customers build out UMTS networks, they also must consider the evolution of these
networks to 3GPP Release 5 and beyond. The traditional MSC solutions do not easily
support the IMS architecture defined in 3GPP Release 5. Consequently, customers are
seeking solutions that can evolve to IMS. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is designed
to support 3GPP Release 99 networks with softswitch technology that evolves to 3GPP
Release 5 architecture and beyond.
A core network solution must provide a high quality of service to the end customers,
irrespective of packet or circuit domain. The highly successful Internet model is evolved
to provide telecommunications and multimedia services in Release 5. Reuse of core
network elements during evolution from Release 99 through Release 5 minimizes
expenditures and allows upgrades to be made without service interruption.
PRELIMINARY
Flexibility and reliability
The heart of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC Server is the Alcatel-Lucent Network
Controller, on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform. This platform provides the flexibility
of a softswitch with the reliability of a more traditional switching architecture using the
knowledge and expertise that made Lucents 5ESS the only switch meeting six nines
reliability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-50
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 9380 3G MSC in LTE Network
The 9380 3G MSC's role in the LTE Network is to leverage the 3G network for voice,
that is, re-use of the existing Circuit Switch.
User interface
PRELIMINARY

9380 3G MSC
Managed by OMC-CN
All functions of the 9380 3G MSC can be managed via the OMC-CN.

For information on the OMC-CN
For information on the OMC-CN, see OMC-CN (p. 22-52).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 MSC, see the 3G-MSC/9380
Wireless Call Server Application User Guide: (http://webint.cic.lucent.com/pdfdocs1/
pristore205/448426.pdf).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9380 3G MSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 3G MSC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-51
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) as used in the
Contents
18-52
Advantages
18-53
Hardware
18-54
Software
18-57
18-57
User interfaces
18-58
18-59

What is the 9471 MME?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) is the network element that
provides mobility and session control management and authentication for user equipment
(UE).
What does the 9471 MME do?
The 9471 MME performs the signaling and control functions to manage UE access to
network connections, and the assignment of network resources and the management of
the mobility states to support tracking, paging, roaming, and handovers.
PRELIMINARY
The 9471 MME supports the following functions:
Security procedures: End-user authentication as well as initiation and negotiation of

ciphering and integrity protection algorithms.
UE-to-network session handling: All the signaling procedures used to set up packet
data context and negotiate associated parameters like QoS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-52
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Idle UE location management: The tracking area update process used to enable the
network to join terminals for incoming sessions.
CMAS handling: Select the appropriate eNodeBs to forward the Alerts notifications.
Manages control plane
The 9471 MME also controls all control plane functions related to subscriber and session
management.
PRELIMINARY

Sets up bearer plane
The 9471 MME also performs the bearer management control functions to establish the
bearer paths that the UE uses.
Gateway selection
The 9471 MME is the key element for gateway selection within the EPC (Serving and
PDN). The 9471 MME also performs signaling and selection of legacy gateways for
handovers for other 2G/3G networks.
Can manage thousands of eNodeBs
The 9471 MME can manage from one to thousands of eNodeB elements, which is one of
the key differences from requirements previously seen on Serving GPRS Support Node
(SGSN) platforms.
Advantages
Advantages
The major advantages of the 9471 MME include the following:

Platform technology designed for telecommunications companies' call processing
High capacity, highly scalable architecture optimized for flexibility and scalability
Inhouse design and manufacturing which maximizes performance, lifecycle, and
sparing, since the platform is common across multiple products
The 9471 MME uses mature, field proven hardware and software assets, which makes
for carrier grade functionality and reliability
Independent and seamless scaling of signaling and bearer throughput
Advanced paging techniques to minimize user equipment location attempts and
reduce power usage
PCMD: sophisticated analysis tools to optimize cell and device performance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-53
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 MME is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control
Platform (LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing
Architecture (ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other
Alcatel-Lucent products, such as the 5450 IMS Session Manager/Application server and
the 5780 DSC which is the PCRF in the EPC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-54
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-12 Hardware for the 9471 MME
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-55
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware configuration
The following figure shows the hardware configuration of the 9471 MME.
Figure 18-13 Hardware configuration of the 9471 MME
The 9471 MME contains the following blades (in left to right order):
PRELIMINARY
1 pair of OAM Server blades, to provide provisioning, shelf management, and

software administration
1 pair of MME Interface Function (MIF) blades, to provide control functionality and
load balancing
1 pair of MME Application Function (MAF) blades, to handle mobility and the SGW
interface application and HSS queries and responses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-56
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 pair of Ethernet Hubs, to provide the switching function

1 pair of Shelf Management Controller (ShMC) blades, to provide shelf management
functions
Software
PRELIMINARY

The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 MME software architecture consists of three functional blocks:
MPH The MME Packet Handling Function. This function provides the interface to
the external entities (eNodeB, SGW, HSS, another MME, SGSN) over SCTP, UDP.
This function also provides the IPsec function for MME interfaces.
MIF - The MME Interface Function. This function provides Load Balance and
Interface Service including paging broadcast, link management, and load balancing of
UE attaches across MME application service boards.
MAF - The MME Application Function. This function provides the MME
functionality: Mobility, SGW interface application handling. This function also
handles the query/responses to HSS at the protocol level - S1-MME, S6a, S11, S10,
S13 and SBc.

The 9471 MME has the following interfaces to other network elements:
S1-MME (eNB) (subset = NAS to UE)
S10 (MME)
S11 (SGW)
S6a (HSS)
Gn (pre-rel8 SGSN)
SGs (3GPP Rel8 MSC)

x1 MME to LIG Admin Function
x2 MME to LIG Mediation Function
S3 interface to Rel8 SGSN

S13 interface to EIR (Equipment Identity Register)
In LM4.0, the 9471 MME adds the following interfaces:
SBc between the MME and the BMC for CMAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-57
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-14 9471 MME connections to other network elements
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 9471 MME is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM), a single management platform that provides common OA&M across the entire
Alcatel-Lucent LTE EPC including the SGW, PGW, and PCRF.
PRELIMINARY
From the SAM GUI client, you can perform configuration management for the 9471
MME by launching and using the MI-Agent GUI and the MME Provisioning GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-58
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a list of recommended documentation on theAlcatel-Lucent 9471 MME, see Table

B-6, Documentation Library for ePC 9471 MME (p. B-16) .
PRELIMINARY

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9471 MME. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9471 MME.
(p. B-24).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-59
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (9471 WMM)
as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 9471 WMM
18-60
How it works
18-61
18-61
Hardware
18-61
18-62
User interfaces
18-63
18-63
18-63
About the 9471 WMM

9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (WMM)
The 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (9471 WMM) is a network element that functions as
a scalable, high-performance Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) within the
Alternate: 7500 SGSN
PRELIMINARY
The 7500 SGSN also can be used as the SGSN within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. For more information on the 7500 SGSN, see the 7500 SGSN
(p. 18-20).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-60
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Role of the 9471 WMM
The 9471 WMM when used as an SGSN supervises the mobility events in a Packet Core
and provides the following functions:
Mobility management
Session management
Packet relaying, transfer and routing of user packets
Legacy 2G/3G and IP Radio Access interfaces

Security and access control
Management of subscription data
Packet Core Operations and Maintenance
PRELIMINARY


Future merging with the 9471 MME
The 9471 WMM will, in a future release, be able to support combined SGSN/MME
functionality in the same system. This combined functionality will enable service
providers to converge their existing GSM/W-CDMA GRPS packet core and LTE EPC.
This convergence will simplify the network design and reduce cost.
Hardware
ATCA platform
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 WMM is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control
Platform (LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing
Architecture (ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other
Alcatel-Lucent products, such as the 5780 DSC. The 5400 LCP is shown in Figure 18-12,
Hardware for the 9471 MME (p. 18-55).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-61
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 9471 WMM (labelled as SGSN in the diagram below) has the following interfaces to
other network elements:
Gn/Gp (to the GGSN and PDN GW)

S4 (to the SGW)
S10 (MME)
S6a (HSS)
Gn S3 (pre-rel8 to the MME)
S3 interface (Rel8 to the MME)
Iu ps (to the RNC)
PRELIMINARY
Figure 18-15 9471 WMM interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-62
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 9471 WMM is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM), a single management platform that provides common OA&M across the entire
Alcatel-Lucent LTE EPC including the MME, SGW, PGW, and PCRF.
PRELIMINARY


No changes
No changes are required on the 9471 WMM to support LTE interworking because the
LTE EPC provides the 3GPP pre-release 8 Gn/Gp control and user interfaces.

For information
For a detailed description of the 9471 WMM go to the following site:

(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)
For information on the 5620 SAM
For information on the 5620 SAM, see 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) (p. 22-20),
For documentation
For documentation on the 9471 WMM go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=
Documentation) and search for 9471 WMM.
Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-63
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9471 WMM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9471 WMM.
PRELIMINARY

HSGW
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HSGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
18-64
Hardware
18-65
Software
18-65
18-65
User interfaces
18-66
18-66

What is the HSGW?
The HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) is a network element that functions as a gateway to
support 3GPP to 3GPP2 (that is, LTE to eHRPD) interworking.
What is eHRPD?
evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) is an application that integrates existing
1xEV-DO wireless networks with LTE wireless networks, using the HRPD Serving
Gateway (HSGW).
For more information on eHRPD, see About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW)
(p. 18-64).
PRELIMINARY
What does the HSGW do?
The HRPD Serving Gateway provides the binding between the HRPD interfaces
(A10/A11+) and the PGW (PMIPv6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-64
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
Hardware
For a description of the HSGW hardware, see the HSGW vendor documentation.
PRELIMINARY

HSGW
Software
Software
For a description of the HSGW software, see the HSGW vendor documentation.

Table 18-3
HSGW Interconnections
Interface
Network Element
Purpose
A10/A11
To the eHRPD
User (A11) and control (A10)

traffic
H1/H2
To other HSGWs
User and control traffic
S2a
To the PGW
Control and mobility support

to the bearer plane
Gxa
To the PCRF
Signalling interface for the

transfer of policy control
information (QoS)
S103
To the SGW
Bearer plane interface

forwards DL data that
minimizes packet losses
during mobility
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-65
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

HSGW
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
User interfaces
For information on the user interfaces for the HSGW consult the vendor documentation.

PRELIMINARY
For further information on the HSGW consult the vendor documentation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-66
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
19
Radio/core
(hybrid)
network elements
PRELIMINARY
19
Overview
Purpose
This chapter is for network elements that combine the functions of several of the
component areas and thus are called hybrid network elements. The hybrid status of
these network elements is indicated by their dual colors (mixed green and blue-green) in
Solution (p. 15-3).
What is a hybrid network element?
A hyhrid network element is an older network element that fills two functions: for
example, both Radio Access Network and Core Network functions. The reason we have
this radio/Core classification is a combining of functions differently in older
technologies. LTE makes a clean break between eNodeB and Core. and has strict
mapping and clear delineation of roles. LTE also splits up the RNC between NEs and the
MME and then gets rid of the RNC. But in older technology the functions of the Core and
functions of the eUTRAN are combined in various NEs. So these NEs have the box that
is half radio and half core, and half green and half blue-green, to show network elements
where the functionality is divided up differently in older technologies.
Changes made by LTE in network element functions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE makes a clean break between the eNodeB (Radio Access Network) and the evolved
Packet Core (Core Network). The LTE designers made a strict mapping of the functions
of the eNodeB and the EPC and a clear delineation of the roles of each. Also, the LTE
designers split the functions of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) between other
network elements and then removed the RNC from the LTE network. Thus the 9271
eRNC is defined as a hybrid network element.
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Why are there hybrid network elements?
Hyhrid network elements exist because older network architectures still use a Radio
Network Controller (RNC) network element. Also, these older network architectures have
network elements that fill both Radio Access Network and Core Network functions.
Hybrid network elements are standard Alcatel-Lucent NEs that are used in connecting the
LTE network with other networks. These network elements also used in other
Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.
PRELIMINARY
Contents
9271 eRNC
19-3
About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC)
19-3
How it works
19-4
Hardware
19-4
Software
19-5
19-5
User interfaces
19-6
19-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9271 eRNC
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

9271 eRNC
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 evolved Radio Network Controller
(eRNC) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
19-3
How it works
19-4
Hardware
19-4
Software
19-5
19-5
User interfaces
19-6
19-6

What is the 9271 eRNC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) is a network element
that supports access to the LTE network from an existing EV-DO network. The 9271
eRNC is a software enhancement of the existing 9271 DO-RNC. The 9271 DO RNC also
provides a wireless interface into the Packet Data Service Network (PDSN).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

9271 eRNC
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 9271 eRNC do?
The eRNC adds to the basic 9271 EV-DO RNC functionality the ability to select the
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) for the network interface. The eRNC also supports
LTE-to-HRPD handover. The LTE-to-HRPD handover is done via a new interface from
the eRNC to the MME, called the S101.
Hardware
Supported frame types
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 eRNC is available on the following frame types:
Alcatel-Lucent Release 1 Satellite Ready (R1SR) frame

Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)
Alcatel-Lucent Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture (ATCA) frame
The 9271 eRNC hardware is identical to the 9271 RNC hardware for all frame types.
Server components
Each 410S drawer in the diagram represents a 9271 eRNC server. Each 9271 EV-DO
RNC server contains:
PRELIMINARY
Application processors (APs), to perform Overhead Channel Management, signaling

processing, and OAM&P control functions
Traffic processors (TPs), to perform bearer functions
A disk for persistent storage of configuration data
Alarm card, to monitor the health of the cards within the drawer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The 9271 eRNC contains its own set of System Management services, Call Control
functions, and Traffic Plane functions.
These functions include:
PRELIMINARY

9271 eRNC
Session establishment and release

Performed by a functional entity called:
Overhead Manager (OHM)
Frame selection and Radio Link Protocol (RLP) processing
Performed by functional entities called:
Selector Function Main (SFM)
RLP and Signaling Manager (RSM)
These are collectively referred to as 9271 EV-DO RNC functions.

The 9271 EV-DO RNC also provides signaling and traffic processing control for each
session.
The basic eRNC functionality is a SW feature (FID 39111.10) on the RNC.
Non-optimized LTE to eHRPD handoff is supported, but it is not functionally provided by
the eRNC. Non-optimized handoff is supported by the PDN Gateway and the HSGW.
Note: FID 39111.10 is controlled by a license.

Table 19-1
Interface
Network Element
Purpose
A10/11
to HSGW
The A10 interface provides

the bearer path between the
EVDO RAN and the core
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The A11 interface provides

the control interface between
the EVDO RAN and the core
network.
PRELIMINARY

9271 eRNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-1
(continued)
Interface
Network Element
Purpose
S101
to MME
Supports the LTE to HRPD

Handover.
Note that for LE4.0 the S101
interface has not yet been
developed.
User interfaces
User interfaces
Just like the existing 9271 DO RNC, the 9271 eRNC is managed through the OMC-RAN.
The 9271 eRNC also uses the 9256 Operations and Management Platform for OAM&P
purposes.
The LMT user interface terminal can also be used for the 9271 eRNC.

For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 eRNC, see Table
B-13, Documentation Library for CDMA eBTS, eRNC (p. B-22).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9271 eRNC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword EV-DO RNC.
PRELIMINARY
For a list of recommended classes, see also the Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO
(p. B-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
20
20
Network
elements used in
the Common Core
Network
Overview
Purpose
The topics on this chapter describe network elements that fill the role of the LTE-defined
common core network elements in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the common core?
The Common Core is a set of network elements that perform functions common to both
LTE and IMS core, including HSS, and Offline Charging systems (OFCS) and Online
Charging systems (OCS).
The network elements described in this chapter are standard ALU NEs that are used in
connecting the stand-alone LTE Solution with other networks. Thus the network elements
described in this chapter are not LTE network elements per se but are also used in other
Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.
Contents
20-3
About the 1357 LIG
20-3
Advantages of the 1357 LIG
20-4
Hardware
20-4
Software
20-4
20-5
User interfaces
20-5
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE
20-6
20-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
1357 LIG
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8610 ICC (OCS)
20-7
About 8810 ICC
20-7
Connection to the network
20-9
20-9
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
20-10
20-10
20-12
8650 SDM HSS
20-13
The 8650 SDM HSS
20-13
How it works
20-14
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS
20-14
Hardware
20-15
Software
20-17
20-17
User interfaces
20-18
20-18
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
20-19
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
20-19
Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE
20-22
20-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1357 LIG
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

1357 LIG
This section describes the 1357 Lawful Interception Gateway (1357 LIG) network
element as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 1357 LIG
20-3
20-4
Hardware
20-4
Software
20-4
20-5
User interfaces
20-5
20-6
20-6
About the 1357 LIG

What is the 1357 LIG?
The 1357 Lawful Interception Gateway (LIG) is the network element that provides the
mediation function within the Alcatel-Lucent complete lawful interception solution, the
1357 ULIS.
For more on the 1357 ULIS
For an explanation of the mediation function and an overview of the complete 1357 ULIS
solution, see Chapter 12, Government-mandated services.
Multiple LIGs may be needed per network, depending on size and traffic constraints in
the network to be intercepted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Multiple 1357 LIGs
PRELIMINARY

1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Centralized solution
The 1357 ULIS (of which the 1357 LIG is a part) provides a centralized solution for all of
a service provider's lawful interception needs. This centralized management can be used
for multivendor mediation functions and can allow a network operator or a Law
Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful interception management.
Other advantages of the 1357 ULIS are listed in Advantages of the 1357 ULIS
(p. 12-5).
Hardware
HP ProLiant DL380
The 1357 LIG runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380.

Two configurations
Two configurations are available:
The normal configuration, which is 230V AC powered

A Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)-compliant configuration, which is
48V DC powered and is equipped with a NEBS kit
Software
Common software architecture
The 1357 ULIS applications share a common software architecture that has optimized
flexibility and modularity to quickly introduce new HIx interface standards and
associated protocols.
Lawful Interception platform
PRELIMINARY
The 1357 ULIS applications run on top of a Lawful Interception platform that is
composed of:
1357 customized Linux Redhat enterprise distribution
WALI (Web Applications for Lawful Interception) that is the Alcatel-Lucent LI

product middleware
a database framework
installation and maintenance services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pre-hardening and HA services

server configuration services based on XML
PRELIMINARY

1357 LIG
Handover Interface 3 (HI 3)
The Handover Interface 3 (HI3) interface is used by the 1357 LIG to transmit the
intercepted call content to the Law Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF). For LTE
HI3 is defined according to 3GPP 33108, as ASN1 encoding over TCP or UDP.
The 1357 LIG uses the following interfaces:
HI 1 the provisioning interface. The HI 1 interface can be local to the 1357 LIG
using the GUI or direct from the LEA to the 1357 LIG using an electronic interface.
HI 2 the interface that is used to provide IRI to the LEA
HI 3 the interface that is used to provide content to the LEA.
X1 the target marking interface from the 1357 to the NE. This is a proprietary
interface.
X2 used by the NE to provide information related to the call to the 1357 LIG. This
is a proprietary interface.
X3 used by the NE to provide content of communication to the 1357 LIG. This is a
proprietary interface.
User interfaces
1357 IMC
The 1357 LIG is managed by the 1357 IMC.

1357 ULIS Graphical User Interface
A graphical user interface called the 1357 ULIS Graphical User Interface exists on the
1357 LIG and is used for system administration.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Minor changes
Minor change were done to the LIG-PS to support 4G nodes.

For details on the hardware
For detailed specifications on the HP ProLiant DL380 hardware, see the following link:
(http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/13234_div/13234_div.html).
For information on the 1357 IMC
For information on the 1357 IMC, see 1357 IMC (p. 22-16).
How to access customer documentation
For instructions on how to access customer documentation at OLCS, see Accessing and
Training on the 1357 ULIS
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1357 ULIS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/
Web/Main and search on the keyword 1357 ULIS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8610 ICC (OCS)

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

8610 ICC (OCS)
This section describes 8610 ICC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About 8810 ICC
20-7
20-9
20-9
About 8810 ICC

What is 8610 ICC?
The Instant Convergent Charging Suite (8610 ICC) enables flexible and configurable
centralized real-time rating, charging and mediation for multiple networks and services.
8610 ICC allows operators to simultaneously offer prepaid, postpaid and hybrid rating
and charging for voice, data, video and content and commerce services.
8610 ICC allows users to manage and personalize their connected experience with
real-time dashboards and smart charging plans, With 8610 ICC, users can access their
personal dashboard anytime, anywhere on any device. They can proactively choose the
best price plan for their current needs and upgrade to a larger data bucket or new price
plan as needed.
8610 ICC provides an open suite of payment capabilities including a design-tree GUI,
centralized product catalog and community rating features. 8610 ICC empowers operators
to offer innovative, flexible, content-specific charging models, providing easy and
immediate payment options. 8610 ICC also enables cost controls for prepaid and postpaid
subscribers to help operators reduce bad debt. It also allows service providers to define
customized loyalty programs in order to reduce churn and increase average revenue per
user.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

8610 ICC (OCS)
About 8810 ICC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of 8610 ICC
8610 ICC offers:
A convergent solution with a real-time rating engine for prepaid, postpaid and hybrid
accounts supporting multiple networks, including CDMA, GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE,
IMS and Wireline
Rating and charging service packages for voice (circuit and VoIP), data, video packet,
session, events, content, SMS, MMS, and eCommerce
A full mobile virtual network operator (MVNO) and mobile virtual network enabler
(MVNE) support
A proven solution, deployed in over 200 service providers with an estimated 400
million subscribers
A high scalable solution to support the smallest to largest of networks with high
availability
A zone-based discount charging option to promote attractive tariff package based on
the location of the subscriber and key zones, such as, home zones, office zones,
campus and yield zone
Advantages of 8610 ICC
Advantages of 8610 ICC are as follows:
PRELIMINARY
An intuitive interface and easy-to-use configuration tools with the pricing center
capability allow service providers to rapidly launch and manage innovative new
service packages with attractive tariff plans
Flexibility to mix and match offers, service programs, discounts and bonus strategies
to uniquely service individual market segments in order to reduce churn with
advanced real-time loyalty
Capability to give end users the ability to control spending in real-time and keep their
budget under control
Deployment acceleration with a set of open APIs to smoothly integrate with any
billing and customer-management system, as well as external applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connection to other network elements
The following figure shows how the 8610 ICC is connected to the LTE network elements:
Figure 20-1 8610 ICC connections to the LTE network elements
PRELIMINARY

8610 ICC (OCS)

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8610 ICC, see Alcatel-Lucent 8610 ICC
Product Description.
Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8610 ICC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 8610 ICC.
PRELIMINARY

8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 8615 Instant Enhanced Charging Collection
Function (IeCCF) for Offline Charging Systems (OFCS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
20-10
20-12

What is the 8615 IeCCF?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8615 Instant enhanced Charging Collection Function (IeCCF), a key
product within the Converged Payment solution, enables offline charging for multiple
applications in IMS, LTE and WiMax networks. The system supports CDR generation,
aggregation and correlation and readily integrates with real-time rating and charging
solutions and billing systems.
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 8615 IeCCF supports Offline
Charging Systems (OFCS), in close cooperation with the S-GW and the P-GW.
Role of the 8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
PRELIMINARY
The 8615 IeCCF is a mandatory building block for IMS/LTE/UMTS/WiMAX Offline

charging. In contrast to legacy networks, where each node may generate their own CDRs,
in IMS core there is no tracking of the network resource usage without IeCCF. It retrieves
Offline events, collects charging information from access network, IMS core and
application nodes, correlates these events, and transfers them to the convergent billing
system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 8615 IeCCF
The 8615 IeCCF provides the following advantages:
Fully integrated and tested with each LTE E2E solution release
Complement to 8610 ICC charging
Flexible, configurable to customer needs
Globally deployed, extensive customer base
Supports LTE, IMS and legacy elements
PRELIMINARY

8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Use of the 8615 IeCCF in LTE
The IeCCF acts as a CCF collecting accounting information from the SGW and PGW
nodes via the Diameter based Rf interface. The IeCCF can also interface to these nodes
using the GTP based Ga interface in which case the CDF (Charging Data Function) is
integrated with the network nodes.
Use of the 8615 IeCCF in IMS
The IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) has introduced new convergence
network elements based on IP based signaling protocols and bearer connections. The goal
is to create a harmonized wireless and wireline IP based control network for
telecommunications.
The new nodes include the following:
Proxy-Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF)

Interrogating-CSCF (I-CSCF)
Serving-CSCF (S-CSCF)
Media Gateway Control Function (MGCF)

Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF)
Media Resource Function Controller (MRFC)
external Application Servers (ASs)
These nodes use the SIP call control protocol for signaling and are described in detail in
both 3GPP and 3GPP2 standards. Each network element generates charging information.
To perform charging functions in the converged IMS network, each new element has a
defined interface to a new node called the Instant Enhanced Charging Collection Function
(IeCCF).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8615 IeCCF, see 8615 Instant Enhanced
Charging Collection Function (IeCCF) 28.0 Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance, 270-725-058R28.0.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8615 IeCCF. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 8615 IeCCF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8650 SDM HSS

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
This section describes the 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM) HSS as used in the
Contents
The 8650 SDM HSS
20-13
How it works
20-14
20-14
Hardware
20-15
Software
20-17
20-17
User interfaces
20-18
20-18
The 8650 SDM HSS

What is the 8650 SDM HSS?
The 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM) HSS is a powerful and versatile database
management platform. The 8650 SDM HSS is a required part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution because of the capabilities of the 8650 SDM HSS to support
application enablement and data mining.
What is the HSS?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The Home Subscriber Server (HSS) is a master user database that supports the network
entities that handle the network connections. The HSS contains subscription-related
information about each user, which is also called a user profile.
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 8650 SDM HSS do?
The 8650 SDM HSS performs the following functions:
Maintains the unique service profile (user profiles) for each end user including 2G/3G
(HLR), LTE and IMS service data
Provides all standardized subscription related data needed to setup multimedia
sessions.
Performs authentication and authorization of the user.
Provides information about the user's physical location.
Supports authentication at LTE registration and at IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
registration.
Using the S6a interface, enables the transfer of subscription and authentication data to
the MME for verifying and allowing user access to the EPC.

Distributed architecture
The unique distributed architecture of the 8650 SDM HSS differentiates the 8650 SDM
HSS from other market offerings. With the 8650 SDM HSS, front ends and/or back ends
can be easily added depending on traffic patterns and database growth.
Central to application enablement
The 8650 SDM HSS is a central part of Alcatel-Lucent's application enablement strategy.
The 8650 SDM has the ability to drive new applications and also provides the information
and capability that can give service providers ways of making money from their extensive
collection of information about subscriber usage patterns and preferences.
Benefits
The 8650 SDM HSS also provides the following benefits:
PRELIMINARY
Easily scales to support the smallest to largest of networks.

Evolves networks toward All-IP (HSS, WiMAX, and SIGTRAN) while preserving
initial investment and integration costs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The 8650 SDM HSS is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture

(ATCA) based platform.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 20-2 Hardware for the 8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Applications suite
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 8650 SDM supports in a single
network element all the following applications:
HLR (for GSM/W-CDMA networks)

LTE-HSS (for LTE network)
IM-HSS (for IMS network
MNP (Mobile Number Portability)

EIR (Equipment Identity Register)
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
LDAP interface
The 8650 SDM also provides LDAP interface for storage of 3rd party application's data,
such as AAA, PCRF, or any other application.
Support of AAA server
Another major application on the 8650 SDM HSS supports an interface with the 8950
AAA server over LDAP for 3GPP2 access.

The 8650 SDM HSS uses the S6a interface to connect to the 9471 MME and, through the
9471 MME, to the other network elements within the EPC.
The 8650 SDM HSS also supports other interfaces:
Cx/Sh interfaces towards IMS Core equipment (I/S-CSCF, TAS/MMTEL

MAP Interfaces to 2G/3G Core network
SWx interface towards the AAA
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

8650 SDM HSS
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1300 XMC
The 8650 SDM HSS and the applications on the 8650 SM HSS are managed via the 1360
COM or the 1300 XMC.
For information on 1360 COM, see .1360 COM (p. 22-6)
For information on 1300 XMC, see 1300 XMC (p. 22-10).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM HSS, see Alcatel-Lucent 8650
SDM Product Description.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8650 SDM HSS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 8650 SDM HSS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
This section describes the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS product as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
20-19
20-22
20-22

What is the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS?
VitalQIP is an IP address management system used by over 800 customers worldwide,

including several service providers. In brief, it maintains an inventory of allocated IP
addresses and address ranges, as well as associated networks, subnets, and domains
(www.example.com, etc.) in a database. VitalQIP generates configuration and data files
from this database, and distributes them to downstream DNS (and DHCP) servers.
Additionally, VitalQIP provides many related functions, including data validation checks,
automation aids, templates, threshold warnings, permission-based administrative roles,
audit trails, and reports.
The VitalQIP ENUM Manager Module is a module available for VitalQIP, and is used by
several service providers worldwide. The primary purpose of ENUM Manager is to
support the administration of ENUM domains (for example, 1.e164.arpa) and the Naming
Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records in them. Usually for a subscriber there are one or
more NAPTR records.
Role of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
Innovative Profiling Capabilities

Flexible Subnet Management
Customizable User Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Key Aspects of VitalQIP Technology include the following:
PRELIMINARY

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ability to Change DNS Options on Multiple Domains Simultaneously

VitalQIP software continues its market-leading support of Microsoft Windows
DNS/DHCP servers with support of sites, subnets, and secure zones in Active
Directory
VitalQIP supports BIND-compliant DNS servers. The Alcatel-Lucent DHCP Server
can update both primary and secondary DNS servers with resource record information
as DHCP leases are granted and deleted
End-to-end Feature Rich VitalQIP Appliance Solution. In the Appliance, VitalQIP
software is pre-installed on Alcatel-Lucent hardware, and this combination is
delivered as a unit.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Module provides visibility into the
network services engines running your DNS and DHCP protocols and helps you
maximize the overall uptime performance of these services
ENUM Manager provides the ability to administrate ENUM records in the VitalQIP
database and manage and update Alcatel-Lucent DNS servers
Advantages of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS include:
Reduce infrastructure support costs - less support staff

Reduce address assignment process and departmental costs
Reduce disaster recovery time and cost
Improve the availability of network infrastructure
Reduce operator effort and misconfigurations

Reduce troubleshooting time and support costs due to inaccurate configuration
Improve overall network operational efficiencies
Maintain consistent and accurate IP inventory
Control operating expenses through automation

Provide high availability for clients/subscribers
VitalQIP is performance proven in the most demanding networks
Rapidly provision address space and reliably deliver critical IP name and service In
step with new technology and services: VoIP, ENUM, RFID, IPv6, Mobile HSD and
IP Video, etc.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS in IMS
DNS translates URLs and domain names into IP addresses.

In IMS, DNS is used to resolve the following IP addresses:
IP addresses of IMS network elements for communication between IMS network

elements
IP addresses of servers that are requested by users
PRELIMINARY

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
IMS network elements rely on the DNS to find each other. For example, a P-CSCF
receives messages that contain domain names for further routing to a S-CSCF. The
domain name cannot be used to route a message, so a DNS query must be performed to
find the IP address that is related to the domain name.
This type of DNS is performed by on-board Alcatel-Lucent CP functionality and is only
used internally in the IMS core network. Once a translation from domain name to IP
address is performed, the translation is stored in on-board cache memory. On-board
storage reduces the number of queries that are needed and speeds up processing.
IMS subscribers that use the Internet rely on the DNS to translate the URL into IP
addresses, to find the servers that are offering services and applications. This type of DNS
uses external DNS servers. DNS servers are common resources and are used by many
applications and services.
In IMS, the VitalQIP ENUM manager supports the administration of ENUM domains (for
example, 1.e164.arpa.) and the Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records in the ENUM
domains. Usually for a subscriber there are one or more NAPTR records. A NAPTR
record maps an E.164 number (basically, a phone number) to a URI. For example, a
NAPTR record maps an E.164 number to a URI for an I-CSCF thats used to reach a
subscribers home network, and during call or session setup a SIP Invite message is sent
to this I-CSCF.
In the ENUM Manager GUI, an administrator can split and merge ENUM domains to
manage the size of ENUM zone files that are used in DNS servers. The GUI also allows
an administrator to create, update, delete, and search the NAPTR records.
Additionally, the VitalQIP ENUM supports an electronic interface for upstream
provisioning systems to create, update, delete, and search NAPTR records in the VitalQIP
ENUM. The NAPTR records are stored in the ENUM database, which is shared with
VitalQIP. VitalQIP accesses this database, and uses the data in it to update DNS servers,
either through zone file pushes or in near-real time with Dynamic DNS Updates.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS in LTE
The VitalQIP ENUM/DNS product itself doesn't change. In IMS, DNS is used to resolve
the IP addresses of IMS network elements for communication between IMS network
elements - this still basically applies, except now it's for LTE network elements instead of
IMS network elements. However, the purpose of the NAPTR records change. They are no
longer associated with subscribers. Instead, as per 3GPP specifications like TS 29.303 on
DNS procedures in LTE networks, LTE network elements use NAPTR records to find
other network elements that are topologically close by matching the maximum number of
labels in domain name suffixes.
The recommended DNS solution is to use separate DNS servers for:
Public DNS (end users Internet access),
IMS ENUM server,

IMS ENUM server Network DNS (APN, TAI, GUTI resolution).
VitalQIP can be used to provide Public DNS and ENUM functions. An Open source such
as Bind 9 server is recommended to provide Network DNS functions.

For documentation
For details on VitalQIP DNS/DHCP and IP, refer to: System Planning in VitalQIP
Administrator Reference Manual, 190-409-042.
For details on the VitalQIP ENUM, refer to: VitalQIP Add-On ENUM Manager - User's
Guide, 190-409-067.
How to access IMS documentation
For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, see Accessing and navigating
IMS documentation on the OLCS web site (p. B-11).
PRELIMINARY
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the VitalQIP. For a listing of these classes, go to

Web/Main and search on the keyword VitalQIP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
21
21
Network
elements used
for IMS
Overview
Purpose
The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform and Alcatel-Lucent's IMS product

The IMS functions used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
The network elements used to support IMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution
Contents
21-4
What is IMS?
21-4
What does IMS do?
21-5
21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
21-7
5060 MGC-8
21-9
21-9
21-10
5100 CMS
21-11
21-11
Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE
21-12
21-12
5110 SMSC
21-13
About the 5110 SMSC
21-13
21-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
About IMS
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5140 BMC
21-16
About the 5140 BMC
21-16
Hardware
21-18
21-18
21-18
21-19
5410 PS/XDMS
21-20
About the 5410 PS/XDMS
21-20
Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE
21-21
21-22
5420 CTS
21-23
The 5420 CTS
21-23
21-24
21-25
21-26
21-26
21-27
21-29
5900 MRF
21-30
The 5900 MRF
21-30
Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE
21-31
21-31
7510 MGW
21-33
About the 7510 MGW
21-33
21-34
21-35
Hardware
21-35
Software
21-38
21-38
User interfaces
21-40
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE
21-41
21-41
7520 MGW
21-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 7520 MGW
21-42
21-43
Hardware
21-43
Software
21-44
User interfaces
21-44
21-44
8950 AAA
21-45
About the 8950 AAA
21-45
21-48
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

About IMS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About IMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform in general and
Alcatel-Lucent's IMS Solution.
Note that although the master diagram subdivides IMS into three categories (access
gateway, session control and applications), all of the IMS network elements are covered
here in this one chapter,
Contents
What is IMS?
21-4
What does IMS do?
21-5
21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
21-7
What is IMS?
What is IMS?

multimedia Internet-like services to end-users. The IMS platform provides a common
set of functions and procedures for session control, bearer control, policy, and charging.
When these functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled.
Developed separately from LTE
PRELIMINARY
IMS was developed separately, before LTE, and is currently used in 3GPP-based wireline
and wireless networks throughout the world.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
What is IMS?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
The 3GPP and Telecoms and TISPAN Next Generation Networking (NGN) architecture
specifications for IMS are documented in the following standards:
3GPP TS 23.002 Network architecture

3GPP TS 23.228 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), Stage 2
3GPP TS 24.229 IP Multimedia Call Control Protocol based on SIP and SDP; Stage
3
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) ES 282 001 TISPAN
NGN Functional Architecture
ETSI ES 282 007 TISPAN IMS Functional Architecture
PRELIMINARY

About IMS
What does IMS do?

Role of IMS
IMS provides communication services such as video communications, Instant Messaging,

and Voice over IP (VoIP).
Support for other applications
IMS provides the UE user the ability to simultaneously support web browsing, File
Transfer Protocol (FTP), streaming video, and other data applications.
Key supported applications include:
IMS Applications, such as VoIP and Video Telephony

Non-IMS Applications. for example, as Streaming Video, Transmission Control
Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Applications, Web browsing, FTP, and
Corporate IP Security (IPsec) Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Functions supported in the Solution
For an explanation of the main functions IMS supports in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution (p. 21-7).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

About IMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent IMS
Alcatel-Lucent has an IMS Solution that can be deployed to complement the LTE offer.
The EPS (LTE) provides a bearer path of a certain Quality of Service (QoS). Control of
multimedia applications such as VoIP is provided by the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).
IMS and VoIP functionality can be introduced together with other high-value applications
to support voice and data service.
Call scenarios
Call scenarios supported by the Alcatel-Lucent IMS include the following:
Voice over IP (VoIP) calls from UE to UE. The calls can use the same or different
codecs.
SMS
PSTN access, including
UE to Landline
Landline to UE
Technical description document
For a detailed description the Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution, see Alcatel-Lucent IP

Multimedia Subsystem Solution Technical Description, 275-100-000.
For information on how to access IMS documentation
For information on how to access IMS documentation, see Accessing and navigating
For training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IMS. For a listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent

University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and
search on the keyword IMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE

End-to-End Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

End-to-End Solution
Introduction
The IMS Solution used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports three
general categories of functions. This topic describes the IMS functions supported in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and where to find the network elements for
each.
PRELIMINARY

About IMS
Functional areas
IMS specifications provide functions and common procedures in three functional areas:
Bearer control/Access Gateway control
Session control
IMS-enabled applications
Bearer Control/Access Gateway
The transport and endpoint layer initiate and terminate SIP signaling to set up sessions
and provide bearer services such as conversion of voice from analog or digital formats to
IP packets using Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP). This layer provides the media
gateways for converting the VoIP bearer streams to the PSTN TDM format. The media
server provides many media-related services.
Grouped in with the bearer control functions are the gateway functions that provide
secure access to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and access to other IP
networks.
An example of a gateway network element in the IMS Solution is the 5450 ISC.
Network elements used for Bearer Control are indicated in orange and labelled Access
Gateway in Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3). NEs used for Bearer Control/Access Gateway are
designated Access Gateway under IMS function in the network element description.
Session control
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The session control layer contains the Call Session Control Function (CSCF), which
provides the registration of the endpoints and routing of the SIP signaling messages to the
appropriate application server. The CSCF interworks with the access and transport layer
to guarantee QoS across all services. The call session control layer includes the Home
Subscriber Server (HSS) database that maintains the unique service profile for each end
user.
PRELIMINARY

About IMS

End-to-End Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An example of a session control network element in the IMS Solution is the 5060 Media
Gateway Control Function (MGCF), which is used to interwork with the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN).
Network elements used for Session Control are indicated in yellow in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3) and are designated Session Control under IMS function in the network
element description.
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution is used
to host selected applications that are IMS-enabled.
This hosting of selected applications is performed by what is known as the Application
Layer in the IMS architecture. The Application Layer contains the application servers that
provide the end-user service logic. The IMS architecture and SIP signaling is flexible
enough to support a variety of telephony and non-telephony application servers. For
example, SIP standards have been developed for telephony services and IM services (and
other multimedia and presence applications).
PRELIMINARY
An example of an application hosted by the IMS Application Layer is the 5110 Short
Message Service Center (SMSC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 MGC-8
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

5060 MGC-8
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller-8 (MGC-8) as
used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
21-9
21-10

What is the 5060 MGC-8?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller-8 (MGC-8) enables service

providers to seamlessly migrate from legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single
platform. The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8 provides the classic media gateway controller
function for both TDM and VoIP networks with any-to-any switching, including
TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP, while delivering a full range of
access/toll-tandem services and protocols. The Alcatel-Lucent MGC-8 uses the Advanced
Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) standards-based platform.
Role of the 5060 MGC-8
The 5060 MGC-8 allows service providers to integrate the signaling gateway
functionality in the same chassis.
The 5060 MGC-8 supports several applications that are key for LTE:
IMS Media Gateway Control Function (MGCF)

Interconnection Border Control (IBCF)
Advantages of the 5060 MGC-8 include:
ATCA-based platform simplifies operations through a shared management system and

hardware platform with other Alcatel-Lucent IMS components
Single, easy-to-manage, self-contained package
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the MGC-8
PRELIMINARY

5060 MGC-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Seamless migration from legacy TDM through VoIP to converged IMS on the same
platform
Offers superior flexibility and cost efficiencies for both network renovation and
IP-network transformation
Supports legacy revenue streams while enabling the growth of next-generation
services
Reduces CAPEX and OPEX while providing carrier-class reliability, scalability, and
performance

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent MGC-8, see (http://www.alcatel-lucent.

com/wps/DocumentStreamerServlet?LMSG_CABINET=Docs_and_Resource_Ctr&
LMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Brochures/May_2010_5060_MGC-8_R8__Product_
Description.pdf).
For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, including documentation on the

5060 MGC-8, see Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
(p. B-11).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the MGC-8. For a listing of these classes, go to

Web/Main and search on the keyword MGC-8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5100 CMS
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

5100 CMS
This section describes the 5100 CMS as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
21-11
21-12
21-12

What is the 5100 CMS?
The 5100 Converged Messaging System (5100 CMS) is an IMS network element that is
used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to host the voice mail server
function for LTE.
What is a Voice Mail Server?
The Voice Mail Server functional entity provides voice mail service for unanswered video
calls and video sharing sessions. This voice mail server should be shared with the video
mail server for normal voice calls so the user may have a single mailbox. A subscriber
placing an unanswered video call will be offered the ability to leave a voice mail. The
ability to leave a video message will be supported in a later release.
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The 5100 CMS supports mixed-media messaging applications. End users have the
flexibility to use Terminal User Interface (TUI) or Messaging Application Broker (MAB)
enabled devices via an Integrated Maintenance Administration Panel (IMAP) or HTTP, as
well SMS, Email, and video mail. End users can receive and print faxes and email that is
sent to their account.
PRELIMINARY

5100 CMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components
The 5100 CMS consists of Telephony Access Servers and a centralized Message Center
that contains the message servers, directory servers, and Administration and Control
Server (ACS). Standard Internet mail protocols are used for communication between the
major components.
Interfaces
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Internet message application protocol 4
(IMAP4) are the standard e-mail interfaces, and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) is the standard directory interface, used across the Wide Area Network (WAN) in
a distributed configuration.

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5100 CMS when the 5100 CMS is used to
support LTE.

For documentation
For documentation on the 5100 CMS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) web site (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com) and search on 5100 CMS.
PRELIMINARY
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5100 CMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5100 CMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5110 SMSC
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

5110 SMSC
This section describes the 5110 SMSC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 5110 SMSC
21-13
21-15
About the 5110 SMSC

What is the 5110 SMSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5110 Short Message Service Center (SMSC) is an IP Multimedia

Subsystem (IMS)- and long term evolution (LTE)-ready messaging solution that enables
mobile subscribers to send and receive short messages using a mobile device in
multinetwork, multiprotocol environments. The 5110 SMSC helps service providers
differentiate their data messaging services by offering enhanced applications to increase
customer satisfaction and subscriber loyalty. Support for both traditional 3GPP/3GPP2
networks and new IMS and LTE networks helps to minimize operating costs.
The 5110 SMSC is interoperability proven-successfully integrated with
SHLR,
HSS,
ICC,
and 5100 CMS.
The 5110 SMSC is extremely reliable with Active/Active Mated Pair available with
geo-diverse deployment. The 5110 SMSC provides automatic failover detection and
guaranteed message delivery.
The 5110 SMSC supports SMS delivery over IMS and LTE Next Generation Networks.
Key details for capacity and performance include the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Capacity and performance
PRELIMINARY

5110 SMSC
About the 5110 SMSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Some of the features of the 5110 SMSC include:
High capacity on a single server
One cabinet supports up to four servers delivering 120 million busy hour message
delivery attempts
Note that the 5110 SMSC supports both the Sun N1290 and the Sun T5440. However,
the Sun N1290 is DA and no longer orderable.
High availability with mated-pair architecture
Replication of pending messages across redundant sites, for timely delivery of
pending messages in case of site failure
Delivery at maximum SMS capacity without outages

No down time required for system upgrades
Advantages of the 5110 SMSC
Some advantages of the 5110 SMSC are:
Complete end-to-end next generation SMSC solution (SMS, FDA, and Voting)
Multiple technologies (CDMA, GSM, UMTS, IMS, and TDMA)
Highly scalable, modular, and flexible carrier grade messaging platform that supports
up to four servers delivering 120 million busy hour message delivery attempts
Solid network reliability and elimination of any single point of failure - providing
99.999% availability with geo-diverse deployment
Operational and deployment flexibility to support individual/multiple regions or the
entire network
Seamless migration of traffic from legacy to new SMSC
Proven migration and integration team with the expertise to transition your network
with minimal impact to subscribers
Operational ease of use with real time monitoring and configuration management
tools
TSIS
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting, monitoring, and provisioning the 5110 SMSC is done by the

Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) tool. For more about TSIS, see TSIS
(p. 22-57).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

5110 SMSC
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5110 SMSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5110 SMSC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5140 BMC
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5140 BMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5140 BMC product as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 5140 BMC
21-16
Hardware
21-18
21-18
21-18
21-19
About the 5140 BMC

What is the 5140 BMC
The Alcatel-Lucent 5140 Broadcast Message Center (5140 BMC) enables

emergency-alert and commercial-message broadcasts to mobile devices in a specified
geographic areas. BMC-based service satisfies government emergency-alerting
requirements (such as CMAS requirements) as well as various commercial message
broadcasts.
The 5140 BMC receives emergency alerts from a government-alert gateway. The 5140
BMC performs alert mapping, manages message-delivery priorities and interfaces with
the network elements responsible for message broadcasts.
PRELIMINARY
The 5140 BMC supports four delivery technologies:
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks with interfaces to Mobile

Switching Centers (MSCs)
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with interfaces to

Radio Network Controllers (RNCs)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) networks with interfaces to Base
Station Controllers (BSCs)
Long Term Evolution (LTE) networks with interface to mobility Management Entities
(MMEs)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 5140 BMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of the 5140 BMC
The role of the 5140 BMC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to support
the Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) capability for the US market, within the
two functional entities introduced in the LTE network: the Commercial Mobile Service
Provider (CMSP) and the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC).
PRELIMINARY

5140 BMC
Advantages of the 5140 BMC
The 5140 BMC has many advantages for the service provider including the following:
The 5140 BMC is a proven end-to-end solution certified in Alcatel-Lucent

laboratories
The 5140 BMC is a standardized platform that offers a scalable solution for multiple
applications and future growth
with:
Carrier-grade reliability
Improved manageability and serviceability
Lower power consumption
Reduced equipment footprint
Remote management and support
The 5140 BMC is designed to support all future cell broadcast-based and
multimedia-based commercial broadcast services
The 5140 BMC supports the delivery of broadcast messages to a large geographical
area
The 5140 BMC enables delivery of alerts based on static (pre-populated) or dynamic
(using circles and polygons) alerting
The 5140 BMC translates geo-target areas to network nodes or elements, including
MSCs, RNCs, BSCs, MMEs, and cell, sector and broadcast zones
The 5140 BMC retransmits, updates and cancels alerts
The 5140 BMC displays status of active alerts on the dynamic web portal
The 5140 BMC complies with major standards: CDMA (IS41/IS824:IS637), UMTS
(3GPP 25.419), GSM (3GPP 23.041) and LTE (3GPP 29.168)
The 5140 BMS is built on the NEBS-compliant Common Alcatel-lucent application

server (MCAS)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5140 BMC
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
5140 BMC Hardware
The 5140 BMC product is available on two different hardware platforms. The first is the
standards-compliant PICMG 3.0 ATCA hardware from Alcatel-Lucent, designed to
provide a platform based on the needs of services providers. The second is the rack mount
server (RMS) technology (380 G6) server from Hewlett Packard.

Changes
For CMAS application, the CMSP Gateway is responsible to interface to the Federal Alert
Gateway for applications-dependent functions and to interface with the carrier network
for technology-dependent functions.
The CBC is responsible to determine the impacted network elements for a CMAS alerts
and manages the transmission and retransmission of the alerts to MMEs. The SBc is a
new interface to be developed on the 5140 BMC to support LTE CMAS.

Three categories of traffic use external networks for transport:
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P
Communication with alert gateways in the government domain
Communication with Mobile Switching Network infrastructure such as BSC, RNC,
MSC and MMEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Standards
The relevant standard specifications and interfaces for LE4.0 are:
Overview:
with
ATIS-0700010 CMAS via EPS Public Warning System Specification
PRELIMINARY

5140 BMC
TS 23.401 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) enhancements for Evolved

Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) access
C interface: J-STD-101, Joint ATIS/TIA CMAS Federal Alert Gateway to CMSP
Gateway Interface Specification
SBc interface: TS 29.168 Cell Broadcast Centre interfaces with the Evolved Packet
Core; Stage 3.
Product description
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5410 BMC, see Alcatel-Lucent 5140
Broadcast Message Center (BMC) Technical Product Description.
For documentation
For documentation on the 5140 BMC go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for 5140 BMC.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5140 BMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5140 BMC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5410 PS/XDMS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5410 PS/XDMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5410 PS/XDMS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
21-20
21-21
21-22

What is the 5410 PS/XDMS?
The 5410 Presence Server (PS)/XDM Server (XDMS) is the IMS network element that
supports the Enhanced Address Book (EAB) contact list on the Video Communications
Service client.
Compliant with standards
The implementation of the PS/XDMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is

fully compliant with the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA RCS 1.0 standard.
What is the Enhanced Address Book?
PRELIMINARY
Video Communications Service 1.0 also includes an Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on
the client. The Enhanced Address Book (EAB) is address book software that contains
typical subscriber information but is also presence-enabled. Presence-enabled address
books contain additional real-time information about where the subscriber is located and
real-time information about the present capability of the end user's contacts.
How the EAB works
The EAB uses the Presence Server (PS) functional entity and the XDM Server (XDMS)
functional entity (both hosted by the 5410 PS/XDMS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Video Communications Service clients operate on lists that are stored in the Shared
XDMS. The subscribed contacts who have authorized the end user to receive their
presence information are listed in the EAB and are available on the Video
Communications Service client.
Role of the Presence Server
PRELIMINARY

5410 PS/XDMS
The presence server (PS) is responsible for aggregating all service capability information
published by all device and terminal clients, and distributing this information to all
authorized watchers.
Role of the XDM Server functional entity
The XDMS server is used to store all presence-related lists, for example the list of
subscribed contacts (which in Video Communications Service is called the Video
Communications Service buddy list) and the presence authorization lists.
HP ProLiant DL380
The 5410 PS/XDMS runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380 Generation.

Two configurations


No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5410 PS/XDMS when the 5410
PS/XDMS is used to support LTE.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5410 PS/XDMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For information on Video Communications Service
For information on Video Communications Service and on use of the 5410 PS/XDMS in
Video Communications Service, see The Video Communications Service approach
(p. 10-7).

5410 PS and 5410 XDMS functions, Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on
the OLCS web site (p. B-11).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5410 PS/XDMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5410 PS/XDMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5420 CTS
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

5420 CTS
This section describes the 5420 CTS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
The 5420 CTS
21-23
21-24
21-25
The 5420 CTS

What is the 5420 CTS?
The 5420 Converged Telephony Server (5420 CTS) is an IMS Telephony Application
Server (TAS) that supports a comprehensive set of voice and video supplementary
services for consumer and business endpoints. The 5420 CTS, as an IMS Telephony
Application Server, provides services to all types of fixed and mobile TDM and IP
endpoints through access network conversion methods.
What is a Telephony Application Server (TAS)?
A Telephony Application Server (TAS) is a network element that acts as a back to back
user agent and provides call processing supplementary services. Examples of TAS
functions include in-network call forwarding, call transfer, and multi-way conferencing.
Role of the 5420 CTS
The role of the 5420 CTS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to provide
voice and video supplementary services.
The 5420 CTS has many advantages for the service provider, including the following:
The 5420 CTS supports both voice and video in a single application server.
The 5420 CTS is highly scalable, supporting both consumer and residential services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the 5420 CTS
PRELIMINARY

5420 CTS
The 5420 CTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 5420 CTS was designed and built to support IMS networks and IMS interfaces
and also supports subscriber data storage in the HSS.
The 5420 CTS is fully pre-integrated into the IMS solution with common OAM&P to
speed deployment and reduce IT integration expense.
The 5420 CTS is compliant with all key standards (3GPP, GSMA, and so forth).
The 5420 CTS has open Application Program Interfaces (APIs), enabling service
creation and new use cases, which can lead to new revenue and subscriber growth for
the service provider.
The 5420 CTS provides 99.999% reliability through local 1+1 redundancy. Additional
geo-redundancy is supported.
The 5420 CTS is commercially deployed throughout the world with deployments
exceeding 2M live subscribers.
How it works
Within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 5420 CTS contains the service
logic that provides all types of endpoints with both basic and advanced call processing
services.
ATCA platform
The Alcatel-Lucent 5420 CTS is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control Platform
(LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture
(ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other Alcatel-Lucent
products, such as the 5780 DSC.

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5420 CTS when the 5420 CTS is used to
support LTE.
PRELIMINARY
The 5420 CTS is compliant with relevant IMS and GSMA standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Product description
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5420 CTS TAS, see Alcatel-Lucent 5420
Converged Telephony Server (CTS) Product Description, 275-900-367.
PRELIMINARY

5420 CTS
For documentation
For documentation on the 5420 CTS TAS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer
Support (OLCS) Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.
do?path=Documentation) and search for 5420 CTS.

5420 CTS, Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5420 CTS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5420 CTS.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
21-26
21-27
21-29

What is the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC) is the session control engine at the
heart of several Alcatel-Lucent solutions. It manages SIP-based sessions for voice, video,
and data communications over any SIP-based wireline or wireless device, as well as
traditional access devices. The 5450 ISC also provides functions ensuring the control of
access network IP boundaries.
Role of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
The 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) includes the following features:
PRELIMINARY
All IMS standards-based session control functionalities are provided from one single
product, e.g. Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF), Interrogating CSCF
(I-CSCF), Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) and Emergency CSCF (E-CSCF)
Support of Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF) for selection of the
appropriate MGCF to provoke PSTN/PLMN breakout.
Supported on Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) and
Compact Packet Switching Backplane (cPSB) hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
Advantages of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) include:
Multiple IMS functions, combined in a single product, reduce the number of elements
in the network resulting in capital expenditure (CAPEX) savings.
Common session-control functionalities for any type of wireline and wireless access
devices enable converged service providers to simplify network operation, resulting in
OPEX reduction
Functional scalability allows service providers to increase their capacity as they need
by adding blades and chassis
Flexible hardware and software architecture allow various deployment types from
large scale for large networks to cost-effective and scaled-down variants for smaller
networks or trials
PRELIMINARY

Support of geographical redundancy for carrier-grade reliability

Introduction
The 5450 ISC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution carries out all the Call
Session Control Function (CSCF) roles defined in the 3GPP IMS standard. These roles
are the following: the Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF), Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF), and Serving
CSCF (S-CSCF). The 5450 ISC also serves the Breakout Gateway Control Function
(BGCF).
This topic defines these roles.
What is CSCF?
Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions provide session management for
IP-based calls. The standard breaks down the session management functions into four
groups and assigns each group to one of four logical entities. Like all entities defined in
the standards, these entities are logical and not physical. Therefore when these entities are
implemented, these entities do not require each require a separate physical network
element. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, these four logical entities are
implemented on one physical platform the 5450 ISC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF)
The Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) is the first contact for a SIP endpoint such as an LTE mobile
to gain access to the IMS from the access packet network domain. The P-CSCF carries
out the following tasks:
Provides the necessary SIP routing capability between SIP mobiles and the IMS
executes the policy control enforced by operators

Coordinates with the PCRF to authorize the resources and Quality-of-Service (QoS)
control using the Rx interface as defined in 3GPP 23.203, Section 5.1 (stage 2), and
3GPP 29.214 Section 4.4 and 5.
Note that in LE4.0 roaming for voice is supported, but the P-CSCF is always in the
home network.
Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF)
The Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) is the contact point within an operators network for
all connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber
currently located within that network operators service area. The I-CSCF performs the
Assigning a S-CSCF to a user performing SIP registration

Routing a SIP request received from another network towards the S-CSCF.
Obtaining from the HSS the Address of the S-CSCF.
Forwarding the SIP request or response to the S-CSCF determined by the previous
step
Serving CSCF (S-CSCF)
The Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) manages SIP sessions and coordinates with other network
elements for call/session control. The S-CSCF is responsible for the following functions:
PRELIMINARY
SIP Registration - process SIP REGISTER requests and maintains subscriber data and
states information for the duration of the registration session
Session Control performs call/session setup, modification, and termination
Service Control Interaction with Application Services platforms for the support of
features and services
Call monitoring and recording for billing, etc
Lawful intercept functionality
Provide security for the session
The Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) supports the SIP ISC interface to the application servers
such as TAS. This interface is defined in 3GPP 23.228, section 4.2.4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF).
The Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF) selects the appropriate MGCF in which
PSTN/PLMN breakout is to occur based on the destination and/or origination of the call.
The MGCF will be responsible for the actual interworking with the PSTN/PLMN
network.
PRELIMINARY

Emergency CSCF
The Emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) is responsible for routing emergency call requests to an
appropriate PSAP. It interacts with an LRF (Location Retrieval Function) to obtain the
PSAP routing information prior to routing the call.
This important application is handled by IMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution is the CSCF.
The 5450 ISC also provides the Emergency CSCF used to route emergency 112 or 911
calls. From LE3.0 onwards, emergency calls are also handled using CSFB to 2G/3G as
defined in 3GPP 23.272, Section 4.6.
For more information on CSCF
CSCF servers are defined in the 3GPP IMS standard. Specific references to the standard
are mentioned previously in this topic.


5450 ISC, Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5450 ISC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5450 ISC.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

5900 MRF
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5900 MRF
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5900 Media Resource Function (5900 MRF) as it is used in the
Contents
The 5900 MRF
21-30
21-31
21-31
The 5900 MRF

What is the 5900 MRF?
The 5900 Media Resource Function (5900 MRF) is the network element that provides the
Media Resource Function (MRF) in Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the media resource function?
The media resource function is defined in the IMS standards as a function used for
conferencing, for playing of tones and announcements and for providing media related
functions such as media manipulation (for example, voice stream mixing).
Role
The role of the 5900 MRF in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to provide
multimedia processing and necessary service related to user interaction features.
PRELIMINARY
Services provided
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 5900 MRF provides the following
services:
Play back of fixed and variable audio announcements

Conferencing
Multilingual announcements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
The 5900 MRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intelligent Network-type variable parts including prices, phone numbers, dates,

time, duration, integer numbers
Play back of video announcements
Support of various codecs (both audio and video)
Recording of audio and video announcements, particularly those announcements that
are suitable for messaging-type applications.
PRELIMINARY

5900 MRF
Support for lawful interception
The 5900 MRF is also used to do media replication for calls that require lawful
interception (LI).
What is media replication?
Media replication is a process performed by the 5900 MRF while legal interception is
going on. During legal interception the 5900 MRF intercepts and replicates the flow of
information between the selected user device and other user devices. The original flow of
information is carried without interruption between the selected user device and other
user devices. However, at the same time, the 5900 MRF replicates the original flow of
information and sends the replicated flow of information to a recording room where the
information can be preserved for law enforcement officials.

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5900 MRF when the 5900 MRF is used
as part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.

For documentation
For documentation on the 5900 MRF go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for 5900 MRF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

5900 MRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS documentation web site

5900 MRF, see Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
(p. B-11).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5900 MRF. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5900 MRF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7510 MGW
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Media Gateway (7510 MGW) as used in
Contents
About the 7510 MGW
21-33
21-34
21-35
Hardware
21-35
Software
21-38
21-38
User interfaces
21-40
21-41
21-41
About the 7510 MGW

The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that provides a
gateway between disparate networks such as Public Switch Telephone Networks
(PSTNs), Next Generation Networks (NGNs), and Public Branch eXchanges (PBXs). The
7510 MGW provides the media gateway function for both TDM and VoIP networks with
any-to-any switching, including TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP.
Flexibility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-33
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The flexibility of the 7510 MGW enables service providers to seamlessly migrate from
legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single platform. In addition, the 7510 MGW
can interconnect several VoIP; IMS or LTE/IMS networks using the Interconnect Border
Gateway Function (IBGF) capability directly.
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
About the 7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is a Media Gateway?
A Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that transforms media from one
transmission format, usually Public Switched Telephone Network Time Division
Multiplexed (PSTN TDM) circuits, to another format, such as Voice over Packet (VoP).
The 7510 MGW functions as a virtual MGW to support many functions on a single
chassis, including the following:
IMS media gateway (IMS-MGW)

Trunking media gateway function (T-MGF)
Interconnect Border Gateway Function (IBGF)
SIP Signaling Firewall (SIP-FW)

Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF)
Signalling gateway for M3UA, M2UA, IUA (SGW)
Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW)
Virtual Media Gateway (VMG)

Functions
The 7510 MGW supports the following LTE/IMS functions:
PRELIMINARY
IMS - Media Gateway (IMS-GW)

Interconnect Border Gateway Function (IBGF)
Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-34
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Market leader
The 7510 MGW is used in many customer networks today and is the leading MGW in the
high density MGW market segment.
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Advantages
The 7510 MGW offers many advantages to the service provider, including the following:
Reduced CAPEX and OPEX and minimizes the cost of ownership.

Delivery of critical end-user services with high quality and high reliability.
Because of the 7510 MGW's Virtual Media Gateway concept, allows the splitting of a
single physical MGW chassis into several logical Media Gateways. Each Virtual
MGW can support different functions simultaneously. The Virtual Media Gateway
concept offers flexibility and cost efficiencies for both network renovation and
IP-network transformation.
Support of multiple functions, which allows the operator a flexible network migration
and evolution including CAPEX protection.
Proven reliability in a multivendor network architecture.
Hardware
A single Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW consists of the following components:
One NEBS Level 3 compliant chassis, designed to meet international power,

grounding, and shielding requirements, and which is mounted in a standard
telecommunication rack
A high-speed midplane that interconnects all Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW modules
Three fan trays

One air filter
Up 16 application-specific modules
System modules
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-35
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the modules
The following application--specific modules provide interface or media processing

services:
Circuit Interface Module (CIM)

Media Conversion Module (MCM)
Packet Interface Module (PIM)
The following system modules provide management and switching services:
System Control Module (SCM)

Switch Fabric Module (SFM)
About the chassis
PRELIMINARY
The chassis is fitted with 20 vertical slots, which are divided by the midplane. Each
application-specific module consists of a processor board that is installed from the front
of the chassis, and an I/O board that is installed from the rear of the chassis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-36
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 21-1 Hardware for the 7510 MGW
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Of the 20 slots available, four slots are dedicated to hold two Switch Fabric Modules, and
two System Control Modules. To maximize the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW port density,
the remaining 16 generic slots can be filled using Media Conversion Modules, Packet
Interface Modules, or Circuit Interface Modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-37
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Each board that is inserted into the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW chassis has a fully
redundant Ethernet MAC connection. Connections to the System Control Module switch
fabrics (the c-PSFs) allow communication with the control plane, while connections to
the packet switch fabrics on the Switch Fabric Modules (the d-PSF) provide the packet
switch used to transfer data in the data plane; these connections are made at the midplane.
Each module has its own power circuit and distribution, supplied, for example, by the
distributed -48 V or -60 V DC exchange power sources.
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
7510 MGW software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains a distributed software system that uses a
layered, modular software architecture. The 7510 MGW architecture is based on an open,
programmable call control model that performs call processing independent of other
functions such as resource management, routing, or forwarding.
The Software inside of the 7510 MGW is structured into Kernel Software, Network Layer
Software; Application Layer Software, Voice Processing, Software Redundancy

Interfaces
PRELIMINARY
Because of its rich feature set, the 7510 MGW can support many types of network
connections. Typical 7510 MGW interfaces are shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-38
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 21-2 7510 MGW interfaces
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Supported gateways
The Virtual Media Concept on the 7510 allows multiple gateways to be supported at once,
including the following:
Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW), The Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW),

under the control of the signalling-compatible MGC-like Alcatel-Lucent 5020 MGC,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-39
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Trunking Gateway (TGW) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW offers high port density in
VoIP trunking on a true carrier grade platform, thereby enabling reliable and
cost-efficient utilization of IP network for transit voice traffic. By supporting TDM
hairpinning (native TDM switching) and avoiding burdening IP network with local
calls, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW enables efficient treatment of local calls while
the service provider is migrating to an NGN Class 4 solution.
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
supports Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Access. By allowing direct PBX access to
IP-based NGN platforms, bypassing TDM local exchanges, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510
MGW provides cost-efficient Primary Rate Access (PRA) lines for connecting
corporate PBX systems.
Interconnection Border Gateway (IBGF) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW interworks
with the Alcatel-Lucent 5020 MGC as the Alcatel-Lucent Border Gateway. The
Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Border Gateway Function (BGF) adapts, polices and switches
media streams. The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 integrated SIP Firewall adapts, polices and
switches the SIP control stream to the Interconnection Border Control Function
(IBCF), provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8.
Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW
interworks with the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS / 5450 ISC as Centralized Access Border
Gateway. The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Centralized Accesses Border Gateway Function
(C-BGF) adapts, polices and switches media streams. The C-BGF can be connected to
any IMS access network, IP-PBX and LTE evolved packet core network. The C-BGF
supports voice call transcoding to interconnect different type of IMS access networks,
such as CDMA EVDO; GPRS; HSPDA; FIX access and LTE EPC networks.
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1310 OMC-P
All functions of the 7510 MGW can be managed via the 1360 COM or the 1310 OMC-P.
For information on the 1360 COM, see1360 COM (p. 22-6) .
For information on the 1310 OMC-P, see 1310 OMC-P (p. 22-13).
Functions supported
PRELIMINARY
The following functions are supported:
Chassis Management The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains a high-level chassis

management system that operates from the active System Control Module.
Configuration Management The configuration database, which is stored in files in

the Flash Memory of the System Control Module, maintains all Alcatel-Lucent 7510
MGW configuration information.
Fault Management Fault management concerns detection, isolation, and correction

of abnormal operations in an Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW.
Diagnostic Test - Bit Error Rate test (BERT) The BERT generates and evaluates bit
patterns to verify the proper functioning of all equipped modules.
System Logging and Debugging In addition to monitoring extensive statistical
data, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW supports a complete set of diagnostic features.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-40
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance Management The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW assesses its ability to

carry out all activities by continuously collecting and analyzing statistical data related
to key functions.
Security Management The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains transport layer and
user account security mechanisms.
Other OA&M interfaces
PRELIMINARY

7510 MGW
Alternatively, the 7510 MGW can be managed using the text-based CLI , the GUI-based
Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGEM on the system or via the 1360 COM or the 1300 XMC.

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 7510 MGW when the 7510 MGW is used
as part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.

For documentation
For documentation on the 7510 MGW go to the following Alcatel-Lucent Online

Customer Support (OLCS) web site product index url (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.
com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000002649&doctype=DOC).
See especially the Product Description, 3FZ 08014 AAAx DEZZA.
For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, of which the 7510 MGW is a part,
see Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site (p. B-11).
Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-41
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Web/Main and search on the keywords 7510 MGW.
PRELIMINARY

7520 MGW
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7520 MGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 7520 Media Gateway (7520 MGW) as used in
Contents
The 7520 MGW
21-42
21-43
Hardware
21-43
Software
21-44
User interfaces
21-44
21-44
The 7520 MGW

The 7510 Media Gateway (7520 MGW) is a gateway network element that provides the
media gateway function for both TDM and VoIP networks with any-to-any switching,
including TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP. The 7520 MGW enables service
providers to seamlessly migrate from legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single
platform.
What is a Media Gateway?
PRELIMINARY
A Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that transforms media from one
transmission format, usually Public Switched Telephone Network Time Division
Multiplexed (PSTN TDM) circuits, to another format, such as Voice over Packet (VoP).
The 7520 MGW functions as a virtual MGW to support many functions on a single
chassis, including the following:
IMS media gateway (IMS-MGW)

Trunking media gateway function (T-MGF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-42
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
The 7520 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signalling gateway for M2UA, IUA (SGW)

Virtual Media Gateway (VMG)
As used in the Solution
The 7520 MGW is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support the
9380 3G MSC. The 7520 MGW is the only gateway supported by the 9380 3G MSC.
PRELIMINARY

7520 MGW

Advantages
The 7520 MGW offers many advantages to the service provider, such as the following:
The MGW delivers reduced CAPEX and OPEX and minimizes the cost of ownership.
The 7520 MGW delivers critical end-user services with high quality and high
reliability.
The Virtual Media gateway concept allows the splitting of a single physical MGW
chassis into several logical Media Gateways. Each Virtual MGW can support different
functions at the same time. The Virtual Media gateway concept offers flexibility and
cost efficiencies for both network renovation and IP-network transformation.
The 7520 MGW's support of multiple functions allows the operator a flexible network
migration and evolution including CAPEX protection.
The 7520 MGW has been proven to be reliable in a multivendor network architecture.
Hardware
The 7520 MGW shares the same chassis as the 5020 MGC-8, that is, the 23inch wide
Alcatel-Lucent Gateway Platform (LGP), The Gateway Platform is 14RU. For a summary
of the hardware, see the 275-100-000, IMS Solution Technical Description.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-43
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY

7520 MGW
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
7520 MGW software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7520 MGW contains a distributed software system that uses a
layered, modular software architecture. The 7520 MGW architecture is based on an open,
programmable call control model that performs call processing independent of other
functions such as resource management, routing, or forwarding.
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1310 OMC-P
Most functions of the 7520 MGW can be managed via the 1360 COM or the 1310
OMC-P.
For information on the 1360 COM, see 1360 COM (p. 22-6).
For information on the 1310 OMC-P, see 1310 OMC-P (p. 22-13).

For documentation
For documentation on the 7520 MGW go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for 7520 MGW.
PRELIMINARY
Training
Web/Main and search on the keywords 7520 MGW.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-44
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8950 AAA
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

8950 AAA
This section describes 8950 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) as used
in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 8950 AAA
21-45
21-48
About the 8950 AAA

What is the 8950 AAA?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA is the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting

(AAA) server of choice for major service providers, ISPs, and Enterprises, due to its
proven performance and its flexible, extensible architecture built on Java -based
programming language. 8950 AAA provides the tools needed to support the technologies
of today as well as the technologies and services of tomorrow, including fixed-mobile
roaming and blended multimedia services.
Based on a powerful multi-threaded engine and a robust core request queue processor, the
8950 AAA server offers the most extensive set of AAA features available today for
wireline, broadband, and wireless networks. Extensive support for IETF RFCs (AAA,
RADIUS, Diameter, and EAP), TIA (IS-835), 3GPP, and 3GPP2 standards means the
8950 AAA server is equipped to support a wide array of access technologies including:
CDMA, GSM/GPRS, UMTS, Broadband, LTE, WiMAX, Femto, and VPN/tunnelling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-45
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
While most AAA servers provide limited flexibility, the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA server
offers a built-in programming language, known as PolicyFlow, for writing complex
authentication and accounting policies. The 8950 AAA policy flow language is easy to
learn and can easily be used to implement new policies or maintain existing policies as
service offerings evolve. The flexibility afforded by PolicyFlow helps service providers
reduce the time to market for new and innovative services, allowing them to stay ahead of
the competition and increase their revenues.
PRELIMINARY

8950 AAA
About the 8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 8950 AAA can easily be integrated into a customers existing network architecture.
The 8950 AAA server can interface seamlessly with existing RADIUS and DIAMETER
systems, and back-end storage technologies accessible via LDAP and SQL. Support for
translation between RADIUS and DIAMETER facilitates communication between next
generation technologies and existing RADIUS based clients.
Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA delivers an extensive suite of features:
PolicyFlow AAA programming language

Server monitoring and statistics tools
SNMP MIB and Trap support

Easy SQL database integration
Read/write from LDAP directories
Strong authentication (based on token cards)
Flexible retry/alternate data source logic

Complete support for Proxy RADIUS and DIAMETER
Fully configurable handling of RADIUS accounting packets
Extensive logging capabilities with multiple output options (Syslog, SNMP, SQL, file,
etc.)
Available for most popular platforms (Windows, Sun, and Linux)
Role of the 8950 AAA
The 8950 AAA is required when interworking with a CDMA (eHRPD) network, or
whenever interoperability with a non-3GPP network is required. In a 3GPP architecture,
8950 AAA serves as the 3GPP-AAA. It can also act as the standard 3GPP2 1xEVDO
AAA if needed.
In an LTE network with eHRPD interworking, 8950 AAA acts as interface between the
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) and the Home Subscriber Server (HSS), and also
between the PDN Gateway (PGW) and the HSS. The 3GPP interface to HSGW is
referred to as STa; for PGW the interface supported is S6b, and to HSS the interface
supported is SWx.
8950 AAA provides EAP-AKA authentication via STa to eHRPD UEs requiring access to
the EPC. It obtains subscriber authentication vectors from the HSS via SWx to do so.
PRELIMINARY
8950 AAA also supports the S6b functions for access authorization, and for forwarding of
location updates from the PGW to the HSS.
8950 AAA maintains an in-core database of active LTE-eHRPD sessions, and this can be
accessed by a operator/administrator to monitor network usage. It can also process
requests from the HSS to update or terminate selected sessions.
8950 AAA provides an out-of-the-box solution for basic LTE-eHRPD interworking, but it
can be extended or customized for more complex needs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-46
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upon installing 8950 AAA, an operator/administrator will need to configure Diameter

interfaces to HSGW, PGW, and HSS. Some configuration activity in all those nodes will
be required. No end-user provisioning is normally performed in the 3GPP-AAA (all LTE
user data resides in the HSS), but 8950 AAA can support locally provisioned data for
specialized customizations.
Advantages of the 8950 AAA
PRELIMINARY

8950 AAA
The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA is designed with a modular architecture to provide the
highest levels of flexibility, performance and availability, and the broadest ranges of
scalability. Advantages of the 8950 AAA include:
Flexibility and performance
Extensibility
PolicyFlow AAA programming language for flexible service definition to provide

extreme configurability
Strong authentication based on token cards
Fully configurable accounting record creation
Multiple configurations to support all environments, including:

Standalone AAA server capability
AAA with a pre-integrated LDAP directory server: Alcatel-Lucent 8661 DS
AAA integration with the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM for complete centralization
of subscriber profiles
Available for the most popular platforms: Sun Solaris , Linux, and Microsoft
Windows
Highly flexible policy-management capabilities and a broad toolset of capabilities
enable personalized services, making the 8950 AAA the most flexible AAA server on
the market
Competitive performance advantage
Intelligent transaction processing of requests, including flexible retry/alternate
data source logic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-47
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Software optimized for performance: fully multi-threaded application with

processor thread tuning to take full advantage of multiprocessor systems
Server monitoring and statistics tools, including extensive logging capabilities such as
Syslog and SNMP
Complete support for Proxy RADIUS and Diameter, including support for 3GPP
standards-defined Diameter interface to provide interoperability with IMS core
network components
Support for both local and geographical redundancy for high availability and
improved resilience
PRELIMINARY

8950 AAA
About the 8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalability and capacity
Virtually unlimited capacity architecture that capitalizes on major IT innovations in

hardware and architecture
Scalable to support the smallest to largest of networks
Support for virtually unlimited number of subscribers, enabling service providers to
maximize one-time investments in network equipment while growing their customer
base

For documentation
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS): (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA, refer to the 8950 AAA Quick
Start Guide, 365-360-007.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8950 AAA. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 8950 AAA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-48
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
22
OAM&P products
22
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent Operations, Administration, Maintenance and

Provisioning (OAM&P) products that are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
22-4
About the Network Management Layer (NML)
22-4
22-5
22-5
1360 COM
22-6
About the 1360 COM
22-6
22-9
22-9
22-10
About the 1300 XMC
22-10
22-11
22-12
1310 OMC-P
22-13
About the 1310 OMC-P
22-13
Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE
22-15
22-15
1357 IMC
22-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
1300 XMC
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 1357 IMC
22-16
22-17
Hardware
22-17
Software
22-17
22-18
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE
22-18
22-19
22-20
22-20
Hardware
22-21
22-22
8950 SAM
22-23
About the 8950 SAM
22-23
Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE
22-25
22-26
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio (OMC-R)
22-27
About the OMC-R
22-27
Advantages
22-28
22-29
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
22-30
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
22-31
22-31
Software
22-32
22-32
User interfaces
22-32
22-32
9256 OMP
22-34
About the 9256 OMP
22-34
22-36
9353 WMS
22-37
About the 9353 WMS
22-37
Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE
22-38
22-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-40
About the 9452 WPS
22-40
22-42
9958 WTA
22-43
About the 9958 WTA
22-43
Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE
22-45
22-45
9959 NPO
22-46
About the 9959 NPO
22-46
Hardware
22-48
Software
22-48
22-48
22-48
NEM
22-50
About the NEM
22-50
Changes in the NEM to support LTE
22-51
22-51
OMC-CN
22-52
About the OMC-CN
22-52
Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE
22-54
22-54
SMT
22-55
The SMT
22-55
How it works
22-55
22-56
22-56
TSIS
22-57
About TSIS
22-57
22-59
22-60
WEM
22-61
About the WEM
22-61
22-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
9452 WPS
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
The Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Performance management support for

the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution falls into the three logical TMN layers
defined in ITU-T Recommendation M.3010:
Network Management Layer (NML)

Element Management Layer (EML)
Network Element Layer (NEL)
The topics in this section describe the three logical TMN layers of OAM&P support
available within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
22-4
22-5
22-5

What is the Network Management Layer?
PRELIMINARY
The Network Management Layer (NML) manages the interactions between network
elements, without knowing the internal details of each network element. A Network
Management Server (NMS) provides oversight services to aid in managing major sections
of the network. According to the standards, there may be several NMSs within a network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the Element Management Layer?
The Element Management Layer (EML) manages individual network elements and sub
networks and hides vendor-specific management functions from layers above. An
Element Management Server (EMS) provides oversight and coordination of services from
groups of network elements.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products

What is the Network Element Layer
The Network Element Layer (NEL) provides agent services, mapping of physical aspects
of the equipment into logical representations. The network elements themselves
implement the NEL.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1360 COM
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1360 COM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1360 COM as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 1360 COM
22-6
22-9
22-9
About the 1360 COM

What is the 1360 COM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1360 Centralized Operations Manager (1360 COM) is a fully

featured, highly robust element management system (EMS) for central management of
the Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End IMS Solution. The Alcatel-Lucent 1360 COM features
several best-in-class attributes, including the number of supported network element (NE)
types, flexible deployment options, value-added vertical modules, and mass data
migration (MDM) tools for moving from previous Alcatel-Lucent EMSs.
The 1360 COM is a single and centralized EMS, combining the 1310 OMC-P and 1300
XMC functions into a single EMS.
Role of the 1360 COM
PRELIMINARY
The 1360 COM provides an easy-to-use interface where all critical operational tasks, such
as performance monitoring, provisioning, security and fault management can be
performed.
In addition, the EMS can provide the following northbound interfaces that allow for
OSS/BSS integration with services providers: x
An SNMPv2c interface is provided for the delivery of fault management information

An SFTP interface is provided for the delivery of performance management
information in XML format A high speed machine to machine SOAP/XML interface
is provided for the delivery of high volume provisioning messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1360 COM
The 1360 COM:
Offers a single management platform, significantly simplifying IMS management and

utilizing a single login to manage all elements
Delivers detailed, effective management reports and analyses
Pro-actively manages the network, solving problems before they occur and reducing
down time and impact to end users
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1360 COM
Increases speed and accuracy for new subscriber deployments

Decreases the operational expenses associated with managed networks
Allows for further analysis and provides sophisticated network management tools
The 1360 COM is also flexible and scalable, managing all network sizes.
The 1360 COM EMS fits into the Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
architecture at the element management layer. The EMS provides an integrated solution
for Fault Management (FM), Configuration Management (CM), Performance
Management (PM) and security functions.
The 1360 COM client provides an OracleJava-based GUI that runs on a standard PC
equipped with Microsoft Windows platforms (Windows XP).
Use of the 1360 COM
The main functions provided by the 1360 COM include the following:
Northbound interface for OSS access

Optional Northbound interface for SOAP/XML access
Optional Centralized NE software download and backup/restore
Optional Advanced Reporting System (ARS), customizable, flexible web-based

reporting tool (inventory data, traffic reporting, PM analysis)
Log management
1360 COM platform management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Management of network elements

A view of the network topology that covers all the network and provides an animated
tree / view of the network
Alarm collection and centralized alarm management
Customizable, centralized collection of performance-related information
Centralized configuration management
Centralized operations and profile management
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1360 COM
About the 1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1360 COM consolidates operations management for the following NE architectures:
Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) reference architecture: distributed or

integrated configurations using the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Call Server (ICS)
Decomposed access and peering (Alcatel-Lucent IP Access Border solution and
Alcatel-Lucent IP Peering Border solution) and the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Border
Controller - 4 (IBC-4)
Alcatel-Lucent Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) gateway solutions and
tandem switch solutions, featuring the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway
Controller - 8 (MGC-8)
Alcatel-Lucent IP-based applications (5410 Presence Server [PS], 5410 XML
Document Management Server [XDMS], 5430 Multimedia Instant Messaging
[MMIM], and so on)
Other IMS-based components, such as the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 Subscriber Data
Manager (SDM)
PRELIMINARY
In addition, the 1360 COM is the element manager for the:
Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Converged Telephony Server (CTS),
Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Service Continuity Gateway (SCG),

Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8,
Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC),
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS,
Alcatel-Lucent 7510/7515/7520 Media Gateway (MGW),

Alcatel-Lucent 5900 Media resource Function (5900 MRF),
Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM,
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IBC-4,
Alcatel-Lucent 5410 PS,
Alcatel-Lucent 5430 MMIM,
Alcatel-Lucent 5400 IMS Application Server (IAS),
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (WCS),

Alcatel-Lucent 7500 Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN),
and Alcatel-Lucent 8615 IeCCF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1360 COM when it is used in the
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1360 COM
1360 COM in LTE
The 1360 COM is one product that covers IMS and may cover LTE as well, if the
Network Elements part of an LTE network is covered by the XMC. There is no change
between COM in an IMS context and COM in an LTE context.

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1360 COM, see Alcatel-Lucent 1360
COM Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1360 COM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 1360 COM.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1300 XMC
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1300 XMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1300 XMC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 1300 XMC
22-10
22-11
22-12
About the 1300 XMC

What is the 1300 XMC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1300 Cross-Domain Management Center (XMC) integrates

management of Next Generation Network and IP Multimedia Subsystem (NGN/IMS)
products, including fixed and mobile access, Packet Switching Network, and Unlicensed
Mobile Access (UMA).
Role of the 1300 XMC
PRELIMINARY
Thanks to its portal architecture, the 1300 XMC is well suited to support the migration of
legacy networks. It acts as an umbrella on top of the installed base, allowing supervision
and navigation of the:
Alcatel-Lucent 1300 CMC,
Alcatel-Lucent 1300 OMC-CS,

Alcatel-Lucent 1300 OMC-PS,
Alcatel-Lucent 1310 OMC-P.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1300 XMC also provides the corresponding Operations Support
System (OSS) Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), such as SNMP interfaces for
Fault Management and 3GPP R6 interfaces (Fault Management and Performance
Management). Deployed on both HP UX and HP Linux baseline, 1300 XMC covers all
Tier 1, 2, and 3 scalability requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 1300 XMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1300 XMC
The 1300 XMC is the management system of the both Fixed Networks and Mobile
Networks, covering both Circuit and Packet Switched. The 1300 XMC encompasses the
centralized element management of these NEs and some network management functions
Unified platform administration mechanisms
Single platform login and common security management mechanisms;

Common alarm management for all the managed elements
Common performance management for all the managed elements
Common network hierarchical system view for the managed network
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1300 XMC
Uses of the 1300 XMC
The main functions provided by the 1300 XMC include the following:
Management of network elements

A view of the network topology that covers all the network and provides an animated
tree / view of the network
Alarm collection and centralized alarm management
Customizable, centralized collection of performance-related information

Seamless navigation between integrated and non integrated (distributed) applications
Centralized operations and profile management
Northbound interface for OSS access
Optional Northbound interface for SOAP/XML access

Centralized NE software download and backup/restore
Log management
XMC platform management

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1300 XMC when it is used in the
The 1300 XMC is one product that covers IMS and may cover LTE as well, if the
Network Elements part of an LTE network are covered by the XMC. There is no change
between XMC in an IMS context and XMC in an LTE context.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
1300 XMC in LTE
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1300 XMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1300 XMC, see Alcatel-Lucent 1300
XMC Product description, 3DN 00801 ABAA DEZZA.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1300 XMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 1300 XMC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1310 OMC-P
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1310 OMC-P
This section describes the 1310 OMC-P as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
22-13
22-15
22-15

What is the 1310 OMC-P?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1310 Operations and Management Console Plus (OMC-P) is an

Operations and Maintenance Center used to support the Control Platforms (1000 and
1800 Models), the Gateway Platform (Formerly the Plexus 9000), Compact Switch,
Network Controller, Network Gateway, Signaling Gateway, and related platforms,
regardless of applications and nodal configurations.
Role of the 1310 OMC-P
The 1310 OMC-P provides an easy-to-use interface where all critical operations tasks,
such as performance monitoring, provisioning, security, and fault management, can be
performed.
In addition, the EMS can provide the following northbound interfaces that allow for
OSS/BSS integration with services providers:
An SNMPv2c interface is provided for the delivery of fault management information
An SFTP interface is provided for the delivery of performance management

information in XML format
A high speed machine to machine XML/SOAP interface is provided for the delivery
of high volume provisioning messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1310 OMC-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1310 OMC-P
The 1310 OMC-P:
Offers a single management platform, significantly simplifying IMS management and

using a single login to manage all elements
Delivers detailed, effective management reports and analysis, proactively managing
the network, solving problems before they occur and reducing downtime and impact
on end users
Increases speed and accuracy for new subscriber deployments
Lowers operational expenses associated with managed networks

Allows for further analysis and detailed network-management tools
The 1310 OMC-P is also flexible and scalable, managing all network sizes and running
on multiple system platforms, including Sun Solaris and Microsoft Windows
platforms.
Use of the 1310 OMC-P in IMS
The 1310 OMC-P is a full-featured, highly robust element management system (EMS)
that provides fault management, configuration, performance and security (FCAPS)
support and value-added maintenance features to the Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) core.
It is also the management system for all Alcatel-Lucent IMS-based and border-gateway
(IP-peering) solutions, the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Call Server (ICS)-based integrated
IMS configuration, and the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller - 8
(MGC-8)-based tandem-switch solutions.
PRELIMINARY
In addition, the 1310 OMC-P is the element manager for the:
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS,

Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC),
Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Resource Controller (IRC),
7510/7515/7520 Media Gateway (MGW),
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8,

and Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Converged Telephony Server (CTS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1310 OMC-P when it is used in the
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1310 OMC-P
1310 OMC-P in LTE
The 1310 OMC-P does not manage any more or less when LTE is used. Instead, the 5620
SAM is used to manage the LTE components while the 1310 OMC-P/1360 COM is used
to manage the IMS components.
The 1310 OMC-P and the 1300 XMC work together to manage the IMS core
environment. Starting with IMS 10.1, the IMS core will be managed by a single,
consolidated EMS called the 1360 Centralized Operations Manager (COM). The 1300
XMC is the only asset managing the PS/XDMS/MMIM, CMS, and SDM assets today.
The 1310 OMC-P does not manage these assets. The 1360 COM will bring the 1300
XMC and 1310 OMC-P together in a single EMS and manage all of the elements that the
1300 XMC and 1310 OMC-P manage today. The 1360 COM is introduced in LE4.0. For
more information on 1360 COM, see 1360 COM (p. 22-6).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the 1310 OMC-P, go to: (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/

portal/productContent.do?productId=null&entryId=1-0000000001749).
Click on the documentation available.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1310 OMC-P. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword OMC-P.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1357 IMC
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1357 IMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1357 Interception Management Center (1357 IMC) network
element as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 1357 IMC
22-16
22-17
Hardware
22-17
Software
22-17
22-18
22-18
22-19
About the 1357 IMC

What is the 1357 IMC?
The 1357 Interception Management Center (IMC) is the network element that provides
the administration function and OA&M support for the 1357 LIG(s) in the Alcatel-Lucent
complete lawful interception solution, the 1357 ULIS.
For more on the 1357 ULIS
For an explanation of the 1357 ULIS solution, see 1357 Unified Lawful Interception
Suite (ULIS) (p. 12-2).
PRELIMINARY
One IMC for all the intercepted networks
One IMC can handle multiple LIGs in multiple networks (Mobile-PS, Mobile CS, IMS,
IP broadband and so forth). Therefore one IMC is able to manage all the requests from the
Law Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) for all the networks of a service provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Centralized solution
The 1357 ULIS (of which the 1357 IMC is a part) provides a centralized solution for all
of a service provider's lawful interception needs. This centralized management can be
used for multivendor mediation functions and can allow a network operator or a Law
Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful interception management.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1357 IMC
Other advantages of the 1357 ULIS are listed in Advantages of the 1357 ULIS
(p. 12-5).
Hardware
HP ProLiant DL380
The 1357 IMC runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380.

Two configurations

Software
Common software architecture
1357 ULIS applications share a common software architecture that has optimized
flexibility and modularity to quickly introduce new HIx standards and associated
protocols.
Lawful Interception platform
1357 ULIS applications run on top of a Lawful Interception platform that is composed of:
1357 customized Linux Redhat enterprise distribution
WALI (Web Applications for Lawful Interception) that is the Alcatel-Lucent LI
product middleware
a database framework
installation and maintenance services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1357 IMC
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pre-hardening and HA services

server configuration services based on XML

Handoff Interface 1 (HI 1)
The Handover Interface 1 (HI 1) is a manual or electronic interface between the LEA and
the IMC. Through this interface, the LEA provides the warrant to intercept subscribers.
Handoff Interface 2 (HI 2)
The IMC uses Handoff Interface 2 (HI 2) to send the interception-related information
(IRI) to the Law Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF).
The 1357 IMC uses the following interfaces:
HI 1 the provisioning interface. The HI 1 interface can be local to the 1357 LIG
using the GUI or direct from the LEA to the 1357 LIG using an electronic interface.
HI 2 the interface that is used to provide IRI to the LEA
X1 the target marking interface from the 1357 to the NE. This is a proprietary
interface.
X2 used by the NE to provide information related to the call to the 1357 LIG. This
is a proprietary interface.
X3 used by the NE to provide content of communication to the 1357 LIG. This is a
proprietary interface.

Minor changes
PRELIMINARY
Minor changes to the 1357 IMC were required to include support for the new nodes
(HSS, MME and S/P-GW).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
1357 IMC
Customer documentation
An entire set of customer documentation for the 1357 IMC is available from the online
customer support (OLCS) web site for customers who have purchased the 1357 ULIS
product. For instructions on using OLCS, see Accessing and navigating the OLCS web
site (p. B-9) and other helpful information in Appendix B, Resources.
1357 LIG
The 1357 LIG is explained in 1357 LIG (p. 20-3).

Training on the 1357 ULIS
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1357 IMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 1357 ULIS.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) as used in the
Contents
22-20
Hardware
22-21
22-22

What is the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)?
The 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) provides operators with a single, integrated
network management solution for EPC, mobile backhaul and the eNodeBs. The 5620
SAM enables end-to-end management of the supported network elements (NEs), the
mobile layer and the IP routing layer within the eUTRAN, Backhaul and Core Networks.
The 5620 SAM also provides flexible configuration and provisioning tools with
automation capabilities that reduce the possibility of human error for both network
elements and IP routing. Combined with powerful, standards-based OSS interfaces, the
5620 SAM provides operators with an advanced management solution that easily adapts
to their existing OSS environment for faster and more cost-effective integration.
PRELIMINARY
5620 SAM overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM provides a comprehensive set of element, end-to-end

network and IP management capabilities for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
(7750 SR [SGW], 7750 SR [PGW], 9471 MME and 5780 DSC). The 5620 SAM
service-aware management solution provides the following key capabilities for the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
Configuration management allowing coordinated deployment of configuration data

across network elements operating at both the mobile and transport layers.
Management of Solution eNodeBs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multi-layer performance management - enabling aspects of self-optimization for the

EPC and transport layer.
The fault isolation and recovery process is significantly simplified through multi-layer
fault correlation and root cause analysis (RCA).
Visualization of the inter-domain relationships (between the mobile service and
underlying IP/MPLS transport layer) provides the operator with the ability to
understand the interactions between the layers and easily isolate/resolve network
issues.
A comprehensive Service Level Agreement (SLA) monitoring capability that can
proactively detect and isolate SLA violations that can occur within any layer of the
network.
End-to-end assurance capabilities which operate in a coordinated fashion across all
layers of the network, further easing the process of fault isolation and resolution.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Management of multiple backhaul strategies employed in both LTE and 2/3G mobile
environments.
Coordinated security infrastructure providing operator scope and span of control.
Single GUI, which simplifies introduction and eases training requirements.
3GPP-based northbound interfaces that allows easier integration into higher level
OSS/BSS systems.
Capabilities provided
For more details on the capabilities of the 5620 SAM for LTE, refer to the "Service-aware
IP management for the Ultimate Wireless Packet Core" Application Note on
www.alcatel-lucent.com/5620sam.
Hardware
The 5620 SAM is supported on a number of different industry standard computing

platforms. The sizing of the computing platform is based upon network sizing and
operational requirements.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM, related to the
Core documentation, see Table B-4, Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM Core (p. B-15).
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM, related to the
LTE documentation, see Table B-5, Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM LTE (p. B-16).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5620 SAM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 5620 SAM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8950 SAM
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
8950 SAM
This section describes the 8950 Services Activation Manager (SAM) as used in the
Contents
About the 8950 SAM
22-23
22-25
22-26
About the 8950 SAM

What is the 8950 SAM?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 Services Activation Manager (SAM) software is a

workflow-enabled provisioning OSS that provides automated flow-through service
activation and provisions services quickly and cost-effectively over multivendor,
multi-domain networks (IMS, wireless, DSL).
8950 SAM software lowers provisioning costs while enabling quick and flexible
introduction of revenue-generating new services such as DSL, 2G, 3G, IMS subscriber
and infrastructure provisioning, voicemail, SMS, etc. The flow-through provisioning
process enables services management for multiple systems and subscribers accurately and
without human intervention.
Role of the 8950 SAM
The 8950 SAM provides the features needed to automate and streamline service
provisioning within service provider networks. The intuitive user interface and innovative
workflow manger of the 8950 SAM make it possible to implement customized business
logic and manage the provisioning process end-to-end.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
8950 SAM
About the 8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features provided by the 8950 SAM include the following:
Single point of entry via open, published northbound SOAP/XML API. This interface
validates each request and selects an appropriate workflow using a set of configurable
rules.
User friendly, web-based graphical user interface (GUI). This allows service
representatives to create orders, view details, search orders, manage manual tasks, and
run reports.
Well-proven workflow manager. This coordinates provisioning steps and provides the
ability to retry and time-out requests, sets and tracks milestones, supports multiple
element provisioning, and manages fallout.
A library of preconfigured reference workflows. These can be used as is or
customized using SAMs configuration tools to support additional services. The flows
support multiple element provisioning, rollback, fallout, and milestone tracking.
Workflows that can incorporate both automated and manual tasks executed either
sequentially or in parallel.
Partitioned or structured service activation environment to manage Service Partners,
Resellers or special security requirements.
A Configurable Southbound Interface (CSI). This takes care of communicating with
downstream systems to provisioning a broad array of services (multivendor,
multi-technology). These interfaces are based on standard CORBA, LDAP, and SOAP
mechanisms, and can be configured as necessary. SAM also contains a Software
Development Kit (SDK) for use in integrating new interfaces between SAM and
external systems to support a Service Providers activation needs.
Provides field-proven scalability, able to handle millions of orders per month.
Alcatel-Lucent can structure custom Implementation Services, Integration Services,
and Training Services to best meet your needs.
Advantages of the 8950 SAM
The 8950 SAM offers service providers a flexible software solution to activate
subscribers and provision infrastructure faster, better, and less expensively. It supports
service activation needs by integrating and controlling complex business and operations
processes for service provisioning, activation, and confirmation.
PRELIMINARY
8950 SAM business benefits include:
Increased profitability with cost-effective provisioning of advanced services across

your multivendor, multi-technology network.
The ability to rapidly introduce new applications and service bundles to maximize
revenue and respond to competitive offerings.
The ability to provision services faster and more economically, reducing OPEX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Improved customer satisfaction with accurate and on-time activation.

Reduced costs by leveraging your existing operations systems with automated service
creation and activation for advanced services.
8950 SAM operational benefits include:
Minimizes OSS duplication and complexity with a single Service Creation solution;
integrates with order management and billing functions for complete provisioning
flow-through.
Reduces staff hourly costs by replacing manual provisioning with automation.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
8950 SAM
Reduces provisioning errors with more automation, fallout management, better

processes and procedures, and tighter order management and control.
Standardizes end-to-end provisioning around a well defined set of workflows,
business models, and service models. Create orders, track progress, alert on
exceptions, run reports, intervene manually if needed, or rollback if problems arise.
Protects your investments by extending your existing OSS applications to provision
and deliver new services.
Use of the 8950 SAM in IMS
The 8950 SAM supports provisioning for IMS services.

The 8950 SAM:
Creates work items that coordinate the information and resources to provision
services.
Triggers workflows that contain the appropriate sequence of manual and automated
steps to provision new services.
Tracks the progress of each work item through its workflows.

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 8950 SAM when it is used in the IMS in the
8950 SAM in LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The 8950 SAM can coordinate provisioning for LTE subscribers by communicating with
8650 SDM/HSS, 5780 DSC (PCRF function) and optionally, a device management
system to perform various actions for the subscription in the network, such as Add,
Delete, Modify and Verify. One input stream to 8950 SAM can be configured to send the
appropriate messages to the downstream elements.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 8950 SAM is available today for LTE provisioning as part of the overall ALU IMS
solution for LTE. However 8950 SAM does not have any specific workflows yet to
support LTE provisioning. Until the requirements for an LTE reference solution
provisioning scenario are available, Alcatel-Lucent will quote customization for each
customer.

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 SAM, refer to the 8950 SAM
(Services Activation Manager) Users Guide, 190-418-001.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IMS. For a listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent

University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and
search on the keyword IMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For

Radio (OMC-R)
Overview
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Overview
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For
Radio (OMC-R) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the OMC-R
22-27
Advantages
22-28
22-29
About the OMC-R

What is the 9153 OMC-R?
In the GSM world, the OMC or Operation and Maintenance Center is defined as a system
responsible for operation and maintenance of a given set of network equipment.
In compliance with the GSM specifications, the Alcatel-Lucent 9153 Operation &
Maintenance Center for Radio Part (OMC-R) is the product used to perform Element
Management and Sub-Network Management on the following BSS network subsystems:
The whole set of BSSs, that is, BSCs, BTSs, TCs, and transmission systems
GPRS Multi-BSS Fast packet Server (MFS), that is, the BSS part of the GPRS
equipment
The 9153 OMC-R is a management system based on one or several UNIX servers
connected with a number of user terminals via Ethernet-LAN or WAN (depending on the
network configuration) and with a number of BSCs and MFSs that have to be managed.
Role of the 9153 OMC-R
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
A single 9153 OMC-R configuration can supervise multiple BSSs (the BSCs with all
related BTSs), BSSs connected to different MSCs depending on the chosen configuration,
and multiple GPRS MFSs. Moreover, the OMC-R provides the capability to be connected
to a Regional or Network Management Center (NMC) via a vendor independent Q3 BSS
mediation interface or via any available external interfaces.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
About the OMC-R
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features of the 9153 OMC-R include:
Hardware plug-and-play capability
Wide choice of transmission options, including X.25, LAN, WAN, and others;
distance and transmission support are not an issue
Access to network information with data on all network nodes displayed through
hierarchical views
Powerful online documentation, using hypertext links and navigation technology
Fault, configuration, performance, and security management

Open architecture, in line with TMN principles and standards recommendations
(M.3,100, X.7xx and GSM 12.20), means easy interfaces to network management
centers and other systems via a comprehensive set of interfaces, including Q3
In addition to these interfaces, Alcatel-Lucent offers a complete set of postprocessing
tools for network optimization
You can run an entire region made up of 30,000 TRXs or 6,000 cells
Advantages
Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R
Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R include:
PRELIMINARY
Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R include:

Various management features provide clear, comprehensive, customized, and
real-time information on network faults, performance, configuration, and security
Manages an entire region composed of thousands of cells
Operators save time and money on network monitoring
Detection: graphic synthesis view, Fault localization, Alarm counters, and Alarm
severity assignment
Tracking: alarm views with sort and filter, alarm reservation, and events/alarms
logging
Resolution: alarm acknowledgment, contextual access to maintenance actions, and
fault correction
Post Analysis: alarm history, evolution of events, and alarm metrics
Real-time diagnosis of resources: usage state on demand
Radio configuration management: online change of radio parameters from the
supervised configuration view, Offline tuning session of radio parameters
(Provisioning Radio Configuration), massive logical configuration update, cell
templates, GPRS/EDGE service handling, and radio configuration import/export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Equipment management: hardware online extension via simple action in the

topological network view and equipment configuration export
Software management: centralized management of BSS software packages from the
OMC-R and rapid rollout of new software with minimum impact on traffic
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
Advantages
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-R, see 9153 OMC R Product
Description, 3DC 21076 0005 TQZZA.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9153 OMC-R. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9153 OMC-R.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Two configurations
Two configurations of the OMC-RAN are available: 9253 OMC-RAN and 9254
OMC-RAN. There are capacity differences between the 9253 OMC-RAN and the 9254
OMC-RAN. However, there is no difference in functionality between the two
configurations.
Both can be used
Both the 9253 OMC-RAN and the 9254 OMC-RAN can be used with the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution. To indicate that, the term 9253/9254 OMC-RAN is used
throughout this document, to represent both configurations.
PRELIMINARY
Contents
22-31
22-31
Software
22-32
22-32
User interfaces
22-32
22-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What is the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN?
The 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253/9254
OMC-RAN) is a comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)-based Operations,
Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) platform that provides
enhanced, state-of-the-art OAM&P capabilities for Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and EV-DO
networks.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Role of the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN carries out
Provides the Graphic User Interface (GUI) used to manage the CDMA BTS in 3G
networks
Provides the fault, configuration, and performance management interfaces for other
EV-DO components in the 3G network
Provides 3G network elements' fault, configuration, and state information to SAM
overviews and allows access to OMC-RAN from those views
Provides 3G Networks fault management information via North Bound Interface to
SAM for consolidation of all alarms in single stream
The OMC-RAN Solution is available as either a 9253 OMC-RAN or a 9254 OMC-RAN

Compact.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The OMC-RAN server runs the Solaris operating system and the OMC-RAN application.
For CDMA applications, a new OMC-RAN release is required along with each new
eHRPD release.

Use of IP operations network
The 9253/9254 OMC-RAN uses the service providers existing Internet Protocol (IP)
operations network to communicate with monitoring entities such as the Network
Operations Center (NOC), client terminals such as PCs and workstations, and the 9271
EV-DO RNC APs.
User interfaces
User interfaces
The primary user interface on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN is a point and click GUI
interface known as the OMC-RAN GUI. The 9253/9254 OMC-RAN also supports a rich
variety of other interfaces. For more information on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN see the
documentation listed at the end of this topic.

For more information on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN, see the following documents and
classes.
Table 22-1
PRELIMINARY
Document Number
Document Title
401-380-086
OMC-RAN System Installation
401-380-091
OMC-RAN Object Description
401-380-092
OMC-RAN Command Line Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 22-1
Document Number
(continued)
Document Title
401-380-835
OMC-RAN Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and

Provisioning
401-662-113
User Interface Guide
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN. For a listing of these classes,
go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/
Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword OMC-RAN.
For a list of recommended classes, see also the Recommended classes for CDMA
(p. B-25).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-33
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9256 OMP
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9256 OMP
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) as used in
Contents
About the 9256 OMP
22-34
22-36
About the 9256 OMP

What is the 9256 OMP?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) is the next
generation Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P)
platform for Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Radio Access Network. The 9256 OMP provides a
cost-effective Element Management System (EMS) platform to perform critical OA&M
functionalities, including: Configuration Management, Service Measurement, and Fault
Management of the ECP, DCS, RNC, and cell sites. It also provides generic retrofit and
software update automation. The 9256 OMP is necessary for the Alcatel-Lucent-provided
CDMA RAN network.
Role of the 9256 OMP
PRELIMINARY
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) is a required, adjunct, standalone
processor that serves as a user interface and general OA&M processing platform for
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also hosts special tools such as
Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits and software updates,
service measurement collection, and so forth.
The 9256 OMP can be used to monitor many functional areas of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, including the:
9290 MM-Based Access Manager

9290 MMC-Based Access Manager
9281 Packet Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-34
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 9256 OMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9271 1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC)

9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (MM-APs)
Base Stations
Data links
Trunks
Note that the 9256 OMP user interface functions are enhanced and available on the
OMC-RAN.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9256 OMP
In addition to providing user interfaces, the 9256 OMP serves as:
A data repository for applications such as the Read-Only Printer (ROP), Service
Measurement (SM) data, Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD), database backup, and
Software Update Automation (SUA) staging
An emergency access point for the MSC

An OA&M tool platform (for both Alcatel-Lucent and customer tools)
Advantages of the 9256 OMP
The 9256 Operations and Management Platform offers efficient management of CDMA
Radio Access Network elements for continued operations, maintenance, and performance
monitoring of the network.
Some advantages of the 9256 OMP include:
Performs generic retrofit and software update automation support for the whole
network
Allows local emergency access with Technician Interface Command Line Interface,
Status Display Page, and Recent Change and Verify interfaces
Performs database backup and restore
Collects and stores
Provides cut-through access to Packet Switch (digital access and cross connect
switch) via Supplemental Trunkline workstation and Recent Change and Verify
interface
Allows direct connection to Executive Cellular Processor
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-35
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9256 OMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 9256 OMP, see CDMA Network
CDMA2000 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Overview, 401-610-102.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9256 OMP. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9256 OMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-36
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9353 WMS
This section describes the 9353 WMS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 9353 WMS
22-37
22-38
22-39
About the 9353 WMS

What is the 9353 WMS?
The 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS) delivers an integrated UMTS

management platform through which all NEs are monitored and controlled. The 9353
WMS provides the complete end-to-end management solution for UMTS networks. The
WMS manages the UTRAN part of the UMTS network.
Advantages of the 9353 WMS
Advantages of the 9353 WMS include:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-37
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Provides the operator full autonomy with a self-sufficient set of capabilities, including
specific know-how in best-practices for Alcatel-Lucent network planning, building,
operating, and maintenance.
Is designed for insuring carrier-grade network behavior across ends of the
Alcatel-Lucent Wireless solution, contributing in the areas of configuration control,
patching and upgrade, recovery, and permanent key network services availability
control.
Preserves the operators existing OSS investments.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9353 WMS
About the 9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Is designed for proper balance and clarity of responsibilities and complexity of

problem resolution between vendor, ISV, SIs, and the operator, leading to manageable
long term relationship and minimized operating and integration costs.
Enables cost effective and fully controlled projects, supported by Alcatel-Lucent

service teams who help the operators plan, build, operate, and maintain activities upon
customer requests.
Hardware
The WMS solution is delivered on a scalable hardware platform designed to grow with
the rollout of UMTS services. The management functions are hosted by Sun servers and
associated storage arrays. A PC or workstation provides the client support for W-CDMA
network management.
Software
For a description of the software on the WMS, see the W-CDMA Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Management System Overview, NN-20500-031.
User interfaces
For information on 9353 WMS user interfaces, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management
System - User Guide, NN-20500-032.

Use of the 9353 WMS in a combined GSM and LTE network

network, the 9353 WMS continues to be used for OAM&P on the W-CDMA portion of
the network.
Nothing changes
PRELIMINARY
Nothing changes for the 9353 WMS when it is used in conjunction with a LTE network.
The 9353 WMS only interfaces with the W-CDMA network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-38
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS, go to the following url:

PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9353 WMS
93. To find all the documentation for the W-CDMA Solution, look under
UMTS/W-CDMA Solutions.
Select the Product Index and then search for 9353 WMS.
See the W-CDMA Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management System Overview, NN-20500-031
and the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management System - User Guide, NN-20500-032.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9353 WMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9353 WMS.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-39
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9452 WPS
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9452 WPS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) as
Contents
About the 9452 WPS
22-40
22-42
About the 9452 WPS

What is the 9452 WPS?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) allows network

administrators to configure, change and optimize parameters of the W-CDMA access
network. Configuration management of mobile networks is a complex and tedious task
and this provisioning system has been specifically designed to cope with this complexity.
The system is a Java based solution running on Microsoft Windows-based desktops. It
includes a generic engine providing a wide range of configuration management
capabilities.
Role of the 9452 WPS
The 9452 WPS has been uniquely designed with the ability to handle and manage
network access objects and components with ease. It uses XML work orders to provide
the flexibility to enable multiple users, working concurrently, to configure the entire
network (or a subset / or single object only if required).
PRELIMINARY
The 9452 WPS system works by loading a reference snapshot in an XML format and
incrementally modifying this view by generating XML work-orders containing create,
delete, and modify unitary actions that increment on the reference network view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-40
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9452 WPS is composed of the following features:
Network Tree - The main window contains a representation of the managed objects or
components in a Windows Explorer type tree. Many applications are available
contextually from the tree allowing network administrators to navigate easily across
the entire set of applications offered.
Component/Object Editor - Enables the creation of components or objects.

Tabular Editor - Provides a tabular view of attribute settings and allows end users to
create, update, and delete attributes.
Dataset - Offers a mechanism to build assorted lists of managed objects. Datasets
facilitate data manipulation by isolating working sets, and are created by selecting
components or objects from the network tree or, by converting existing datasets.
Templates - Templates are user-defined containers of values shared among several

objects. The use of templates allows a reduction in the amount of information to be
typed in by the end-user, and more importantly, allows the network administrator to
benefit from Alcatel-Lucent engineering expertise.
Network Checker - Enables network administrators to check the updated

configuration before applying it in the network. This functionality is exceedingly
important in order to avoid any potential network malfunction.
Audit Capabilities - Allows network administrators to assess the 'health' of actual or
planned network configurations. It allows the comparison of two objects in order to:
evaluate an object against a template; do a global tabular display of a given object
class; do a global comparison against a given template; do a comparison against a
default value; generate a synchronization report over two days; or generate a
synchronization report between a target and an actual configuration of the network.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9452 WPS
Advantages of the 9452 WPS
The 9452 WPS provides the following advantages:

Market leader - Recognized by the market place as a leading product in its space.
With its large set of configuration management functionalities, high capacity, and
performance, it enables network administrators to configure and optimize
W-CDMA/HSPA networks quickly in an assisted and reliable manner.
Capacity - Able to cope with the configuration of access W-CDMA networks

managed by up to two different regional operational centers. Up to 12000 NodeBs can
be managed.
Revenue Generation - Allows rapid configuration and optimization of W-CDMA
access networks. It accelerates the deployment of new services and the revenues
associated with them.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-41
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9452 WPS
About the 9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rapid Deployment/Reliability/Flexibility - With its large set of features focused on

operational effectiveness and providing intelligent assisted capabilities such as
templates, the 9452 WPS enables reliable and rapid network deployment.
Low Cost of Ownership - This solution runs on low-cost hardware. In addition, it

allows network administrators to efficiently configure and optimize the W-CDMA
network, resulting in a reduction of the total OPEX required to operate a W-CDMA
access network.
Use of the 9452 WPS in LTE Network
The 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) is a high-performance kernel that

provides support to design and configure Alcatel-Lucent LTE networks based on specific
network recommendations. The 9452 WPS offers a centralized view and configuration of
all LTE network elements (Es) and parameters.
The 9452 WPS kernel-based applications can be used for configuration at every stage of
LTE management including:
Data engineering of a new network.
Data engineering for network expansion and additional density.

Data engineering for network optimization.
Data engineering for upgrade provisioning.
The 9452 WPS manages configuration data coming from various sources and the file
format used is CM XML.

For documentation
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9452 WPS, see Table
B-10, Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS (p. B-20).
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9452 WPS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9452 WPS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-42
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9958 WTA
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9958 WTA
This section describes the 9958 WTA as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 9958 WTA
22-43
22-45
22-45
About the 9958 WTA

What is the 9958 WTA?
The 9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer (9958 WTA) (formerly known as eDAT) is a PC
client-based application that enables rapid troubleshooting of subscriber problems by
producing detailed end-to-end analysis of calls. The 9958 WTA enables operators to
address the challenge of diagnosing and troubleshooting complex issues via call trace
data, thereby eliminating the need for costly analyzers and probes to be temporarily
installed on multiple network interfaces.
How it works
The 9958 WTA provides postprocessing of Call Trace data provided by Alcatel-Lucent
LTE network elements. The 9958 WTA supports tracing the entire call signaling from
inception to completion on the eNodeB and MME.
History
Prior to this release, the 9958 WTA product has been used internally by Alcatel-Lucent
service teams and for trials.
The first commercial release of the 9958 WTA product is occurring in the LE3.0 time
frame, and is intended for use starting with LE3.0 LTE networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-43
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
First commercial release
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9958 WTA
About the 9958 WTA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for the 9958 WTA
LTE trials are operated with significant support from Alcatel-Lucent, however, when
switching to commercial deployments, operators will require increased independence in
solving their network issues by themselves. As more networks are deployed, the number
of networks will not allow Alcatel-Lucent to sustain the same involvement from the
services team.
Advantages
The 9958 WTA efficiently addresses common problems such as identifying the reasons
for subscriber authentication failures, and very complex ones requiring detailed protocol
layers message decoding. The 9958 WTA is also extremely helpful for troubleshooting
the behavior of new devices, or for performing in-depth analysis of call traces following a
subscriber complaint. In addition, as the 9958 WTA can combine trace analysis from
multiple network elements, complex time-intensive manual correlation of traditional
probe-based traces is avoided.
Unique software-based approach
The centralized, comprehensive and software-based approach of the 9958 WTA provides
many benefits for the service provider. For example,
There is no need to deploy several analyzers over the different network element
interfaces, which results in significant CAPEX savings.
The 9958 WTA ensures aggregation of the different trace elements from multiple
NEs, helping understand the overall, end-to-end message sequence.
Trace acquisition and analysis can be triggered from the Network Operation Center
(NOC) without sending technical staff to different locations, thereby helping to reduce
OPEX.
Since traces can be configured and analyzed from the NOC, where additional
information is also available from other important sources such as the 9959 NPO,
operators can more quickly identify fixes and optimizations.
Trace activation can be handled in the different modes defined by the 3GPP
specifications (signaling-based or management-based activations). This allows, for
example, the trace activation to be propagated by a given MME to multiple eNodeBs
involved in the investigated call.
PRELIMINARY
Software
WTA is a stand-alone software application, which can be run on a Windows platform.

The 9958 WTA uses the Reality Services Platform Satellite Agent software running on
each of the appropriate nodes to access the call trace data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-44
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

No change
There is no change in the functionality of the 9958 WTA when the 9958 WTA is used in
support of LTE.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9958 WTA

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9958 WTA. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9958 WTA.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-45
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9959 NPO
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9959 NPO
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9959 NPO with PCMD option as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the 9959 NPO
22-46
Hardware
22-48
Software
22-48
22-48
22-48
About the 9959 NPO

What is the 9959 NPO?
The 9959 Network Performance Optimizer (9959 NPO) is the Alcatel-Lucent

multi-standard performance management system. The 9959 NPO is available for
GSM/EDGE, W-CDMA/HSPA and LTE radio access technologies. The 9959 NPO allows
mobile service providers to monitor and optimize the performance of the radio access part
of their wireless networks.
How it works
PRELIMINARY
The 9959 NPO uses a powerful database containing data from the 2G, 3G and/or 4G
EMSs in the network. The 9959 NPO imports into this database performance
measurements and calculated indicators as well as radio parameters, planned data,
topology information, inventory, alarms, and logs. This enables the operator to define
indicators combining all data sources.
Used with additional PCMD module
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 9959 NPO is used with an additional
PCMD module. Adding the PCMD module to the 9959 NPO provides additional
granularity to speed up finding and solving key problems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-46
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the 9959 NPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is PCMD?
Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD) is a feature that provides information on the key
procedures of each call: call setup and termination (success or failure), traffic area update,
and handover. For each call, PCMD data contains a great deal of information, including
the following:
Identification for the call, such as the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI),
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI), cell identifier (ID), eNodeB, MME,
SGW IP, and so forth
The ongoing procedures and their success or failure (with detailed failure cause)
The radio conditions (power, quality, round trip delay)
Bytes transmitted
Cells detected by the UE
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9959 NPO
How it works
When the PCMD module is added to the 9959 NPO, PCMD data is sent from the eNodeB
to the MME and then to the 5620 SAM. The 9959 NPO then retrieves the information
from the 5620 SAM.
Advantages
The primary benefit of the 9959 NPO is to consolidate into a single tool a combined view
of performance measurements, topology data and configuration information of the
cellular network.
In addition, the 9959 NPO delivers a rich tool set enabling QoS diagnostics, correlation of
performance and configuration, and QoS tuning based on network performance
collection.
The 9959 NPO also delivers advanced reporting functions on network QoS across
multi-standard wireless 2G-3G-LTE technologies.
Unique design
The 9959 NPO is based on a unique combination of an intuitive but sophisticated user
interface, multiple data sources, and a Geographical Information System. Because of
these attributes the 9959 NPO significantly increases the efficiency of a service provider's
QoS monitoring, troubleshooting and optimization activities.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-47
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9959 NPO
Hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The 9959 NPO has a distributed architecture on HP servers (running Linux) plus
terminals.
Software
Software
The 9959 NPO has a multi-user client-server architecture and relies on the Oracle
database for storing performance data.

No changes
No changes are required in the 9959 NPO to support LTE.

For documentation
For documentation on the 9959 NPO go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for 9959 NPO.
For documentation
PRELIMINARY
Overview documents for the 9959 include:
9959 NPO Customer Product Overview
9959 Network Performance Optimizer Feature Planning Guide
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9959 NPO, see Table
B-12, Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO (p. B-21).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-48
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9959 NPO. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword 9959 NPO.
Note: The 9459 NPO and 9959 NPO are the same product. From LE3.0 onward, the
name 9959 NPO is used even though some databases (and training classes) may still
contain the term 9459 NPO.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-49
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
9959 NPO
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
NEM
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NEM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Network Element Manager (NEM) as used in the
Contents
About the NEM
22-50
22-51
22-51
About the NEM

What is the NEM?
The Network Element Manager (NEM) is an application that provides OA&M functions
for the 9412 eNodeB.
Role
Think of the NEM as the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for the 9412 eNodeB.
The NEM is needed (in addition to the 5620 SAM) to configure certain equipment-related
parameters, to direct the 9412 eNodeB to ping another network element (for
troubleshooting), and to support the 9412 eNodeB restore procedure.
How it works
The NEM is an application that runs on a PC.

Benefit
PRELIMINARY
The NEM offers direct access to the 9412 eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-50
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

No changes
No changes are required in the NEM to support LTE.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
NEM

User Guide
For information on the NEM, see the eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, 418-000-390.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the NEM in the eNodeB Maintenance classes. For a
listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:
https://training alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword NEM or
eNodeB Maintenance.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-51
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
OMC-CN
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMC-CN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-CN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the OMC-CN
22-52
22-54
22-54
About the OMC-CN

What is the OMC-CN?
The Operations and Maintenance Center - Core Network (OMC-CN), supports the
network elements that comprise the Core Network for both wireline and wireless
applications. The Core Network refers to the set of network elements used for the
switching and signaling portion of a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network. These
elements also offer features to subscribers, both residential and business.
OMC-CN acts as an interface between the Network Management System (NMS) and the
Network Elements (NEs). These NEs can be geographically dispersed over multiple
regions and can still be managed remotely from a central facility using OMC-CN.
Role of the OMC-CN
PRELIMINARY
OMC-CN's role is to support the network elements that comprise the Core Network for
both wireline and wireless applications.
OMC-CN delivers the functionalities identified at the Element Management Layer (EML)
of the Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P). An
important distinction of OMC-CN is that it supports multiple network element types. That
is, OMC-CN is used as the Element Management System (EMS) for the Core Network
elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-52
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About the OMC-CN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the OMC-CN
Advantages of the OMC-CN include:
OMC-CN supports the network elements that comprise the Core Network for both
wireline and wireless applications.
OMC-CN is used as an Element Management System (EMS) for the Core Network
elements.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
OMC-CN
Use of OMC-CN in LTE Network
OMC-CN manages the 9380 3G MSC (9380 WCS) network element in the GSM/UMTS
network. During LTE network coverage buildup stage, the 9380 3G MSC provides
voice/SMS fallback to circuit core for LTE-capable UEs. OMC-CN provides the element
management layer for 9380 3G MSC call server in such GSM/UMTS and LTE coverage
areas.
Figure 22-1 Use of OMC-CN in LTE network
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-53
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
OMC-CN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the OMC-CN when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent
OMC-CN in LTE
There is no change required for OMC-CN to support LTE network fallback coverage to
3G-MSC call server.

For documentation
For details on the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-CN documentation, see OLCS:

Manuals and Guides: (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/
dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000001245&doctype=DOC)
Release Notes: (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.
cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000001245&doctype=RLNT)
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the OMC-CN. For a listing of these classes, go to

Web/Main and search on the keyword OMC-CN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-54
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMT
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
SMT
This section describes the Server Management Tool (SMT) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
The SMT
22-55
How it works
22-55
22-56
22-56
The SMT
What is the SMT?
The Server Management Tool (SMT) is the management platform for the 8950 AAA
server.
How it works
What does the SMT do?
The SMT is an Element Management System (EMS) application that is used to configure
and manage all aspects of the 8950 AAA. The SMT is a stand-alone application that may
be run on the same computer as the AAA, or on a different computer.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-55
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
SMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
There are not changes in the SMT when the SMT is used as part of the Alcatel-Lucent

For documentation
PRELIMINARY
For information on the 8950 AAA, including information on the SMT, see Accessing
and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site (p. B-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-56
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TSIS
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
TSIS
This section describes the Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface System (TSIS) as
Contents
About TSIS
22-57
22-59
22-60
About TSIS
What is TSIS?
The Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) provides a robust web-based

Graphical User Interface (GUI) for troubleshooting, monitoring, and provisioning the
5110 Short Message Service Center (SMSC). TSIS is a stand-alone component that can
be configured to run either on the 5110 SMSC platform or on a stand-alone server. When
running on a stand alone server, TSIS allows operators to manage all 5110 SMSCs in
their network from a single platform.
Included with 5110 SMSC
TSIS is included with the 5110 SMSC and needed to accomplish many SMSC-specific
OA&M capabilities.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-57
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
TSIS
About TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Key capabilities
TSIS provides many capabilities for the 5110 SMSC, including the following:
Administration
Control of users accounts
Ability to assign users access to different levels of functionality within TSIS
Dashboard
Provide traffic statistics: Busy Hour Short Message (BHSM), Transmission
Control Protocol/internet Protocol (TCP/IP), Signaling System 7 (SS7)
Display Central Processor Unit (CPU) usage
Troubleshooting - For a detailed list, see Troubleshooting assistance (p. 22-58)
Provisioning - For a detailed list, see Provisioning assistance (p. 22-58)
Troubleshooting assistance
The TSIS provides tools and information to assist in tracking down and resolving 5110
SMSC message delivery or service problems, including the following:
Message submission and review pending and completed messages

Details of past delivery attempts for messages
One-click subscriber information
Tracing
Billing Call Detail Record (CDR) record review

Port Status and Control
Platform information such as Initialization (INIT) process, Real Time Data Base
(RTDB), SS7 link status, SS7 Stream Connection Transport Layer (SCTP) link status,
Mate Update Status, and software versions
SPA information, such as Service Package Application (SPA) status, RTDB

connection status, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) data view status,
and patches
Provisioning assistance
The TSIS provides provisioning assistance for the 5110 SMSC, including the following:
PRELIMINARY
SUBDB RTDB (including directory number (DN), Mobile Identification Number

(MIN), Cellular Office Service (COS), Rating, Signature, Copy, Forward, and Send
Blocked Notification)
Subscriber Blocklists, Subscriber White Lists, Global White List
Destination Routing
Notification Forwarding
Message Service Center (MSC) Table (MSC Point Code or Global Title Address
[GTA])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-58
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
About TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Broadcast List Groups and Members

Banner Categories, and Banners
TSIS provisioning also supports Short Message Peer-to-Peer (SMPP) multiplex port
status, and rebuilding the SMPP Multiplex Table. It also supports bulk provisioning of the
Destination Routing tables, and the Subscriber Database (SUBDB) RTDB.
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
TSIS
Hardware
The TSIS software package runs on the same hardware as the 5110 SMSC.
Software
TSIS is a stand-alone component that can be configured to run either on the SMSC
platform or on a stand-alone server.
The TSIS has no connections to other network elements (apart from the 5110 SMSC).
User interfaces
The Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) supports the following two user
interfaces:
A robust web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI)

A character-based Text Interface with limited functionality

No changes
No changes are required in the TSIS to support LTE.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-59
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the TSIS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support

Documentation) and search for 5110 SMSC. TSIS is written up within the 5110 SMSC
documentation.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the TSIS. For a listing of these classes, go to

Web/Main and search on the keyword 5110 SMC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-60
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEM
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
WEM
This section describes the Wireless Element Manager (WEM) as used in the
Contents
About the WEM
22-61
22-62
About the WEM

What is the WEM?
The Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Element Manager (WEM) is the management platform for
the 5060 WCS and 7549 MGW, used for the Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks.
Role of the WEM
The WEM offers simplified configuration, fault and performance management of the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, all subtending MGWs and MSC pools server.
Use of the WEM
The main functions provided by the WEM include the following:
Enables the integrated provisioning of trunks groups with automatic mapping of

WCS trunk groups onto MGW trunk circuits
Unified Operations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-61
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Single Provisioning Interface

that:
Allows the WCS and MGWs to be provisioned via one EMS, including WCS and
MGW nodes, slots, cards, protection groups, trunk groups, cross-connects, SGW,
IWF, etc.
Provides integrated view of WCS and MGW HW and SW inventory
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
WEM
About the WEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
that:
Provides centralized operations for WCS and MGW SW upgrades, backups, and
restores
Central repository for WCS & MGW SW loads and backups

WEM toolset integrated for both WCS and MGW, e.g. Call Trace performs both a
WCS and MGW trace
Provides unified view of alarms, events, OM pegs, device status, etc. for the WCS
and all subtending MGWs
Centralized management of all MGWs in a MSC Pool, by one designated primary
WCS WEM

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent WEM, see Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS
Product Description.
Training
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the WEM. For a listing of these classes, go to

Web/Main and search on the keyword WEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-62
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-63
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
OAM&P products
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-64
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix A: LTE interfaces
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists LTE interfaces. Note that some of these interfaces are not used in the
current the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
IP connectivity
A-1
Graphical view of the LTE interfaces
A-2
A-3
IP connectivity
Either IPv4 or IPv6
The IP connectivity between network elements can be either IPv4 or IPv6, though dual
stack is not supported in LE4.0 by RAN and EPC elements.
Note: IPSec over IPv6 is not possible in LE4.0 since IPSec is not supported on the
7750 SR security gateway.
IPv6 for OAM and Telecom traffic
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The service provider can, however, deploy IPv6 for OA&M and Telecom traffic within
the service provider's transport network. Deploying IPv6 helps eliminate the need for
IPv4 addresses for the thousands of eNodeBs that will be deployed in the network.
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FDD Reference Architecture
The following figure shows the ALU End-to-End Solution with the architecture and the
LTE interfaces.
PRELIMINARY
Figure A-1 End-to-End LTE Solution architecture and interfaces
For another graphical view of all LTE interfaces used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution (p. 15-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference table
Note: This list of interfaces is provided for reference purposes. Some of these
interfaces are not used in the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Table A-1
LTE Network Interfaces and Protocols
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
A, Ac(Cntrl),
Au(User)
MSC<->BSS
BSSAP
43.051
A1
PS <->3G1x BS
A10/A11'
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
48.xxx-Series
HS Gateway <-> RNC
Proprietary (runs on top

of UDP)
A.S0014-0
3GPP2 X.0087
A.S0017-0
(3gpp2)
(3gpp2)
A13
RNC <-> RNC
3GPP2 X.0087
A.S0007-A
(3gpp2)
Abis
BSC <-> BTS
TDM for traffic LAPD for

BTS supervision signaling
and synchronization.
48.5x-Series
Ater
TC <-> BSC/MFS
BTAP
Proprietary
MSC Server <-> HSS/HLR
MAP
23.078
CAP
GMSC <-> HSS/HLR
(CAMEL)
OCS <-> HSS/HLR
29.002
OCS <-> MSC
CAP
23.078
29.078
CPRI
Radio Equip Ctrl<-> BBU <->
Radio Interface
RRU
Cx
x-CSCF <-> HSS
CPRI
Specification
Diameter
29.228
29.229
MSC/VLR <-> HSS/HLR
MAP
23.078
(CAMEL)
29.002
D /Gr
3GPP Server <-> HLR
23.234
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
Ga
SGSN <-> OFCS (CGF)
GTP
32.295
BSSGP
48.014
S-GW (CDG) <-> OFCS (CGF)

P-GW (CDG) <-> OFCS (CGF)
OFCS (CDF <-> CGF)
Gb
SGSN <-> BSS
48.016
48.018
Gi
GGSN <-> Packet Data Networks
Diameter
20.061
29.274
Gn-C/S3
SGSN<-> MME
GTPv1-c
29.274
Gn/Gp
SGSN <-> GGSN
UDP/IP GTP/V1
29.060
29.274
Gn-U
GGSN <-> RNC
GTPU
23.060
MAP
23.060
GGSN <-> SC-TDMA RNC

Gr
SGSN <-> HLR

MME <-> HSS/HLR
29.002
29.305
Gs
MSC/VLR <-> SGSN
SCCP
29.008
29.016
29.018
29.118
Gx
PCEF <-> PCRF/H-PCRF/V-PCRF
Diameter
PCRF <-> P-GW

Gxa
Trusted non-3GPP IP Access <->

PCRF/V-PCRF
23.203
29.212
Diameter
23.203
29.21x-Series
HS Gateway <-> PCRF
PRELIMINARY
Gxc
S-GW <-> PCRF/V-PCRF
Used only with S5/S8

PMIP
23.203
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
Gy/Ro
OCS <-> PCEF
Diameter
32.240
Gz
OCS <-> P-GW/GGSN
32.251
OCS <-> SGSN
32.260
OCS <-> TAS
32.29x-Series
OCS <-> P/S/I-CSCF
RFC 4006
OFCS <-> PCEF
Diameter
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
32.240
OFCS (CDF) <-> P-GW
32.295
OFCF(CDF) <-> S-GW
32.299
OFCF(CDF) <-> P/S/I-CSCF

Iub
RNC <-> NodeB
NBAP
25.43x-Series
RANAP/SCCP
25.413
Iu-up/AAL2 or RTP
25.410
SC-TDMA RNC <-> SC-TDMA

NodeB
Iu-CSc
RNC <-> MSC

SC-TDMA RNC <-> MSC
Iu-CSu
RNC <-> MGW

SC-TDMA RNC <-> MGW
Iu-PS
SGSN <-> BSS
25.415
RANAP
25.41-Series
RNSAP
25.42x-Series
M1
36.441
SGSN <-> RNS

SGSN <-> SC-TDMA RNS
Iur
RNC <-> RNC

SC-TDMA RNC <-> SC-TDMA
RNC
M1
MBMS-GW <-> eNB
36.445
25.446
M2
MCE <-> eNB
M2AP
36.441
36.442
36.443
MCE <-> MME
M3AP
36.441
36.442
36.444
Mc
(G)MSC Server <-> CS-MGW
H.248
29.232
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
M3
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
Rf
OFCS(CDF) <-> HS Gateway
Diameter
32.225
OFCS(CDF) <-> TAS
32.240
OFCS(CDF) <-> P/S/I-CSCF
32.251
OFCS(CDF) <-> S-GW
32.260
OFCS(CDF) <-> P-GW
32.299
RFC 4006
Rx
PCRF <-> Application Function
Diameter
23.203
29.214
S1-MME
MME <-> E-UTRAN
S1-AP Access Stratum

(AS) Protocol
23.401
24.301
36.41x-Series
S1-U
S-GW <-> E-UTRAN
GTP-U
29.274
36.41x-Series
S2a
Trusted Non-3GPP IP Access <->

S-GW/P-GW
PMIPv6
29.274 (GTP)
HS Gateway <-> P-GW

S2b
S4
24.304
29.275 (PMIP)
Untrusted Non-3GPP Access

(WLAN) <-> P-GW
PMIPV6
SGSN <-> S-GW
GTPU
29.275
33.402
23.401
29.274
S5(non-roaming)/
S8(roaming)
S-GW <-> P-GW
GTP
23.060 (GTPv1)
29.274 (GTPv2)
29.275 (PMIP)
S6a
MME <-> HSS
Diameter
23.401
PRELIMINARY
29.272
S6b
PDN-GW <-> 3GPP AAA

Server/Proxy
Diameter
29.273
S6d
SGSN <-> HSS
Diameter
23.060
29.272
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
S9
PCRF <-> V-PCRF
Diameter
23.203
23.215
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
23.402
29.125
29.215
S10
MME <-> MME
GTPv2-c
23.401
29.274
S11
MME <-> S-GW
GTP
29.274
S12
S-GW <-> UTRAN
GTP-U
29.274
S-GW <-> SC-TDMA UTRAN

S13
MME <-> EIR
Diameter
29.272
S16
SGSN <-> SGSN
GTPv2-C
23.060
29.274
S101
HRDP AN <-> MME
S101-AP
23.402
29.276
C.S0087-0
(3GPP2)
S102
3GPP2 1xCS IWS <-> MME
UDP Over IP
23.216(SRVCC)
23.272(CSFB)
29.277
A.S0008-C
SBc
CBC <-> MME
SBc-AP
29.168
SGi
PDN-GW <-> Packet Data

Networks
Diameter, Radius
29.061
SGs
MSC/VLR <-> MME
SCTP SGs AP
23.272
29.118
Sh
HSS <-> SIP AS or OSA SCS
PCRF <-> HSS
23.228(Section
4.2.4)
29.328
29.329
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
HSS <-> IP-SM-GS for SMSIP

delivery
Diameter
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
Sp
SPR <-> PCRF
Not Specified 3GPP. ALU

uses Diameter
23.203
29.328
29.212 (Gx)
29.213 (Call Flows)
29.238
29.239
STa
Trusted 3GPP Access <-> AAA

Server/Proxy
Diameter
23.402
29.273
HS Gateway <-> AAA

Sv
MSC Server <-> MME
Sv AP
29.280
Untrusted Non-3GPP Access <->

AAA Server/Proxy
Diameter
23.402
ePDG <-> AAA Server/Proxy
Diameter
MSC Server <-> SGSN

Swa
SWm
29.273
23.402
29.273
SWx
HSS <-> 3GPP AAA Server
Diameter
23.402
29.273
Um(Geran)
MS<-> BSS
GSM, GPRS Air Interface
25.xxx Series
44.xxx-Series
45.xxx-Series
Um(3gpp2)
CDMA 1X UE <-> 3G1X BS

CDMA eHRPD UE <-> 1xEV-DO
BS
Ut
UE<-> AS
HTTP(s), XCAP (XML

Based)
24.6xx- Series
(Supp Svcs)
PRELIMINARY
33.222 (security)
Uu (LTE)
UE <-> E-UTRAN
Air Interface
36.xxx-Series
Uu
UE <-> RNS
Air Interface
24.xxx-Series
UE <-> SC-TDMA RNS
25.xxx-Series
26.xxx-Series
Wf
Untrusted non-3GPP access

(WLAN) <-> OPCS
Diameter
23.234
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Reference Point
End Points
Protocol
LTE Standards
Reference
Wo
OCS <-> ePDG
Diameter
23.234
X1_1
LIG <-> HSS
SSH
Proprietary
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
LIG <-> MME

LIG <-> P-GW
LIG <-> S-GW
LIG <-> P/S/I-CSCF
LIG <-> 3G MSC
X2(AN)
eNB <-> eNB
X2 (LI)
LIG <-> MME
36.42x-Series
X2-AP, GTP-U
Proprietary
UDP
Proprietary
LIG <-> P-GW

LIG <-> S-GW
LIG <-> P/S/I-CSCF
X3
LIG <-> MRF

LIG <-> P-GW
LIG <-> S-GW
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix B: Resources
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists resources for further information on LTE and on the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Release Notes
B-2
Planning Hub site
B-2
Technical reading on LTE
B-3
B-3
More about the LTE Library on OLCS
B-6
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site
B-9
Accessing network element documentation through the Product Index
B-11
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site
B-11
B-13
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics
B-23
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE
B-24
B-26
Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications
B-26
Glossary
B-31
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Release Notes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release Notes
Release Notes document
The Release Notes explain what particular product releases are included in a Solution
release.
A Solution release notes document is available, at the following site:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/)
To access the Release Notes, choose a Release and then click on the Release Notes. For a
picture showing this, see Release Notes and manuals (p. B-6).
Planning Hub site

Planning Hub Site
An LTE Planning Hub website has been created to provide planning information and
release notes to the customer.
To access the site
To access the LTE Planning Hub website, carry out the following steps:
PRELIMINARY
Go to the following url and log in:

Select an LTE release
Select LTE x Manuals and Guides, where x is the LTE release you are working
with
Select Preliminary Solution Documents
Select Planning Hub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Books for additional reading
The following books give a good overview of LTE and related topics:
Sesia, Stefania, Toufik, Issam and Baker, Matthew, LTE - The UMTS Long Term
Evolution - From Theory to Practice, John Wiley & Sons, 2009, ISBN
978-0-470-69716-0
Lescuyer, Pierre and Lucidarme, Thierry, Evolved Packet System (EPS) The LTE and
SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS
Agilent Technologies, edited by Rumney, Moray, LTE and the Evolution to 4G
Wireless Design and Measurement Challenges
PRELIMINARY
Resources

What is the LTE Library?
The LTE Library is a complete set of LTE-related customer documentation, all in one
place to help the user.
Benefits
Benefits of the LTE Library include the following:
A complete set of Solution-level documents that provide a framework for all the
network pieces
A complete set of documentation for all network elements used in the Solution
A separate site for each LTE Solution release
Capability to search across all LTE-related documents
Release numbers may vary
Some customer documentation may have release numbers that don't match the current
LTE release. For information on what other releases map to the current LTE release, go to
the Release Notes, which are at the following url:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
To access the Release Notes, choose a Release and then click on the Release Notes. For a
picture showing this, see Release Notes and manuals (p. B-6).
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Solution-level and core LTE documents
The following figure shows the Solution-level and core LTE documents for LE4.0.
Figure B-1 Solution-level and core LTE customer documentation
Dedicated site
PRELIMINARY
LTE Solution documents are available from OLCS Services Collaboration at the
following dedicated site: https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte. This site
contains the solution-level documents and links to all the related LTE network element
documents (9471 MME, 5620 SAM, and so forth). The site is therefore one-stop
shopping for LTE documentation and software.
This topic describes the LTE documentation site on the online customer support (OLCS)
web site and tells how to use it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About OLCS
The OLCS web site is part of the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner Portals
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com). The web site is designed mainly for registered
customers and business partners.
For a detailed overview of OLCS and instructions on its use, see Accessing and
PRELIMINARY
Resources
LTE documentation site
To find the LTE documentation site, go to the following url:

(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte)
Limited to LTE customers
The LTE customer documentation site is restricted to LTE customers.

To find LTE documentation
To access documentation on the LTE Solution and on network elements used in LTE,
carry out the following steps:

(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte)
Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or LTE
or 1xEV-DO.
Go to the box at the center in the top of the screen called Model/Subgroup and from
the drop-down select the network element you are interested in, for example, 9412
eNodeB.
selected.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
This topic gives tips for navigating with the OLCS LTE Library.
OLCS access
The LTE Solutions Documents and Software services collaboration area provides
one-stop shopping for solution and network element resources.
PRELIMINARY
Figure B-2 OLCS access
Release Notes and manuals
Choose a release to access the appropriate documentation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure B-3 Release Notes and manuals
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying documents for a single network element
Use the drop down box to select a document.

Figure B-4 Selecting a document in the OLCS LTE Library list
PRELIMINARY
Note: The automatic mapping mentioned in the figure means that when you start at
the solution level (LE2.1 for example) and then go to MME or SAM or DSC, the
correct NE versions correlating to LE2.1 are automatically displayed. If you use the
drop-down box, you will see all available releases of the NE software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The online customer support (OLCS) web site contains documentation and other
resources to help Alcatel-Lucent customers. This topic describes the OLCS web site and
tells how to use it.
PRELIMINARY
Resources
About OLCS
Registration benefits
Depending on your service level as outlined in your customer contract, you can enjoy the
following benefits as a registered user:
Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.

Receive 24/7 technical support service to help you operate and maintain your
communications network at peak performance.
Keep current on relevant news and events with customized alerts.
Review a library of technical documents, case studies, white papers, catalogs, industry
intelligence, and expert articles to help advance your research and business practices.
The level of benefits to which you may be entitled is determined by the customer contract
for your company or organization.
If your company or organization is a registered business partner, you can use the
following options:
Gain access to powerful marketing tools that help you make the most of your
Alcatel-Lucent products and solutions.
Enhance the cooperation and efficiency of your team by sharing documents and ideas
in the collaboration work space.
Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.
Draw on our extensive library of case studies, white papers, catalogs, and expert
articles to advance your research and work.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Registering for the portals
To register for the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner Portals

(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com), proceed as follows:
1. Click Register for Access.
2. On the Registration for access to Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner
Portals page, follow the steps displayed under Registration Progress.
You will receive an e-mail confirmation of your registration and site access privileges.
Alcatel-Lucent strives for two business days or less response.
How the site is designed
The My Customer Support portal is the umbrella portal to all of the underlying content
and tools. Product-specific content is organized by product. You can also gain access to
content and tools by going directly to each of the underlying applications.
Navigating on OLCS
The following primary ways to navigate are provided on OLCS.
Jump to Content Page list
This option is the primary means to navigate between My Customer Support home
and the underlying applications or among the applications without returning home.
Technical Content for portlet
This option allows easy access to product-specific content without navigating deeper
into the product pages.
My Products
This option takes you to the My Products page, the access to both product-specific
content and any other available applications. The names of products for which your
company has service agreements or warranties are displayed on this page. If your
company has purchased a number of products from Alcatel-Lucent, and you wish to
shorten the list to only those products that you are responsible for, select Manage My
Products.
Quick access portlets
These portlets provide easy access from the home page to heavily used applications
and useful support information. For example, the portlets provide quick access to the
CARES system and the ask AL Knowledgebase.
PRELIMINARY
Technical support information
To locate technical support telephone numbers and e-mail contact information for your
area, use the Product Technical Support, Phone and E-mail Contact Information
drop-down menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical documentation on OLCS
Depending on the product, technical documentation may include:
Manuals and guides

Technical notes
Release information
PRELIMINARY
Resources
The Manuals and Guides category of documentation points directly to corporate libraries
for our highest volume products. In addition to listing documents available for online
viewing, the libraries may include CD-ROMs, videos, and other tangible media for
purchase. The libraries use Topic Finder which is a search engine designed to search
documents more efficiently than full text search.
Accessing network element documentation through the

Product Index
Product Index page
OLCS has a product index page that can be used to search for documentation on a
particular network element (for example, on the 9471 MME). To reach the product index
page, go to the following url:
(https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=Documentation)
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web

site
Introduction
This topic describes the IMS documentation site on the online customer support (OLCS)
web site and tells how to use it.
About OLCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
For a detailed overview of OLCS and instructions on its use, see Accessing and
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS

web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS documentation site
To find the IMS documentation site, go to the following url:

(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=
1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
Limited to IMS customers
The IMS customer documentation site is restricted to IMS customers.

To find IMS Solution documentation
To access general documentation on the IMS Solution, for example, the product
description, carry out the following steps:

(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?
entryId=1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
From the drop-down list to the right of the Model/Subgroup filter, select IMS
Solution-General
Result: A list of IMS Solution-level documentation appears.
To select the product description document, scroll down to number 275-000-000, IP
Multimedia Subsystem Release x Technical Description (where x stands for a software
release), and click on the word pdf to the left of the title of the document.
To find IMS documentation on a network element
To find the IMS documentation for a particular IMS network element, for example, the
5420 CTS, carry out the following steps:

(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?
entryId=1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
From the drop-down list to the right of the Model/Subgroup filter, select 5420
CTS
Result: A list of IMS documentation for the 5420 CTS appears.

Product Index page
PRELIMINARY
OLCS has a product index page that can be used to search for documentation on a
particular network element. To reach the product index page, go to the following url:
url to Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=
Documentation)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Partial list
The following tables give a partial list of the available customer documentation on the
The first table gives the list of the domains then the other tables give a list of customer
documentation per domain.
Table B-1
LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library
Documentation List
Where to find the list
LTE End-to-End Solution
See Table B-2, Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End

Solution (p. B-14)
ePC - 5780 DSC
See Table B-3, Documentation Library for ePC 5780 DSC

(p. B-15)
ePC and RAN 5620 SAM Core
See Table B-4, Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM Core (p. B-15)
ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE
See Table B-5, Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM LTE (p. B-16)
ePC - 9471 MME
See Table B-6, Documentation Library for ePC 9471 MME

(p. B-16)
ePC - 7750 SR (backhaul and

PGW/GGSN & SGW support)
See Table B-7, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR

(Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support) (p. B-17)
ePC 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN & SGW)
See Table B-8, Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR

(PGW/GGSN/SGW) (p. B-18)
LTE RAN Access
See Table B-9, Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access

(p. B-18)
LTE RAN Concept Guides
LTE RAN Reference Guides
LTE RAN Network

Re-configuration and Activation
Procedures
LTE 9412 eNodeB Guides
LTE 9926 d2U BBU Manuals
LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact

Manuals
LTE 9460 Pico eNodeB Manuals
LTE RRH Manuals

See Table B-10, Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS
(p. B-20)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
LTE 9452 WPS Guides
PRELIMINARY
Resources
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-1
(continued)
Documentation List
Where to find the list
LTE 9958 WTA Guides
See Table B-11, Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA

(p. B-21)
LTE 9959 NPO Guides
See Table B-12, Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO

(p. B-21)
CDMA - eBTS, eRNC
See Table B-13, Documentation Library for CDMA eBTS, eRNC

(p. B-22)
WCDMA
See Documentation for W-CDMA (p. B-23)
3rd Party Components
See Documentation for 3rd Party Components (p. B-23)
IMS Solution
See Documentation for IMS Solution (p. B-23)
Documentation for LTE End-to-End Solution
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE End-to-End Solution :
PRELIMINARY
Table B-2
Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End Solution
Document Number
Document Title
418-111-000
LTE End-to-End Solution Solution Overview
418-111-001
LTE End-to-End Solution Operations, Administration and

Maintenance (OAM)
418-111-005
LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes
418-111-006
LTE End-to-End Solution Software Upgrade Procedure
418111007
LTE End-to-End Solution Capabilities Guide Technical Description
418-111-008
LTE End-to-End Solution Call Flows with Performance

Measurements Technical Description
418-111-010
LTE End-to-End Solution Planning Hub Reference Guide
418-111-012
LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology Overview
LTE/DCL/APP/030940
LTE Network Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (LNCME)
LTE/DCL/APP/034072
Transport Engineering Guide (TEG)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC 5780 DSC
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC 5780 DSC:
Table B-3
Documentation Library for ePC 5780 DSC
Document Number
Document Title
3HE 06673 AAAA
5780 DSC User Guide
3HE 06674 AAAA
5780 DSC Installation and Upgrade Guide
3HE 06676 AAAA
5780 DSC Integration Guide
3HE 06675 AAAA
5780 DSC Policy Management Use Cases
3HE 06928 AAAA
5780 DSC Planning Guide
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Documentation for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM
Core:
Table B-4
Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core

Document Title
3HE 06505 AAxx TQZZA
5620 SAM Glossary
5620 SAM Installation and Upgrade Guide
5620 SAM Integration Guide
5620 SAM Maintenance Guide
5620 SAM Network Element Compatibility Guide
5620 SAM Parameter Guide
5620 SAM Planning Guide
5620 SAM Release Description
5620 SAM Scripts and Templates Developer Guide
5620 SAM Statistics Management Guide
5620 SAM Supervision Module User Guide
5620 SAM System Architecture Guide
5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide
5620 SAM User Guide
5620 SAM XML OSS Interface Developer Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Document Number
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM
LTE:
Table B-5
Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE
Document Number
Document Title
5620 SAM 3GPP Interface Compliance Statements
5620 SAM 3GPP OSS Interface Developer Guide
5620 SAM LTE Alarm Reference
5620 SAM LTE ePC User Guide
5620 SAM LTE RAN Release Description
5620 SAM LTE Parameter Reference
5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
Documentation for ePC 9471 MME
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC 9471 MME:
PRELIMINARY
Table B-6
Documentation Library for ePC 9471 MME
Document Number
Document Title
418-111-200
9471 MME Technical Description
418-111-201
9471 MME Operations, Administration and Maintenance
418-111-203
9471 MME Security Management
418-111-206
9471 MME Software Update
418-111-207
9471 MME Configuration Management
418-111-208
9471 MME Alarm Dictionary
418-111-209
9471 MME Observation Counters
418-111-210
9471 MME Site Preparation
418-111-250
9471 MME Chassis-only Site Preparation
LTE/DCL/APP/031094
MME LTE Parameter Guide (LPUG) for LM4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW Support)
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and
PGW/GGSN/SGW support):
Table B-7
Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (Backhaul and

PGW/GGSN/SGW support)
Document Number
Document Title
93-0070-08xx
7750 SR OS Basic System Configuration Guide
93-0071-08xx
7750 SR OS System Management Guide
93-0072-08xx
7750 SR OS Interface Configuration Guide
93-0073-08xx
7750 SR OS Router Configuration Guide
93-0074-08xx
7750 SR OS Routing Protocols Guide
93-0075-08xx
7750 SR OS MPLS Guide
93-0076-08xx
7750 SR OS Services Guide
93-0077-08xx
7750 SR OS Quality of Service Guide
93-0098-07xx
7750 SR OS Triple Play Guide
93-0181-05xx
7750 SR OS OAM and Diagnostics Guide
93-0184-03-xx
7750 SR OS Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0252-01-xx
7750 SR OS Video Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0262-02-xx
OS Multi-Service Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0019-08-xx
7750 SR-12 Installation Guide
93-0032-08-xx
7750 SR-7 Installation Guide
93-0186-02-02
SR-Series Channelized OC3/OC12/STM-1 Circuit Emulation

Services (CES) CMA/MDA Installation Guide
93-0218-02-xx
7x50 MDA-XP Installation Guide
93-0235-02-xx
7x50 High Scale (HS) MDA Installation Guide
93-0253-01-xx
7x50 10 Gigabit Ethernet Tunable DWDM MDA Installation Guide
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC 7750 SR PGW/GGSN/SGW
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC 7750 SR
PGW/GGSN/SGW:
Table B-8
Documentation Library for ePC 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)
Document Number
Document Title
93-0298-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Configuration Guide
93-0299-02-xx
7750 SR OS MG Basic System Configuration Guide
93-0300-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway System Management Guide
93-0301-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Interface Configuration Guide
93-0302-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Router Configuration Guide
93-0303-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Routing Protocols Guide
93-0304-01-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway MPLS Guide
93-0305-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Services Guide
93-0306-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Quality of Service Guide
93-0317-02-xx
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway OAM and Diagnostics Guide
93-0363-03-01
7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway KPI/KCI Counters
Documentation for LTE RAN Access
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE RAN Access:
Table B-9
Document
Number
Document Title
PRELIMINARY
LTE RAN Concept Guides

418-000-010
LTE RAN Customer Documentation Overview
418-000-011
LTE RAN Terminology
418-000-012
LTE RAN Overview
418-000-014
LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) Technical Description
418-000-015
LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) FDD Reference Guide
418-000-019
LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) TDD Reference Guide
418-000-134
LTE RAN Customer License Manager (using LKDI) User Guide
LTE/DCL/APP/
031078
FDD LTE Parameters User Guide (LPUG) for LA4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-9
Document
Number
(continued)
Document Title
LTE RAN Reference Guides

418-000-032
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB FDD Parameters Reference Guide
418-000-033
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB TDD Parameters Reference Guide
418-000-034
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB Alarms and Events Reference Guide
418-000-035
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB FDD Counters Reference Guide
418-000-039
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB TDD Counters Reference Guide
PRELIMINARY
Resources
LTE RAN Network Re-configuration and Activation Procedures

418-000-018
LTE RAN Release LA4.0 LA3.0.2/TLA3.0.2 to LA4.0.1/TLA4.0.1 Migration

Procedure
418-000-050
LTE RAN Feature Activation Procedure
418-000-051
LTE RAN IP security Integration Procedure
418-000-052
LTE RAN Migration to IP v6 (Telecom and/or OAM) Procedure
418-000-054
LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB Reconfiguration for 1588 V2 Synchronization

Procedure
418-000-055
LTE RAN VLAN Reconfiguration Procedure (FDD)
418-000-056
LTE RAN VLAN Reconfiguration Procedure (TDD)
418-000-140
LTE OAM operations for RRH Redundancy via Antennae Cross-Connect

User Guide
418-000-311
LTE RAN Reconfiguration Procedures
LTE 9412 eNodeB Guides

LTE 9926 BBU Technical Description
418-000-404
LTE 9926 BBU Maintenance Guide
418-000-460
LTE 9922 BBU (small) sBBU Technical Description
418-000-461
LTE 9922 BBU (small) sBBU Maintenance Guide
418-000-410
LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Technical Description
418-000-411
LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Maintenance Guide
418-000-420
LTE FDD RRH Technical Description
418-000-421
LTE FDD RRH Maintenance Guide
418-000-436
LTE TDD RRH Technical Description
418-000-437
LTE TDD RRH Maintenance Guide
418-000-390
LTE 9400 eNodeB NEM User Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
418-000-403
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-9
Document
Number
(continued)
Document Title
LTE 9926 d2U BBU Manuals

418000472
9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) Base Band Unit (BBU) Site
Preparation Guidelines
418000470
9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) Base Band Unit (BBU) in PSU
Medium Outdoor Cabinet Site Preparation Guidelines
418000462
9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) 9922 small Base Band Unit (BBU)
Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Manuals

418-000-412
9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-414
9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-416
9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor Rack Mount Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE 9460 Pico eNodeB Manuals

418-000-450
9460 eNodeB FDD Pico eNodeB Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE RRH Manuals

NOTE: In this document, the RRH is called LTE RRH Product Family
418-000-422
LTE FDD RRH 2x30W/2x40W 2600 MHz Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-424
LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 700 MHz Lower Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-426
LTE FDD RRH 2x40W AWS Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-428
LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 700 MHz Upper Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-430
LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 800 MHz Upper Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-434
LTE TDD RRH 2x20W 2300 MHz & 2600 MHz Site Preparation
Guidelines
418-000-438
LTE TDD RRH 8x5W 2600 MHz Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-440
LTE RRH Antenna Cross-Connected Site Preparation Guidelines
Documentation for LTE 9452 WPS
PRELIMINARY
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9452 WPS:
Table B-10
Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS
Document Number
Document Title
418-000-200
9452 WPS Software Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-10
Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS
Document Number
Document Title
418-000-201
9452 WPS User Guide
(continued)
Documentation for LTE 9958 WTA
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9958 WTA:
Table B-11
Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA
Document Number
Document Title
418-112-001
9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for LTE
418-112-010
9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for

W-CDMA
9YZ04122000PCZZA
9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for LTE
and W-CDMA
Documentation for LTE 9959 NPO
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9959 NPO:
Table B-12

Document Title
418-000-124
9959 NPO Server and Client PC Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-230
9959 NPO eNodeB and MME Indicators Reference Guide
418-000-231
9959 NPO PCMD Counters and Indicators Reference Guide
418-000-232
9959 NPO NUART Counters and Indicators Reference Guide
3BK 17446 5100 TQZZA
NPO Introduction
3BK 17446 0018 RJZZA
NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows XP
3BK 17446 0019 RJZZA
NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows Vista
3BK 17446 4019 RJZZA
NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows 7
3BK 17446 5142 PCZZA
NPO Security Guide
3BK 17446 8120 PCZZA
NPO User Administration Handbook
3BK 17446 2110 TQZZA
NPO PCMD User Guide
3BK 17446 2111 TQZZA
NPO WCT User Guide
3BK 17446 5110 TQZZA
NPO Analysis Desktop User Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Document Number
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-12
(continued)
Document Number
Document Title
3BK 17446 5111 TQZZA
NPO Platform User Guide
3BK 17446 5112 TQZZA
NPO Administration User Guide
3BK 17446 5113 TQZZA
NPO Unavailability User Guide
3BK 17446 5114 TQZZA
NPO Remote Inventory User Guide
3BK 17446 5116 TQZZA
NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide
3BK 17446 5117 TQZZA
NPO WEB Client User Guide
3BK 17446 5118 TQZZA
NPO WEB Publishing User Guide
3BK 17446 5119 PCZZA
NPO Export Interface User Guide
3BK 17446 5120 TQZZA
NPO SNMP Interface for Traps Configuration User Guide
3BK 17446 5123 PGZZA
NPO Engineering Guide
Documentation for CDMA eBTS, eRNC
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the CDMA eBTS, eRNC:
PRELIMINARY
Table B-13
Document Number
Document Title
401-614-322
1xEV-DO Air Interface Performance Monitoring Tool
401-614-104
1xEV-DO Base Station Operation, Administration, and Maintenance
401-614-325
1xEV-DO Configuration Management Bulk Provisioning Guide
401-614-413
1xEV-DO Feature Provisioning Guide
401-614-101
1xEV-DO Radio Access System Planning and Implementation Guide
401-614-321
1xEV-DO Radio Access System Retrofit Procedures
401-614-102
1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller Operations, Administration,

and Maintenance (OA&M)
401-614-323
1xEV-DO RF Engineering
401-614-107
1xEV-DO Security Features
401-614-326
1xEV-DO Service Measurements
401-610-165
1xEV-DO Service Measurements Flowcharts
401-614-106
1xEV-DO Software Update
401-614-331
1xEV-DO System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME)
401-610-055
CDMA Network Input Messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-13
(continued)
Document Number
Document Title
401-610-057
CDMA Network Output Messages
401-610-166
Status Display Pages (SDPs) Reference Guide
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Documentation for W-CDMA
See W-CDMA Documentation Library for list of NE documents

Documentation for 3rd Party Components
Documentation provided via Starent Support Site only

Documentation for IMS Solution
See IMS Solution Documentation Library for list of NE documents
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics

Alcatel-Lucent LTE web site
http://www-lte.alcatel-lucent.com/#/home/ecosystem
LTE Solution customer documentation web site
LTE Solution customer documents are available from OLCS Services Collaboration at the
following dedicated site: https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/. This site
contains the solution-level documents and links to all the related LTE network element
documents (9471 MME, 5620 SAM, and so forth).
ng Connect web site
ng Connect is an application-enablement and application design organization started by

Alcatel-Lucent to bring together stakeholders from traditional industries to do the
following:
Accelerate deployment of new services and devices
Drive new sources of revenue with new business models
Expand the connectivity landscape
To access the ng Connect web site, go to the following link:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related

topics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One of the most popular ng Connect products so far is an LTE-connected car. For more
information, visit this site:
http://www.ngconnect.org/ecosystem/connected-car.htm
High leverage networks web site
Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Backhaul Solution web site
To see this site, go to the following url:

Detail_000021.xml)

To reach the training web site
To access the Alcatel-Lucent training web site, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the

following link:
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main
For more about the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
For more about the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see the TMO21020
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Overview class.
For more about LTE technology
For more about LTE technology, see
LTW543W - LTE Overview
PRELIMINARY
For additional training on LTE, the following classes are recommended:

Table B-14
Class Reference
Class Title
TMO21024
Alcatel-Lucent Evolved Packet Core 9471 Mobility Management Entity

(MME) Technical Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-14
(continued)
Class Reference
Class Title
TMO21025
Alcatel-Lucent Evolved Packet Core 9471 Mobility Management Entity

(MME) Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
TMO21026
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Evolved Packet Core (ePC) Technical Overview
TMO21027
LTE Solution Fault and Alarm Management
TMO18213
9400 LTE RAN Technical Overview
TMO18214
9400 LTE RAN Radio Principles
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO
For additional training on 1xEV-DO, the following classes are recommended:

Table B-15
Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO
Class Reference
Class Title
TMO21028W
eHRPD Technical Overview
CL5594W
1xEV-DO HDLC to MLPPP Conversion
CL5597W
Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Cell Site Conversion
CL5661
1xEV-DO Radio Access System OA&M Hands-On course
CL8306
1xEV-DO Rev 0 RF Design Engineering and Call Processing
For additional training on CDMA, the following classes are recommended:

Table B-16
Class
Reference
Class Title
CL5530AW
CDMA Network Operations & Maintenance Center Radio Access Network

(OMC-RAN) Overview
CL5530B
9253/9254 OMC-RAN (Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Access

Network OA&M
To see a complete listing of LTE-related courses, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at

https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search using the keyword LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Other classes
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sign up for Alcatel-Lucent training
To sign up for a training, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:

https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent offers a wide variety of LTE Services to support service providers who are
evolving to LTE. For more information on the many types of services available, see LTE
Services (p. 2-13).

Introduction
This topic gives tips for getting started with standards for the Evolved Packet System
(EPS) and an overview of the standards themselves.
Reminder: LTE is not the official name
Technically speaking, the new network and the associated standards commonly referred
to as LTE are named the Evolved Packet System (EPS) and the name LTE only refers
to the radio access component of the new network. Though the name LTE is now
widely associated with the entire new network and is commonly used to refer to the
whole of the new network, the standards use the name EPS, not LTE, except when
referring to the radio access component of the new network.
Divided into stages
3GPP specifications are classified as Stage 1, Stage 2 or Stage 3.
PRELIMINARY
Stage 1 specifications
Stage 1 specifications define service level requirements and normally capture the needs of
operators for a certain feature to be part of the 3GPP system. Reading Stage 1
specifications is normally essential for an engineer in product development, while it could
be beneficial for a product manager or a marketing person willing to understand market
requirements formally accepted by 3GPP to drive the specification of the EPS.
Stage 1 specifications are numbered like this: 3G TS 21.xyz or 3G TS 22.xyz where xyz are
digits identifying the particular specification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stage 1 specification for the ePS
The stage 1 specification for the ePS is 3G TS 22.278.

PS domain requirements apply to ePS
Requirements applicable to the PS domain of 3GPP system are largely applicable to the
ePS. These requirements are defined in 3G TS 22.101.
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Stage 2 specifications define the architecture of the system. These specifications normally
include the definition of network functional entities and their role in the architecture, the
interfaces interconnecting them as well as message flows describing how these interfaces
and network entities interact. Stage 2 specifications for the overall architecture and core
network aspects (with some exceptions that we will not enumerate here) are numbered
like this: 3G TS 23.xyz.
Stage 2 specifications are normally developed within 3GPP SA WG2, but in some cases
they are defined by other groups.
Stage 2 specification for the ePS
The Stage 2 specification for the ePS is described in 3G TS 23.401. The Stage 2
specification for the ePS sets standards for systems based on GPRS tunnelling Protocol
(GTP). 3G TS 23.402 outlines the operation of the system for interworking with non
3GPP accesses including CDMA. In the Stage 2 specification Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP)
was used.
How to connect to the EPC without LTE access
The 3G TS 23.060 standard explains how 2G/3G 3GPP accesses could be connected to
the evolved Packet Core even without any LTE access being deployed.
How LTE supports voice services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-27
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Several Stage 2 standards outline how voice services are supported in LTE. 3G TS 23.216,
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC), defines the way a voice call that started
as VoIP in LTE can be continued over a legacy cellular access in the CS domain (that is,
as a normal CS GSM, UMTS or 1X-RTT call). 3G TS 23.272, Circuit Switched (CS)
fallback in Evolved Packet System (EPS), Stage 2, defines how to place a voice call on
legacy CS systems and use LTE only for Broadband wireless data.
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stage 2 specifications on QoS
To understand the way applications interact with the ePS to deliver the necessary Quality
of Service (QoS), and how QoS is handled in PMIP based systems, read 3G TS 23.203 on
the Policy and charging control architecture.
Stage 3 specifications define protocols used over the interfaces identified by Stage 2
specifications according to the behavior of the network element that was defined in the
Stage 2 specifications. The numbering of these specifications follows roughly this logic:
specifications are numbered as 3G TS 24.xyz if they relate to terminal to network
signalling protocols, or 3G TS 29.xyx if they relate to protocols between network
elements.
Key specifications
Key examples (and the most relevant) of these stage 3 specifications for the ePS are:
Table B-17
Stage 3 specification documents for the ePS
PRELIMINARY
Specification
Title
TS 24.301
Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for Evolved Packet System (EPS);

Stage 3
TS 24.302
Access to the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) via non-3GPP access

networks; Stage 3
TS 24.303
Mobility management based on Dual-Stack Mobile IPv6; Stage 3
TS 24.304
Mobility management based on Mobile IPv4; User Equipment (UE) foreign agent interface; Stage 3
TS 29.274
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS); Evolved GPRS Tunnelling

Protocol (eGTP) for EPS
TS 29.275
PMIP based Mobility and Tunnelling protocols
TS 29.276
Optimized Handover Procedures and Protocols between EUTRAN Access

and cdma2000 HRPD Access
TS 29.277
Optimized Handover Procedures and Protocols between EUTRAN Access

and 1xRTT Access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-28
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security
In general, security specifications are numbered as 3G TS 33.xyz. Key security

specifications for the EPS are:
Table B-18
Security specifications for the ePS
Specification
Title
TS 33.401
3GPP System Architecture Evolution (SAE); Security architecture
TS 33.402
3GPP System Architecture Evolution (SAE)
PRELIMINARY
Resources
OA&M
Table B-19
OA&M specifications for the ePS
Specification
TS 425
Title
Telecommunication management; Performance Management (PM);
Performance measurements Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (E-UTRAN)
Telecommunication management; Performance Management (PM);
Performance measurements Evolved Packet Core (EPC) network
TS 32.450
Telecommunication management; Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for

Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN):
Definitions
TS 32.451
Telecommunication management; Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for

Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN):
Requirements
TS 32.500
Telecommunication management; Self-Organizing Networks (SON);

Concepts and requirements
TS 32.501

Self-establishment of eNodeBs; Concepts and requirements
TS 32.502

Self-establishment of eNodeBs; Stage 2
TS 32.511

Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR) management; Concepts and
requirements
TS 32.521

Self-optimization and self-healing; Concepts and requirements
TS 32.751
Telecommunication management; Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Network

Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-29
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
TS 32.426
PRELIMINARY
Resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-19
OA&M specifications for the ePS
(continued)
Specification
Title
TS 32.752

Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Information
Service (IS)
TS 32.753

Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Common
Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) Solution Set (SS)
TS 32.755

Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Bulk CM
eXtensible Markup Language (XML) file format definition
32.761
Telecommunication management; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio

Access Network (E-UTRAN) Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration
Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
TS 32.762

Reference Point (IRP): Information Service (IS)
TS 32.763

Reference Point (IRP): Common Object Request Broker Architecture
(CORBA) Solution Set (SS)
TS 32.765

Reference Point (IRP): Bulk CM eXtensible Markup Language (XML) file
format definition
Charging specifications
Charging specifications are still in the study phase.

Now defined in 3GPP
From release 8 onwards, LTE is defined in the 3GPP standards.
PRELIMINARY
How to access
The LTE specifications documents are updated periodically and can be found at:
http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/specs/archive/36_series/.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-30
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Glossary
Glossary
For an extensive glossary of LTE terms and telecommunications-related terms, go to the

LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology, 418-111-012.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-31
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Resources
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Resources
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-32
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix C: Alcatel-Lucent LTE

project release naming
convention
Project release naming conventions
Introduction
This appendix explains the conventions used in Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release
naming.
Conventions
The list of current project releases includes the following:
LEx.x End-to-End LTE Release

LSx.x Solution Product Release - EPC
LMx.x LTE MME
LAx.x LTE Access, eNodeB
Explanation
Alcatel- Lucents product release naming conventions are shown in this appendix. LE is
used for the end to end solution. LS, LM, and LA are used for the solution, MME,
eNodeB, and voice interworking components of the network, respectively. For product
release dates, contact your Account Representative.
Load conventions for the other network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Other network elements used within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, such
as the SGW and the PGW, have their own load numbering conventions. For a complete
list of all the loads for all the network elements used within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see the LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes. For information on
how to access the LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes, see Release Notes (p. B-2).
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release naming convention
Project release naming conventions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix D: Mobile Backhaul

Solution
Overview
Purpose
The key to controlling the costs of an LTE network is to control the cost of the backhaul.
The topics in this appendix describe the Mobile Backhaul Solution, Alcatel-Lucent's
answer for the twin problems of increasing demand for data transport and the large cost of
transport media.
Contents
Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution
D-2
About the Mobile Backhaul Solution
D-2
D-4
For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution
D-6
Training
D-7
D-7
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

As fourth generation cell sites are rolled out in support of Long Term Evolution (LTE)
services, and the increase in mobile data services continues unabated, it is expected that
average bandwidth requirements will increase to tens of Mb/s per site. To keep pace with
this growth, service providers need an end-to-end architecture from cell site to core
that supports a variety of network evolution alternatives and service provider
deployments.
To meet the explosively growing demand for enhanced mobile broadband services,
service providers need a new way to deliver increased bandwidth at lower cost while
providing the reliability and quality of experience of traditional wired networks.

What is the Mobile Backhaul Solution?
The Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Backhaul Solution is a product offering developed by

Alcatel-Lucent that provides the industry's first and most comprehensive framework for
mobile transport evolution to all-IP.
What does the Mobile Backhaul Solution do?
The Mobile Backhaul Solution integrates multiple mobile transport technologies

including IP/Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS), Optical, Microwave, Digital
Subscriber Line (DSL) and Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network (GPON) into an
end-to-end network architecture with more intelligence, flexibility, simplicity and
cost-effectiveness.
PRELIMINARY
How it works
The Mobile Backhaul Solution supports the efficient, end-to-end mobile transport of
existing TDM-based and next generation packet-based mobile technologies
simultaneously over any media (including fiber, copper, and wireless transport) providing
flexible evolution paths for any last mile access. The Mobile Backhaul Solution enables
3GPP2 and 3GPP wireless network providers to transform and scale their networks,
leveraging existing infrastructure investments while evolving to all-IP networking at their
individual business pace and with the level of QoS required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalable bandwidth at lower cost
The Mobile Backhaul Solution allows mobile providers to support new broadband mobile
services while lowering costs, achieving up to 44% Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)
savings, and improving overall network performance. To do this, the Mobile Backhaul
Solution leverages the optimal cost points of Ethernet, coupled with the proven
scalability, availability and service aware capabilities of MPLS, as well as customers'
existing infrastructure investments to provide flexible evolution options that satisfy
customers' new service demands.
PRELIMINARY
Note that the 44% cost savings is based on a Bell Labs model. Actual costs savings will
differ based on differences in individual networks.
Support for All Mobile Services
The Mobile Backhaul Solution offers support for all types of mobile services. With the
Mobile Backhaul Solution, a service provider can do all of the following:
Offer new mobile broadband services profitably: deliver voice, video, multimedia and
data services with high reliability, availability, and guaranteed QoS
Support 2G, 3G, WiMAX and LTE services
Deliver triple play (voice, data and video) over fixed and mobile networks for seamless
delivery of all services
Service Awareness features
The Mobile Backhaul Solution provides the following in wireless networks:
Service-aware access nodes that provide traffic prioritization in support of multiple

classes of service.
Service aware packet transport for larger numbers of simultaneous users
Service driven adaptive modulation, which provides air link bandwidth optimization
Guaranteed Quality of Experience with end-to-end QoS management in real-time
Other benefits
Other benefits provided by Mobile Backhaul Solution include the following:

Graceful introduction of LTE with the Mobile Backhaul Solution backhaul
components previously deployed for CDMA/1xEVDO or GSM/UMTS
Seamless convergence of backhaul/backbone networks

Support of flexible eNodeB access alternatives to Metro Ethernet network
Flexible Ethernet backhaul alternatives supporting leased/owned strategies
IP OAM and IP Management

Industry leading integrated end-to-end management of both wireless and wireline to
simplify operations and reduce operating expenditures (OPEX)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delivers dramatic network simplification via advanced troubleshooting and SLA

monitoring tools
unified operations
simplified node, network and service-level provisioning
End-to-End QoS between the eNodeB and the Evolved Packet Core.
Provides scalable, multiservice transport in support of all mobile traffic (2G/3G and
4G/LTE).

PRELIMINARY
The following figure shows the architecture of the Mobile Backhaul Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure D-1 Combined network management provided by the Mobile Backhaul

Solution
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent can help
Alcatel-Lucent has a backhaul solution that provides a variety of ways to set up and
maximize a service provider's Backhaul Part of the Transport Network.
For help with design and implementation
Drawing on the expertise of Alcatel-Lucent in backhaul and traffic modeling, a member

of the Alcatel-Lucent Services team can put together a customized LTE backhaul solution
to fit the unique needs of a service provider network.
Alcatel-Lucent services offered include planning, design, and optimization for the
following parts
Cell site terminating equipment

Backhaul access network architecture, topology, and equipment
Aggregation node placement and equipment
Backhaul aggregation network architecture, topology and equipment

Multiple Service Operator (MSO) aggregation terminating equipment
To contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services organization, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account

Executive.
For help managing and reducing ongoing costs
PRELIMINARY
Reducing the cost and complexity of customer backhaul networks once they are installed
is essential to a customer's success with LTE. For information on Alcatel-Lucent's
solution for optimizing and reducing costs in customer IP networks, see Appendix D,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IP Backhaul and Ethernet Backhaul. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:: https://training.alcatellucent.com/Saba/Web/Main.
PRELIMINARY

For further information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, go to the following url
Detail_000021.xml)
or contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix E: Defining and

displaying the user and control
plane
Overview
Purpose
This appendix gives background information defining the user plane and control plane
and explains how the user plane and control plane are shown in diagrams throughout this
document.
Contents
User plane and control plane defined
E-1

Introduction
This write-up defines the terms user plane and control plane and explains how they are
shown in the following LTE network diagrams and throughout this document.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure E-1 Control plane and user plane as shown in network diagrams
Blue dashed lines
The blue dashed lines in the network diagram shown here refer to the control plane.
PRELIMINARY
What is the control plane?
The control plane (also called control function or control path) is a portion of a channel or
protocol that carries signaling and control data. The signaling is used to establish, modify
and clear a call. Traditionally, the signaling can be either SIP signaling or ISUP signaling.
The SIP would be carried on a separate IP connection from the bearer functions on the
user plane. The same is true for ISUP signaling, where the signaling is on a separate
circuit from the user plane.
For LTE, however, the control function is always SIP signaling, never ISUP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples of control plane functions
Examples of control plane functions include establishing the call, conveying information
such as dialed digits, controlling features, and disconnecting the call.
Solid red line
The solid red line in the network diagram shown here refers to the user plane.
PRELIMINARY
What is the user plane?
The user plane (data plane) is the portion of a channel or protocol that carriers user data
packets. In traditional circuit-based wireless networks, the user plane would carry voice.
The user plane also performs the bearer function. The user plane is also sometimes known
as the bearer plane.
For LTE, however, since LTE does not handle voice traffic, the user plane contains pure
data (non-voice) traffic.
What is the bearer function?
The bearer function is the function that performs any action that can be applied to a user
plane, such as inserting a tone or announcement or establishing a conference connection.
Separate network elements
The control plane and user plane are typically separated in an IP network and often
handled by separate network elements. This is true within the LTE EPC.
The EPC separates the control plane from the user plane (called data plane in the
following diagram). The control plane provides scalable, secure dynamic mobility and
connection management. The control plane also provides network-wide, real-time policy
control. The user (data) plane provides high aggregate throughput (over 100 Gbps) for
high bandwidth on-demand services. The separation of control and user planes allows
each element to be optimized for its function and to be scaled independently. The MME
provides control plane functions and is optimized for signaling. The SGW provides user
(data) plane functions and is optimized to provide data (bearer) services.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Appendix F: What's new in the

Releases

Introduction
Listed here are the revisions to this document that were made in previous releases.
New material and changes in the LE3.0
A complete list of the changes and new material for LE3.0 introduced in this document
are detailed.
Table F-1
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
To give additional
information on how to
use this document
The section Aids to using this document (p. 1-3) was

added.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
To help the reader
To help the reader understand more about LTE and the

Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the
following additional figures and topics were added in
this issue:
NM2345
PRELIMINARY
Figure 1-3, Key innovations of LTE (p. 1-17)
Figure 1-4, Basics of OFDM (p. 1-19)
Figure 1-5, Comparison of OFDM and CDMA

(p. 1-20)
Figure 1-6, Basics of SC-FDMA (p. 1-21)
Figure 1-8, Multiple antenna techniques

(p. 1-23)
Figure 1-9, MIMO support on the downlink vs

MIMO support on the uplink (p. 1-24)
Layers of OAM&P support (p. 22-4)
IP connectivity (p. A-1)
To clarify
Alcatel-Lucent's
Converged RAN
offering
The following topics were added:
5620 SAM migration

from XMS LA2.0 (for
mgt of eNB LA2.0)
In LE3.0 the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)

replaces the 9453 XMS. The following parts of this
book were updated for this:
Converged RAN approaches (p. 2-26)
Converged RAN (p. 2-26)
LightRadio (p. 2-28)
Converged OA&M for LTE (p. 2-11)
5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) (p. 22-20)
To describe support for

Self-Optimizing
Networks (SONs) in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
Added a new topic: Use of Self-Organizing Networks

(SONs) (p. 2-24)
To show the
comprehensive range of
services offered by the
Services organization
Chapter 3, LTE Services was completely rewritten.

LTE Services (p. 2-13) was also updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
Feature ID
(FID)

Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
(continued)
LS33007-03 LTE to UMTS

Inter-RAT PS Handover
using Gn/Gp (Pre-Rel
8) with measurements
A statement was added at Both voice and data

supported (p. 4-14) that data handoffs from LTE to
GSM within the network are supported.
LS31037-01 Enhanced
Non-Optimized
LTE-eHRPD HO with
eHRPD Radio
Measurement
A statement was added at Both voice and data

supported (p. 4-9) that data handoffs from LTE to
GSM within the network are supported.
New chapter: Chapter 6, UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's

Devices and IOT Team.
Request from users for

information on
Alcatel-Lucent's
interoperability testing
of UEs for service
providers
LS30035-01 Dynamic Quality of

Service (QoS) for VoIP
PRELIMINARY
See also About User Equipment (p. 2-4).
New chapter: Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with

LTE.
References to Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and the new
Voice Services chapter, Chapter 7, Approaches for
voice with LTE, were added throughout Chapter 4,
Deployment options.
LS33008-01 Circuit Switched Fall

Back for LTE/WCDMA
New chapter: Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with

LTE
The following additional information throughout the
document:
LS30035-01 Dynamic Quality of

Service (QoS) for VoIP
Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF)

functions (p. 21-27)
This information was also included in the new chapter,

Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with LTE.
Use of SMS within LTE
New chapter: Chapter 8, SMS with LTE
video over LTE
New chapter: Chapter 10, Approaches for video on

LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
References to Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and the new

Voice Services chapter, Chapter 7, Approaches for
voice with LTE, were added throughout Chapter 4,
Deployment options.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
Feature ID
(FID)

Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
LS30032-02 A chapter on regulatory

services, including the
Lawful Interception
solution for the
Solution, was added.
(continued)

New chapter: Chapter 12, Government-mandated
services
The 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS)
solution was added to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution (along with descriptions of other
government-mandated services).
See also:
PRELIMINARY
1357 LIG (p. 20-3)
1357 IMC (p. 22-16)
To explain security
needed in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
New chapter: Chapter 14, LTE End-to-End Security
Support of TDD in the

Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
To show the Solution's support for TDD, the following

topics were rewritten
support for TDD
To show new versions of these Radio Access Network

(RAN) network elements to support TDD, the
following network element descriptions were updated:
14000.9
R-OCM Reverse
Optical Communication
Module and Support
for 3G-1X/LTE BTS
New topic to explain the use of the Reverse Optical

Communication Module (OCM) to share radios
between LTE and 2G/3G technologies: Support for
the R-OCM (p. 16-47)
To correct a
classification error
The following network elements were moved from

Radio/core (hybrid) component into the Radio Access
Network (RAN) component:
9125 TC (p. 16-7)
9130 BSC/MFS (p. 16-10)
9370 RNC (p. 16-19)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
SPR is now hosted on

the 5780 DSC
Changed the descriptions in 5780 DSC (p. 18-7) and

in 8650 SDM HSS (p. 20-13) to show that as of
LE3.0 the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR) in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is hosted on
the 5780 DSC instead of on the 8650 SDM HSS.
To explain that the Sun

N1290 is now in DA
mode.
Capacity and performance (p. 21-13)
To clarify that both the

9253 OMC-RAN and
9254 OMC-RAN can
be used with the
Solution
9253/9254 OMC-RAN (p. 22-30)
To explain use of a 3rd

party PGW in LE3.0
Special case (p. 18-25)
To help users find the

LTE End-to-End
Solution Release Notes
Added the following: Release Notes (p. B-2)
To help users find the

LTE End-to-End
Solution Planning Hub
Added the following: Planning Hub site (p. B-2)
To help users find

customer
documentation on LTE
and related topics
The following new information was added
LTE 3.0
PRELIMINARY
Pointers to the Release Notes topic were added

throughout the document.

(p. B-3)
More about the LTE Library on OLCS (p. B-6)
Accessing network element documentation

through the Product Index (p. B-11)
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on

the OLCS web site (p. B-11)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
The table of customer documentation at Table B-1,

(p. B-13) was updated.
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
LE3.0
To support the new functionality and enhancements in

LE3.0, the following network elements were added:
1357 IMC (p. 22-16)
1357 LIG (p. 20-3)
5100 CMS (p. 21-11)
5410 PS/XDMS (p. 21-20)
5420 CTS (p. 21-23)
5900 MRF (p. 21-30)
7510 MGW (p. 21-33)
7520 MGW (p. 21-42)
8965 C3S
9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (p. 18-60).
9958 WTA (p. 22-43)
9959 NPO (p. 22-46).
NEM (p. 22-50)
SMT (p. 22-55)
TSIS (p. 22-57)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
Changes to graphics for

LE3.0
The following graphics were updated for LE3.0:
Figure 2-2, Major components of the

Alcatel-Lucent LTE network (p. 2-7)
Figure 4-1, LTE Network Deployment Option

(data only) (p. 4-6)
Figure 4-2, Major components of the LTE

Network Deployment Option (p. 4-7)
Figure 4-3, LTE Interworking with 3GPP2


Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment
Option (p. 4-11)
Figure 4-5, LTE Interworking with 3GPP


Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment
Option (p. 4-16)
Figure 15-1, Network elements and interfaces in

the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
(p. 15-3)
The 9926 D2U BBU is now known as the 9926

eNodeB BBU. This change has been made in this
document.
To help the user
New information was added to 5780 DSC (p. 18-7).
Support of FDD and

TDD in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
To show the hardware versions of these Radio Access

Network (RAN) network elements to support FDD
and TDD, the following network element descriptions
were updated:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New material and changes in the LE4.0 before this last issue
A complete list of the changes and new material for LE4.0 already introduced in the
previous issues of this document are detailed here.
Table F-2
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
__
What's new in the

Releases
In order to track the evolutions of this document

whatever the LEx.0 Release, this appendix has been
reworked. As such, we have kept and moved all the
LE3.0 History revisions in a specific section, while a
new section is opened to keep all the LE4.0 History
revisions. Then the last section is related to the last
issue of the current Release and is linked to the section
Reason for reissue.
Moreover, the Appendix History of revisions has
been renamed as What's new in the Releases.
The following changes where done in Appendix F,
What's new in the Releases.
__
Changes to graphics for

LE4.0
The following graphics were updated for LE4.0

The following graphics were added in the

documentation:
LS3003303 LTE Offline Charging

Support with ALU
PGW/SGW and IeCCF
on Ga Interface
Figure A-1, End-to-End LTE Solution

architecture and interfaces (p. A-2)
The following descriptions have been updated:

Appendix A, LTE interfaces
PRELIMINARY
The following network element descriptions were

updated:
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) (p. 18-25)
7750 SR (SGW) (p. 18-37)
8615 IeCCF (OFCS) (p. 20-10)
The 8965 C3S network element description has been

removed as this material is not needed anymore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-2
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
__
Ease the reading of this

document
The following parts have been introduced in the

document
LS3900001 Public Warning System

(Commercial Mobile
Alert System or
CMAS)
Part II: LTE Network Provided Services
Part III: Network Elements Overview
PRELIMINARY

Appendix A, LTE interfaces
A new chapter is added in Part II: LTE Network

Provided Services
Chapter 9, Cell Broadcast with LTE

updated:
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity

(MME) (p. 18-52)
The following network element were added:
LS3304801 CSFB to
UTRAN/GERAN
enhancements with
enhanced Redirection
5140 BMC (p. 21-16)
The CSFB approach (p. 7-5)
The VoLTE approach (p. 7-9)

(p. 7-27)
Emergency Services (p. 12-8)

updated:
5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) (p. 21-26)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-2
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
LS115695
Solution Level FID for

1900Mhz support of
LTE for Sprint, based
on

updated:
T113799
L114561 PCS Band

Distributed eNB
configurations in
LA4.0.1
L115461
LTE/CDMA
technology OAM
support
TD-LTE_2.6G_RRH8x5_ The following network element descriptions were

PU requirements
updated:
eNodeB HW evolutions
The following network element of the Radio Access

Network (RAN) descriptions were updated with the
list of hardware versions of the components supported
in LE4.0:
9412 eNodeB (p. 16-22)
Following a remark , it seems that 9926 eNodeB BBU

is known as 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU. This change has
been made in this document.
PRELIMINARY

updated:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-2
Feature ID
(FID)

Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
LS3100103 7750 PGW

interworking with
eHRPD
(continued)


Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO (p. 4-9)
PRELIMINARY

updated:
5780 DSC (p. 18-7)
8650 SDM HSS (p. 20-13)
LS3301001 Support IRAT neighbor

exchange between
UMTS and 4G systems
LS3004301 Inter LTE Service

LS3003801 Provider Roaming
(using Home PGW)

Provided Services
LTE Local Breakout

with S9 (for future)
Chapter 11, Roaming in LTE networks

updated:
LS3010001 Network Sharing LS3010004 Multiple Public Safety

Networks Share A
Common Core

(p. 2-24)
5780 DSC (p. 18-7)

Provided Services
Chapter 13, Public Safety
Priority Access With

Pre-Emption (for all
bearers)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-2
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
1360 Centralized
Operations Manager
introduction


updated:
8650 SDM HSS (p. 20-13)
7510 MGW (p. 21-33)
7520 MGW (p. 21-42)
1310 OMC-P (p. 22-13)
LS3003002 Online Charging

between ALU PGW
and 8610 ICC over
Ro/Gy
1360 COM (p. 22-6)

The following descriptions were updated:
The VoLTE approach (p. 7-9)

updated:
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) (p. 18-25)
8615 IeCCF (OFCS) (p. 20-10)
5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) (p. 21-26)
8610 ICC (OCS) (p. 20-7)
The 8620 SurePay network element description has

been removed as this material is not needed anymore
PRELIMINARY
__
Training
All NEs training sections have been checked and

notably the keyword within the Alcatel-University web
site. So, everywhere in the document the Training
sections were updated.
All the recommended classes have been moved into
the Appendix Ressources. The following description
was updated:
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE (p. B-24)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-2
(continued)
Feature ID
(FID)
Feature Name or
Reason for Changes
__
Documentation
All Customer Documentation References were

updated to LE4.0 Solution Release.
To improve the access of the Customer Documentation
Reference list, the big table into the Appendix B,
Resources was split into little tables per domain or
per product. Global Index has also been improved.
PRELIMINARY
All these changes are done into :
List of LTE customer documentation (p. B-13)
To avoid any duplication, all references found in the

network element descriptions were removed and
replaced by a link toward the related table into the
Appendix B, Resources. So, everywhere in Part II:
LTE Network Provided Services, when needed, the
For documentation section of the network element
description was updated.
__
VitalQIP is move in
Common Core Network
category
All NEs training sections have been checked and

notably the keyword within the Alcatel-University web
site. So, everywhere in the document the Training
sections were updated.
The following descriptions were updated:
LS30033-03 LTE Offline Charging

Support with ALU
PGW/SGW and IeCCF
on Ga Interface
A sample LTE network (p. 1-36)
LTE network (p. 2-6)

Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO (p. 4-9)
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network

Deployment Option: GSM and W-CDMA
(p. 4-14)
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS (p. 20-19)
Following review, the following description was

updated:
8615 IeCCF (OFCS) (p. 20-10)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New material and changes in this LE.4.0 issue 0.04
This issue of this document is for LE4.0. A complete list of the changes and new material
for LE4.0 is given in the Reason for Revision in the About this document chapter. Click
on Reason for reissue (p. xxxvii) to be taken to that list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Numerics
112 calls
PRELIMINARY
Index
1357 IMC
defined, 12-2
advantages, 22-17
for further information, 12-6
configurations available, 22-17
functions of, 12-3

how it works, 12-3
about, 22-10
connections to the network,

22-18
advantages, 22-11
defined, 22-16
and 8650 SDM HSS, 20-18
hardware, 22-17, 22-17
provides centralized solution,

12-6
defined, 22-10
interfaces, 22-18
purpose of, 12-2
documentation, 22-12
NEBS compliant, 22-17
software, 20-4
role, 22-10
one for all networks, 22-16
standards for, 12-6
training, 22-12
software, 22-17
training, 20-6
use in LTE Network, 22-11
training, 22-19
handling off, 21-29

1300 XMC
1310 OMC-P
1357 LIG
about, 22-13
advantages, 20-4
advantages, 22-14
defined, 22-13
connections to the network,

20-5
role, 22-13
supports 7510 MGW, 21-40
training, 22-15
1310 Operations and Management

Console Plus
See: 1310 OMC-P
1357 ULIS Graphical User

Interface
defined, 20-5
1357 Unified Lawful Interception
Suite
See: 1357 ULIS
hardware, 20-4, 20-4
1360 Centralized Operations

Manager
See: 1360 COM
interfaces, 20-5, 20-5
1360 COM
defined, 20-3
multiple may be needed, 20-3

about, 22-6
advantages, 22-7
software, 20-4, 20-4
and 8650 SDM HSS, 20-18
user interfaces, 20-5
defined, 22-6
1357 ULIS
advantages of, 12-5
documentation, 22-9
role, 22-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-1
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
use of, in IMS, 22-14
information collected, 12-3
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
defined, 18-4
5400 LCP, 18-61
5410 PS/XDMS
training, 22-9
ready to support evolution to

LTE, 18-6
compliance with standards,

21-20
role, 18-4
training, 18-6
defined, 21-20
use of, 18-5
use, 22-7
1xEVDO Base Station
See: 922x 1xEVDO BS
2G network
compared to LTE network,
1-27
2x
5100 CMS
defined, 16-31
3G Mobile Switching Center

See: 9380 3G MSC
3G network
compared to LTE network,
1-27
3GPP standards
technologies, 1-14
3GPP2 standards
technologies, 1-14
3GPP/NGN IMS Multimedia
Telephony Service
See: MMTel
5060 Media Gateway Controller-8
See: 5060 MGC-8
5060 MGC-8
about, 21-9
advantages, 21-9
defined, 21-9, 21-9
role, 21-9
training, 21-10
PRELIMINARY
5060 Wireless Call Server

See: 5060 WCS
5060 WCS
See: also 7549 MGW
about, 18-4
advantages, 18-4
components, 21-12
defined, 21-11, 21-11
how it works, 21-11
interfaces, 21-12
training, 21-12
5100 Converged Messaging
System
See: 5100 CMS
5110 Short Message Service
Center
See: 5110 SMSC
5110 SMSC
about, 21-13
advantages, 21-14
defined, 21-13
role, 21-13
training, 21-15
5140 BMC
advantages, 21-17
defined, 21-16, 21-16
hardware, 21-18
standards, 21-19
hardware, 21-21, 21-21

training, 21-22
5420 CTS
advantages, 21-23
defined, 21-23, 21-23
hardware, 21-24
how it works, 21-24
training, 21-25
5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
about, 21-26
advantages, 21-27
defined, 21-26
role, 21-26
training, 21-29
5620 SAM
and 7750 SR, 18-35
and the 9412 eNodeB, 16-30
and the 9471 MME, 18-58,
18-63
capabilities, 22-21
converged OA&M, 22-20
defined, 22-20
training, 21-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
hardware, 22-21
role, 21-42
role, 22-20
role of, 21-30
software, 21-44
support of 5780 DSC, 18-15
services provided, 21-30
training, 21-44
supports Backhaul Network,

Transport Network, MME,
and eNodeB, 2-11
support for LI, 21-31
use in the Solution, 21-43
training, 21-32
training, 22-22
5620 Service Aware Manager
(SAM)
See: 5620 SAM
5780 DSC
3GPP-compliant, 18-8
advantages, 18-9
benefits to service provider,
18-9
blades, 18-12
defined, 18-7, 18-7
hardware configuration, 18-12
hardware platform, 18-10
how it works, 18-8
need for, 18-8
network connections, 18-14
product description page,
18-15
7500 Serving GPRS Support Node

(SGSN)
See: 7500 SGSN
7549 Media Gateway

See: 7549 MGW
See: also 5060 WCS
7500 SGSN
7549 MGW
advantages, 18-21
about, 18-17
alternate for, 18-20
advantages, 18-18
defined, 18-20, 18-20
as used in the Solution, 18-18
defined, 18-17
hardware, 18-21

18-23
role, 18-17
role, 18-20
training, 18-24
use of in LTE, 18-23
7510 MGW
advantages, 21-35
defined, 21-33, 21-33
purpose of, 18-8
hardware, 21-35
RADIUS support, 18-8
market leader, 21-35
role, 18-8
software, 18-13
role of, 21-34
training, 18-16
software, 21-38
two ways of hosting SPR,

18-14
training, 21-41

5780 Dynamic Services Controller
See: 5780 DSC
5900 MRF
defined, 21-30, 21-30
user interface, 21-40

7520 MGW
advantages, 21-43
defined, 21-42, 21-42
training, 18-19
use of, 18-18
7705 SAR
defined, 17-9
fixed configuration, 17-11
hardware, 17-10
how it works, 17-10
software, 17-12
support for local routing, 4-8
training, 17-13
7705 Service Aggregation Router
(SAR)
See: 7705 SAR
7705 SR
hardware, 17-10
7750 Service Router Serving
Gateway
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
hardware, 21-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-3
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 Service Router (SR)

See: 7750 SR
7750 SR
benefits, 18-29
benefits of, 17-15
changes for supporting Core
Network elements, 17-20
defined, 18-26
role, 20-10
how it works, 18-27
training, 20-12
training, 18-36
use of, in LTE, 20-11
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
8650 SDM HSS
defined, 18-25
advantages, 20-14
defined, 20-13, 20-13
changes to support Mobile

Backhaul, 17-20
hardware, 18-30
software, 18-34
hardware, 20-15
defined, 17-14
training, 18-36
how it works, 20-14
changes in, to support LTE,

17-20, 18-28
documentation, 17-20, 18-34
7750 SR (SGW)
LDAP interface, 20-17
function, 17-15
about, 18-37
hardware, 17-17, 18-30
benefits, 18-38
software, 20-17
in a sample LTE network,

17-18
defined, 18-37
support of AAA server, 20-17
training, 20-18
hardware, 18-39
role, 17-15
role in LTE network, 17-18
software, 17-18
support for many applications,
18-26
support for PGW and GGSN
simultaneously, 18-26, 18-37
training, 17-20
7750 SR (GGSN)
See: 7750 SR PGW/GGSN
PRELIMINARY
7750 SR (PGW)

role, 18-38
software, 18-43
training, 18-45
8610 ICC (OCS)
about, 20-7
advantages, 20-8
8650 Subscriber Data Manager

(SDM) HSS
See: 8650 SDM HSS
8950 AAA
about, 21-45
advantages, 21-47
defined, 21-45
role, 21-46
about, 18-27
connection to the network,

20-9
benefits, 18-28
defined, 20-7
defined, 18-26
documentation, 20-9
training, 18-36
role, 20-8
8950 Authentication,
Authorization and Accounting
(AAA)
See: 8950 AAA
training, 20-9
8950 SAM
7750 SR MPG
benefits, 18-30
7750 SR Packet Data Network
(PDN) Gateway
See: 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
training, 21-48
advantages, 22-24
about, 20-10, 20-10
changes for LTE, 22-25
advantages, 20-11
defined, 22-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
defined, 16-10
role, 22-31
role, 22-23
software, 22-32
training, 22-26
how used in GSM, 16-11
training, 22-33
role of, 16-10
user interfaces, 22-32, 22-32
8950 Service Aware Manager

(SAM)
See: 8950 SAM
training, 16-12
use of, 16-11
9153 OMC-R
See: 9153 OMC-R
8x
defined, 16-31
9100 Base Transceiver Station
See: 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
9100 BTS
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
advantages of, 16-4
16-5
defined, 16-4
for more information, 16-6
role of, 16-4
training, 16-6
use of with GSM and LTE,
16-5
911 calls
handling of, 21-29
9125 Compact Transcoder (TC)
See: 9125 TC
9125 TC
about, 22-34
advantages, 22-35
defined, 22-34
role, 22-27
training, 22-29
role, 22-34
9153 Operation & Maintenance

Center for Radio Part
See: 9153 OMC-R
922x 1xEVDO Base Station
advantages of, 16-15
training, 22-36
9256 Operations and Management
Platform
See: 9256 OMP
9271 eRNC
defined, 16-13
connections to network, 19-5
defined, 19-3
documentation, 19-6
role of, 16-13
hardware, 19-4
software, 16-15
how it works, 19-4
training, 16-15
server components, 19-4
use of, with CDMA and LTE,

16-14
software, 19-5

See: 922x 1xEVDO BS
defined, 16-7
documentation, 16-9
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
role, 16-7
about, 22-30
training, 16-9
defined, 22-31
9130 BSC/MFS
9256 OMP
advantages, 22-28
9253 Operations and Maintenance

Center Radio Access Network
See: 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
advantages, 16-8
9254 OMC-RAN, 22-31

about, 16-10
hardware, 22-31
advantages, 16-11
support of HSGW, 19-4

supported frame types, 19-4
training, 19-6
9271 Evolved Radio Network
Controller (eRNC)
See: 9271 eRNC
9326 NodeB
about, 16-16
defined, 16-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-5
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
hardware, 16-16
role, 16-16
software, 16-17
training, 16-18
with W-CDMA and LTE,
16-17
9353 Wireless Management
System (WMS)
See: 9353 WMS
9353 WMS, 16-20
about, 22-37
advantages, 22-37
and 9326 NodeB, 16-17
defined, 22-37
hardware, 22-38
software, 22-38
training, 22-39
9370 Radio Network Controller
(RNC)
See: 9370 RNC
9370 RNC
about, 16-19
advantages, 16-20
defined, 16-19
hardware, 16-20
PRELIMINARY

role, 16-19
software, 16-20
training, 16-21
9380 3G Mobile Switching Center

See: 9380 3G MSC
9380 3G MSC
advantages, 18-48
components, 18-46
defined, 18-46, 18-46
role, 18-48
training, 18-51
use of in LTE network, 18-51
9412 eNodeB
9412 eNodeB TRDUs

defined, 16-26
9442 RRH
See LTE RRH Product Family,
16-31
9452 Wireless Provisioning
System
See: 9452 WPS
9452 WPS
about, 22-40
advantages, 22-41
auto-assignment of cell ID,
2-25
about, 16-23
defined, 22-40
advantages, 16-23, 16-24
defined, 16-23
role, 22-40
training, 22-42
hardware, 16-24, 16-24
use of, in LTE, 22-42
how it works, 16-23
use of SON principles, 2-25
9471 MME
OA&M for, 22-50
advantages, 18-53
software, 16-29
blades, 18-56
support of FDD, 16-29
defined, 18-52, 18-52
training, 16-30
hardware configuration, 18-56
9412 eNodeB BBUs
hardware platform, 18-54
controller unit, 16-26
how it works, 18-53
modem unit, 16-26
9412 eNodeB MC-TRX

defined, 16-27
9412 eNodeB MultiCarrier
Transceiver
See: 9412 eNodeB MC-TRX
9412 eNodeB Transmit Receive
Duplex Units
See: 9412 eNodeB TRDUs
role, 18-52
software, 18-57
training, 18-59
9471 Mobility Management Entity
See: 9471 MME
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-6
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

See: 9471 WMM
9471 WMM
role of, 16-43
how it works, 22-46
software, 16-47
select documentation list,

22-48
advantages, 18-61
sub-racks, support of TDD vs

FDD, 16-45
alternate for, 18-60
support for R-OCM, 16-47
training, 22-49
defined, 18-60, 18-60, 18-60
supports both FDD and TDD,

16-36, 16-45
unique design, 22-47
hardware, 18-61
how it works, 18-61
interfaces, 18-62
18-63
role, 18-61
role of, 18-61
support for both SGSN and
MME, 18-61
training, 18-63
See: 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
about, 16-43
advantages, 16-43, 16-43
cards used for LTE, 16-45
training, 16-49
9926 DBS
See: Distributed eNodeB
Solution
9926 digital 2 Unit (D2U)
9926 digital 2U eNodeB Base
Band Unit
9926 Distributed Base Station
See: Distributed eNodeB
Solution
9926 eNodeB BBU
size, 16-44
9958 WTA
software, 22-48
with PCMD module, 22-46

.............................................................
A AAA
See: 8950 AAA

Access Point Names
See: APNs
Access Terminal
See: UE
Accessing and navigating the
OLCS web site, B-9
accessing customer
documentation, B-9
Accessing IMS documentation,
B-11
Accessing LTE documentation,
B-3
advantages, 22-44
Accessing network element

documentation, B-11
defined, 22-43, 22-43
administration function
first commercial release, 22-43
defined, 12-3
controller, support of TDD vs

FDD, 16-46
history, 22-43
Advanced Exchange Service, 3-23
controller unit, defined, 16-44
how it works, 22-43
Advanced Integration
Methodology
See: AIM
defined, 16-39
hardware, 16-44
modem unit, defined, 16-44
modems, support of TDD vs
FDD, 16-46
need for, 22-44

software, 22-44
training, 22-45
unique benefits, 22-44
9959 NPO
advantages, 22-47
rack back plane, defined, 16-44
defined, 22-46
rack user commissioning,

defined, 16-44
aggregation, in backhaul, 17-4

AIM
defined, 3-5
defines, 3-4
air interface
security threats to, 14-4
hardware, 22-48
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-7
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

common security threats, 14-4
control plane, 14-4
defined, 14-2
purpose of, 14-3
two planes to protect, 14-4
user plane, 14-6
Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT
Team
achievements, 6-8
band availability testing, 6-8
benefits of using, 6-5
defined, 6-5
expertise, 6-8
process, 6-7
support for both LTE and
W-CDMA, 6-5
support for standards, 6-5
UE testing, 6-9
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution
See: Solution
Alcatel-Lucent University
how to get training, B-26
how to reach the site, B-24
recommended classes, B-24
Analysis Services
types offered, 3-9
ANR
PRELIMINARY
defined, 2-25
APNs
defined, 18-26
Application Assurance
defined, 18-27
performed on 7750 SR, 18-27

application enablement
defined, 1-8
Application Enablement, Service
Creation and Monetization, 3-7
defined, 3-17
Architecture Security Assessment,
3-12
assignment of Cell ID
automatic, 2-25
ATCA platform
defined, 18-10
used for 5420 CTS, 21-24
used for 5780 DSC, 18-10
used for 9471 MME, 18-54
used for 9471 WMM, 18-61
audience
for this document, xxxviii
authentication
defined, 14-11
Authentication, Authorization and
Accounting
See: 8950 AAA
Automatic Neighbor Relations,
2-25
.............................................................
B backhaul
leasing, 14-10
Backhaul Network
defined, 1-36
Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network
aggregation segment, 17-4
cell site segment, 17-3
challenges of LTE, 17-6

changes caused by LTE, 17-6
connectivity models, 17-5
defined, 2-8
logical models, 17-5
mobile gateways segment,
17-4
network elements, 17-1
security, 17-5
segments of, 17-3
Base Station
defined, 16-13
Base Station Controller (BSC)
See: BSC
Base Transceiver Station
defined, 1-31
BBU
converged, 2-27
distributed solution, 2-28
bearer function
defined, E-3
benefits of LTE
easy convergence, 1-44
Efficient Always-On support,
1-42
flexibility in spectrum use,
1-43
increased downlink and uplink
rates, 1-39
more throughput; less latency,
1-39
reduced OPEX, 1-41
spectrum efficiency, 1-43
support for high leverage
networks, 1-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-8
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
user-visible benefits, 1-44

BG
CC
client
defined, 12-3
defined, 17-8
BMC
See: 5140 BMC
Broadcast Message Center
See: 5140 BMC
broadcast video
compared to conversational
video, 10-3
defined, 10-2
BS
defined, 1-31, 16-13
BSC
defined, 1-31
BSC/MFS
See: 9130 BSC/MFS
BT
defined, 17-7
BTP Aggregation Gateway
See: BG
BTP Termination Device
See: BT
BTS
defined, 1-31
Build Operate Managed for
Mobility, 3-25
CCM
defined, 16-45
CDMA
compared to OFDM, 1-20
cell broadcast with LTE
defined, 9-1
Cell ID
automatic assignment of, 2-25
cell phone
See: UE
cell site
in backhaul, 17-3
CEM
defined, 16-45
Centralized Access Border
Gateway (C-BGF)
See: C-BGF
Centralized Access Gateway
(C-AGW)
See: C-AGW
Centralized Operations Manager
See: 1360 COM
changes
to this document for this
release, xxxvii
.............................................................
Channel Element Module

See: CEM
C C-AGW
circuit connections
defined, 21-39
C-BGF
defined, 21-39
Call Session Control Function
See: CSCF
for SMS, 8-2

Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB)
See CSFB, 7-5
circuit-switched traffic
none, in LTE, 1-25
defined, 10-3
cloud computing
defined, 1-40
CMAS
architecture, 9-3
defined, 9-2
how it works, 9-3
implementation in LTE, 9-5
LTE network requirements, 9-5
network and UE impacts, 9-6
what is Commercial Mobile
Alert System, 9-3
CMS
See: 5100 CMS
COM
See: 1360 COM
Commercial Mobile Alert System
See: see CMAS
Common Core Network
defined, 1-36, 2-10
common core network elements
used by VoLTE, 7-15
Common Services blade
configuration, 18-12
software, 18-13
Compact Transcoder (TC)
See: 9125 TC
Component
as defined in this document,
1-3, 4-3
connectivity models
in Backhaul Part of the
Transport Network, 17-5
Carrier Network Outsourcing,

3-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-9
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting Services
UE registration, 7-6
defined, 3-6
defined, 1-32, 1-36, 2-9, 18-1
types offered, 3-7
assumptions, 7-6
types of NEs, 18-1
how it works, 7-6
Content of the communication

(CC)
See: CC
control plane
defined, E-2
security for, 14-4
control plane latency
defined, 1-42
controller unit
defined, 16-44
Converged base station, 2-27
Converged BTS portfolio, 2-27
Converged Messaging System
See: 5100 CMS
Converged OA&M, 2-11
Converged RAN, 2-28
approaches, 2-26
Converged BBU, 2-27
Converged BS, 2-27
defined, 2-26
deployment scenarios, 2-26
integrated frame, 2-27
LightRadio, 2-28
Converged Telephony Server
See: 5420 CTS
conversational video
PRELIMINARY
Core Network
compared to other types of

video, 10-3
defined, 10-3, 10-3
Core Controller Module
See: CCM
CSCF
defined, 10-15
CSFB
always in demand, 7-7
basic service, 7-6
benefits, 7-6
coexist with VoLTE, 7-10
control of UEs, 7-6
CSFB scenario
CTAs, 3-24
CTS
See: 5420 CTS
customer documentation
3rd Party components, B-23
CDMA, B-22
ePC and RAN 5620 SAM
Core, B-15
current implementation, 7-8
ePC and RAN 5620 SAM

LTE, B-16
defined, 7-5
ePC 5780 DSC, B-15
does not require IMS, 7-7
ePC 7750 SR, B-17
how it works, 7-6
ePC 7750 SR Mobile

Gateway, B-18
increased load on the network,

7-7
ePC 9471 MME, B-16
increases call setup delay, 7-7
global list, B-13
limitations of, 7-7
how to access, B-9
loss of data session, 7-7
IMS solution, B-23
low-cost alternative, 7-7
LTE 9452 WPS, B-20
network and UE impacts, 7-8
LTE 9958 WTA, B-21
network impact, 7-8
LTE 9959 NPO, B-21
Required interface, 7-8
LTE end-to-end solution, B-14
reuse of existing equipment,

7-6
LTE RAN Access, B-18
slowing down of data session,

7-7
support for Emergency
Services, 12-8
support for Number Portability,
12-9
TTY/TTD Support, 12-10
UE impacts, 7-8
W-CDMA, B-23
Customer Technical Advocates
See: CTAs
.............................................................
D delay
minimizing, 10-5
demand
for higher level services, 1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-10
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
for mobile broadband, 1-7

deployment options
documentation
customer, how to access, B-9
LTE, how to access, B-5
in the Solution, 4-1
on LTE, xxxix
Also see: OLCS
related terminology, 4-3

Deployment Services
defined, 3-14
types offered, 3-14
Design Engineering, 3-9
Design Services
types offered, 3-13
Distributed base station, 2-28
Distributed eNodeB Solution
about, 16-40
architecture, 16-40
benefit of, 16-33
components of, 16-40
defined, 16-40
flexibility in radio installation,
16-42, 16-42
product index, B-11

dongle
current use of term, 6-2
defined, 6-2
downlink
defined, 1-18
DPA
defined, 18-13
DSC
See: 5780 DSC
dual stack
support for, A-1
Dynamic Services Controller
See: 5780 DSC
.............................................................
E E2E LTE Solution Integration and
flexibility of placement, 16-33

greater flexibility in placement,
16-41
linked by optical fibers, 16-41
reduced power consumption,
16-42
Validation, 3-22
EAB
defined, 10-3, 10-9
eBTS
advantages, 16-14
rooftop installations, 16-42
defined, 16-14
support of PCMD, 16-42
how created, 16-14
document, this
covers current release only, 1-5
covers multiple access
technologies, 1-5
how to read, 1-5
scope, xxxviii
use of, 16-14

eDAT
See: 9958 WTA
Efficient Always-On support
defined, 1-42
eHRPD, 10-17
defined, 4-12, 18-64
how it works, 4-12

impacted network elements,
4-12
need for, 4-12
new OMC-RAN release, 22-32
eHRPD 1xEV-DO Interworking
Deployment Option
defined, 4-9, 4-9
Element Management Layer
See EML, 22-5
Element Management Server
See EMS, 22-5
emergency calls
handling of, 21-29
Emergency Services
defined, 12-8
how supported, 12-8
EML
defined, 22-5
EMS
defined, 22-5
encryption
defined, 14-4
for NAS, 14-5
for RRC, 14-5
Engineering Assessment, 3-10
Enhanced Address Book
See: EAB
See: EAB
defined, 21-20
how it works, 21-20
eNodeB
about, 16-23
defined, 1-31, 16-22
functions, 1-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-11
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
parts, 16-24
transport for, 17-9
enterprise applications
defined, 1-41
ENUM Manager
defined, 20-19
EPC
benefits, 1-33
Evolved Packet Core

See: EPC
Evolved Radio Network Controller
(eRNC)
See: 9271 eRNC
evolved Universal Terrestrial
(eUTRAN)
See: eUTRAN
compared to earlier networks,

1-33
.............................................................
defined, 1-32, 2-9
F Fall back
entities, 1-34
ePC
security, 14-10
EPC
what it does, 1-32
for voice services, 7-18

FD-RRHx
FDD
defined, 1-14, 16-36, 16-45
ePC and eUTRAN Network

Architecture and Design, 3-13
supported by 9926 d2U

eNodeB BBU, 16-36, 16-45
EPS
use of OFDMA, 1-18
defined, 1-12
Equipment Engineering, 3-10
Equipment Installation, 3-15
Equipment Removal, 3-15
Ethernet Backhaul
defined, 17-9
eUTRAN
contains eNodeB, 1-31
defined, 1-31, 1-31, 1-31, 2-8
security, 14-10
evolution summary
PRELIMINARY
evolved NodeB
See: eNodeB
for 3GPP to LTE, 5-5

for 3GPP2 to LTE, 5-4
evolved Base Transceiver Station
(eBTS)
See: eBTS
use of SC-FDMA, 1-20

used in LTE, 16-36, 16-45
Field Integration
defined, 3-16
finding customer documentation,
B-9
Fixed and Mobile Multimedia, 3-8
Frequency Division Duplexing
(FDD)
See: FDD
functional entity
defined, 1-3, 10-4
GGSN function
on the 7750 SR, 18-26
Global Suppliers Association
(GSMA)
See: GSMA
Glossary, 1-3
government-mandated
requirements
support for, 7-1
Green Touch
benefits, 2-25
defined, 2-25
web site, 2-26
GSMA
web site, 6-3
.............................................................
H Handoff Interface 1
defined, 22-18
Handoff Interface 2
defined, 22-18
Handoff Interface 3
defined, 20-5
HI 1
defined, 22-18
HI 2
defined, 22-18
HI 3
defined, 20-5
High Leverage Network and IP
Transformation, 3-7
high leverage networks
.............................................................
defined, 1-8
G GGSN
examples of, 1-40
for further information, 1-8,

1-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-12
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
need for, 1-8
hyper-availability
revenue opportunities, 1-40

history of revisions
to this document, F-1
Home Subscriber Server
See: HSS
how to access LTE documentation,
B-5
how to access LTE training, B-24
characteristics of, 10-10
accessing, B-11
defined, 10-10
for an IMS network element,

B-12
.............................................................
I
IAP
defined, 12-3
IBGF
defined, 21-39
how to find IMS documentation,

B-11
ICC
See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
HP ProLiant DL380
ICS
5410 PS/XDMS, 21-21

configurations, 22-17
for further information, 20-6,
21-22, 22-19
hosting 1357 IMC, 22-17
hosting 1357 LIG, 20-4
IMS documentation
defined, 7-22
IeCCF
See: 8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
IMC
See: 1357 IMC
IMS
restricted to IMS customers,

B-12
where to find, B-12
IMS network elements
used in VoLTE, 7-11, 7-14
IMS-based SMS
availability, 8-6
defined, 2-11
IMS-hosted SMS
defined, 8-6
IMS-provided rich services
can provide new services, 7-22
Alcatel-Lucent, use of, 21-6
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW)

See: HSGW
defined, 7-22
call scenarios, 21-6
how it works, 7-22
HSGW
defined, 2-10, 7-9, 8-6, 21-4
defined, 18-64, 18-64
documentation, 21-6
implemented in the Solution,

21-7
hardware, 18-65
role of, 18-64
index
of product documentation,
B-11
Installation Quality Assessment,

3-15
role, 21-5
role of, with LTE, 2-11
types offered, 3-15
selection of, by 9271 eRNC,

19-4
specifications, 21-5
Installation Staging, 3-15
software, 18-65
training, 21-6
Instant Converging Charging Suite

(ICC)
See: 8610 ICC (OCS)

HSS
defined, 10-15, 20-13
Hybrid network elements, 19-1
defined, 19-1
why they exist, 19-2

defined, 1-36
IMS Centralized Service (ICS)
See: ICS
IMS Centralized Services (ICS),
7-4
Instant Enhanced Charging

Collection Function (IeCCF)
defined, 3-16
types offered, 3-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-13
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inter Radio Access Technology

See: IRAT
Inter-Operability Testing program
need for, 6-3

IOT process, 6-7
IOT testing
band availability testing, 6-8

benefits of, 6-5
UE testing, 6-9
Intercept Access Point (IAP)
See: IAP
Intercept-related information (IRI)
See: IRI
Interception Management Center
See: 1357 IMC
confidentiality of, 6-5

IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
See: IMS
IP network
benefits, 1-25
IP Session Controller (ISC)
See: 5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
IP Transformation Center
benefits of, 3-21
Interconnection Border Gateway

(IBGF)
See: IBGF
interfaces
LTE, A-3
related LTE standards, A-3
used in Solution, A-3
defined, 3-21
services provided, 3-22
defined, 14-11
needed for security, 14-11
over IPv6, not supported, A-1
threats IPSec can protect from,
14-11
IPv4
about, 6-4
support for, A-1

IPv6
Interworking
as used in this document, 4-4
defined, 4-4
PRELIMINARY
K key
defined, 14-11
.............................................................
L latency
defined, 1-40
Lawful Intercept Gateway
See: CSCF
lawful interception
Lawful Interception
See: 1357 LIG
Lawful Interception Gateway
See: 1357 LIG
Lawful Interception platform,
20-4, 22-17
LBO
See: Roaming with Local
Break Out
LDAP interface, 20-17
for OAM and Telecom traffic,

A-1
legacy networks
IRAT
both UEs and chipsets, 6-4
defined, 12-2
benefit of, A-1
support for, A-1
benefits of, 6-4
defined, 6-4
.............................................................
standards for, 12-6
defined, 12-3
commitment to, 6-5
minimizing, 10-5
IPSec
internal intercept function
IOT
J jitter
for both voice and data, 12-5
comprehensive list, 15-2
InterOperability Testing (IOT)

See: IOT
.............................................................
IPA
See: OSS/BSS Implementation
Planning and Analysis
interfaces used in the Solution
InterOperability Testing
ISC
See: 5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
designed for voice traffic, 1-7

flattening revenue, 1-7
need to cut costs, 1-9, 1-9
as used in the Solution, 4-4
need to reduce complexity, 1-9
defined, 4-4
need to save space, 1-9
IRI
reducing carbon footprint, 1-10

defined, 12-3
how it works, 6-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-14
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LIG
See: 1357 LIG
See: 1357 LIG
defined, 10-15
LightRadio
list of customer
documentation, B-13
Multiple antenna techniques,
1-23
need for, 1-6, 1-7
compared to RRHs, 2-28
new network components, 1-29
compared to traditional cell

tower equipment, 2-28
no circuit-switched traffic,
1-25
defined, 2-28
one network, not two, 1-26
how it works, 2-28
provides improved QoS, 1-26
used in Converged RAN, 2-28
quality improvements, 1-26
local routing
supported by 7705 SAR, 4-8
location-based services
defined, 1-41
Long Term Evolution
See: LTE
LTE
removal of RNC, 1-31

standards committees, 1-13
supports both FDD and TDD,
1-14
technical reading, B-3
training, B-24
use of FDD, 16-36, 16-45
all IP, 1-25
use of MIMO techniques, 1-22
applicable to 3GPP and

3GPP2, 1-14
use of OFDMA, 1-18

1-3
compared with earlier
architectures, 1-26, 1-27,
1-27, 1-28

use of smaller spectrum
segments, 1-25
LTE documentation site, B-5

LTE ecosystem
support for, 6-4
LTE Interworking with 3GPP
Network Deployment Option
about, 4-14
defined, 4-14
how it works, 4-17
interfaces, 4-17
major components, 4-15
types of interworking, 4-16
when to use, 4-14
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Network Deployment Option
defined, 4-9
how it works, 4-12
interfaces, 4-13
major components, 4-10
types of interworking, 4-11
when to use, 4-9
LTE Library
benefits of, B-3
use of STANDBY state, 1-26
defined, B-3
use of TDD, 16-36, 16-45
how to access, B-3

LTE Network
defined, 1-6, 1-12
use of VoIP, 1-25
destination for both 3GPP and

3GPP2, 1-15
used as synonym for EPS, 1-14
defined, 4-5
web sites, B-23
major components, 1-36, 2-6
glossary of terms, 1-3

how it works, 1-16
how to find documentation on,
xxxix
increasing throughput, 1-18
innovations, 1-16
key innovations, 1-17
LTE air interface

defined, 14-3
LTE customer documentation
glossary, B-31
how to access, B-4, B-5, B-23
LTE documentation
accessing, B-3
sample, 1-36
voice services, flowing through
a data only network, 4-6
call flow, 4-8
data-only configuration, 4-6
defined, 4-5, 4-8
how it works, 4-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-15
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
voice and data configuration,

4-7
when to use, 4-5
LTE Network Transformation and
Migration Service, 3-22
LTE Product Validation and
Acceptance Service, 3-22
LTE project, 1-13
LTE project release naming
conventions, C-1
LTE Roaming, 11-2
support for 2X2 MIMO, 16-36

support for 4-way Rx, 16-36
.............................................................
support of TDD, 16-36
M Maintenance services
training, 16-38
LTE Services
defined, 2-13
LTE specifications
Managed Network Operations,

3-25
for OA&M, B-29
for the ePS, B-28
with home routed traffic, 11-4
how to access, B-30

about, 16-31
advantages, 16-33
characteristics, 16-32
defined, 16-31
flexibility, 16-33, 16-33
hardware, 16-35
how it works, 16-31
installation benefits, 16-33
multiple bandwidths, 16-36
part of distributed eNodeB
solution, 16-31
reduced CAPEX, 16-34
reduced footprint, 16-34
reduced OPEX, 16-34
Managed End-to-End Service

Operations, 3-25
Managed Infrastructure, 3-25
mobility requirements, 11-9

16-31
defined, 3-23
LTE Solution Readiness, 3-22
for security, B-29
LTE RRH
LTE Video Communications

Service
See: Video Communications
Service
defined, 11-4
with local break out, 11-6
PRELIMINARY
software, 16-38
understanding, B-26
LTE standards
define logical not physical
entities, 1-35
for interfaces, A-3
getting started with, B-26
LTE to eHRPD handoff, 19-5
LTE training
defined, B-24
how to reach the site, B-24
LTE end-to-end Solution, B-24
other classes, B-25
recommended classes for
1xEV-DO, B-25
recommended classes for
CDMA, B-25
recommended classes for LTE,
B-24
sign up for Alcatel-Lucent
training, B-26
technology, B-24
Managing Services
defined, 3-24
master diagram
of all interfaces in the Solution,
15-2
of all NEs in the Solution, 15-2
of the Solution, 2-3
Media Gateway
See: 7510 MGW
See: MGW
See: MGW
Media Gateway Controller-8
See: 5060 MGC-8
media replication
defined, 21-31
how it works, 21-31
media resource function
defined, 21-30
Media Resource Function
See 5900 MRF, 21-30
mediation function
defined, 12-3
Mediation function
defined, 12-3
role, 16-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-16
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG
defined, 17-8
MG-ISM, 18-28
defined, 18-31, 18-40
role of, 18-31, 18-40
software, 18-34, 18-43
sub-elements, 18-32, 18-41
MG/BG
defined, 17-8
MGC-8
See: 5060 MGC-8
MGW
See: 7510 MGW
See: 7520 MGW
defined, 21-34, 21-42
migration
MIMO support
downlink vs uplink, 1-24
MME
See: 9471 MME
MMTel standard
defined, 10-5
group, 10-5
mobile
See: UE
Mobile Backhaul Audit and
Design, 3-7
architecture, D-4
benefits, D-3
defined, 17-7, D-2, D-6
documentation, D-7
how it works, D-2
mobile phone
See: UE
Mobile Service Provider Gateway
See: MG
mobile station
See: UE
mobile terminal
defined, 6-2
mobile unit
See: UE
Mobility Management Entity
See: 9471 MME
Mobility Management Entity
(MME)
defined, 1-34
modem unit
defined, 16-44
MRF
See: 5900 MRF
ample activities, 3-20
key network elements, 17-7
considerations, 7-24
need for, D-2
defined, 3-19, 3-19
packet-based, 17-7
ease of, with LTE, 5-7
role, D-2
MSP Termination Device

See: MT
service awareness features,

D-3
MT
solution for transport

problems, 17-7
MT/BT
migration options, 5-1

migration path
for Voice with LTE, 7-25
migration planning
basic principles, 5-6
support for all mobile services,

D-3
resources, 5-8
training, D-7
Migration Services
types offered, 3-19
migration tasks
for 3GPP to LTE, 5-5
for 3GPP2 to LTE, 5-4
MIMO
defined, 1-22
mobile broadband
demand for, 1-7
Mobile Gateway-Integrated
Services Module (MG-ISM)
See: MG-ISM
mobile gateways, 17-4
functions of, in Backhaul
Network, 17-4
MSC, 3G
See: 9380 3G MSC
defined, 17-7
defined, 17-7
multicast video
compared to conversational
video, 10-3
defined, 10-2
Multiple antenna techniques
defined, 1-23
Multiple-input Multiple-Output
(MIMO)
See: MIMO
Multivendor Maintenance, 3-25
how it works, 1-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-17
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
N NE
See: network elements

NEL
defined, 22-5
NEM
advantage of, 22-50
in the Common Core Network,

20-1
in the Core Network, 18-1
in the Radio Access Network,
16-1
key facets, 2-17

purpose of, 2-16
web site, 2-18
NML
defined, 22-4
NMS
used for IMS, 21-1
defined, 22-4
defined, 22-50
network level testing, 2-20
Network Management Layer
NPO
See: 9959 NPO
how it works, 22-50

OA&M for 9412 eNodeB,
22-50
role, 22-50
training, 22-51
user guide, 22-51
network
common security threats,
14-10
network element
defined, 10-4
finding documentation in the
Product Index, B-12
network element descriptions
as organized in this document,
15-2
Network Element Layer
See NEL, 22-5
network elements
1-3, 4-3
classified as hybrid, 19-1
PRELIMINARY
in the Backhaul Part of the

Transport Network, 17-1
comprehensive list, 15-2

defined, 1-3
documentation on, B-11
grouping of, 15-4
See NML, 22-4

Network Management Server
See NMS, 22-4
Network Migration
defined, 3-19
sample activities, 3-20
Network Performance and QoS
Analysis, 3-7
Network Performance Optimizer
(NPO)
See: 9959 NPO
network security
authentication, 14-11
defined, 14-8
how it works, 14-11
parts of the network protected,
14-9
Number Portability
defined, 12-9
how it works, 12-9
NVIOT Forum
benefits of, 6-6
compliance with standards, 6-6
defined, 6-6
url for, 6-6
work of, 6-6
NVIOT process, 6-7
.............................................................
O OA&M network
security, 14-10
OAM&P
defined, 2-11
purpose, 14-10
ITU-T standard, 22-4
standard for, 14-12
layers of support, 22-4
use of keys, 14-11
products, 22-1
new value chain

defined, 1-11
ng Connect
areas of focus, 2-18
defined, 2-16
OAM&P Products
defined, 1-36
used in Solution, 22-1
OCM
defined, 16-47
how it works, 2-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-18
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OFC
OFDM
basics of, 1-18
compared to CDMA, 1-20
OFDMA
defined, 1-18
Offline Charging Systems (OFCS)
OLC
See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
OLCS
about, B-5, B-9, B-11
benefits users enjoy, B-9
how site is designed, B-10
navigating, B-10
product index page, B-11
registering for the portals, B-10
technical support information,
B-10
OLCS LTE Library
location, B-5
navigating through, B-6
OLCS web site
accessing, B-9
IMS documentation, B-11
LTE documentation, B-3
navigating, B-9
OMC-CN
about, 22-52
advantages, 22-53
defined, 22-52
manages 9380 3G MSC, 22-53
training, 22-54
use in LTE network, 22-53
OMC-P
See: 1310 OMC-P
OMC-R
See: 9153 OMC-R
OMC-RAN
both configurations can be
used in Solution, 22-30
two configurations, 22-30
OMP
See: 9256 OMP
OneBTS CPRI Module
See: OCM
Onlibe Charging Systems (OCS)
See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
Operation and OSS/BSS
Transformation, 3-7
Operation Services
defined, 3-23
types offered, 3-23
Operations and Maintenance
Center - Core Network
(OMC-CN)
See: OMC-CN
Center for Radio Part
See: 9153 OMC-R
Center Radio Access Network
Operations and Management
Console Plus
See: 1310 OMC-P
Operations and Management
Platform
See: 9256 OMP
Operations Readiness plan, 3-11
Operations, Administration,
Maintenance and Provisioning
See: OAM&P
OSS/BSS Implementation
Planning and Analysis, 3-11
OSS/BSS Transformation and
Integration, 3-18
.............................................................
P Packet Data Network (PDN)
Gateway
See: 7750 SR
Packet Data Network Gateway
(PGW)
See: See 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN)
PCI, 2-25
PCMD
defined, 16-23, 16-42, 22-47
how data is collected, 22-47
PCRF
defined, 10-15
PCRF Services blade
software, 18-13
Per Call (or Connection)
Measurement Data
See: PCMD
Per Call (or Connection)
Measurement Data (PCMD)
See: PCMD
Per Call Measurement Data
See: PCMD
Personal Digital Assistants
(PDAs), 6-2
PGW
PGW function
on the 7750 SR, 18-26
role, 22-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-19
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PGW/GGSN
Physical Cell ID, 2-25
Planning Hub
Product Integration
defined, 3-16
Product Operations Knowledge
Transfer
defined, B-2
where to find, B-2
defined, 3-17
Product Operations Support
point to point topology, 17-4

Policy and Charging Rules
Function
See: PCRF
policy control
defined, 3-17
Product Upgrades
defined, 3-17
Product Validation
defined, 3-17
defined, 18-7
Post-Launch Optimization
defined, 3-24
Program Management, 3-20

defined, 4-17
presence information
standards for, 10-5
Video Communications
Service, 10-17
Presence Server
defined, 10-14
presence server
defined, 21-21
Presence Server
See: 5410 PS/XDMS
presence-enabled
defined, 10-9
Product Capacity Growth
PRELIMINARY
defined, 3-17
product index
for documentation, B-11
Product Index
for documentation, how to use,
B-12
PWS
defined, 9-2
what is Public Warning
System, 9-2
.............................................................
Q QoS
demanded by users, 1-7

improvements, 1-26
planning for, 3-10
Quality of Service
See: QoS
.............................................................
types offered, 3-14
Pre-Launch RF Optimization, 3-13

pre-R8
Public Warning System

See: see PWS
R R-OCM
PS
See: Public Safety
PS handover of Voice over IMS,
7-10
PS/XDMS
See: 5410 PS/XDMS
PSAP, 12-8
Public Safety
about, 13-2
configurations, 13-5
defined, 13-1
definitions, 13-2
devices, 13-5
expectations with LTE, 13-3
frequency spectrum, 13-5
hosted core model, 13-9
how it works, 13-4
no specific network equipment
required, 13-4
Priority Access, 13-10
sharing network elements, 13-7
benefits, 16-48
benefits of, 16-47
defined, 16-47
easy migration to LTE, 16-48
how it works, 16-47, 16-48
purpose, 16-48
R-OCM connections, 16-47
unique in industry, 16-49
works with both CDMA and
1xEV-DO, 16-47
Rack Back Plane
defined, 16-44
Rack User Commissioning
defined, 16-44
See: RAN
Radio Network Controller (RNC)
See: 9370 RNC
See: RNC
Radio Network Planning and
Audit Service, 3-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-20
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAN
categories of network
elements, 16-1
contains NEs from many
networks, 16-1
defined, 1-31, 1-36, 2-8, 16-1
LTE-only network element,
16-1
ring topology, 17-4
use of software-defined
modules, 2-27
benefits, 17-4
RNC
See: 9370 RNC
defined, 1-31
functions of, redistributed in
LTE, 1-31
RRH products
supported by OMC, 16-38
Rx
defined, 16-36
.............................................................
S S102 interface
Reason for revision, xxxvii
about inter LTE networks

roaming, 11-2
defined, 8-4
Release Notes
approaches, 11-3
For further information, 8-5
defined, B-2
benefits, 11-3
where to find, B-2
defined, 11-1
SAM
See: 5620 SAM
See: 8950 SAM
definitions, 11-2
sample migration paths, 5-1
releases
included in LTE End-to-End
Solution release, B-2
Remote Radio Head
16-31
Resident Engineer, 3-24
residential tree topology, 17-4
Return for Repair, 3-23
revenue
diminishing, service providers,
1-7
Reverse OCM
See: R-OCM
Reverse Optical Communication
Module
See: R-OCM
revisions
to this document, xxxvii
revisions to this document
history, F-1
RF Optimization, 3-13
RF Planning and Design, 3-13
Roaming with Home routed traffic

about, 11-4
SAR
See: 7705 SAR
defined, 11-4
SC-FDMA
how it works, 11-5

Roaming with Local Break Out
defined, 11-6
with Home IP services, 11-6
with Visited IP services, 11-8
and Home IP services
about, 11-6
how it works, 11-7
and Visited IP services
basics of, 1-20

defined, 1-20
scalable networks
defined, 1-9
SCs
already developed, 2-17
defined, 2-17
SDM HSS
See: 650 SDM HSS
See: 8650 SDM HSS
security
about, 11-8
control plane, 14-4
how it works, 11-9
standards, 14-7
RRH
standards, for LTE, 14-2
converged, 2-27
two types needed, 14-1
user plane, 14-6

16-31
Security Architecture Design, 3-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-21
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
security assessment
defined, 3-12
steps in performing, 3-12
Security Enabler Integration, 3-19
Security Organizational
Assessment, 3-12
security, eUTRAN
common threats, 14-10
security, network
common threats, 14-10
Self Config
defined, 2-25
Self-Organizing Networks (SONs)
See: SONs
Server Management Tool
See SMT, 22-55
Service Aggregation Router (SAR)
See: 7705 SAR
Service Aware Manager (SAM)
See: 5620 SAM
See: 8950 SAM
Service Centralization, 7-4, 7-10
defined, 7-22
service providers
challenges faced, 1-10
pressures on, 1-6
Service Router (SR)
See: 7750 SR
Service Router Serving Gateway
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
Services
PRELIMINARY
Analysis help available, 3-9

Consulting help available, 3-7
Deployment help available,
3-14
Design help available, 3-13
Installation help available,

3-15
Integration help available, 3-16
Managing Services, 3-24
SIOP Services, 3-9

site acquisition
evaluation of candidate sites,
3-10
Migration help available, 3-19
Site Consolidation, 3-7
Operations help available, 3-23
Site Engineering, 3-9
Project Management help

available, 3-14
Site Preparation, 3-15
Security Services, 3-12

services available, 3-3
Services Portfolio
defined, 3-3
summary diagram, 3-3
Serving Gateway
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
defined, 1-34
Serving GPRS Support Node
(SGSN)
See: 7500 SGSN
SGs interface
Site Records, 3-10

Site Survey, 3-9
SLA enforcement
downstream, defined, 17-5
upstream, defined, 17-3
smart phones
defined, 6-2
SMS
and LTE, 8-3
and service providers, 8-3
and users, 8-3
between two LTE UEs, 8-4,
8-4
defined, 8-4
defined, 8-1
For further information, 8-5
delivery methods, 8-3
SGSN
See: 7500 SGSN
for data-only networks, 8-5
SGW
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
IMS-hosted, 8-6
Short Message Service

See: SMS
Short Message Service Center
See: 5110 SMSC
how it works, 8-2
need, 8-3
no guaranteed transmission,
8-2
not a dedicated circuit, 8-2
simultaneous registration on two

networks, 7-18
over IP, 8-6
Simultaneous Voice and LTE

See: SVLTE
required for all LTE

deployments, 7-1
Single Radio Voice Call

Continuity
See: SR-VCC
transmitted over circuit

connections, 8-2
over SGs/S102, 8-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-22
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
use with dual configurations,

8-3
particular releases included,

B-2
with any LTE network, 8-5
parts of, 1-3, 2-5
SMS (IMS-hosted)
defined, 8-6
SMS messages
length restraint, 8-1
SMS over IP
defined, 8-6
SPR
defined, 18-8
hosted by 5780 DSC, 18-7
provides a complete solution,

2-3
support for Emergency
Services, 12-8
support for Public Safety, 13-2
support of CMAS, 9-2
two ways of hosting, 18-14

SR
See: 7750 SR
SR Operating System
See: SR OS
SR OS
support of governmentmandated requirements, 7-1
defined, 18-34, 18-43
CSFB not needed, 8-5
support of Roaming, 11-2
functions supported, 18-34,

18-43
defined, 8-4
use of SONs, 2-25
SMS over SGs/S102
SMS with LTE

requires equipped MSC, 8-5
requires multiple equipped
MSC, 8-5
SMT
defined, 22-55, 22-55
how it works, 22-55
software-defined modules
in RRH, 2-27
Solution
Solution Architecture Advisory

Services, 3-10
Solution Concepts
See: SCs
Solution Integration and Validation
Service, 3-18
Solution, benefits of
cost reductions, 2-24
ease of evolution, 2-22
LTE, 2-20
pre-integrated, 2-20
preservation of capital, 2-23

1-3
single-vendor solution, 2-21
defined, 1-3, 2-3
use of ng Connect, 2-23
deployment options, 4-1

interfaces, A-3
Green Touch initiative, 2-25

SONs
list of all interfaces in, 15-2
defined, 2-24
list of all NEs in, 15-1, 15-2
examples, 2-25
LTE Services, 2-13

major components of, 15-4
need for, 2-3
ng Connect program, 2-16
first implemented in LTE, 2-24
SR Packet Data Network (PDN)

Gateway
See: 7750 SR
SR-VCC, 7-10
defined, 7-4, 7-21
standards for LTE, B-26
Standby state, 1-26
defined, 1-42
how it works, 1-42
need for, 1-42
Subscriber Data Manager (SDM)
HSS
See: 8650 SDM HSS
Subscriber Profile Repository
(SPR)
See: SPR
Sustainable Energy Audit and
Design, 3-7
SVDO
defined, 7-20
SVLTE
purpose of, 2-24
and the Solution, 7-20
standards for, 2-24
attractive to 3GPP2 service

providers, 7-18
spectrum usage
need to conserve, 1-9
benefits of, 7-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-23
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
defined, 7-17
dependent upon UEs, 7-20
defined, 1-14, 16-36, 16-45
for provisioning, 22-58
Fall back required, 7-18
supported by 9926 d2U

eNodeB BBU, 16-36, 16-45
for troubleshooting, 22-58
how it works, 7-18

impact on UE, 7-19
limitations, 7-19
need for SVDO, 7-20
no communication between
networks, 7-18
no network impact, 7-18
short-term approach, 7-19
simultaneous registration, 7-18
simultaneous voice and data,
7-17, 7-18
12-9
UE requirements, 7-19
SVLTE UEs
See: used for Video
Communications Service
defined, 10-12
required for Video
Communications Service
UEs, 10-12
Switching Hub blades
software, 18-13
System Architecture Evolution
(SAE) project, 1-13
.............................................................
T TAS
PRELIMINARY
TDD
defined, 21-23
TD-RRHx
support of TDD, 16-36
hardware, 22-59
use of OFDMA, 1-18

included with 5110 SMSC,

22-57
used in LTE, 16-36, 16-45
key capabilities, 22-58
TDM backhaul
software, 22-59
prohibitive cost, 17-6
training, 22-60
replace with packet-based

solutions, 17-7

TTY/TTD Support
Technical Support Services, 3-23
defined, 12-10
Telephony Application Server

(TAS)
how it works, 12-10

requirements for, 12-10
defined, 21-23
terminal
See: UE
two UEs in one

used for SVLTE, 7-19
Terms used in this document, 1-3
.............................................................
TGW
U UE
defined, 21-39
Time Division Duplexing (TDD)
See: TDD
Training
See: LTE training
Transcoder (TC)
See: 9125 TC
transport network
defined, 2-8
TRDU
defined, 16-44
Troubleshooting and Statistical
Interface System
See: TSIS
Trunking Gateway (TGW)
See: TGW
defined, 6-2
how it works, 6-2
not manufactured by
Alcatel-Lucent, 6-3
other names for, 6-2
types of, 6-2
ULIS Solution
components of, 12-4
need for, 12-6
UNI
defined, 17-10
Unified Lawful Interception Suite
See: 1357 ULIS
uplink
defined, 1-20
TSIS
defined, 22-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-24
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Equipment (UE)

defined, 6-2
user plane
defined, E-3
security for, 14-6
User-to-Network Interface (UNI)
See: UNI
user-visible benefits of LTE, 1-44
UTRAN
defined, 16-19
.............................................................
V VANC
defined, 7-4
vertical applications
defined, 1-41
Video Application Server
See: Video AS
Video AS
defined, 10-13
video call
defined, 10-4
video calling
defined, 10-8
example of, 10-8
Video Communications Service
architecture, 10-11
benefits, 10-8
See: participation by
non-LTE users
capabilities, 10-8
client, 10-13
complies with standards, 10-6
defined, 10-7
how it works, 10-16
how SVLTE UEs are used,

10-12
impacts, 10-18
impacts of, 10-12
video with Video Communications

Service
approaches for, 10-6
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
limitations, 10-17
about, 20-19
need for IMS, 10-14
advantages, 20-20
new network elements needed

for, 10-13

20-22
purpose, 10-7
defined, 20-19
QoS, 10-14
requirement for SVLTE, 10-12
role, 20-19
requires client, 10-18
training, 20-22
requires SVLTE UE, 10-18
use of in IMS, 20-21
roaming, 10-17
use of HSS, 10-15
use of IMS core, 10-14
Voice Mail Server

defined, 10-14, 21-11
Voice over IMS
use of LIG, 10-15
defined, 7-10
use of PCRF, 10-15, 10-15
See VoLTE, 7-9
use of presence information,

10-17
use of Presence Server, 10-14
use of Video Application
Server, 10-13
use of Voice Mail Server,
10-14
voice call turning into video
call, 10-17
voice service handled by MSC,
10-17
Video Communications Service
buddy list
defined, 21-21
video over LTE, 10-2
defined, 10-4
need for, 10-5
standards for, 10-5
Voice over IMS over LTE

See VoLTE, 7-9
Voice over LTE
See: VoLTE
Voice over LTE using Generic
Access
See VoLGA, 7-4
voice services
over data-only LTE Network,
4-6
voice with LTE, 7-1
approaches, 7-3
Voice with LTE
comparison of approaches,
7-27
defined, 7-3
voice with LTE
features to be supported, 7-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-25
418-111-000 Release LE4.0
PRELIMINARY
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
in-handset approach, 7-4
.............................................................
in-network approaches, 7-3
W walled garden
Voice with LTE

migration path for, 7-25
migration, information about,
7-24
often confused with VoLTE,
7-3
voice with LTE
unsupported approaches, 7-4
VoIP
need for, with LTE, 1-25
VoLGA
defined, 7-4
not widely supported, 7-4
VoLTE
coexist with CSFB, 7-10
current implementation, 7-16
defined, 7-9
delay and jitter, 7-10
enhancements required, 7-10
Greenfield applications, 7-26
how it works, 7-10
WEM
See: also 5060 WCS
See: also 7549 MGW
about, 22-61
defined, 22-61
use of existing IMS network

elements, 7-11
XDM server
defined, 21-21
XDMS Server
See: 5410 PS/XDMS
training, 22-62
use of, 22-61
what's new
in this document, xxxvii
Wireless Call Server
See: 5060 WCS
Wireless Element Manager
See: WEM
Wireless Management System
(WMS)
See: 9353 WMS
Wireless Provisioning System
See: 9452 WPS
wireless triple play
use of existing common core

aggregation of, 17-4
role of, 22-61
often confused with Voice with

LTE, 7-3
UE impacts, 7-16
X X2 interface
Wireless Trace Analyzer

See: 9958 WTA
PRELIMINARY
.............................................................
defined, 1-11
network impacts, 7-16

12-9
WTA
See: 9958 WTA
defined, 1-11
wireline networks
security, 14-11
WMM
See: 9471 WMM
WMS
See: 9353 WMS
WPS
See: 9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-26
418-111-000 Release LE4.0

LTE End-to-End Solution Overview PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LTE End-to-End Solution Overview PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent Long Term Evolution (LTE)

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

About this document

Reason for reissue ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

Part I: LTE Solution Introduction

Long Term Evolution (LTE)

Specialized meaning for key terms

How to read this document .................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

Need to scale and converge older networks .................................................................................................................... 1-9

The need for high leverage networks

Applicable to all major wireless standards .................................................................................................................... 1-14

Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures ......................................................................... 1-26

Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN)

A sample LTE network

Sample LTE network ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-36

High capacity and low latency ........................................................................................................................................... 1-39

Efficiency and reduced operating costs .......................................................................................................................... 1-41

Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks

User-visible benefits .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

About the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

About the Common Core Network .................................................................................................................................. 2-10

Summary of services ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-13

About the ng Connect program ......................................................................................................................................... 2-16

For further information ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

How the ng Connect program works

Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

All the benefits of LTE ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

Benefits of not having a multivendor solution

Ease of evolution .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22

Use of ng Connect .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-23

Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) .................................................................................................................... 2-24

Summary table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30

About Consulting Services .................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

Project Management Services ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14

Integration Services ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

Solution Integration and Validation Service ................................................................................................................. 3-18

Security Enabler Integration ............................................................................................................................................... 3-19

Maintain ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

Operate and manage .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-24

LTE Network Deployment Option

Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3

Diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5

LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO

High-level migration strategy

3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary .................................................................................................................. 5-5

Migration planning resources ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8

Part II: LTE Network Provided Services

UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team

Explosive growth in LTE

About InterOperability Testing (IOT)

Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT ............................................................................................................... 6-4

IOT Process ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7

Approaches for voice with LTE

The CSFB approach

Benefits ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6

Network and UE impacts ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-8

Use of IMS network elements ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11

How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-10

Network and UE impacts ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

The SVLTE approach